














"^ < .-life - / ^fe- -w •■3ii 













►° 



V*^ # \*^ % ; ^'*V \,***^\^ 




YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT 



IN 



PRACTICAL SEAMANSHIP 



INCLUDING THE 

RULES OF THE ROAD ; DIRECTIONS FOR RESUSCITATING 
THE APPARENTLY DROWNED, ETC., ETC., 

TOGETHER WITH THE 

SALUTES AND ETIQUETTE ON BOARD A MAN-OF-WAR; THE 

GENERAL SERVICE CODE AND HOMOGRAPHIC CODE OF 

~IGNALS ; THE CAUTIONARY WEATHER SIGNALS ; 

WITH COLORED PLATES OF FLAGS OF ALL 

NATIONS, NAVAL SIGNAL FLAGS, 

VERY'S LIGHTS, AND THE 

INTERNATIONAL CODE 

OF SIGNALS, 



BY 
V 
LIEUT. EMORY H. TAUNT, U. S. NAVY. 



THIRD EDITION. 



WASHINGTO: 

1893. 



<& 








^A 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1883, by 

EMORY H. TAUNT, U. S. N., 
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED 

TO 

REAR ADMIRAL R. W. SHUFELDT, U. S. N. ; 

TO WHOSE EFFORTS THE SERVICE IS INDEBTED 

FOR THE PERMANENT ESTABLISHMENT 

OF THE NAVAL TRAINING SYSTEM. 



Navy Department, 
Bureau of Equipment and Recruiting, 
Washington, June ist, 1883. 
Lieutenant Emory H. Taunt, U. S. Navy. 

Navy Department. 
Sir: A Board of Officers, formerly connected with the 
Training System, having examined and favorably recom- 
mended your "Young Sailor's Assistant," the work is ap- 
proved and adopted by the Bureau as an aid in the instruction 
of Naval Apprentices. 

Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 

EARL ENGLISH, 

Chief of Bureau. 



PREFACE. 



The object of this work is to present a simple, practical sea- 
manship for the use of the "young sailors" of the Navy; and 
through it, if possible, to bring about a uniformity of instruc- 
tion among the Naval Apprentices, the necessity of which has 
long been felt by those who have been connected with the 
Training System. 

I trust the work, in its simple way, will not only prove an 
assistant to the young sailor, but will also be of service to the 
Instructors by suggesting questions and answers that might 
not otherwise occur to them. . 

Everything obsolete, so far as practicable, has been omitted, 
and the work has been confined to the manner of rigging 
and fitting vessels of the present day. 

I have consulted and made extracts from Luce's Seaman- 
ship (ed. 1877), Nare's Seamanship, Qualtrough's Sailors* 
Handy Book, The Boys' Manual, by Commander C. Burney, 
R. N., Hammersley's Naval Encyclopaedia, and the Equip- 
ment Allowance Book, and I have been greatly assisted by 
the advice of Commodore Earl English, U. S. Navy, Lieu- 
tenant A. P. Nazro, U. S. Navy, and Boatswain C. E. Haw- 
kins, U. S. Navy. I am endebted to Chief Constructor T. D. 
Wilson, U. S. Navy, for the use of the Bureau's drawings of 
the hull and spars of the " Lancaster," and other vessels. 

EMORY H. TAUNT, Lieutenant, U. S. N. 
Navy Department, 

Washington, D. C, 1883. 



CONTENTS. 



SIGNALS. 
General Service Code,*Day and Night Signals — Homographic Code, 
Day and Night Signals — Examples, etc., etc pp. 5-15 

SALUTES. 
Etiquette on board a Man-of-War — Boat Salutes — Special Salutes of 
Coxswains, etc., etc pp. 26-29 

CHAPTER I. 
Bags — Clothing — Hammocks — Messes — Slinging Hammocks — Lash- 
ing Hammocks — Cleaning Hammocks — Care of Clothing — ■ 
Watches^ — Bells for Denoting Time on Board Ship — Formation 
of Messes — Ration Money — Rations, etc., etc pp. 30-39 

CHAPTER II. 
Rigs of Vessels — Men-of-War, how Classed — Names of Masts, Yards 
and Sails — Names of the Parts of a Ship, the Fittings, etc., etc., 

pp. 40-63 

CHAPTER III. 

Names of the parts of Masts, Bowsprit, Yards and Sails — Gaskets — ■ 

Reef Earings — Head Earings — Back Cloths — Securing Sails to 

Yards and Stays — Awnings — Ridge Ropes, etc., etc. . . pp. 64-83 

CHAPTER IV. 
Standing Rigging — Shrouds — Stays — Backstays — Head Rigging- 
Gammoning — Laniards of Rigging — Dead Eyes — Hearts — Sheer 
Poles — Ratlines— Fittings for Yards — Jacob's Ladders, etc., 

pp. 84-90 
CHAPTER V. 
Marline — Spike Seamanship — Knots — Splices — Bends — Hitches — 
Clinches — Seizings — Worming — Parcelling — Serving — Slinks — 



CONTENTS. 

Pointing Ropes — Whipping Ropes — Sennit — Round, Square, 
French Sennit, etc. — Mats, etc.. etc pp. 90-115 

CHAPTER VI. 
Boats — Parts of a Boat — Catamaran — Oars — Lowering and Hoisting 
Boats — Orders Used by Persons in Charge of Boats — Towing Boats 
— Gripes — Securing Boats for Sea — Beaching Boats — General 
Remarks, Applied to Boats Under Oars and Sails — Duties of 
Boat-Keepers — Boats Under Sail — Rigs of Boats — Handling Boats 
Under Sail — Remarks on Boats Under Sail .... pp. 1 16-147 

CHAPTER VII. 
Blocks — Block Straps — Tackles — Common Block — Morticed Block — 
Different Classes of Blocks — Strapping Blocks — Description of 
Different Purchases — Rope or Cordage, Different Kinds, How and 
Where Made, Its Uses, How Preserved — Hawsers, Towlines, 
Where Stowed, etc., etc. — Wire and Hide Rope, Their Uses — 
How Protected from the Weather pp. 148-173 

CHAPTER VIII. 
Compass — Helm — Lead — Log — To Box the Compass — Construction 
of the Navy Compass — Description of a Tiller — Rudder — Tiller or 
Wheel Ropes — Leads, when Used — Lead Lines, how Marked, etc., 
etc. — Logs, What They Consist of, how Marked, when Used — 
Description of Log Line and Reel — Time Glasses — Taffrail Log 
WTnd — Scale — Cloud Record — Seamen's Proverbs, etc., etc. 

pp. 174-210 

CHAPTER IX. 

General Fittings and Lead of the Standing Rigging — Rigging of Bow- 
sprit — Lower, Topmast, Topgallant and Royal Rigging — Healey's 
Patent Splice, for Fitting Rigging — Rigging of Yards, etc., etc., 

pp. 210-224 

CHAPTER X. 

Rigging Ship — To Step Lower Masts — Send Up Tops — Getting over 

Lower Rigging — Send up Lower Stays Send up Topmasts — Ship 

Lower Caps — Rig Topmasts —Ship Topmast Caps — Send up and 

Rig Lower and Topsail Yards — Rig out Jib Boom — Send up Top. 



CONTENTS. 

gallant Masts — Rig out Flying Jib-Boom — Cross Top-gallant and 
Royal Yards pp. 225-243 

CHAPTER XL 
Staying of Masts and Setting up Rigging — Staying Masts by Use of 
Battens — Staying Lower Masts — Setting up Lower Rigging and 
Lower Stays — Securing Laniards — Mast Wedges — Mast Coats — 
Swiftering in — Sparring Down — Rattling Down — Snaking Down, 
etc., etc pp. 245-251 

CHAPTER XII. 
Running Rigging — The Uses of Different Ropes — Reeving Gear — 
Lifts — Foot Ropes — Stirrups, etc. — Miscellaneous — Questions on 
Purchases, etc pp. 252-286 

CHAPTER XIII. 

Bending, Loosing, Furling, Mending Sail, Reefing Sail — Squaring 
Yards — -To Make up Courses and Topsails for Bending — To Bend 
a Course and Topsail — To Make up and Bend Studding Sails — 
Loosing Sail to a Bowline — Shorten and Furl Sail — To Mend Sail 
— Reefing and Turning out Reefs — Unbending Sails, etc., etc., 

pp. 287-309 
CHAPTER XIV. 
Making and Reducing Sail, Ropes Used, etc., etc. — Working Studding 
Sails — Manoeuvring, Tacking, Wearing, etc., etc. — General Re- 
marks — Ropes Used in Making and Taking in Sail — In Setting 
and Taking in Studding-sails — Manoeuvring under Various Cir- 
cumstances — Tacking and Wearing — General Instructions as to 
Manner of "Making" and Shortening Sail, etc., etc., 

pp. 309-328. 
CHAPTER XV. 
Exercising Spars — Shifting Sails — How to Send Topgallant and Royal 
Yards Up and Down — How to " Rig In " a Flying -Jib Boom — 
How to Send Down Topsail or Lower Yard- -How to Send Down 
or "Shift" a Topmast — How to Shift a Jib — How to Shift a Top- 
sail and Course in Moderate Weather, and in a Gale, etc., etc., 

PP- 3 2 9-343- 



CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER XVI. 
CAPSTANS, ANCHORS AND CHAINS. 

Capstan, How Made and Worked — Anchors and Chain Cables, How 
and Where Made — Names of Different Anchors in Use, and 
their Description — Construction and Use of a " Sea Anchor "— . 
How to Tell the Weight of an Anchor or Kedge — Manner of 
Making and Description of Chain Cables — How they are Marked, 
and Where Stowed on Board Ship, etc pp. 344-354. 

CHAPTER XVII. 
Handling Anchors and Chains — Mooring — State of Hawse, etc., etc. 
— Warping and Kedging — Carrying Out Anchors — How Chains 
are Bent to Bower and Sheet Anchors — Appliances Used in 
Handling Anchors and Chains — How to Stopper and Bitt a Chain 
— Description of Cat and Fish Falls, and their Uses — How to 
" Bring To" a Chain, and Get Ready for Heaving Up Anchor— 
The Use of Messengers — Anchor Buoys — How to "Moor" a 
Vessel — How to Clear Hawse — How to Recover an Anchor and 
Chain if the Cable Parts — How to Carry Out a Kedge or Stream 
Anchor — How to Carry Out a Bower Anchor — How Warps are 
Run and Precautious to be Taken with Them when Wet, etc., 
etc pp. 355-376. 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

HOISTING IN AND OUT OF BOATS — SECURING YARDS FOR HEAVY 
WEIGHTS. 

How Launches and Other Boats are Hoisted in and out — Use of 
Triatic Stay — Manner of Securing Yards for Ordinary or Heavy 
Work, etc • pp. 377-382. 

CHAPTER XIX. 
Preparations for Sea — Life Buoys, etc. — Man Overboard — Cork Jackets 
— Rules of the Road — Bells to Regulate the Movements of 
Steamers — How a Vessel is Prepared for Sea — What is Done 
About the Health Bill and Ship's Bills— What are Life Buoys— 
Their Use and How Worked on Vessels of War. — Life Boats — 



CONTENTS. 

Special Instructions and Additional Rules, Relating to Lights for 
Inland Waters — Aids to Memory for Rules of the Road — The 
Buoying of Channels, etc., etc 383-400 

CHAPTER XX. 

Cautionary Weather Signals — Stations for the Display of Same — Life 
Saving Service — Vessels Ashore — Management of Open Boats in 
a Surf — Instructions for Saving Drowning Persons by Swimming 
to their Relief — Instructions for Restoring the ApparentlyDrowned, 
etc., etc pp. 401-422 

CHAPTER XXI. 

Bright Work, Remarks on Cleaning Same — Stowage of Holds — Scrap- 
ing Spars — Navy Yards and Naval Stations — National Holidays 
— Dressing Ship— Mourning — Paints, Stains, etc., etc. — Currency 
Tables pp. 423~43 6 

CHAPTER XXII. 

Cutting and Fitting Rigging, as Practiced in a Rigging Loft — Beam 
Scale, etc., etc. — Preparation and Care ot Standing and Other 
Rigging pp. 437-449 

CHAPTER XXIII. 
Definitions of Sea Terms, Expressions, etc., etc. — Definitions of Tides 

pp. 450-458 



ILLUSTRATIONS. 



COLORED. 

PAGE, 

National ensigns for men-of-war 16-17 

National ensigns for mercantile marine 18-19 

International code of signals 1 9 

American ensign 20 

American union jack 20 

American pennant .20 

President's flag 20 

Flag of the Secretary of the Navy 20 

Fleet flags . 21 

Signal flags and lights 22-24 

Lights of vessels as seen at night 25 

Signal Service Distinctive Flag 401 

Signal Service Number 401 

Cautionary Weather Signal 403 

Cautionary Off- Shore Signal 404 

CO 



ILLUSTRATIONS. 



NOT COLORED. 

PAGn. 

Anchors 346-347 

Anchors, carrying out 373 

Bowsprit, top and side view of 69 

Bends 101-102 

Boats, showing evolutions of crew 124-128 

Boats, giving and taking a tow 130 

Boats, towing alongside of vessel 131 

Boat, hauling up on beach 146 

Blocks 14S-157 

Beam Scale 438 

Caps, lower and topmast 67 

Clinches 103 

Compass, and parts of 174-177 

Capstan, steam 344 

Drowning, rescuing the . . . , 416 

Dead-eyes, Healy's patent . 219-220 

Drowned, restoring 418-419 

Earing, bull 306 

Earing, bull passed with riding turn 306 

Earing head, passed 290 

Gammoning 86 

Garland and lashing 225 

Hammock, properly slung 31 

Hammock, hitches 32 

Hitches 97-100 



ILLUSTRATIONS. 3 

Hooks 104 

Hawsers . 17° 

Hawse, foul 367-368 

lack and funnel 68 

Jib-boom, side view of 69 

Knots 93-97 

Ladders, Jacob's 89 

Lead, deep sea . . 198 

Log chip 202 

Log reel . 203 

Log, taffrail 205 

Masts — 

Lower mast, section of . . 64 

Lower and topmast, doublings of 65 

Lower mast, staying of . . . 245 

Mats 114-115 

Mooring swivel 369 

Rigs, sea-going vessels — 

Ship 41 

Barque 43 

Barquentine 43 

Brig . . . . 41 

Brigantine 42 

Hermaphrodite biig 42 

Double-turretted monitor 44 

Topsail schooner 44 

Fore-and-aft schooner 45 

Sloop 45 

Four-masted ocean steamer 45 

Ropes 170 

Rudder, section of vessel showing 188 

Ratlines 248 

Rigging, setting up lower 247 

Rigging, setting up topmast 25 1 



4 



ILLUSTRATION?. 



Signals, Fog • 3S7 

Signals, general service code 6 

Signals, homographic code > . 11 

Sails — 

Course . 75 

Topsail 75 

Topgallant sail 75 

Jib ^ 81 

Spanker 81 

Slings 104 

Splices 105-109 

Seizings 110-114 

Sennit 114-115 

Steering-gear, steam 186 

Stranded vessel, establishing communication with shore 406 

Screw, section of vessel showing 188 

Sockets, metallic 221-222 

Snaking down 251 

Strap and toggle for laniards 246 

Top, for-and-aft view of 71 

Tackles 158-166 

Time-glass 204 

Tops, sending up whole 226 

Tops, sending up half 228 

Toggle and becket 306 

Vards, section of lower and topsail r , 73 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



SIGNALS. 



The figures on the opposite page will explain the "First 
position. " First motion" (or No. i), second motion (or 
No. 2), third motion, (or No. 3). 

General Service Code — Army a?id Navy. 

Flag. F/a?. 



A . . . 


... 22 


B . . . 


. . .2112 


C . . . 


. . . 121 


D . . . 


. . . 222 


E . . . 


... 12 


F . . . 


. . . 2221 


G . . . 


. . . 221 I 


H . . . 


. . .122 


I . . . 


. . . . I 


J- - • 


. . . I I 22 


K . . . 


. . . 2121 


L . . . 


. . . 221 


M . . . 


. . . 1221 



N 11 

O 21 

P 1 21 2 

Q 1211 

R 211 

S 212 

T 2 

U 112 

V 1222 

W I I 21 

X 2122 

Y Ill 

Z 2222 



Signalman faces exactly communicating station — flag is 
held directly above the head — butt of staff at the waist. 

Letters are signalled by making, one after the other, the 
following motions for the figures standing for each letter. 
When two or more figures follow each other, there is no 
pause between the motions of the figures : 
To make "one" [1] flag is waved to ground on right side, 

and brought back above the head. 
To make ".two " [2] flag is waved to ground on left side, 

and brought back above the head. 




'Two - One"-'?!? ( 6 ) * O/ie-Two- One-Tivo- "IZ22: 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 7 

To make " three" [3] or front, flag is waved to ground in 
front, and brought back above the head. 

So to make "A," or " twenty-two" [22], the flag is waved 
twice to the ground to the left without any stop between 
the motions — so for a number of " twos " following 
each other. 

To make "N" [11], " one " "one," (as above). 

To make "B," or "twenty-one twelve" [2112], the flag 
is waved to the ground, " left — right — right — left." 

To make " K," or "twenty-one twenty-one" [2121], the 
flag is waved to the ground, "left — right — left — right." 

To make "three " [3] flag waved front, to make " thirty- 
three " [33] — front — front. Error — 2 121 21. Repeat 
— 121-121-121-3. Assent — -22-22-22-3. End of word, 
3. End of sentence, ^t,. End of message, ^^1,. Cease 
signaling — 22-22-22-333. 
Move a little to the right, 211-211-211-3. 
Move a little to the left, 221-221-221-3. 
"Attention, look for signals from this point." Wave 

the flag successively from side to side until attention is 

attracted. 

In a squadron, each vessel has its own particular letter to 

distinguish it when being called for signals, for example : 

The Flag-ship is usually "F" the " Portsmouth " " JP," 

" Saratoga" "S," etc., etc. 

The flag is always above the head at the end of each 

letter. 

JWos. Numerals. 

1. 21 1 12 also means, Wait a moment. 

2. 1 2221 " " Are you ready? 

3. 22122 " " I am ready. 

:\ 22212 " " Use short pole and small flag. 



8 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



5 


22221 " ' 


6 


12222 " ' 


7 


II222 " ' 


8 


IIII2 " ' 


9 


TI2II " * 


o 


22222 " * 



A — after, b- 



Use long pole and large flag. 

Work faster. 

Did you understand ? 

Use white flag. 

Use black flag. 

Use red flag. 

Abbreviations, 
-before, c — can, h — have, n — not, r — are, 
t — the, u — you, ur — your, w — word, wi — with, y — why. 

Night Signals. 
A lighted torch or lantern {foot light) is placed in front 
of, and at the feet of the signalman. Another light fast- 
ened at the end of a staff, is waved with precisely the same 
motions as those for the flag in the day. 

TO SEND A MESSAGE. 

General Service Code, 

First call attention by waving the flag successively "from 
side to side, until it is answered by the opposite station, 
or make a vessel's signal letter until answered. 

The answer will be 22-22-22-3, which is the general 
signal for assent, to signify that they are ready to receive 
the message. The communicating vessel or station then 
answers 22-22-22-3 signifying, " I see you are ready to re- 
ceive the message/' and then proceeds to signal the mes- 
sage letter by letter. A pause is made at the end of each 
letter, with the flag at "first position" (see fig. \ 

At the end of each word the flag is waved to the feet 
directly in front (3d motion "3"), to show the word is 
finished. At the end of each sentence there is a pause, 
and the flag is waved directly to the front twice (" 33 ") 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 9 

to show that the sentence is finished. At the end of a 
message the flag is waved to the ground three times directly 
in front C 333") showing that the message is finished. 

When the signal 333 "end of message " is made, it in- 
dicates, "My communication is complete, and await your 
answer." The person receiving the message will, upon 
noticing the signal, "message complete, " if the message 
is understood, answer with the signal, "I understand," 
22-22-22-3. If, however, the message or any part of it 
is not understood, the person receiving will make the signal 
for "Repeat" 121-121-121-3, after or before the word, 
(here signal the word after or before which the repeat is 
required). If no part of the message is understood, the 
signal "Repeat " is simply made alone as 121-121-121-3. 
In commencing a repetition of a signal, the sender will 
always commence by making the signal of "assent" or 
"I understand," 22-22-22-3, to show that the call for 
" repeat " is understood. 

The "signal of assent " or "I understand" must be 
used at the commencement of all communications. 

If in sending a message a mistake is made, make the 
error signal, 2 1-2 1-2 1-3. The sender then beginning with 
the letter in which has been the error, signals it correctly 
and proceeds with the message. Signal slowly and dis- 
tinctly; do not attempt a too hurried way of making the 
letters, for confusion will follow and many repetitions be 
necessary. 

The Roman letters may be used instead of the numeial 
characters 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., etc., for example; iv (or 1-1222) 
would stand for numeral 4, etc., etc. 

A simple, convenient method is to use the first ten letters 
of the alphabet to represent the numerals, for example; A 



IO YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

(22) would stand for numeral 1. B(2ii2) would stand 
for numeral 2. C (121) would stand for numeral 3, etc., 
etc., etc. And to make 365 signal C. F. E. To make 
123 signal A. B. C. To make 10 signal A. J. To make 
12, signal A. B. To make 42, signal D. B., etc., etc. 

When numerals occur in messages, and it is desired to 
send them va figures instead of words, the following signal 
will be made to indicate that numerals follow. 

The flag being in the first position is dropped directly 
to the front, and then moved in a horizontal plane to the 
right until it reaches a point at right angles with the line 
of work, when pass it vertically over the head to a cor- 
responding position on the left, then bring it tc the front 
horizontally and return it to the first position. 

The signal for "numerals ended M is made in the same 
manner, only reversing the movements. These signals 
should always precede and follow numerals. 

The signal for the "address of the message" is made 
thus : The flag being in the first position is dropped to- 
the front, and then waved twice as above described, in full 
circles to the right, passing vertically over the head, then 
resuming the first position. 

The signal for the ''signing of the message" is made 
thus : The flag being in the first position is dropped to 
the front, and then waved as before described in full circles 
twice to the left, passing vertically over the head, then re- 
suming the first position. 

The " General Service Code " is intended to be used for 
general communication between different parties on land. 
or between vessels, or between vessels and parties on land. 
It is for the purpose of transmitting such messages only as 
may constantly occur in service, and concerning which it 






y MKAmr 










fn] 




12 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

does not matter whether they are interpreted by the enemy 
or not. 

Ciphers to be agreed upon by the different commanders, 
must always be used in the transmission of messages of 
importance, or for any communication which might give 
information to an enemy. 

HOMOGRAPHIC SIGNALS. 

There are for these signals one position and ten motions, 
(see figs, for position " ready/' and motions from i to o). 

The signalman is equipped as follows : He holds in each 
hand a disk of canvas, one foot or eighteen inches in 
diameter, stretched upon a circle of strong wire, and hav- 
ing attached a handle for convenience of management. 
This handle may be of size only sufficient to be grasped by 
the hand, or it may be, to give greater distinctness to the 
signals, say two feet in length. Being thus equipped, take 
the first position of "ready" stand holding a disk in each 
hand, with the disks held together, andr at the height of 
the breast. 

To make the first motion or "one," the right hand and 
disk are extended obliquely upward above the head, at 
arm's length, and on the right side, then returned to the 
first position. 

To make the second motion or "two," the right hand 
and disk are extended horizontally, and at arm's length on 
the right side, then returned to the first position. 

To make the third motion or "three," the right hand 
and disk are extended obliquely downward, at arm's length, 
and on the right side, then returned to the first position. 

To make the fourth motion or " four," the left hand and 
disk are extended obliquely upward, at arm's length, and 
on the left side, then returned'to the first position. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



To make the fifth motion or " five," the left hand and 
disk are extended horizontally, at arm's length, and on the 
left side, then returned to the first position. 

To make the sixth motion or "six," the left hand and 
disk are extended obliquely downward, at arm's length, 
and on the left side, then returned to the first position. 

To make the seventh motion or "seven," both hands and 
disks are extended obliquely upward above the head, at 
arm's length on both sides, then returned to the first posi- 
tion. 

To make the eighth motion or "eight," both hands and 
disks are extended horizontally, at arm's length, on both 
sides, then returned to the first position. 

To make the ninth motion or "nine," both hands and 
disks are extended obliquely downward, at arm's length, 
on both sides, then returned to the first position. 

To make the tenth motion or "cipher," both hands and 
disks are held together at arm's length above the head, one 
disk covering the other, then returned to the first position". 

The General Service Homographic Alphabet is as fol- 
lows : 



A 


. ii 


F . 


. 12 


K. . 13 P. 


• 14 


U . 


• *5 


B 


. 21 


G . 


. 22 


L . . 23 Q . 


. 24 


W . 


• 2 5 


C 


• 3 1 


H . 


• 32 


M . . 33 R . 


• 34 


X . 


• 35 


D 


. . 41 


I . 


. 42 


N . . 43 S . 


• 44 


Y . 


• 45 


E 


• Si 


J • 


• 5 2 

1 — 

2 — 
3— 


0. .53 T. 
V . . 16 

Numerals. 

-1 4—4 7—7 
-2 5—5 %—% 
3 6—6 9—9 


• 54 
— c 


Z . 


• 55 


3- 


-End of a word. 











I 4 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

33 — End of a sentence. 

333 — End of a message. 

22-22-22-3, The signal of assent, or I understand, is 
to be used with the disks as with the flags. 

22-22-22-333 — Cease signalling. 

1 2 1-1 2T-12 1-3 — Repeat. 

2 1-2 1-2 1-3 — Error. 

2 1 1-2 1 1-2 1 1-3 — Move a little to the right. 

2 2 1-2 2 1-2 2 1-3 — Move a little to the left. 

To attract attention, wave the disk from side to side, or 
make vessel's signal letter. 

Abbreviations. 

A — after, b- — before, c — can, h — have, n — not, r — are, 
t — the, u— you, ur — your, w — word, wi — with, y — why. 

If it happens that the signals for numbers are to be used 
in a message, a wave of the disk must be made in the be- 
ginning and. at the end of the completed number, to 
clearly distinguish the numeral signals - " from the letter sig- 
nals. 

Each numeral letter is indicated by a single motion; 
thus to make 293, but three motions are needed. 

NIGHT SIGNALS. 

Fasten a red lantern at the waist, use a white lantern held 
in the hands. 

Same motions and positions for signals as those given in 
the day. 

The figures for any signals in Boat Code or Naval Signal 
books, can be made as above. , 

Examples in Homog7'aphic Signals. 

To make the letter S " 44," the left hand and disk are 
extended slowly obliquely upward, at arm's length, and on 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 5 

the left side, and returned to the first position, thus making 
the signal "four;" repeat this at once in th ' same manner, 
thus making " four " again. There is thus made the signal 
"44," or the letter "S." 

To make the letter "IT" or "32," the right hand and 
disk are extended slowly obliquely downward at arm's 
length, and on the right side, then returned to first position, 
thus making the signal "3." Then without pause, the 
right hand and disk are extended slowly horizontally at 
arm's length and on the right side, then returned to the 
first position, thus making the signal " 2." Pause. There 
has thus been made 32, or the letter "Zf." And so on, 
spelling out the words of the message. 

In addition to the system of signals already explained, 
there are "flash lights" at night, signals by sound, long 
distance signals, such as manipulating the sails of a vessel, 
or hoisting objects at the yard arms or mast head to repre- 
sent numbers, etc., etc. 



NATIONAL ENSIGNS FOR MEN OF WAR 




EKGLANO 



P 

g FRANCE. 




GERMANY. 



& RUSSIA. 





ran 

Li ITALY. 1 TURKEY. 

P 

1 BELGIUM. 




EGYPT. 





GREECE. 




PORTUGAL. 




fi DENMARK. 

o 




SWEDEN. | ROUMANIA 




PERSIA. 



NATIONAL ENSIGNS FOR MEN OT WAR. 




S1AM. 



DWICH 1? 



NATIONAL COLOURS FOR MERCANTILE MARINE 






ENGLANp. 




GERMANY- 





BELGIUM. 




PORTUGAL. 



12 







m 




HOLLAND. 




DENMARK. 





wsmm 



RUSSIA. AUSTRIA. 




I EGYPT. 




m\— 




P 

PERU. 



NATIONAL COLOURS FOR MERCANTILE MARINE. 




SAN DOMINGO 





le Signal & Answering P^ 
i used as Code Signal; tab 
hoisted under the fcns«$n 



When used as 





COSTA RICA 




JAPAN 



IB 



For Answering Pendant\rf?ere best seen 

3 -S 



D 




Ensign. 

^L Star for every 
State. 





Union Jack. 

A Star for every 
State. 



lb be worn at the Fore as a signal for a Pi lot. at they fizz en 
as a signal that a Court llartial is in session. 



Pennant 




To be worn by Commarulers of all single vessels, 
and in the bows of their boats . 





Pre sident' s Flag . Hag of the Secretary of theXavy; 

To be worn at die Main, and in the bows of o oats. 



FLEET FLAGS. 



Admiral. "Vice Admiral. 

EH B 



Rear Admirals. 



■ i 



Commolores' T3road Peniicoxts. 



kl^ 




SIGNAL FLAGS AND LIGHTS. 



FLAGS 



VERY S p, Ar c 



VERYS 
LIGHTS 
















R 







ft 







■N 



* 






a 






_, Cornet 

as 



.Rocket 

at xiight 

iaplace of 

Cornet 



r 



a 

a 

# 



Guard or GuideTlag . 



Tot)e Carried 
at the 
foTe 



SIGNAL FLAGS AND LIGHTS 



REPEATERS. 



Second 




Answering or 
Date Pennant . 




yv. Answering 

or "Iimdertand' 

• Repeating 
or 
"I do ?i ot understand ' 



Preparatory. 




General Call. 

Rocket followed ht/>^ 

^VLessageCall. 
& vtifhovt Rocket . 



Tuteiro<>atory\ 




U 



<j 



XunieTal . 







Geo graphical Pennant 




2 "Rockets 



Geo. 



succession . 



Despatch. Rag 



♦ ♦ 

♦ ♦ 



Thbe carried\\iie7iauihQTizedbxvesselsbe<irTng 
iniportant orders or despatches'to or arm a Cmii 1 ^ 
in Chief, and is not to be stopped or interfered 
m'tn except under extraordinary circumstances, 
forwdc/i me Officerwilt beheld 'accountable . 



Quarantine Tla g 




Tobeworn ~b}*vesselswliu?i are placed in Quar- 
antineniiich are aimitimj Pratique, andrrith 
vthieh. mteroourse isfodnddai . 



Qmr ch Pennant . 




General Recall. 



■ ■ 




To be /hoisted at the~Pcak, above 
tiie£n*iqn , durinq theperfbrman ce Of all Vessels orBoats sent in chase 
ofnivine Service . or on service Tobe Twisted at t7ie tore , 

andrmerr oestseen from odiervessels . 



CoTLVovFLacj. 




Tele^rapKTTLa^ . 



Xiotii Signal. 

) " A \ arid a Bocket 
^*\ immediately after 
i^V^vdwJSressa^e Call 
\ 'has been answer* 



I To he displavcd attfie same rirtie and- at the same 
part of the ship with all Telegraphic signals. 



Danger Flag. 




the Cotnpass Signal under which 
tv/77 inaicale the 




Y^ihf hotstinnofdtLi 



Amxullijicj Fla 







t'or' out of order. 



AtKigTit: Danger or Distress ^ made and repeated as 
a" Call" without tlie Bochet. 



"Wing Flags 



rTigQiWii^ll J LeftWingB 

■ ■ ■■ 



BowtLer Tlag . 




JfedFlag of Sigjial Code . 

lb he hoisted at the lore arvdiere best seen from 
tf^er\vsselspnrhenta/dm/rn or discharging jmvder. 



Hag of Truce . 




WJu'te Flag of Signal Code . 



Lights of Vessels as seen by Lookouts. 




Vessel ax anchor 



Vessel overtaken 
by another. 




Steam Vessel 

with another 

vessel in tow. 

BOWS ON. 




Steam Vessel 
under way. 
BOWS ON. 




Sailing- Vessel 

moving- towards 

the RIGHT. 




Steam Vessel 

moving towards 

the RIGHT. 




Sailing Vessel 

moving towards 

the LEFT. 




Steam Vessel 

moving towards 

the LEFT. 




Pilot Vessel on. 
Pilotage duty. 

A flare-up at short 

intervals which 

shall never exceed 

15 minute is. 



SALUTES. 

All commissioned and warrant officers must be saluted 
when met or spoken to, either on board ship, in a boat, 
or on shore. 

The customary salute in passing or speaking to an officer, 
is made by touching the cap with the right hand, looking 
him full in the face. 

If sitting down and an officer passes, rise, face to the 
front and salute ; if sitting when addressed by an officer, 
make the same salute. Should the cap be off, rise and 
stand at attention. Raising the cap while seated is not a 
proper salute. 

When passing an officer, commence the salute a few 
paces before reaching him, and keep^the hand to the cap 
until you are well past him. 

Always salute an officer, either naval or military, when 
meeting him on shore, in uniform or not ; even if a long 
distance off and not looking towards you, so long as you 
can see that he is an officer make the proper salute. 

There can be no excuse for not seeing an officer when 
passing ; it is your duty to keep a sharp lookout, and never 
allow an officer to pass you without saluting him. 

Never salute with hands in pockets. 

Never salute with a cigar or pipe in mouth. 

Never salute when in ranks without an order from the 
superior in charge. 

Should an officer pass a company of men marching 
under arms, they are brought to a u carry;" if standing at 
ease they are brought to an "attention;" the senior 
non-commissioned officer, if in charge, salutes. 

(26) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 2>J 

Should an officer pass a company of men marching, 
without arms, the senior non-commissioned officer, if in 
charge, salutes. 

Always bear in mind that it is your duty to pay proper 
respect to your superiors. Never neglect it, nor attempt to 
shirk it, but rather go out of your way to perform it. 

When coming on the quarter deck from below, from 
forward, coming on board or leaving the ship, always salute. 

The quarter deck is reserved for the commanding officer, 
executive, officer-of-the-deck, and such other officers as may 
be called there by their duties. 

Never use the starboard side of the quarter deck in port, 
nor the weather side at sea. unless called there by a superior. 

Should you wish to speak to the commanding, executive 
officer, or officer-of-the-deck, always go to " the mast," 
salute, and wait there until the officer-of-the-deck can 
attend to you, and when addressed stand at attention. 

" The mast" is at the starboard side of the mainmast in 
port, and the weather side at sea. 

Whenever sent on a message, or moving about decks in 
obedience to an order, always move on the run. 

Be careful to thoroughly understand the message to be 
conveyed and answer returned. 

If sent in search of a person, known to be on board, 
never return and say you can't find him. 

The ladders abaft the mainmast are for the use of the 
officers — those forward of the mainmast, are for the ship's 
company. 

BOAT SALUTES. 

Boat keepers in boats alongside a vessel or landing, 
must always rise and salute officers, leaving, coming along- 
side, or passing in boats. 



28 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

When other boats are leaving or coming alongside the 
ship, boat keepers should go to the bows of their boats, 
haul up to the boom, and there salute, standing. 

SPECIAL SALUTES OF COXSWAINS. 

Coxswains of boats when passing commissioned officers, 
below the rank of commanding officer, must rise and 
salute. If passing warrant officers simply salute, without 
rising. 

When passing a commanding officer, they should, in 
addition to the customary salute, "lay on their oars," if 
under sail, " let fly the sheets." 

When passing an admiral, vice-admiral, rear admiral or 
commodore, they should in addition "toss oars" if under 
sail, " lower the sail" Single banked boats trail the oars. 

Coxswains of loaded boats or boats towing, in passing- 
commissioned officers of all grades, should simply rise and 
salute. Warrant officers are saluted as before. 

They must always return the salute made by passing 
boats, to officers in their own boat. 

Boats' crews must always rise and salute, Avith the cox- 
swain, when a flag officer comes into the boat. And if not 
underway, they must rise and salute when a flag officer 
passes. 

Flag officers are the admiral, vice-admiral, rear admirals 
and commodores. 

All foreign officers must be saluted the same as our own 
officers. 

Boats moving in the same direction, an inferior must 
never pass nor crowd his superior, unless authorized to do 
so by the superior. 

Boats passing in opposite directions, to prevent fouling, 
port the helm. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 29 

Boats approaching the same vessel or landing, an inferior 
must always yield to a superior. 

Never keep a boat at a gangway or landing, thereby pre- 
venting the approach of other boats, unless there are orders 
to do so. Shove off and " lay on oars" abreast the ship. 
If in a tideway, get permission to make fast to a boom 
pendant or stern ladder. 

Coxswains of boats visiting other vessels, must never 
leave their boats nor allow their crews to do so, except by 
permission of the officer-of-the-deck. 

Side boys are detailed to " attend the side ;" when com- 
missioned officers are coming on board or leaving the ship, 
they must touch the cap when the officers are piped over 
the side. 

Nothing will add more to the good credit of a ship than 
a respectful, well-behaved crew afloat and on shore ; but 
should a ship's company become careless and neglectful in 
paying the proper respect to their superiors, it will invaria- 
bly bring discredit on their ship and on themselves. 



CHAPTER J. 

BAGS — HAMMOCKS — CLOTHING — MESSES, ETC., ETC. 

After being shipped in the navy an apprentice is 
watched, stationed, messed and berthed ; his bag, ham- 
mock, and outfit of clothing are served out to him. 

Where is the outfit stowed? 

In the regulation black bag, each piece being brushed 
and rolled up before stowing. The mattress and blankets 
stow in the hammock. 

How are the bags marked, and where stowed ? 

They are marked with the owner's jiame and ship's num- 
ber, and are stowed in the bag-rack on the berth deck. 
The bags are in charge of the master-at-arms, and must not 
be opened except at stated hours, without special permission 
of the officer-of-the-deck; such permission should always 
be reported to the master-at-arms or ship's corporal. Each 
apprentice is allowed one bag and a small box, called 
"ditty box." 

How are hammocks marked ? Where stowed ? 

With the watch number, outside, on the head of the ham- 
mock, starboard watch in black, port watch in red. They 
are stowed in hammock nettings on the spar deck, port 
watch, on the port side, starboard watch, on the starboard 
side, forecastlemen, fore and main topmen in forward net- 
tings, afterguards, mizzen topmen, idlers and marines in 

( 3° ) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 3 1 

the after nettings. Each apprentice is allowed two ham- 
mocks; one he sleeps in, the other being stowed below in 
charge of the sail-maker until needed. 
What are hammock clews ? 

A collection of small lines called nettles, hitched to a 
small metal ring. The clews are made fast to each end 
of the hammock. 

How is a hammock suing ? 

Hook the ring of the clews to a hammock hook, pass 
each outer nettle through the outer eyelet hole on its own 
side of the hammock, square these two nettles and take a 

half hitch with each ; then take 
the nettles next to the outer 
ones, and pass them througl 
the next eyelets from the ends, 
square and hitch as before, and 
so on, being careful to expend 
or tuck the end of each nettle 
through the half hitch following 
it, so that 710 ends will be ex- 

A PROPERLY SLUNG HAMMOCK. . . 7 _ 

posed when the ha??wwck is 
lashed. One end being finished, sling the other end in 
the same manner. 

What is a hammock laniard ? Its use ? 

A piece of small line spliced to the ring of the clews, 
(the end being whipped to prevent unlaying) and is used 
to assist in swinging the hammock when the clews will not 
reach comfortably from hook to hook. 

What are ha??i?nock hooks ? 

Hooks, screwed into the ship's beams, upon which the 
hammocks are slung. 

What is a sleepi?ig billet ? 




3 2 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



The hooks designated for a person to sling his hammock 
on. The watch number is plainly painted above the for- 
ward hook; be careful in swinging the hammock not to 
injure the paint on the beams. 

How are sleeping billets distributed ? 

Commence forward with the forecastlemen, working 
athwartships, until well aft, so as to leave an empty hammock 
on each side of a full one when either watch is on deck. 
Forecastlemen, fore, main and mizzentopmen, etc., etc., in 
their own parts of the ship. Boatswain's mates close to the 
hatchways. 

What is a hammock lashing ? Its use ? 

A piece of 12 thread manilla rope with an eye spliced in 
one end, the other end being whipped. It should be long 
enough to take seven good turns, with plenty to spare. It 
is used to lash the hammock before stowing. 

How do you lash a hammock ? 

Lay the blankets in neat folds in the centre of the mat- 
tress, draw the two 
sides of the ham- 
mock snugly to- 
gether, and take 
seven turns or hitches 
with the lashing equal 
distances apart, com- 
mencing at the head 
(reeving the end of the lashing through the eye for the 
first turn), after the last or foot hitch, take a round turn 
around the end, and tuck the lashing neatly along the 
centre or belly of the hammock. Unhook one end, and 
with the hammock under the arm, twist the clews well and 
tuck them neatly under the lashing at the belly, hauling 




HAMMOCK HITCHES. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 33 

them well taut and beating the end of the hammock well 
down. Keep the hammock off the guns and deck. Proceed 
in the same manner with the other end, then stow in the 
proper netting. 

Great care should be taken to always have a well lashed 
neat looking hammock to stow in the nettings. This is 
easily accomplished by being careful to observe the above 
instructions. 

How are hammocks cleaned ? 

Each person scrubs his own hammock with his own soap. 
First wet the deck where the hammock is to be scrubbed, 
then soap and scrub each side of the hammock thoroughly. 
After being scrubbed and well rinsed they are stopped on 
the hammock gantlings (lines stretched from the jib-boom 
to the spanker-boom) to dry, starboard watch stopping on 
the starboard side, port watch on the port side, numbers up 
and outboard. Each hammock should be secured to the 
line by three stops, lap about four inches over and be 
secured to the foot of the next hammock by footstops. 

What is done with the hammocks after drying ? 

They are taken from the line after being piped down 
(lowered to the deck), and are turned in to the sailmaker 
at the next muster at quarters, the hammocks of each gun's 
crew forming separate bundles. 

What is ' ' airing bedding ? ' ' 

Once a week, weather permitting, the hammocks are 
taken out of the nettings and unlashed, the bedding spread 
out, one turn of the lashing is then taken around the mid- 
dle of the hammock and bedding, the whole being triced 
up in the rigging to air, forecastlemen and foretopmen in 
the fore rigging, maintopmen and afterguards in the main 
rigging, mizzentopmen, marines, etc., in the mizzen rig- 
ging, care being taken not to pass lashings around ratlines. 



~a YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

What is done with clothing when served out ? 

Each piece after being tried on, is to be plainly marked 
with the owner's name in full on the inside, not where it 
will show while being worn. Each wash piece to have 
permanent clothes stops made fast to it, these stops to be 
long enough to tie on the clothes-lines with end to spare. 

How are clothes washed? 

Scrubbed on deck with soap and brushes, well rinsed and 
wrung out, then stopped on the clothes-lines to dry. White 
clothes are kept separate from the blue, and are to be stop- 
ped on above them, so that drippings from the blue 
pieces will not soil the white. 

What is doiie the night before scrubbing clothes ? 

Soap and brushes are prepared, and all soiled clothing 
should be stowed in the top of the bag so that it can be 
reached without delay. 

What is done the night before scrubbing ham?nocks ? 

Clean hammocks are served out at quarters and after- 
wards slung, soap and brushes are prepared to scrub the 
dirty hammocks the next morning. 

How is bedding inspected ? 

Hammocks are piped down, taken to quarters, unlashed, 
and the hammock and bedding laid on the deck athwart- 
ships, blankets folded and placed on the foot of the mat- 
tress, all being exposed so the inspecting officer can see, 
plainly, their condition. 

How are bags inspected ? 

The bags are piped up and taken to quarters, everything 
is taken out, the bag flattened and laid on the deck, to 
arrange the clothes upon and keep them from being soiled. 
Take each piece, brush it well, roll it up carefully with the 
marking out, and stop it with clothes stops, one stop a! 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 35 

each end of the roll, then arrange the pieces on top of the 
bag in two rows, keeping the white and blue separate. 
When everything is ready for inspection, stand in rear of 
the clothing and wait for the inspecting officer. 

Every apprentice should take pride in having a clean, 
well kept bag, and never miss a wash morning when he 
has soiled clothes; no matter how cold it is, if others can 
wash, he can. Keep all clothing mended. Be very par- 
ticular about the person, take off the underclothing every 
day, and brush the seams oict thoroughly. Wash to the waist 
every morning before decks are dried down, and wash all 
over, at least, once a week. By observing these rules he 
will not find it difficult to keep both clothing and person 
neat and clean. 

Shift into the uniform of the day during breakfast hour, 
and shift back again into such uniform as may be ordered, 
during the supper hour, and not before unless otherwise 
ordered. 

WATCHES. 

How ar-e the ship" s company divided ? 

Into two watches — starboard and port. Each watch is 
divided into two parts, ist and 2d part. Odd numbers 
always make up the starboard watch, even numbers the 
port. The watches are composed of the chief petty 
officers, boatswains' mates, quartermasters, forecastlemen, 
fore, main and mizzentopmen, afterguards, idlers and 
marines. 

How are the different watches distinguished ? 

A piece of white tape is sewed on the sleeve of the blue 
frock, a piece of blue stuff on the sleeve of the white frock 
and working jumper, on the right arm for the starboard 
watch, on the left arm for the port watch. Great care 
should be taken to have proper watch marks on all frocks. 



36 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



The principal petty officers wear the following marks of 
distinction : All petty officers wear on the right sleeve, 
above the elbow, an eagle and anchor with a star above 
it. The master-at-arms has in addition a foul anchor 
and star on each sleeve. Coxswains to flag officers, wear 
cross anchors on each end of the collar. Captains 7 cox- 
swains, wear one anchor in the same place. Quarter- 
masters, wear double glasses on the sleeve. Boatswain's 
mates, wear a foul anchor. Gunner's mates, wear cross 
cannon. Captains of forecastle, wear cross anchors. Cap- 
tains of tops, wear figure-of-eight knots. Carpenter's mates, 
a broadaxe, and sailmaker's mates, a fid. 

How is a ship's company distributed for working and 
cleaning ship ? 

Forecastle men on foie yard and head booms, they clean 
both sides of the forecastle ; foretopmen, in foretop, and 
clean port gangway ; maintopmen, in main top, and clean 
starboard gangway ; mizzentopmen, in mizzen top, and 
clean port side of quarter deck; afterguard smen, on main, 
yard, spanker, and trysail, they clean starboard side of 
quarter deck. In port, on board gundeck ships the star- 
board watch look out for the spar deck, the port watch for 
the gun deck. The spar deck people clean the ladders 
leading fro?n spar deck. Gun deck people clean the lad- 
ders leading to the berth deck. Side and copper cleaners 
and chain keepers are detailed from the different parts of 
the ship. 

How are the watches divided during the twenty-four 
hours ? 

Into seven tours : The afternoon watch is from noon to 
four, first dog watch from four to six, the second dog 
watch from six to eight, the first watch from eight to 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 37 

twelve, the middle watch from twelve to four, morning 
watch from four to eight, and the forenoon watch from 
eight to twelve. The dog watches being of two hours' 
duration and the other watches of four hours, the people 
of each watch change their tour every twenty-four hours ; 
for example, if the starboard watch has the first watch one 
night, they will have the middle watch the following night, 
and so on, giving each watch while at sea, eight hours on 
deck every other night, and eight hours in their ham- 
mocks every other night. Anchor watches are kept in 
port, a few hands being detailed from each part of the 
ship. They are relieved every two hours. On foggy and 
on windy nights they attend the fog-bell and the drift- 
lead. 

How is twie denoted on board ship ? 

By striking the bell as follows — noon, 4 p. m., 8 p. m., 
midnight, 4 a. m. and 8 a. m., are all eight (8) bells, 
struck in pairs as 11-11-11-11. Commencing at eight 
bells, each hour and half hour is as follows : 

Noon — 8 bells struck 11-11-11-11. 

y 2 past 12 — 1 bell " 1. 



1 o'clock — 2 


bells 


a 


II. 


y 2 past 1—3 


a 


a 


II— I. 


2 o'clock — 4 


a 


a 


II— II. 


Y* past 2—5 


a 


a 


II-II-I. 


3 o'clock — 6 


a 


a 


II— II— II. 


y 2 past 3—7 


a 


a 


II-II— II— I. 


4 o'clock — 8 


a 


(( 


II-II-II-II 



Then commence half past four as one bell, and increase 
every half hour until eight bells is reached again. 
W/ien is a crew at qua?'ters ? 
When at their stations for muster, preparatory for battle. 



38 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

How are they stationed? 

In divisions, viz. : Master's or Navigator's, powder, and 
gun divisions — gun divisions being sub-divided into gun's 
crews to work each gun. The guns are numbered from 
forward, the odd numbered guns being manned by the 
starboard watch, the even numbered guns by the port 
watch. All musters and inspections, except " General 
Muster" are made at quarters. 

How is a crew messed ? 

In cruising men of war, with regard to the part of the 
ship to which they belong. In training ships, the appren- 
tices are usually messed by gun's crews. The messes are 
numbered from forward, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., etc., the 
starboard watch composing the odd numbered messes, the 
port watch the even numbered. The appointed officers, 
petty officers, and marines form separate messes. 

A mess cook is selected from each mess, which consists 
usually of sixteen or seventeen persons. He must keep 
the mess-table and mess-gear clean "and in good order, 
draw all the provisions, do all the cooking that does not 
belong to the ship's cook, and attend to all the mess work. 
He must keep his mess- chest ready for inspection at all 
hours, and assist in cleaning the berth deck. Mess-cooks 
are under the especial charge of the master-at-arms. They 
are usually allowed their ration as a compensation for cook- 
ing, and are permitted to draw it in money. The navy 
ration is thirty cents per day. 

What is a mess caterer ? 

A person selected to take charge of the mess money, de- 
rived from the stopped rations, etc.; he purchases such 
extra provisions as the mess may wish to lay in. 

What are stopped rations ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 39 

Three or four rations are allowed to be commuted or 
stopped in messes of sixteen or seventeen men, and their 
value paid, in money, by the paymaster to the caterer every 
quarter (or every three months). 

Wliere does a ship' s company take its nieals ? 

In double-decked ships, on the gun deck; in single- 
decked ships, usually, on the berth deck. 

Wliere does a ship's company repair for " General 
Muster ? ' ' 

The petty officers in the starboard gangway ; the re- 
mainder of the ship's company on the quarter-deck. 



CHAPTER II. 

RIGS OF VESSELS — MEN-OF-WAR, HOW CLASSED — NAMES OF 
MASTS, YARDS AND SAILS, ETC. , ETC. 

Name the different rigs of sea-going vessels ? 

Ships, barques, barquentines, brigs, brigantines, herma- 
phrodite brigs, two, three and four masted schooners, 
and sloops. 

How are vessels of the navy classed? 

They are classed as ist, 2d, 3d, and 4th rates, according 
to their tonnage. 

Which is the spar deck of a man- of war ? 

The upper deck. 

Which is the gun deck ? 

The one below the spar deck. 

Which is the berth deck ? 

The one below the gun deck.* Below the berth deck 
come the holds. 

How is a ship divided lengthways ? 

Into fore, midship and after parts. 

Which is the bow ? 

The front or foremost end of the ship. 

Which is the stem ? 

The aftermost end of the ship. The midship part is be- 
tween the bow and stern, or the middle part. 

IVJiich is the starboard ? Port side ? 

The starboard side is the right hand side looking towards 
the bow. The port side is the left hand side looking 
towards the bow. 

*In single decked ships, the berth deck is the one immediately below 
the spar deck. In double decked ships, when there is an orlop deck ii 
is the one below the berth deck. 

( 4o^ 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 
RIGS OF SEA-GOING VESSELS. 



41 




Ship under full sail. 




Brie. 



42 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



RIGS OF SEA GOING VESSELS. 




Brigantine. 




Hermaphrodite Brig {Iron Clad.) 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

RIGS OF SEA-GOING VESSELS. 



43 




Barque sails loosed " to a bowline. 




Barquentine with double topsail yards. 



44 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 
RIGS OF SEA-GOING VESSELS. 



^ 



•^ 
^ 

3 




^ 






YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 
RIGS OF SEA-GOING VESSELS. 



45 




Fore-and-aft schooner. 




Four-masted Ocean Steamer. 



46 young sailor's assistant. 

What is the keel ? 

The first piece of metal or timber laid on the blocks 
when building the ship, it is the foundation from which all 
the other parts rise to form the ends and sides of the ship. 

WJiat is the stem ? 

It rises from the fore part of the keel to form the bow. 

What is the stern-post ? 

It rises from the after part of the keel to form the stern. 

What is the forefoot ? 

The forward end of the keel. 

What are the ribs ? 

An expression for the framework, which, resting on the 
keel, form the sides of the ship. 

What is a keelson ? 

An internal keel, lying fore and aft above the main keel 
and lower pieces of the ribs, confining the floors in their 
places. 

What are floor- timbers ? 

Timbers of the frame which lie directly over the keel. 

What are the knight-heads ? 

Two strong uprights, one on each side of the upper part 
of the stem and apron, to strengthen the bow and support 
the bowsprit. 

What is the apron ? 

A timber next to and abaft the stem. 

What is a false keel? 

An additional keel below the main keel. By offering 
greater resistance, it prevents the ship from being driven too 
much sideways through the water, away from the wind. It 
also protects the main keel should the vessel go ashore. 

What is the bilge ? 

That flat part of the ship's body on each side of the keel 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 47 

at the floors, or the part in contact with the ground surface 
when the ship is ashore. 

What are bilge keels ? 

Large pieces of wood or iron, bolted to the outside of a 
ship's bottom, in a position to offer resistance to the water 
as the vessel rolls, thereby lessening the motion. 

What are garboard strakes ? 

The lowest planking outside, nearest to the keel, running 
fore and aft. 

WJiat are the bends ? 

The thickest outside planking extending from a little 
below the water-line to the lower deck ports. 

What is the counter ? 

That portion of the stern from the water-line to the over- 
hang. 

What is the overhang ? 

The part that projects over the main body of the vessel. 

What is the water-line ? 

There are two, the light water-line and the load water- 
line. The light water-line is the line of immersion of the 
ship when light or unladen ; the load water-line is the 
line described around the ship's body when the stores are 
all on board and the ship is ready for sea. 

What are the topsides ? 

The upper part of a ship above the water-line. 

What is the quarter ? 

The upper part of the topsides at the after end of the 
ship. 

What are the quarter-galleries ? 

Projections from the quarters of a vessel. 

What is the run ? 

The narrowing of the after part of the body of a ship 
from keel to counter. 



48 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



CROSS SECTION — U. S. MONITOR " PURITAN.* ' 




Mas 



^M^s^ 



a, armor* b. wood backing. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 49 

WJiat is the cutwater ? 

That part of the vessel forward of the stem; it divides 
the column of water through which the vessel passes. 

What are li?nbers ? 

Gutters formed on each side of the keelson, to allow the 
water to pass to the pump wells. 

What are li7?iber boards ? 

A covering over the limbers. 

What are li?7iber chains ? 

Small chains leading through the limbers, having a rope 
spliced to each end, used to clear the limbers by being 
worked backwards and forwards. 

What is a double bottom ? 

In most iron ships the frames, etc., are covered in with 
iron plates, forming an inner ship, the space between the 
inner and outer ship being termed a " double bottom.' ' 
It gives strength and safety in case of damage to the 
outside skin. 

What is kentledge ? 

Pigs or bars of iron used for ballast. 

WJiat are water-tight bulkheads ? 

The name applied to the sides of the compartments into 
which iron ships are divided athwart and fore-and-aft of 
the ship. 

What are the wings of a ship ? 

That part of the hold nearest the side of the ship. 

What are chain-lockers ? 

Spaces partitioned off in the hold under the chain-pipes, 
for stowing chain -cables. 

WJiat is a pump-well ? 

An enclosure around the pumps to protect them from 
injury; it extends from the hold to the lower deck. 
3 



JO YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

JVJiat are beams ? 

Horizontal timbers lying across the ship, to support the 
decks and connect the sides. 

What are clamps ? 

Strakes of plank that extend all around the inside of 
the ship, for the beams to rest on. 

What is sp irk e ting ? 

The inside planking just above the water-ways below the 
port. 

What are wate?--ways. 

Thick planking extending all around the inside of the 
ship, immediately above the beams. 

What are scuppers ? 

Holes lined with lead, cut through the water-ways and 
ship's side, to convey water overboard. Scupper plugs fit 
in, and close them when not in use. 

What are partners ? 

Frames of timber fitted into the jjecks, to strengthen 
them immediately around the masts, etc., etc. 

What are ports ? 

The openings in the ship's side through which the guns 
are pointed and fired.* 

Wliat are port-sills ? 

The pieces of timber forming the upper and lower parts 
of the ports. 

What are cartings ? 

The short pieces of timber running fore and aft, con- 
necting one beam to another, to distribute the strain of 
masts, capstan, and bitts among the several beams so con- 
nected. 

What are ledges ? 

Pieces of timber lying between the beams and jogged 
into the carlines and knees. 

* On board merchant vessels, the ports are openings in the ship's 
side (or receW'incr and Hisohnrcnnp' carsro. etc.. etc. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 
CROSS SECTION — U. S. S. " LANCASTER.' ' 



5* 







a. spar deck; b. gun deck; c. berth deck; d. d. smoke 
stack; e. e. e. knees;/ main keel; g. bilge keel; h. main 
keelson; t\ i. sister keelsons; k. k. k. boiler keelsons; /. 
spirketting; m. waterways; n. hammock nettings; 0. o. 0. 
ship's frame ; r. channels. 



52 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



What are knees ? 

Pieces of wood or iron uniting the beams to the clamps 
and the ship's side. 

WJiat are stanchions ? 

Pillars of metal or wood supporting a beam amidships. 

What are treenails ? 

Wooden bolts used in fastening the planks to the timbers 
and beams. They are rarely used in the navy. 

What is caulking ? 

Driving oakum between the planks; it is then payed 
(filled in) with pitch. 

What is the rudder ? 

A contrivance or apparatus used to steer the vessel ; it 
hangs to the stern post by pintles and gudgeons. 

What is the tiller? 

A piece of timber or metal fitted fore and aft into the 
head of the rudder, by which to turn it when steering. 

What is the wheel ? 

A framework shaped as a wheel ; used to move the tiller 
and rudder, to which it is connected by wheel ropes. 

What is the forecastle, the gangway (or waist) and the 
quarter deck ? 

The forecastle is that portion of the spar deck from the 
after fore shroud forward. The gangway, or waist, that 
portion of the spar deck from the after fore shroud to the 
mainmast (also applied to the passage-way over the side). 
The quarter deck is that part of the spar deck abaft the 
mainmast, except in vessels having poop decks, when it 
only extends from the mainmast to the mizzen mast. 

What is a topgallant-forecastle ? 

A small deck in the bow of a vessel above the spar deck . 

What is a poop deck ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 53 

A small deck above the spar deck, extending from the 
mizzen mast aft. 

WJiat is the break of the poop ? 

The forward end of it. 

What is the break of the topgallant-forecastle ? 

The after end of it. 

What is a hatchway ? 

An opening in the deck forming a passage way from one 
deck to another, and into the holds. 

What is a coaming ? 

The raised boundary of the hatchways, to keep water 
from going below. The pieces at the ends are called head- 
ledges. 

What are gratings ? 

Coverings of lattice work for the hatchways. 

What are air ports ? 

Holes cut in the ship's side for light and ventilation, 
and closed with dead-lights. 

Wliat are scuttles ? 

Round holes cut in the decks. 

What are bulwarks ? 

The planking around the vessel above the spar deck. 

What is the taffrail? 

The rail around the vessel's stern. 

What is a bumpkin ? 

A short beam or metal bar projecting from each bow and 
from each quarter of a ship. 

What are hawse-holes ? 

Holes in the bow of a ship for cables to pass through. 

What are hawse-pipes ? 

Iron pipes fitted in the hawse-holes to take the chafe of 
the cable. 



54 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What are hawse -plugs ? 

Plugs made to fit the hawse-holes to prevent any water 
coming on board. When made of canvass, stuffed or filled 
with oakum, they are called jackasses. 

What are bucklers ? 

Shutters fitted to confine the hawse plugs in the hawse 
holes and keep them from washing inboard. 

What is the manger ? 

Part of the deck partitioned off forward, to prevent any 
water that may enter through the hawse holes from running 
aft over the deck. 

Where is the bridle port? 

The opening in the extreme bows of the ship, on each 
side. 

What are chain-pipes ? 

The holes for leading the cable through, as it passes from 
one deck to another from the chain lockers. 

What are chain-bitts ? 

The timber or iron heads fixed amidships in the fore 
part of the deck, to which, with the assistance of deck 
stoppers and compressors, the cable is secured. 

What is a compressor ? 

The large, movable, iron lever fixed at the bottom of 
each chain-pipe ; with the help of a tackle the cable is 
controlled as it runs out, by being nipped between the 
compressor and the lower part of the chain-pipe. 

What is a capstan ? 

A barrel of wood or iron turning around horizontally on 
a centre spindle ; it is used with the assistance of capstan 
bars, or by connection with a steam engine, for weighing 
anchors, lifting heavy weights, etc., etc. 

What are the topsail sheet bitts ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 55 

Vertical timbers projecting above the deck near to, and 
forward of, the masts. 

What is a fife -rail ? 

The rail around the mast with pins in for belaying ropes. 

What is a pin-rail ? 

A timber bolted to the inside of the bulwarks,- a con- 
venient distance from the deck, with pins in for belaying 
ropes. 

What is a belaying-pin ? 

A wooden or metal pin for belaying ropes. 

What is an eye-bolt ? 

A bolt with an opening in the head to which a tackle 
may be hooked. An eye -bolt with a ring welded into the 
eye, is a ring bolt. 

What is a cat -he ad? 

A piece of timber, or an iron davit projecting from each 
bow of the ship, to support an anchor. 

What is a fish-boom or davit? 

A movable spar or an iron projection, for raising the 
fluke of an anchor and placing it on the bill-board. 

What is the bill-board? 

A ledge on the ship's side to support the fluke of an 
anchor. 

What are the channels ? 

Platforms projecting out from the ship's side to give 
greater spread to the lower rigging. 

What is a bridge ? 

A platform extending, above the rail, across the ship, for 
the convenience of the officer in charge of the deck. 

WJiat is a horse-block ? 

A grating platform for the convenience of the officer-of- 
the-deck. 



5<> 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



What are chain plates? 

Iron plates for securing the lower dead eyes to the ship's 
side. 

What are side or sea steps ? 

Pieces of oak, fastened on the ship's side at the gang- 
way, for the convenience of ascending and descending, 
when the accommodation ladder is unshipped. 

What are accommodation ladders ? 

Convenient ladders shipped at the gangway. When 
shipped on both sides, the starboard ladder is reserved for 
commissioned officers and their visitors. 

What is a goose-neck ? 

A sort of iron hook fitted into the end of a boom ; it is 
intended to be hooked into a clamp or eye bolt, and can be 
unhooked at pleasure. 

What are davits ? 

Outriggers projecting from the ship^s side, to which the 
boats are hoisted. 

What are hammock-cloths ? 

Pieces of canvas made to fit the nettings, painted black, 
used to cover the hammocks. 

What are hammock-nettings ? 

Spaces on the rail for hammocks, to stow, when not in 
use. 

What are head-boards ? 

Boards placed at the forward and after ends of hammock 
nettings. 

What is a boom-cover ? 

A large painted canvas cover extending over the booms 
and boom-boats. 

What is a galley ? 

The cooking apparatus on board ship. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 5} 

WJiat is the ??iagazine ? 

The place where all powder is stowed. 

What is the shell-room ? 

The place for stowing the shell. 

How is the position of the water line pointed out on the 
inside of a vessel? 

A black line, about two inches wide, is painted all around 
the inside of a ship, directly opposite the water line. The 
position and number of each port is plainly marked on this 
line. 

What is the object of the coi7iposition figures on the stern 
and stern post of a vessel? 

To determine the draught of water. 

WJiat is the draught of water? 

The distance (or depth) of the bottom of the keel of a 
vessel, below the surface of the water. 

How do you determine the draught ? 

The bottom of the figures, on the stem or stern, mark the 
even feet, for example the bottom of 9 is an even nine 
feet draught of water. The figures are six inches long, 
therefore the top of the figure 9 will be nine feet six inches 
draught. The inches in the space between the top .and 
bottom of the figures, and in the spaces between the 
figures themselves, must be calculated by the eye. 

Point out all the foregoing parts of the ship and fittings. 
In addition point out the cabin, ward room, steerage, holds 
and sick-bay, and explain their uses. 

MASTS — SPARS AND SAILS. 

What are masts ? 

Upright spars which are placed in a vessel to support the 
yards, gaffs, and booms. 
How are masts named ? 



5 8 young sailor's assistant. 

From the position in which they are placed in a vessel, 
named foremast, mainmast and mizzen mast. 

What is the foremast ? 

The most forward one. 

What is the mainmast ? 

The middle one. 

What is the mizzenmast ? 

The one farthest aft. 

The mainmast is the largest, the foremast is next in size, 
and the mizzenmast is the smallest of the three. 

Into how many parts are each mast divided? 

Into four parts or sections, lower mast, topmast, top 
gallant-mast, and royal mast. 

Why are these divisions made ? 

Even if a spar of sufficient length could be obtained for 
the entire mast, it would be almost impossible to give a 
single spar the proper support. And, it is necessary to be 
able to send down the upper parts of the mast and leave 
the lower ones in position. 

What are lower ?nasts ? 

The lower part or section of each mast. They rest or 
step, on the keelson, except the mizzenmast, which, in 
smaller vessels, steps in the ward room. 

What are topmasts ? 

The next pieces above the lower masts. 

What are topgallant-masts ? 

The next pieces above topmasts. 

What are royal-masts ? 

The upper pieces, and are a continuation upwards of the 
topgallant-masts. 

So we have here three principal masts, each of which 
is composed of four masts. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 59 

What are tiysail masts ? 

Small masts immediately abaft the fore and main masts, 
to which they are connected.* 

What is the spanker mast? 

A small mast immediately abaft the mizzenmast, and 
connected with it.* 

What is a jury-mast? 

A temporary mast rigged in a ship, to replace one that 
has been carried away. 

YARDS AND SAILS. 

WJiat are sails spread upon ? 

Upon yards crossed upon each mast, upon gaffs, and 
upon stays and booms. 

What are yards ? 

Spars, suspended from a mast, to which the head of a 
sail is attached. 

How are they named? 

From the mast to which they are attached, and the sails 
they spread, viz. ; main topsail yard, fore-topgallant yard, 
and mizzen-royal yard. 

What are gaffs ? 

Small spars projecting abaft the masts. 

Viliat is a boom ? 

A long spar used to extend or boom out the foot of a 
particular sail. It takes its name from the sail it extends. 

Where is the cross jack yard ? 

The lower yard on the mizzen mast; there is no sail 
spread on it.*}" 

Point out the main yard. What sail does it spread ? 

The mainsail. 

Point out the fore yard. What sail does it spread ? 

The foresail. 

* Trysail and spanker masts are seldom used now. 

f Merchantmen sometimes set a sail on the cross: jack yard. 



Co YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Point out the foretopsail, tnaintopsail> and mizzen 'topsail 
yards. What sails do they spread? 

Foretopsail, main topsail, and mizzentopsail. 

Point out the fore-topgallant, main-topgallant, and mizzen- 
topgallant yards. What sails do they spread ? 

Fore-topgallant sail, main-topgallant sail, and mizzen -top- 
gallant sail. 

Point out the fore royal, main royal, and mizzen royat 
yards. If hat sails do they spread ? 

Fore royal, main royal, and mizzen royal sail. 

Point out the fore and main trysail, and spanker gaff. 
What sails do they spread ? 

Fore trysail, main trysail, and spanker. 

What are the " head yards ? " 

The yards crossed on the foremast. 

What is the bowsprit ? 

The large spar that projects out from the bows of a 
vessel. 

WJiat is the jib-boom ? 

It projects outside of, and is supported by the bowsprit. 

What is the flying jib -bo oi?i ? 

It projects outside of, and is secured to the jib-boom. 

What is the dolphin striker or martingale boom ? 

The spar that projects down from the bowsprit. 

What are the whisker booms ? 

The spars that project from each side of the bowsprit. 

What are the " head boo?ns? " 

The bowsprit, and booms connected with it. 

Where is the jib ? 

It is set, or spread upon the stay called the jib-stay, 
which leads from the foretopmasthead to jib-boom end. 

Where is the flying-jib ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 6 1 

It is set, or spread upon the stay called the flying-jib 
stay, which leads from the foretopgallant-masthead to the 
flying jib-boom end. 

What are staysails ? 

Three-cornered sails set upon stays, other than the jib 
and flying-jib stay. 

WJiat are square sails ? 

Sails that are spread by yards. 

WJiat are fore- a?ni- aft sails ? 

Sails that are not spread by yards, but spread by stays or 
gaffs, such as the jib, staysails, trysails and spanker. 

IVJiat are the ' ' head sails ? ' ' 

The sails spread on the foremast and forward of the 
foremast. 

Wliat are t/ie " after sails ?" 

Those sails spread on the mainmast and abaft the main- 
mast. 

What are the "light sails ? " 

The topgallant sails, royals, flying jib and topgallant 
staysail. 

JVhat are boat sails ? 

Those sails fitted for, and used in the boats. 

Vf^hat are aw?iing stanchions ? 

Wooden sometimes, but usually iron stanchions secured 
outside the ship, to assist in supporting the rope that the 
awning hauls out to. 

What are awnings ? 

Canvas coverings, spread over the deck of. a vessel to 
protect the crew from the sun and weather. The forecastle 
awning, is from the foremast forward, maindeck awning, 
from the foremast to the mainmast, the quarter-deck awn- 
ing, from the main to the mizzen mast, the poop awning 
from the mizzen mast aft. 



62 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

What are awning, or side-curtains? 

Strips of canvass, set between the ridge rope and the rail. 

What is a smoke sail ? 

A piece of canvas fastened on two small yards, hoisted 
on the foremast, to prevent the smoke of the galley from 
soiling the mast. 

What are weather-cloths ? 

Tarpaulins placed in the weather rigging, to shield the 
men and officers on watch. 

What are the lower booms ? 

The booms rigged outside the ship on each side of, and 
abreast the foremast, to spread the lower studding-sails. 

What are studding sails ? (Pronounced stun'sails.) 

Sails set outside the square sails on each side of the 
ship; they are spread at the top upon yards, and at the 
bottom by booms. They are only set upon each side of 
the foresail, foretopsail, foretopgallanf sail, maintopgallant 
sail, and sometimes, but rarely, on each side of the main- 
topsail. 

In addition to the sails in general use on sea-going ves- 
sels, in the merchant service, they use skysails, small sails 
set above the royals ; sky-scrapers, sometimes called star- 
gazers, a triangular sail set above the skysails. Inner-jib, 
a sail set just inside the jib \ jib-o-jib, a sail set outside of 
the flying jib ; and jib-topsail, a small light sail set on the 
topmast stay of sloops and schooners. 

Almost invariably in the merchant service, they use 
"double-topsail yards," or one topsail yard immediately 
above the other, called the upper and lower topsail yards ; 
each yard spreads a separate sail, called upper and lower 
topsails. This rig is for convenience in reefing, and reduc- 
ing sail. 






YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 6$ 

What are " mooring shackles ? ' ' 

Heavy "D" shaped pieces of iron under the fore, main 
and mizzen chains on each side ; for mooring chains to 
shackle to, when a ship is moored to a wharf or dock. 
They are bolted through the timbers of the ship, and se- 
cured inside with heavy iron plates. 

What are torpedo booms ? 

Spars attached, outside, to a vessel's bow and sides, to 
use in exploding torpedoes. 




CHAPTER III. 

PARTS OF A MAST, BOWSPRIT, YARDS, AND SAILS. 

What are masts and bowsprits made of? 
Wood, iron and steel. The wood used is pine, spruce, 
fir, etc., etc. Iron and steel masts and bowsprits are used 
principally in vessels made of that material ; being hollow 
they act as ventilators. Wooden lower masts in the navy 
are made of four principal pieces united by 
dowels and hoops — the inner corner of each 
piece is cut off so as to leave a square hole ex- 
tending the whole length of the mast; this 
permits a closer contact of the parts : top- 

SECTION OF r • ~" 11 j 

A LOWER MAST. maStS ^ ° f ° lie P ieCC : t0 P"g allant an <l 

royal masts are in one. 

What is the step ? 

The timber on which the heel or bottom of a mast, or 
bowsprit rests. 

WJiat is the hounding? 

The length of the mast, from the heel to the lower part 
of trie head. 

What is the 7nast head? 

From where the rigging is placed to the top of the mast. 

What are the bibbs ? 

Side pieces bolted to the hounds to support the trestle- 
trees. 

WJiat are the hounds ? 

(64) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



65 



SECTION OF A LOWER MAST AND TOPMAST, SHOWING THE 
DOUBLINGS OF THE MASTS, TOP, ETC., ETC. 




n. n. section of top- 
mast cross-trees and 
trestle-trees. 

o. 0. 0. lower dead 
eyes of topmast rig- 
ging- 

p. p. futtock band. 

q. q. truss band. 



a. a. lower mast \ b. b. topmast ; <r. c. c. top ; d. d. d. 
cap ; e. e. capshore ; f. lower yard ; g. g. truss ; h. bibbs ; 
i. i. slings; k. k. preventer slings; /. /. futtock shrouds; 
m. slip or pelican hook. 



55 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

The projections at the mast-head which support the 
trestle-trees of the lower and topmasts, and the rigging of 
the upper or smaller masts. 

What are the trestle-trees ? 

Fore-and-aft pieces, one on each side of the mast, upon 
which are placed the cross-trees. There are lower and 
topmast trestle-trees. 

What are cross-trees ? 

Two cross pieces on top of the trestle-trees. There are 
lower and topmast cross-trees. 

What are the ' ' horns of the cross-tree ? ' ' 

The outer ends or arms. 

What are tops ? 

Platforms of oak of two thicknesses, resting upon the 
lower mast cross-trees and trestle-trees, used to spread the 
topmast rigging, and for the convenience of men working 
aloft. 

What is the top rim ? 

The sweep which forms the edge of the top. 

What is the lubber ' s hole ? 

The space between the top and mast-head which affords 
a passage into the top, and allows space for the lower rig- 
ging- 

What are the doublings ? 

That portion of the two masts between the trestle-trees 
and the cap. That is, where the head of one mast doubles 
with the heel of another. 

What is a gin bar ? 

A short stout bar of iron placed across the topmast 
trestle-trees, between the doublings of the mast, with links 
or shackle eyes for the gin -blocks of topsail tyes. 

What is a cap ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 67 

Thick block of wood, iron bound, fixed upon the heads 
of the lower and topmasts, and bowsprit, for 
the topmasts, topgallant-masts, and jib boom 
to pass through. It supports them in posi- 



D 



cap. tion. 

What is a capshore ? 

A support under the fore part of a lower cap to prevent 
it drooping. 

What are mast wedges ? 

Pieces of wood, placed between the mast and the partners 
of a deck, to keep it upright in its place. 

WJiat are mast coats ? 

Pieces of prepared canvas fitted around the partners of a 
mast, to prevent water from getting in and rotting the 
wood. 

What are bolsters ? 

Pieces of oak placed on the trestle-trees, for the eyes of 
the rigging to rest on, and prevent a sharp nip ; sometimes 
the lower trestle-trees are rounded off and covered with 
composition, as a substitute for bolsters. The oak bolsters 
on the topmast trestle-trees, are covered by the rounded 
shoulder which projects from, and is a part of, the topmast 
funnel. With hemp rigging, bolsters were of soft wood 
covered with canvas. 

How are lower mast heads protected from the chafe of the 
lower rigging? 

Composition plates are fitted on each corner of the mast 
head. 

What are the jack cross-trees or jack ? 

An athwartship iron bar at the top gallant mast head, for 
spreading the royal rigging which reeves through eyes in 
the end. The top-gallant funnel and jack are in one. 



58 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




JACK AND FUNNEL. 

What is the bed of a bowsprit ? 

That part of the stem and apron upon which the bow- 
sprit rests. In wooden ships it is lined with lead to pre- 
vent water from getting in. 

What are the shoulders of the jib and flying jib-boom ? 

The part that the band for the rigging, fits over. 

What are the bees ? 

Chocks of wood on each side of the bowsprit, between 
the rigging and the cap, for the fore-topmast stays to reeve 
through. 

What is the saddle of jib-boom ? 

A chock of wood on top of the bowsprit to fix the heel 
of the jib-boom in, and keep it in place. 

WJiat are jaws ? 

Two cleats on the inner end of a gaff or boom, forming 
a semicircle, to keep it in its place against the mast, also 
on the slings of topsail, top-gallant, and royal yards. 

What is the heel of a spar ? 

The lower end. 

What is the head? 

The upper end. 

What is a fid hole ? 

A hole in the heel of a topmast or topgallant-mast, for 
the fid. 

What is a fid? 

A bar of iron or wood put through the fid hole of a mast, 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



6 9 



P. 

P- ? 

cr CTQ 
O 03 

3 3 



o 
o 

3 

o 



p 
en 


^ 
« 


pa 




a 


§ 


PL 


V 




£* 


a 


<S 


3 

p 


< 


P 


fc3 




S> 


-! 


c? 


Oq' 


C5 


ap 


^ 


— • 


V 


3 


** 


Oq 


r^ 



O 
^5 



n 

p 

*0 



o 
o 

3 




7<D YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

and across the trestle-trees, to support a topmast or top- 
gallant-mast. Fids should have laniards attached, to pre- 
vent their falling from aloft. 

IVJiaf is a preventer fid? 

A short fid passed through a hole in the mast about two 
feet above the fid hole. It is put in as soon as the pre- 
venter fid hole gets above the trestle-trees when sending 
up topmasts. 

What is the sheave hole ? 

An opening cut in the topmast, topgallant-mast, and 
other spars in which a sheave is fitted, to reeve the yard 
and other ropes. 

What is a dumb sheave ? 

It is simply a groove in the heel of a topmast, for a 
hawser or pendant to lie in. 

Wltat is the royal pole ? 

That part of a royal mast above the royal rigging, be- 
tween it and the truck. 

What is the ti-uck ? 

A circular piece of wood on the head of the royal mast, 
in which is the sheave for the signal halliards. 

What is the lightning conductor? 

A small copper rope or wire, which extends from the 
top of each royal mast, (running down the royal backstay) 
to the copper sheathing on the vessel's bottom. 

What is a jack-staff? 

A short staff raised at the bowsprit cap, upon which the 
jack is hoisted. 

What is an ensign staff ? 

A staff rigged over the stern upon which the ensign is 
hoisted, when not hoisted at the peak. 

Wliat is understood by a spar " buckling?" 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



71 




VIEW OF A TOP FROM AFT. 




TOP VIEW OF A TOP. 

a. a. a. top rail; b. b. b. top rim; c. c. c. lubber's hole; 
0. o. dead eyes for topmast rigging ; d. d. cross-trees ; e. c. 
trestle-trees;/!/, bolsters. 



72 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

The bending or bowing of a spar when not properly sup- 
ported, or when too great a strain is put on it. It is a 
sign of weakness. 

Where are spars nwst likely to decay ? 

At the heel, partners and cap, or any part where the 
water can get in and air cannot freely circulate. 
Yards, 

What are the slings of a yard? 

The centre or middle of the yard. The name is also ap- 
plied to the chain that goes around the lower mast-head, 
and secures to the yard by a slip bolt. 

What are the jaws? 

The projections at the slings embracing each side of the 
mast. 

What are the yard-arms ? 

The extremities or ends. 

WJiat are the quarters ? 

That part between the slings and the yard arms. 

IVJiat are the shoulders or hounds ? 

That part of the yard between the outer quarter and the 
yard arm, over which is placed the rigging or iron band 
for blocks. 

Point out all the foregoing parts of the masts, yards and 
booms. 

Parts of Sails. 

What are sails made of? 

Flax canvas.* 

How is it graduated as regards strength ? 

No. i to No. 10. No. i is the strongest, and it gradu- 
ally decreases in strength to No. 10, which is the finest. 
Ravens duck is used, and is even finer. 

*This is the regulation for the navy. In the merchant service, sails 
are frequently made of cotton canvas. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 
LOWER AND TOPSAIL YARDS. 



73 




8. 



# 






■ji 



i 



ft 

a. 









74 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What sails are made of No. I canvas? 

All fore-and-aft storm sails and usually one foresail and 
one fore and main-topsail, to be used as storm sails. 

Name the fore-and-aft storm sails. 

The fore, main and mizzen storm staysails, fore and main 
trysails, and storm mizzen, the last being set on the spanker 
mast, or abaft the mizzen ma.st. 

What is the strength of canvas for other sails? 

Graduated according to the class of vessels for which 
they are made, the coarsest and strongest for the larger 
vessels, as follows: courses made of No. 2. Fore and main- 
topsails of No. 2, mizzen topsails of No. 3 to No. 4, fore 
and main-top-gallant sails of No. 4 to No. 7, mizzen top- 
gallant-sails of No. 6 to No. 7, royals of No. 8 to No. 9, 
jibs of No. 2 to No. 4, flying jibs oi No. 5 to No. 7, 
spankers of No. 2 to No. 3, and studding sails of No. 5 
to No. 9. Boat sails are made of heavy and light cotton 
ravens duck. 

What are the cloths of a sail? 

The strips of canvas forming the sail. In the sail-loft 
the name applies to a strip of canvas about 39 yards long 
and 24 inches wide. 

WJiat is a bolt of canvas ? 

Cloths rolled up ; a bolt usually contains about 80 yards. 

Name the principal parts of a square sail. 

The bead, foot, leeches, cbws, head-earing-cringles and 
bunt. 

What is the head? 

The upper edge that is made fast to the yard. 

What are the leeches ? 

The two sides. 

What is the foot? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



75 



TOPGALLANT SAIL, TOPSAIL AND COURSE. 




Dotted lines indicate the after side of the sail. 

/. i. i. foot ; 2. 2, 2. head ; j. j. j. leeches : 4. 4. 4. gluts ; 5. j. j. 
reef points ; 6. 6. 6. grab-lines for beckets and toggles. 

a. a. a. buntline cloths ; b. b. b. belly bands ; c. c. c. reef bands ; 
d. d. spur pieces ; e. e. reef tackle patches ; f. f. f. leech cringles ; 
g. g. g. head earing cringles; //. h. h. spectacles, k. k. top lining (on 
after side); ;;/. in. m. bunt lining (on of'.er =ide). /. /. mast lining (00 
aUer ^id^). 



76 young sailor's assistant. 

The bottom or lower edge. 
What are the clews ? 
The two lower corners. 
What are the he ad- earing- cringles ? 

The cringles spliced into the two upper corners for head- 
earing. 

What are cringles ? 

Strands of rope worked around and into the roping, for 
head-earings reef-earings, bowline-bridles, etc. ; they have 
thimbles in them to prevent chafe. 
What is the bunt ? 
The middle part of the sail. 
What is the bolt rope ? 

The rope sewed around the sides of the sail. 
What is the tabling? 

The double part of the canvas to which the bolt rope is 
secured. 

What are head-holes ? 

Eyelet holes in the head of sails, for the robands. 
What are eyelet holes ? 

Holes formed in the tabling and reef bands, for cringles, 
reef points etc., etc. 
What are robands ? 

Pieces of spun yarn, rope yarn etc., etc., hitched 
through the eyelets or head holes, for securing the sail to 
the yard. 

What is the midship roband? 

The middle roband ; it is of larger stuff and is the lirst 
one made fast to the yard. 
What are reef bands ? 

Double pieces of canvass sewed across the sail for work- 
ing the eyelet holes for reef points, and to take the strain 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 77 

when the sail is reefed. The first and second reef bands 
are usually fitted as french reefs, with grab lines for beckets 
and toggles, and the third and fourth reef band with points. 

Hozv many reef bands have square sails ? 

Courses have two, topsails have three and four, except 
the mizzen topsail which rarely has more than two; the last 
reef is called the close reef. 

Wliat is the belly-band? 

An extra piece of canvas sewed across the topsail or 
course, below the lower reef band, for additional strength. 

Wliat is a foot-band ? 

An extra piece of canvas sewed along the foot of a sail, 
on the after side. 

Wliat is a top-lining? 

The extra piece of canvas sewed on the after part of a 
topsail from the belly-band to the foot (the width of the 
top) to protect the sail from the chafe of the top. 

What is a mast- lining? 

An extra piece of canvas sewed on the after side of a sail 
to protect it from the chafe of the mast. 

What are buntline cloths ? 

Extra pieces of canvas on the forward part of the sail ex- 
tending in an angular direction from the foot to the belly- 
band, to take the chafe of the buntlines. 

Wliat is a reef tackle patch ? 

The extra piece of canvas sewed on the forward part of 
the sail, at the reef tackle cringles, to take the strain of the 
reef tackles. 

Wliat are hcai-earins[s ? 



jg YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Pieces of rope spliced into the head-earing-cringle, to haul 
the head of the sail taut along the yard. 

What are reef earings ? 

Pieces of rope spliced to the eyelet holes below each reef 
earing-cringle, and seized to the cringle. Each earing is 
made fast to the cringle next above its own, the first reef 
earing being made fast to the yard. This is done so that 
the earings will be in reach of the men on the yards when 
reefing. Reef earings are used to haul up, and make fast, 
the reef cringles to the yard, when reefing. 

What are bowline-bridles ? 

Pieces of rope spliced into the bowline cringles, having 
a toggle to which the bowline is toggled. 

What are spectacles ? 

Pieces of iron, with three or more^eyes, spliced into each 
clew of topsail, course, and topgallant-sail. 

What are gluts ? 

Strands of rope spliced into the middle cloth of a sail, 
with a thimble turned in to prevent chafe. Courses have 
one on the after side of the sail, topsails have one on the 
after side and two or three on the forward side of the sail. 
The gluts on the after sides are used for hooking the bunt- 
whip to in furling. The gluts on the forward side are used 
to hook the bunt-whip to, when used as a midship bunt- 
line, and to hook the midship buntline to, in order to haul 
up the slack sail in close reefing. 

Top-gallant sails of large ships sometimes have bowline 
bridles, but neither top-gallant sails nor royals are reefed, 
although top-gallant-sails sometimes have reef bands. 

What are gaskets ? 

They are classed as harbor and sea gaskets. Harbor 
gaskets take their names from the position they occupy on 



YOUXG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



79 



the yard, as bunt, quarter and yard arm gaskets: they are 
usually made of sword mat or heavy canvas. Those for the 
bunt consist of two single legs, one on each side of the 
slings, varying from two to three inches in width, and 
fitted with a thimble in one end by which it is secured to 
the bending jackstay, with a permanent seizing, the other 
extremity having a laniard, which is hitched to the opposite 
quarter of the yard on top ; the gaskets crossing each other 
on the bunt when the sail is furled. The quarter and yard- 
arm gaskets are made in the same manner as the bunt 
gaskets, only shorter as they approach the yard-arms, and 
are secured at equal distances (generally about every third 
seam) along the yard underneath the jackstay, by a cross 
seizing. The gasket lies under the head of the sail. When 
furling it is taken up forward and over, and the end rove 
through a staple on the after part of the yard, the sail tossed 
well up, and the end of the gasket expended around its own 
part. 

In making harbor gaskets, the broad part should be long 
enough to take the sail m when furled with two reefs; they 
should be carefully blacked, and to avoid staining the sail, 
should be lined w r ith duck. Harbor gaskets are sometimes 
made fast to the head of the sails. 

The sea gaskets or furling lines (of which there are three 
on each arm of the lower and topsail yards, and one on 
each arm of the light yards) may be either of sennit or 
small sized rope, and of sufficient length to take several 
turns around booms and all, when furling in heavy weather. 
These however are not permanently secured to the yard, 
but are usually put round it at the outer and inner quarters 
with a running eye, and the surplus end bighted up with 
trapping turns and thrown forward of the sail at sea. 



3q YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What are back cloths ? 

Triangular pieces of canvas secured to each quarter of 
the topsail yards; they are for convenience in stowing the 
bunt of a topsail. 

What is the " hoist" of a sail? 

A term applied to sails whose yards travel up and down 
masts; it is the distance from the head to the foot, as, one 
topsail has more hoist than another. 

What is the " drop " of a sail? 

A term applied to courses, the distance from the head to 
the foot, as, one main-sail has more drop than another. 

What are the principal parts of the fore-and-aft sails ? 

The forward corner of the foot or lower edge, is the 
"tack," the after corner of the foot is the "clew" the for- 
ward corner of the head or top is the " throat or nock" 
the after corner of the top is the ^peak or head." The 
forward edge is the fore leech or luff, the after edge is the 
after leech. 

How are fore-and-aft sails made fast to the spars and 
stays ? 

Trysails and spankers are made fast to the hoops (which 
travel on the masts and gaffs) by robands, rove through the 
eyelet holes, in the fore leech and head. The staysails and 
jibs travel by hanks, or lacings on the stays. Vessels are 
now being fitted for trysails and spanker as follows — a com- 
position bar fitted with a slot down its centre is bolted to 
the after sides of the fore, main and mizzen masts, and the 
under sides of the gaffs — these slots have composition 
travelers working in them, which take the place of the 
hoops; to the eyes in the travelers the robands of the sails 
make fast; with this rig the trysail and spanker masts are 
done away with. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



Sx 



JIB AND SPANKER, 




/. /. foot ; 2. 2. head ; j. j. after leech ; 8- 8. fore leech or luff;// 
leech cringles; //. h. spectacles; s. throat or nock; t. t. tack; g. g. 
strengthening or clew patch. 
4* 



g 2 • VOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What sails play the principal part in ihe handling of a 
ship ? 

Topsails. 

The spanker sometimes has a reef band running diagon- 
ally, called a balance reef. The lower studding sail has a 
reef called a rolling reef. And the topmast studding sail 
has a reef so it can be set with reefed topsails. 

What is the roach of a sail? 

Where the foot is hollowed out to prevent chafe on the 
stays etc., etc. Sometimes the leeches are roached to get a 
taut reef band. 

WJiat is a goring cloth ? 

Any cloth cut obliquely, as those on the jib and in the 
sides of a topsail. 

Roping is always sewed on the after side of square sails ; 
from this you can always distinguish the after side from 
the forward side. On fore-and-aft sails, the roping is sewed 
on the port side. A sail is always bent with the roping 
between the sail and the yard. 

What are the principal parts of an awning? 

The back-bone, shark' s-mouth, earings, stops, lacings, 
etc., etc. 

What is the back-bone ? 

A rope stitched to the middle of the awning; it runs fore 
and -aft, has a thimble in both ends, to the forward end the 
fore-and-aft-tackle hooks, the after thimble secures to a 
hook on the mast. The awning is hauled out at the cor- 
ners by earings, and at the sides by stops. 

What is the shark's mouth ? 

An opening to accommodate the masts and stays. The 
"dog's ear" is one of the peculiar corners formed by this 
opening. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



83 



What is the lacing ? 

The line which draws together the ends of adjoining 
awnings. 

IVJiat is the ridge-rope ? 

The rope running fore-and-aft, on each side of the ship, 
to which the awning is hauled out. This rope is supported 
by the stanchions and rigging. 

In very warm climates, (East Indies etc.,, double awn- 
ings are used, one stretched above the other. 

Point out all the foregoing parts and fittings of the sails 
and awnings. 



CHAPTER IV. 

STANDING RIGGING — NAMES OF, ETC., ETC. 

To steady and secure the masts and booms of a vessel, 
it is necessary to have, at least, three separate supports. 
These supports are permanent or standing, and are called 
the " standing rigging, ' ' 

What are stays ? 

The ropes leading from the head of, and supporting a 
mast from forward. 

What are shrouds ? 

The side supports leading from the^ head of the masts. 

What are backstays ? 

The supports leading from the head of the upper masts, 
abaft, down to the ship's side. 

Why has each mast more support sideways and aft, than it 
has forward? 

Because the force of the wind on the sails blows the 
mast forward, and opposite to the point from which the 
wind blows. 

What are guys ? 

The side supports of a boom. 

What are bobstays ? 

The downward and principal supports of a bowsprit. 
Bobstays are the most important supports in a vessel ; they 
support the bowsprit, which in turn supports the foremast, 
which in turn supports the mainmast, or a portion of it, and 
the mam supports the mizzen or a portion of that mast 
Should bobstays carry away, all masts are endangered. 

(8 4 ) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



85 



WJiat are bowsprit shrouds ? 

The side supports of a bowsprit. 

WJiat are back ropes ? 

Ropes shackled to the end of the dolphin striker, lead 
ing to, and setting up at the bows, well abaft the cutwater ; 
to give a good spread ; and are used to prevent the dolphin 
striker from canting forward. 

What are the jumpers ? 

They lead from the ends of the whisKer Doom to the 
cutwater, to prevent the whiskers from canting upwards. 
In straight stemmed vessels (see " Trenton ") they lead to 
the dolphin striker. The straight stem is too far aft to 
give a proper support to the whiskers. 

What is a jib martingale ? 

The downward support of a jib-boom. 

What are jib guys ? 

The side supports of a jib-boom. 

Wliatis a flying jib martingale ? 

The downward support of a flying jib-boom. 

What are flying jib guys ? 

The side supports of a flying jib-boom. 

WJiat is a jib netting? 

The net work under the jib-boom, which is seized to the 
whiskers and jib guys; frequently a flying jib netting is 
placed under the flying jib-boom. These nettings are to 
catch and hold the jibs when loosed and not hoisted, and 
they will prevent people falling overboard from the head 
Dooms. 

What is a flying-jib wythe ? 

A species of iron cap or band on the end of the jib-boom. 
to support the flying jib-boom. 

How is standing rigging named ? 



86 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSIblAN'T. 



Each stay, shroud, backstay and guy, has the same 
name as the spar which it supports, for example ; the sup- 
ports of the main-topgallant-mast, are the main-topgallant 
shrouds, the main-topgallant stay and the main-topgallant 
backstays. 

What are fore-and-aft stays ? 
All stays that lead forward. 
What is gammoning ? 

A heavy iron band set up with a nut and screw, used to 
secure a bowsprit in its bed. 
What are futtock shrouds ? 
The iron rods leading from an iron band 
on the lower masts, called a futtock band, 
to an iron plate near the top rim called a 
futtock plate, these shrouds take the strain 
of the topmast, and keep the top from 
warping up. They frequently have ratlines 
gammoning. on them for convenience, in getting over 
the top. 

What is a futtock staff? 

A leather covered iron rod inside the lower ana top- 
mast rigging. In the former, the running rigging leads 
over it, in the latter the top-gallant shrouds lead over it. 
What are laniards of rigging? 

Small hemp ropes which connect the upper and lower 
dead eyes, hearts, etc., etc.; used to set up and secure the 
end part of the rigging. 

How do you determine the size of laniards ? 
If the rigging is hemp, the laniard is y 2 the size of the 
rigging; if of iron wire, the laniard is the same size as the 
rigging. 

What is a dead eye ? 




YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT, 



37 



The piece of lignum vitae with three holes in it, through 
which is rove the laniard of the rigging. 

What is a heart? 

A peculiar sort of block having one large hole in the 
centre, in which are three or four scores, and a groove 
around the circumference ; used generally for the laniards 
of heavy stays or bobstays. 

What is a thimble ? 

An iron ring, the outer surface so shaped, that it may be 
held in position by a rope, when spliced around it. 

What are mast head pendants ? 

Short pieces of rigging hanging from the lower mast 
heads, two on each side, with thimbles turned in the ends ; 
both legs are the same length. They are used to get the 
mast in its proper position and for setting up the lower 
rigging, etc., etc. 

What are burton pendants ? 

On small vessels they are four pieces of wire rope, of 
proper length, shackled, two on each side, under the top- 
mast trestle-trees. Experience, however, has proved that 
this method of fitting burton pendants will greatly weaken, 
and bring too heavy a strain on the topmast trestle-trees, 
they are now being fitted to go over the mast head in the 
same manner as lower pendants, particularly in large ves- 
sels. They are used in setting up rigging, securing lower 
yards for heavy weights, etc., etc. 

What is a sheer pole ? 

An iron rod seized to the shrouds, just above the dead 
eyes, and parallel to the water, used to steady the lower 
rigging, also to keep the dead eyes from slueing. 

What are ratlines ? 

Small hemp lines hitched across the shrouds, parallel to 
the sheer pole, to form a ladder for going aloft. 



88 young sailor's assistant. 

What is a sheer ratline ? 

Every fifth ratline ; it extends to the swifter to steady it. 

What is the swifter ? 

The forward shroud. 



YARDS AND MISCELLANEOUS. 

What are jackstays ? 

Rods of iron secured along the top of yards, for the sails 
to be bent to and for reefing. Reefing jackstays are some- 
times of wire rope rove through eye bolts on the top of 
the yard, but iron reefing jackstays are better. 

What is afoot rope ? 

The rope hanging under a yard for the men to stand on. 

What are stirrups ? 

Short pieces of rope hanging from Jhe yard, to which 
the foot rope is seized. Foot ropes no longer reeve through 
the stirrups. 

What is a flemish horse ? 

The outer or short foot rope, it fits over the pacific-iron 
on the yard arm, and the other end is seized to the outer 
quarter of the yard. 

What are pacific irons ? 

Iron fixtures fitted on the extreme end of both fore and 
main topsail, and fore and main yard arms ; it has a square 
end for the outer boom iron, and the outer end of the 
flemish horse fits over it. 

What are boom irons ? 

Metal hoops or rings on the lower and topsail yards, to 
support the studding sail booms. 

What is a pai 'rel ? 

A rope collar encircling the mast and attached to the 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



8 9 



jaws of the yard, it confines the yard to the mast, but per- 
mits it to move up and down. 

What is a parrel lashing ? 

The lashing between the two eyes of a parrel, abaft the 
mast. 

What is a preventer parrel ? 

It is fitted on topsail yards only, and is of wire. It 
goes around the starboard slings of the yard, then around 
the mast and around the port slings of the yard, the two 
eyes being seized together, and to 
the jaws, between the mast and the 
yard. 

What is a truss ? 

A heavy iron fixture by which the 
centre of a lower yard is held in its 
position at the mast. 

What are the slings ? 

A short chain going around the 
lower mast head and connected to 
the yard by a slip bolt or pelican 
hook. 

What is a Jacob' 's- ladder ? 

A short ladder with wooden or 
iron rungs and rope sides, used for 
getting into the lower rigging, and 
in going from the topmast cross-trees 
to the jack \ also for stern ladders, Jacob's ladder. 
boom ladders, and lower mast ladders, cap ladders, etc., 
etc. 

WJiat are cat-harpins ? 

Short wire ropes with thimbles in each end, used, with 
lashing eyes, to bind in the topmast rigging in wake of 




9<D YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

the topsail yard when it is hoisted ; it also counteracts the 
drag of a lee lift when topsails are reefed. 

Wliat are the "eyes of the rigging? '- 

The parts that go over the mast head. 

What advantage has wire rigging over hemp ? 

It is neater, lighter, not so perishable, and does not 
stretch so easily. 

Point out all the standing rigging, and the fittings de- 
scribed. 



CHAPTER V. 

MARLINE-SPIKE SEAMANSHIP. 

An apprentice can learn very little marline-spike seaman- 
ship from descriptions. Only general ideas can be gained. 
The best, and in fact the only way to become perfect in 
this most important branch of a seaman's education, is to 
take a marline-spike on deck and under the eye of a petty 
officer or seaman, try to attain perfection by constant prac- 
tice. 

It is not proposed to give a description of the knots and 
splices, but simply to give their general uses in connection 
with the cuts. 

What does marline-spike seamanship comprise ? 

Knots, splices, clinches, seizing, etc., etc. 

What is splicing ? 

Joining ropes together for different purposes, by uniting 
their strands in particular forms. The spliced part is 
slightly weaker than the main part. 

WJiat is seizing a rope ? 

Binding the two parts of a rope together with spun yarn, 
marline, or small stuff. 

What is a round seizing? 

A round seizing has riding or cross turns. 

WJiat is a flat seizing? 

A flat seizing has ?w riding turns. 

WJiat is an eye or throat seizing? 

A seizing of one or two parts of a rope that cross to 
form an eye. 

(90 



92 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

All seizing stuff should be well stretched before using. 

What is worming a rope ? 

Filling up the divisions between the strands (called the 
lay), by passing spun yarn or other material along. This 
renders the surface smooth for parceling. Worming, in 
length, is about once and a half the length of the rope to 
be wormed. 

What is parcelling a rope ? 

Wrapping strips of old, well-tarred canvas around it, 
with edges overlapping, like shingles on a roof, to shed the 
water. (For wire rope use sheeting, coated with red lead 
and boiled linseed oil, instead of tar). This prepares the 
rope for serving and protects it from rain. 

What is service for ? 

It is put on to protect the rope from chafe and from the 
influence of the weather. It is always passed against the 
lay of the rope. It binds the worming down together, and 
gives the whole the appearance of a well rounded rope. 

" Worm and parcel with the lay, serve and marl the other 
way. ' ' 

Splicing an eye in a wire rope. 

Wire requires more end for splicing than hemp. Stick 
the whole strand once under two strands, once two-thirds 
under each strand, and once one-third under each strand. 
This will make a good taper. Then set it up and stretch 
it well, beating the yarns well into place and breaking them 
off close to the rope, by working them backwards and for- 
wards two or three times, or with nippers. Then red lead 
parcel and serve over with spun yarn. To assist in tucking 
each strand, a hammer or light maul is used, to beat the 
strand down into place. When splicing heavy wire, two 
men will be needed to make a neat splice. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

KNOTTING. 



93 










>A rope yarn knot. 
Used in bending rope yarns together. 





An over -hand knot. 



A figure-of-eight knot. 





A bowline knot. 



A reef or square knot. 
Used in tying reef points and 
small stuff generally. Also used 
for bending ropes together. 



94 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 





A running bowline. 



A bowline on the Bight of a rope, 
(J ' Bowline on a bight. ' ') 

Used to sling a man over the 
side. 




A wall knot. 



A single wall and single crown. 



VOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



95 





A double wall and single crown. 



A double wall 

and double crown, 

or "man rope knot." 

Used for the ends of 

man-ropes, and for deck 

stoppers. 




A single Matthew Walker. 
Used for bucket ropes. 



A Matthew Walker's 
knot. 



9 6 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 




A single diamond knot. 



A double diamond knot. 




Turk! s head worked into a rope. 




" Turk's head, 11 (different stages.) 
Turk's heads are used on foot ropes, grab ropes, etc., etc., etc. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



97 





A stopper knot. ^*^^^^^^^«==5^ 

Used for tern- <^~~ 

porarily securing the "Shroud knot." 

roping of a sail when Used when a shroud is shot, 

carried away, or carried away. 




A French shroud knot. 

HITCHES. 




Half -hitch cround a spar. 
A half-hitch T, o half hitches. 

5 



9 8 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 




A timber hitch. 
Clove hitch with a Used for securing the end of a 
ratline around a r °pe to a spar. 
shroud. 





A timber and half hitch. 
Used for bending a line to a spar, for 
towing, hauling anything into the tops, 
etc., etc. 



A round turn 

and half hitch. 

Used for bending a 
line or hawser to the 
ring of an anchor. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



99 





Two round turns and 
two half hitches. 



A roband hitch. 
To hang an anchor to a spar. 



1 


4- 


^ 




P E--.-rri-=T^ 


s 


- 1 r?' 


J nrr ■' j'~ TTJ-— a 


ii = ; v 




Rollins; hitch. 





B lac kw all-hitch . 
U\e J for hooking a tackle to a rope. 




Double Blackwall-hitch. 



"A cat's Jaw." 
Used for the same purpose 
as a Blactovall-hitch. 



IOO 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




A sheep-shank. 
Used for shortening a rope. 





A midshipman' 's hitch, or a back half- 
hitch. A marling hitch. 
A good hitch for a stopper, and Used for making 
is much used on board ship. selvagee straps, lash- 
ing hammocks, marl- 
ing over parcelling, 
etc., etc. 




A marline-spike hitch, 
g e en oj Always use( j j n heaving on seizings. 
a rope. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

BENDS. 



IOl 




"Rackling." 
Used to prevent chafe. 




Single or sheet-bend. 
For bending ropes' ends 
together. 




A double bend. 
Used the same as "sheet 
bend." 




Fisherman's bend. 
For securing a hawser to the 
ring of an anchor, or to a spar 



io: 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 





ic Studding-sail-halliard bend. ' 

Used for bending halliards - 
to the yards. « Carrick bend. ' ' 

Used for bending hawsers together. 




Half hitch and a seizing. 
Used to bend hawsers together. 



CSXSS3J|^^^g| 



Reeving line bend. 
Used for bending small hawsers together. 



VOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



I03 



CLINCHES. 




A clinch in a cringle. An outside clinch. An inside 

clinch. 





Hawser bent to an anchor with inside Mousing a hook. 
clinch. 



io4 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



SLINGS AND HOOKS. 




Hogshead slings. 



Can-hooks , 





Sling a cask with head knocked in, 
Sling a cask with a ist and 2d method. 

rope' s end, with a guy 
bent on. 




A lank to<nr y c. 



A barrel or bale sling. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



'°5 



SPLICING. 




Marline spike. 




12 3 4 

Eye splice, (different stages.) 

No. 1 strands unlaid ; No. 2, first tuck; No. 3, second 

tuck ; No. 4, the eye turned; No. 5, third and last tuck. 

Used for the eye of single ropes. 




Eye splice. 
Four-stranded rope. 



io6 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 




Short splice , (different stages). 
Used for joining ropes when strapping heavy purchase 
blocks, etc., etc. 




i 2 3 

Short Splice, (four stranded rope). 




tH stage. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




stage, 
ist method. 



107 



SSSSSSSSSSSSSS^sssssssS 



2nd method. 

Long splice, (different stages). 

Used for splicing running rigging. 




;&>5K»&sa^g^csg^g***lK^^ 



Long splice, (four stranded rope). 




Cut splice. 
Sometimes used for burton pendants, launches rigging. 



io8 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 





Strand of a rope chafed. 
The chafed part is cut out, 
and a strand laid in its place; 
stick the ends as in a splice. 



Horseshoe splice. 




Splicing a 7' ope to a chain. 




A selvage e strap with marline hitches. 



VQUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



109 




Grovunel, 
Used for block straps. 




Cringle in a rope. 




Cringle in a sail. 



no 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT, 



SEIZINGS, ETC, ETC 




I 2 

Spanish windlass. 
No. 2, the same, finished with a marline-spike hitch. 




Throat seizing. 




Throat seizing with a 
round seizing. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



Ill 




Racki?ig seizing. 




Cuckold" s neck, or half- 
crown. 




i 2 3 

' 'Round seizing. ' ' 
ist, 2d, and 3d stages. 




Rose seizing. 



112 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 





Rose lashing. Nippering two parts 

Used for seizing on the foot of a rope together. 

ropes of light yards. 




Worming a rope. 




Parcelled and serving. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



IT 3 




Wliipping a rope. 
To prevent the strands un- 
laying and fagging out. 



A serving 
mallet. Serving 

board. 
Used for small jobs. 



MISCELLANEOUS. 




fflm 

To point a rope. (The different stages.) 





Pointing a hawser. 



M4 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 





I 2 

Cross pointing. 



French Sennit: 





Common sennit. (Three stages.) 



Sennit gaskets. 
i st and 2d stage. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



lit 




Round sennit. (Two stages.) 



Square sennit. 




Paunch mat. 
Used for chafing mats, in the rigging. 



CHAPTER VI. 



BOATS. 



Ship's boats are either carvel, clinker, or diagonal-built. 
In carvel-built boats the planking does not overlap, but 
makes flush seams (smooth seams) which are caulked. In 
the clinker boats, the lower edge of each plank (or strake) 
overlaps the upper edge of the plank below, like shingles 
on a roof. In diagonal-built boats the planking is double 
and runs diagonally, the inside planks running in an oppo- 
site direction to the outside planks, and their edges meeting. 

Boats have a keel, ribs (or frames), knees, stem, and 
stern-post. 

What is a catamaran ? 

The name usually given to the scow, balsa, or boat, used 
when cleaning the ship's sides or copper. 

How are boats shaped ? 

Either square-sterned, round-sterned, or sharp at both 
ends; in the latter case they are called whale-boats. 

What is the ' ' run of a boat ? ' ' 

The curve of the after part of the body of the boat. A 
fine run is a sharp slope or curve. A full run is a full curve. 

What is the ' ' entrance ? ' ' 

The angle which the bow makes with the water. 

What are the thwarts ? 

The seats for the crew. 

What is the fore-and-aft thwart ? 

The piece running fore-and-aft in the boat, with holes in 
it for the masts. 

( 116) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



117 



WJiat are foot-li?iks or bottom boards? 

The strips, running fore-and-aft, in the bottom of the 
boat. 

WJiat is the rising ? 

The strips, running fore-and-aft, on the sides, that the 
thwarts rest on. 

IVJiere are the stern-sheets ? 

The space between the after thwart and the back-board. 

What is the back-board ? 

The board across the stern sheets, to support the backs 
of passengers and also to form the coxswain-box. 

WJiat is the. coxswain-box ? 

The space between the back-board and the stern ; it 
generally has a small seat on each side, for the coxswain 
when steering the boat. 

Where are the fore-sheets ? 

The space forward of the forward thwart. 

What is the body of a boat ? 

That part included betwen the stem- sheets and the fore- 
sheets. 

What are rowlocks ? 

Spaces in the wash-strake for the oars. Metal rowlocks 
are sometimes used, working on a swivel; they fit into 
composition plates having small holes in them; these 
plates are set into the gunwale of a boat. 

What is the wash-strake ? 

The broad, thin plank which is fastened on the gunwale 
of a boat, to keep the spray and water out. 

WJiat is the gunwale ? 

The upper edge of the sides. 

What are sJiutters ? 

Pieces of wood made to fit in, and fill up the rowlocks; 
used wnen under sail. 



it8 young sailors assistant. 

What is a stretcher ? 

A foot piece, for an oarsman to brace his feet against 
when pulling. 

What are boat-falls ? 

Tackles used, at the ends of the davits, to hoist the boats. 

What are boat-stoppers ? 

Ropes made fast to the davit-heads, long enough, with 
end to spare, to reach the water ; used to take the strain 
while the falls are being belayed. 

What is a strong-back ? 

A small spar lashed on top of, and across, each pair of 
davits; the gripes are made fast to it when the boat is se- 
cured for sea. 

When is a boat single-banked ? 

When it has but one oarsman to a thwart, pulling but 
one oar. 

When is a boat double- banked ? 

When it has two oarsmen to a thwart. 

When are oars double-banked ? 

When each oar has two men pulling it. 

How are boats classed in the navy ? 

Steam launches, steam cutters, sailing launches, cutters, 
barges, gigs, whale-boats and dingies. 

What are their uses ? 

Barges are reserved for flag-officers ; gigs for command- 
ing officers ; the other boats are for the ship's use. 

Boats are propelled by steam, electricity, sails and oars. 

Rudders are shipped on the stern-posts of boats, by 
means of pintles (hooks) and gudgeons (iron eyes), they 
are also made fast to a boat by means of a small laniard 
from the rudder to the stern ; this is to prevent their being 
lost in case they should become unshipped from the stern- 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. H9 

post. A tiller, to move the rudder, ships into a hole in 
the rudder-head, and is usually worked by hand, although 
steam launches connect their tillers, by tiller ropes, with a 
small wheel placed in the bows of the launch. Gigs, 
whale-boats, dingies, and other small boats, generally use a 
yoke to move the rudder ; this yoke has two arms project- 
ing, one, on each side of the rudder-head. The centre of 
the yoke ships on top of the rudder-head, and two lines, 
called yoke ropes, are connected to the outer end of each 
arm, and lead in to the stern sheets. The rudder is moved 
by means of these yoke ropes. 

Boats should have their own recall and the general recall, 
plainly painted in the coxswain -box. 

The rules of the road apply to boats as well as to ships. 

In using the rudder, with the boat going ahead, if the bow 
is .to go to port the rudder is put to port, and the tiller or 
I elm to starboard and vice versa. With the boat going 
aste7-n, the helm must be put in the opposite direction to 
that in which it is put for going ahead. Do not place too 
much dependence on the rudder steering a boat going 
astern . 

What a7-e oars, for the navy, made of? 

Ash. 

What are the parts of an oar ? 

The blade and the loom. The Hat part that is dipped 
in the water is the blade, the part inboard is the loom. 
The inner end of the loom is shaped to be grasped by the 
hand, and is called the handle. Oars are leathered where 
they take the rowlocks, to prevent chafe. 

What gear is a boat supplied with, for ordinaiy duty? 

A full set of oars and two spare oars, boat hooks, fenders, 
a full set of stretchers, two awning stanchions, a breaker 



120 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

of water, anchor, lazy painter (or line for making fast), 
colors, awnings, cushions, etc., etc. Masts, sails, and 
compass are to be carried if ordered ; the plug should be 
secured by a laniard. 

What is ' ' calling away ' ' a boat ? 

Sounding a call, or passing the word" for the crew to 
man her. Boats are called away by the pipe (and passing 
the word) and by the bugle. 

LOWERING AND HOISTING. 

It must be remembered that in lowering and hoisting 
boats, the object is to take such precautions, that the lives 
of the crew will not be endangered, and that the boats 
themselves will not suffer injury. Lowering and hoisting, 
particularly at sea, or in a strong tideway, is a very impor- 
tant part of the proper handling of boats. 

How is a boat lowered ? 

See the falls clear for running, the rudder shipped, plug 
in, and everything in readiness. A sufficient number of 
the crew in the boat to manage her. 

At the order "lower away!" the boat is lowered, by the 
falls, steadily and squarely into the water. The men in 
the boat should use boat hooks, to bear her clear of the 
guns and ship's sides. As soon as the boat reaches the 
water, unhook the falls, and hook them to bolts in the 
ship's side, underneath the davits. The men on deck haul- 
ing taut and coiling down the falls. 

If in a tideway always unhook the after fall first, and 
attend the rudder, otherwise the boat might swing around 
and swamp. 

When lowering a stern boat, particularly in a tideway, 
always unhook the stern tackle or fall first, and attend the 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 121 

rudder; should the stern fall not unhook readily, better 
let it unreeve at once, she will then swing around with the 
bow fall fast and come " bows on" to tide or sea. 

If lowering a stern boat in a strong tideway, it is better 
to use stout runners, fitted for the purpose; the runners are 
hooked, hauled taut, and belayed; the regular falls are 
then unhooked. When lowering, lower by the runners, 
and when the boat strikes the water, allow them to unreeve 
from on deck, and the boat will sweep clear of the ship. 
The runners are then hauled in and coiled down neatly in 
the boat. In lowering a stern boat, never get her broadside 
on, if it can be avoided, for in that position she is more 
than likely to swamp. 

When under weigh, or m a strong tideway, and lowering 
a quarter or waist boat, have a line fast, from well forward, 
to the boat's bow next the ship's side. As the boat is 
being lowered, the crew are to hold on to the life lines. 

Never lower a boat if the vessel is going astern, much 
better to be going ahead, but, if possible, wait until the 
vessel is stationary, or nearly so, before lowering. 

In case a boat is to be lowered while underweigh, one 
fitted with a detaching apparatus is used, if possible. 
Usually two boats, one on each side, are so fitted for vessels 
of the navy. By this apparatus, the lower blocks of the 
falls are detached (when near the water), and the boat is 
dropped clear. 

How is a boat hoisted ? 

The boat is hauled under the davits, the falls, having 
been overhauled down, are hooked, manned, and set taut. 
When all ready, " hoist away !" and walk her up to the 
davits. As the boat rises, one man in the bow and one in 
the stern, should reeve the stoppers through the rings or 
6 



122 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

slings, and take in the slack all ready to pass them before 
the falls are belayed. Others, in the body of the boat, use 
book-hooks, etc., to fend her off from the guns and the 
ship's side. 

If in a tide or seaway, have a line fast to the bows from 
forward, hook the forward tackk first, and attend the 
rudder. As each tackle is hooked, the lower-blocks should 
be held taut up, by the standing part of the fall to prevent 
unhooking. Cross the life-lines and keep them taut through 
the bow and stern rings (this will prevent the fore and aft 
swing after the boat leaves the water). As an extra precau- 
tion, when the vessel has headway, have a stern line taken 
to the quarter. When the boat is rising, bind her by steady- 
ing lines from the ports or rail. The crew must also use 
boat-hooks to fend off. 

If hoisting a stern boat in a strong tideway, hook the bow 
tackle first, and do not hook the stern tackle until all is 
ready for hoisting on deck. If both are hooked, at the 
same time, it will bring the boat broadside on to the tide 
or sea. When the boat rises, hold hard by the life-lines as 
she flies forward. 

It is often difficult to get hold of the stern tackle of 
stern boats ; after the bow tackle has been hooked, they 
should be overhauled down into the bows of the boat, and 
passed aft. When all ready on deck, haul the boat up 
gradually and hook quickly. The men in the boat use 
boat-hooks, as she rises, to fend off from the stern. Small 
spars can be held down from the stern -rail, between the 
boat and the vessel. The plug should be taken out the 
moment a boat leaves the water. 

How is a boat-stopper passed ? 

Take it through the ring (or slings) in the bowar.d stern, 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 1 23 

and, with the bight, pass two or three turns around the 
davit-head, binding the hauling part of the boat's falls. 
Then take a few turns around both parts of the falls, between 
the blocks. 

What are life-lines ? 

Lines made fast along the spans and guys of boat davits, 
for steadying the boat when hoisting and lowering, and 
affording a ready means for the crew getting out of the 
boat. 

JVJiat is done when a boat is called away ? 

If the boat is hoisted, the crew lay aft, and lower at the 
order; hauling to the gangway and manning her, or hauling 
out to the booms or astern, whichever is ordered. 

If the boat is riding astern, or at the booms, the crew 
man her there, and haul or drop to the gangway and wait 
for orders. 

When called away, every member of a boat's crew should 
start at once, moving on the run, and man the boat. On 
getting into the boat take the proper seats quickly and 
quietly; the stroke and bow oarsmen standing by with 
boat-hooks. The after-thwarts are for the stroke, and the 
forward-thwarts for the bow oarsmen. The remainder of 
the crew, are distributed, on the thwarts, in the body of the 
boat. 

When distributing a crew in the boat for pulling, a 
coxswain should select as stroke oarsmen, the two most 
skillful oarsmen in the boat. Bow oarsmen should be light, 
active, and intelligent. The heaviest men should be dis- 
tributed in the body of the boat. 

During the temporary absence of the coxswain, the 
starboard stroke oarsman is in charge, and responsible for 
the boat and crew. 



J24 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



ORDERS USED BY PERSONS IN CHARGE OF BOATS. 

The following orders are those most generally used by 
officers and others in charge of boats. A cutter, for exam- 
ple, is supposed to be lying alongside, properly manned, 
and ready to shove off. 




up oars! 

The crew, with the exception of the bow oarsmen, seize 
their proper oars, and, watching the stroke oarsmen, raise 
them briskly " up and down" together, holding them 
thus directly opposite the front and centre of their bodies, 
blades fore-and-aft, those on the starboard side with the 
right hand, and those on the port with the left hand down 
and grasping the handles. The oars to be held by the 
hands alone, not resting on the bottom of the boat, the crew 
facing squarely aft and paying strict attention to the cox- 
swain. 

Bow oarsmen stand up facing forward, and attend the 
painter or heaving line, or handle boat-hooks as the case 
may be. They should not raise their oars until the order 
" let fair 1 has been executed. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. I2 J 

In a sea way or strong tideway, the after-oarsmen do not 
raise their oars, at " up oars" but assist with boat-hooks 
in shoving off, and raise their oars together and before the 
order "let fall". 

At the command " shove off! " bow oarsmen cast off 
painter or heaving line, handle boat-hooks, and shove the 
bow clear by a vigorous shove, the coxswain seeing that 
the ensign staff and quarter goes clear of the gangway, 
assisted by after oarsmen if necessary. In "shoving off," 
be careful not to mar or score the paint work on the ship's 
side with the pointed end of the boat-hook; reverse the 
boat-hook and shove off with the butt. 

In shoving off from a vessel going ahead, always shove 
off the stern of the boat (supposing the boat is to lee- 
ward of the vessel), then as the vessel passes ahead and 
clears, the boat will be bows on to the wind and sea. 

When the boat is well clear of the ship or wharf the 
order is given ' ' let fall ! ' ' The oars are eased down into 
tne rowlocks together, and leveled or trimmed on the after 
oars. The blades shoitld not be allowed to splash in the 
water. 

Take in the fenders. In double banked boats, each man 
is responsible for the proper handling of his own fender ; 
in single bank boats No. 2 takes in and throws out the 
fender of No. 1, No. 3 that of No. 2, etc., etc. 

The boat can now be pointed in the desired direction by 
ordering the proper oars to be backed or given way upon. 

The bow oarsmen, having shoved the boat clear, turn 
aft, lay in their boat-hooks together, coil down the painter, 
if adrift, then take their seats, seize their oars, and looking 
at each other, throw their blades over the bows in line with 
the keel, together, and grasping the looms and handles, 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



raise the oars up and down, touch "the blades and drop 
them into the water together. 

When the boat is properly pointed, the command is 
given "give way together! " 




The first of the stroke. 

The starboard after oar gives the stroke, the others fol- 
low him. Each oar should be lifted as high as the gun- 
wale, and feathered by dropping the wrist until the blade 
is flat, a brief pause being made when the oar is level with 
the gunwale, long enough to feather the oar. This is done 
to cut the wind and to avoid splashing in a seaway. 

At the middle of the stroke each man throws his weight 




The last or end of the stroke. 
upon the oar. Never row hand over hand or from the 
shoulder alone, but bend the back at each stroke. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. I 2 7 

On approaching the desired place of landing, the boat 
being properly pointed, at the moment the oars are leav 
ing the water, the command is given " in bows !" The bow 
oarsmen, closely regarding each others' motion, take one 
stroke, toss their oars, raise them up and down, lightly 
touching the blades together, laying them fore-and-aft in the 
boat on the top of the thwarts and without unnecessary noise, 
the blades of the oars forward, the handles being shoved aft, 
and well out to the side of the boat, underneath the oars 
still in motion, taking care that their oars are "boated." 
They then seize their boat-hooks, stand up, face forward, 
and hold their boat-hooks up and down. 

When with sufficient headway to reach the desired place 
of landing, the command is given " way enough ! " As 
before, the command is given while the oars are in the water. 
The crew, regarding the motions of the stroke oarsmen, 
give one stroke, and, at the word from Li.e s;arboard 
stroke, toss their oars together, raise them up and down, 
and lay them easily and without noise on top of the 
thwarts fore-and-aft in the boat, the blades forward and the 
oars out to the side of the boat, and to be so placed that 
they can be readily resumed by the crew, the stroke oars to 
be placed nearest the gunwale, and the others in succes- 
sion, each oar being outside the one forward of it. The 
boat-hooks to be handled, so that the butt will not be 
tointed towards any of the crew. 

The oars being boated, the stroke oarsmen, keeping 
their seats, handle their boat-hooks, and assist in bringing 
the boat to the landing. 

After boating the oars the fenders are thrown out. 

In saluting passing boats, in stopping to hail or to check 
headway, it may become necessary to lay on oars. To do this 
the command is given, " stand by to lay on your oars ! " 



128 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

At this, pay strict attention for the command 




OARS ! 

which is given while the oars are in the water, the stroke is 
finished, and the blades of the oars are feathered and raised 
together as high as the gunwale, where they are firmly held 
and trimmed (or leveled) on the stroke oars. On no 
account are the oars to be allowed to touch the water, or to 
be thrown out of line. 

At the order "give way! " the pulling is resumed, taking 
the stroke as before from the stroke oars. 

To toss the oars, the command is given, "stand by 
to toss ! ' ' 




YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



I29 



which is given while the oars are in the water; the stroke 
is completed, and the oars are thrown up and dawn together, 
blades fore-and-aft. Each oar is held square to the front 
cf the man holding it, on line with the centre of the body 

To trail, the command is given, " stand by to trail! ' 
"Trail! " 

At the second order, the oar is to be thrown out of the 
rowlock and allowed to trail alongside, either by the trail- 
ing line, or by holding the handle. 

To stop the boat's headway, the order is given " oars!" 
Followed by " hold water ! " and if necessary " stern 
all!" 

At the first order, lay on oars as directed ; at the second, 
drop the blades into the water to check the headway, and at 
the third, back water, keeping stroke with the after oars. 
The oars should not be dropped into the water too sud- 
denly, or dipped too deep, lest they get broken. 

To turn a beat suddenly, the order is, " give way 
starboard (or port), back port (or starboard) ! oars! " 
Both backing and pulling, oars should always keep stroke 
with the stroke oar of their own side. 

Nothing can be more discreditable than a noisy, slovenly 
boat's crew. Therefore, keep perfect silence at all times ; 
the coxswain (in the absence of an officer), is the proper 
person to give orders, and he will do the necessary talking. 
Pay strict attention to his orders, and obey them with a 
will. Boat the oars quietly, and see that when boated, 
they are so placed, that they will not roll around after the 
boat is hauled out or dropped astern. 

The crews of running boats should be neatly dressed in 
the uniform of the day. and ready for inspection by 8:jo 
a. ///.. and remain so until the order to shift. 



l 3° 



YOUxVG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



The rain clothes of the running boat's crew should be 
stowed where they can be easily reached. In rainy 
weather, coxswains should see each member of the crew 
provided with rain clothes before leaving the ship. 

How is a boat steered in a heavy sea ? 

An oar is shipped in a metal crotch, which is fitted to 
the stern of the boat. Whale-boats and surf-boats are 
usually so fitted. 

What are muffled oars ? 

Oars having pieces of canvas or thrum mats, wrapped 
around the loom in wake of the rowlocks, to deaden the 
sound of the oars while pulling. 

How take a boat in tow ? 




' ' Giving and taking a tow. ' ' 

Pass well clear of her oars, and place yourself ahead 
exactly in line, give way as soon as you have the tow-line. 
Make fast the tow-line, to an after thwart, or a little forward 
the stern, so as to be able to bear it over the quarter to 
assist in turning. 

When several boats are towing, the heaviest boat should 
be nearest the tow. 

Do not give another boat your painter until sue is right 
ahead. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. I3J 

If towing a vessel on fire, a few lengths of chain (with a 
grapnel on one end) should be made fast to the vessel, and 
the tow-rope made fast to the outer end of the chain. 

How tow a spar? 

The small end first. 



u Towing alongside a vessel" 

How receive a tow when alongside or astern of a vessel? 

If alongside, take the tow-line from as far forward as 
possible, but if astern, take a short tow. Never secure the 
tow-line in the boat, but toggle it, or make it fast, so that 
it can be slipped quickly, should it become necessary. Do 
not allow other boats to hang on to you when being towed, 
the extra strain will endanger your stem or stern. 

When being towed alongside, the tow-line is generally 
taken around the forward thwart, and the bight thrown 
through the forward rowlock (on the side near the ship), 
this insures towing clear, or it is sometimes taken from the 
bolt in the stem, through the forward rowlock. 

In a strong tideway, how assist a boat to make the ship ? 

Make fast a s^ood sized breaker or a couple of gratings 
(should one not be heavy enough), to a line, and float it 



I32 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

down to the boat ; the end being made fast to the boat, 
man the line, and walk her up. 

How are boats kept clear of the ship when riding astern ? 

Make fast a bucket or grating to a line, and tow it astern 
of the boat. This is very often necessary at the change of 
tide, when the ship is wind-rode or held by an under cur- 
rent ; the boat being so much lighter, naturally feels the 
effects of the surface current before the vessel, and so is fre- 
quently seen riding in an entirely opposite direction. 

When a number of boats are made fast astern, what is 
the dange? to a boat shoving off from the stem ladder ? 

Unless she is veered astern of all the other boats, she 
would probably get athwart hawse of some of them. 

What precautions should be taken in leaving a ship in 
thick or threatening weather ? 

Have a compass in the boat ; before shoving off, if clear 
enough, take a bearing of the place you are going to. If not 
clear enough, take a bearing from the vessel's position on 
the chart, and compare the boat compass with the standard 
compass on deck. The opposite of this bearing will be the 
course back to the ship. 

Take a bearing of your own ship on losing sight of her 
at night or in a fog. 

What is bailing a boat ? 

Dipping the water out. 

What is sculling ? 

Propelling the boat with a single oar rigged over the 
stern. 

How are the crew notified to hook their boat on for hoist- 
ing?' 

By the bugle call, and also by the pipe and passing the 
word , for example ; First cutters, hook your boat on ! 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. T33 

Illicit is done at that order ? 

The crew are to move immediately on the run. Three or 
four (who have been detailed), go into the boat, drop (or 
haul) her under the proper davits, and hook the falls. The 
rest of the crew lead the falls out ready for hoisting, the 
men are sent aft, the falls manned, and when all ready, Set 
taut ! hoist away ! the boat is walked up to the davits. 

When hoisting a boat, avoid all stamping, whistling, sing- 
ing out, or any unnecessary noise. 

See the plug out, and the falls hauled aft and coiled 
down neatly. 

When lying in a port where the water is at all fouled by 
sewage matter, or by anything tending to discolor the paint 
on the outside of the boat, boat-keepers should clean the 
boat as soon as she is up to the davits. 

How are boats secured for sea ? 

The davits are rigged in, stoppers passed, the gripes 
passed and set up. Spars, oars, boat-hooks, etc., etc., 
securely stopped and stowed in the boat, the hauling part 
of the falls are taken in and coiled down neatly in the 
bow and stern of the boat, unship the rudder of all but 
life boats, put on the boat covers (if ordered). The boat 
sails are usually unbent and sent below, the masts being 
stowed either in their own boat or on the booms.* Chafing 
mats are put on the boats and davits in the wake of the 
rigging, such as main sheet, etc., etc. 
What are g?'ipes ? 

Broad bands made of sword mat, etc. They are fitted 
with thimbles and laniards and are passed around the body 
of the boat, when hoisted, then set up to the chains or 
rigging, binding the boat, to prevent swinging out and in. 

How are life boats secured ? 

*This seems to be the general custom, but properly, boat sails should 
be bent and kept stowed in the boats, at sea. 



134 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

When at sea, they are secured so that they can be cast 
adrift without a moment's delay. A line is kept rigged 
from the boat's bow, next to the ship's side, leading 
well forward. The plug kept in, the falls clear for running 
at all times. The gripes are fitted with toggles or slip- 
hooks, so that they will be perfectly secure, and still can 
be cast adrift in a moment. The breaker is kept filled with 
fresh water, a bag of bread is stowed in the boat, a boat 
compass kept at hand, and everything must be so arranged 
that the boat can be cleared and lowered in a moment. 
Life lines should be secured to the davit spans and guys, 
and be Ions: enough to reach the water. The oars and 
fittings must be complete, and a metal crotch, with a steer- 
ing oar, is usually secured to the stern of the boat. The 
life boat (at sea) has a full crew, in each watch, of picked 
men. After a rain the plug should be taken out of a life 
boat, and replaced as soon as the water has run out; the 
sails should be well dried. 

When is a steering oar used ? 

When a boat is pulling, head to wind and heavy sea; 
the rudder will then be of no use, from the stern being 
out of water part of the time, and from the boat having 
little headway. 

In beaching a boat, through a heavy sea, why back the 
boat in ? 

The bows must be pointed out to take the force of the 
sea. The boat will rise much better at the bows, than she 
would at the stern, were she running, bows on, to the 
beach. 

Why should not the stern of a boat rise equally as well to 
the sea, as the bows ? 

A sea striking a boat in the bows meets the body of the 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 35 

boat, lifts it up, and being split by the bow, passes under- 
neath. But on striking the stern, it finds the upright part 
of the run, and having nothing to take hold of to lift the 
boat with, it must pass over the stern and into the boat. 

Why should you pull out to meet a wave as it approaches ? 

If in backing towards the shore, and the boat is allowed 
to have much sternboard when the waves overtake her, the 
sea will raise the bows, and, in striking that end of the 
boat first, give it more way than the stern, which is much 
below it ; therefore, the boat must either run her stern 
under or broach to and capsize. 

GENERAL REMARKS. 

Applies to boats under sail and oars. 

Keep clear of a ship with sternboard on. Should a 
boat get under a vessel's bow, she will be in danger of 
being cut down by the stem or dolphin striker. 

Do not stand up in a boat, or sit on the gunwale. Never 
have arms hanging over the gunwale, nor the hands in the 
water alongside. 

Trim the boat if under oars, that is, keep her on an 
even keel, with the weights amidships. 

If in charge, remember that a loaded boat will hold 
her way longer than when light. 

Always keep a boat " bows on " to a heavy sea. 

Breakers of water, will make a safer ballast, than iron or 
sand. 

If in charge, carrying stores, luggage, etc., etc., do not 
overload the boat. Keep the weights amidships. 

If after sand, remember that wet sand is heavier than 
when dry. Be careful with the oars, the blades are easily 
ruined by throwing them on the stones, and treading on 



136 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

them. Have the necessary number of shovels, buckets 
and tarpaulins in the boat before leaving the ship. 

Stowing casks in a boat, keep them bung up, and leave 
plenty of space aft for bailing the boat out. 

Have tarpaulins for covering such stores, as may be 
injured by salt water. 

When loading, make large allowance for the roughness of 
water you may encounter. 

If steering a boat, under oars, going alongside a vessel, 
make allowance for the tide, sea, etc., etc., and strive to 
bring your boat alongside the gangway, gradually or easily, 
and not with a rush and a bang. If steering a barge or 
gig, make a long sweep; an old rule was to turn when you 
could see the rudder-chains. 

If passing under a low bridge, or under a weight that 
cannot be moved, should it require but a few inches to 
clear the gunwale, take out the plug and sink the boat the 
required distance, provided, of course, you are not loaded 
with stores that the water will ruin. 

When getting into a boat, never step on the gunwale, 
but step in amidships. 

Never smoke in a boat. 

Never hail the shore, a ship, nor another boat in passing. 

Never leave a boat without permission. 

If sent in charge of a boat on duty to another vessel, 
report to the officer-of-the-deck on arriving ; and on receiv- 
ing permission, return to your boat and shove off at once, 
being careful to clearly understand the message to be con- 
veyed, and the answer returned. 

When boarding a vessel at sea, always board to leeward, 
and take a line of sufficient length to allow the boat to rise 
and fall with the sea. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 137 

DUTIES OF BOAT KEEPERS. 

A boat keeper is in charge of, and respo?isible for the boat 
in the absence of the coxswain and crew. After the boat 
is lowered he is to see everything in order, bright work 
cleaned, cushions out, and covers on, colors ready for 
shipping, fresh water in the breaker, (this should be at- 
tended to before lowering the boat,) oars and stretchers in 
place. In fact, see the boat in perfect order for leaving the 
ship. 

Follow the movements of the ship as regards spreading 
and furling awnings. He is never to sleep, read or lounge 
around in his boat; he is there on duty and must keep a 
bright lookout, see that his boat suffers no injury, and that 
passing officers are properly saluted. 

When other boats are approaching or leaving the ship, 
he should go to the bow of his boat and haul her up out 
of the way. When his boat is called away, he must haul 
up to the boom, or to the stern ladder if astern, so the 
crew can man her. 

In case the boat is to remain down during the night, the 
cars, spars, etc., etc., should be properly secured so they 
cannot roll around and disturb the people on board. 

BOATS UNDER SAIL. 

How are the masts stowed in the boat ? 

On top of the fore-and-aft thwart, the heel of the fore- 
mast stowing forward, and the heel of the mainmast stow- 
ing aft. 

WHiat is the regulation rig for boats in the navy ? 

The sliding-gunter, and sloop rig. 

WJiat is the sliding-gunter rig ? 

The masts consist of two sections nearly equal in length, 



I38 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

called the lower-mast and topmast. The latter slides upon 
the former, and is held in position by means of two iron 
tings, which are secured to the topmast, one at its heel and 
the other high enough above it, to secure sufficient support 
for the topmast when the sail is set. 

How is the sail bent ? 

It is bent to the topmast and laced to the lower-mast, in 
order to allow the topmast to travel freely. With this ar- 
rangement the spread of sail may be quickly reduced by 
lowering the topmast. Cutters have two of these sails and 
a jib, whale-boats have two sails and no jib, sailing launches 
are usually sloop-rigged, having one mast upon which are 
set a jib, mainsail, and gaff topsail. Dingies have a sail 
on one mast, no jib. 

IVJiat other rig is used for ships" boats ? 

The lug rig is the most used, it consists of two lug 
sails, the forward (or foresail) being the larger, and so cut 
that the forward part of the sail acts as a jib. 

How make sail in a boat ? 

If under oars, lay in the oars, see everything clear, hal- 
liards and brails rove off, sheets clear, etc., etc. Unship 
the flagstaff if shipped, and put the shutters in the row- 
locks. Now step the masts together ; set up the shrouds on 
each side, and ship the bowsprit. The jib tack having been 
previously rove through the hole in the outer end 'of bow- 
sprit, take it through the thumb-cleat on the bow and set 
it taut ; see the breaker and other movable articles well 
secured. When all ready "hoist away ! " and make sail. 

If the boat is head to wind, hoist the jib, and as she 
pays oft from the wind on the proper tack, the halliards 
having been manned, hoist away the topmasts, and then 
haul aft the fore and main sheets (care being taken to have 
the topmasts well up). 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 1 39 

If alongside a ship and not head to wind, pull well clear 
of the ship before making sail. 

After making sail, see the halliards are coiled down clear 
for running, and do not belay the sheets, but take a cleat 
turn around a cleat, and keep them in hand, so that they 
can be eased off quickly. 

How douse sail and get under oars ? 

See the brails, halliards, etc., clear for running. When all 
ready, "brail up!" lower away together ! (the topmasts), 
unship the bowsprit. Take several turns with the brails 
around the sails and spars, making everything as snug as 
possible. Gome up the shrouds, and when ready, unstep 
and lower the ?nasts together. The foremast is lifted by the 
men forward, and the head received by the men aft; the 
mainmast being lifted by the men aft and the head received 
by the men forward. The bowsprit and jib are stowed on 
top of the fore and mainmast ; the whole being secured on 
top of the fore-and-aft thwart; take out the shutters, the 
men take their proper thwarts and stand by to up oars ; if 
proper, ship the colors. Should the boat commence 
drifting to any extent before the masts are down, get out 
a couple of oars on each side, amidships, to keep her in 
position. 

When making or taking in sail, endeavor to keep well 
down in the boat. 

Wliat is tacking and wearing ? 

Tacking a boat, is putting the helm down and luffing 
into the wind, finally bringing the wind on the other bow. 
Wearing a boat, is putting the helm up and running off 
from the wind, and finally bringing it on the other bow. 

What is luffing ? Bearing up ? 

Luffing, is putting the helm down and throwing the boat 



I 40 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

sufficiently into the wind to shake the sails. Bearing up, 
is putting the helm up and running off from the wind. 

Explain how to tack a boat ? 

The order is given, Ready about ! When all ready, the 
helm is eased down, main boom hauled gradually amidships, 
and as the jib is about to lift, ease off the jib sheet. When 
nearly head to wind the jib may be borne out to leeward, 
and aback, to assist in sending the boat's head around, but 
with a smart-working boat this will not be necessary. When 
the wind is right ahead, shift over ! The fore and 
main sheets are shifted over, the fore sheet being hauled 
aft when the wind is a little on, what will be, the 
weather bow; the main sheet is eased well off. As soon as 
the foresail is full, draw jib ! the jib and main sheets are 
then hauled aft. 

When tacking, boats are frequently sluggish in paying 
off from the wind with the jib sheet to windward, in con- 
sequence of the great pressure on the lee bow from leeway, 
the boat having little or no headway. The quickest way 
to get her to her course is to draw the jib, and slack off 
the main sheet ; this will give headway, and prevents her 
stern from being driven to leeward, and consequently her 
bow falls off. 

In tacking, supposing a boat gets stemboard, how do you 
make her bow pay off the right way ? 

The helm is shifted for sternboard, but little dependence, 
however, can be placed on that method. Send all hands 
aft to the old weather quarter; the boat is then sure to pay 
off the right way, in consequence of the pressure of the 
water being more on the quarter well down in the water, 
than on the other quarter, and also her bow, being higher 
than the stern, catches the wind better. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 141 

The usual practice is to bear out the mainsail, but it sel- 
dom has the desired effect, in consequence of the wind in 
the sail depressing the wrong quarter. For example : the 
wind is ahead and it is desired to have the bow pay off to 
starboard. If the mainsail is borne out on the starboard 
quarter in the hope of sending her stern to port, it will 
likely have the opposite effect, as it will at once depress 
the port quarter, which then being the deeper, the water 
will act against it more than against the other quarter, and 
cause the stern to turn to starboard, even against the main- 
sail. The more she turns the more the mainsail will 
depress the port quarter and side of the boat ; but if the 
men are sent to the starboard quarter and side of the boat, 
the stern is at once forced to port, and the bow to starboard, 
as desired. 

Explain hozv to wear a boat ? 

Put the helm up and ease off the after sheets ; when the 
wind is well aft " shift over ! " the sheets, taking in the 
slack quickly as the sails gybe (swing over). il Ease off 
the head sheets ! " until the boat is close to the wind, then 
"trim aft!" everything. If blowing fresh, the sails 
should be brailed up before gybing. In fact, the better prac- 
tice is to brail up the mainsail just after putting the helm up. 

How is weather and lee helm produced and avoided ? 

Weather helm is produced by trimming a boat by the 
head ; lee helm, by trimming a boat by the stern ; or, send- 
ing the men aft raises the bow, which being higher than 
the stern, the wind has more effect on it, and the tendency 
is to cause the bow to fall to the leeward. The reverse 
applies to sending the men forward. 

If the sails are up taut, and well trimmed, by a proper 
distribution of the weights, the helm can be brought amid- 



142 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

ships ; dragging the rudder across the stern, deadens the 
boat's headway, therefore try and keep the helm amidships. 

How do you reef a boafs sail ? 

Slack down the halliards, secure the forward eyelet of 
the reef-band well down, haul the foot of the sail taut 
along the boat and tie the reef points together with a reef- 
knot, being careful to have the slack sail as neatly rolled 
up as is possible, avoiding all dogs' ears (bights of sail 
hanging down near the reef earings). The reef being in, 
take a turn with the sheet, mind the helm, hoist the sail, 
trim aft. 

How shake out a reef ? 

Ease the halliards and sheets, untie the reef points, cast 
off the eyelet lashings, and hoist away the halliards, trim 
aft the sheets. 

What is done when hoisting the jib tajitup? 

Slack the fore sheets; the jib acts as a stay for the fore- 
mast, and the fore sheet pulls the head of the mast aft. 
Therefore, the sheet should be slacked to allow the mast 
head to go forward while the jib is being hoisted, then haul 
aft again. 

Why is it dangerous to use lee oars wheit under sail ? 

In a squall, if the oars catch the water, the gunwale 
might be split, the oars broken, or the boat capsized. 

If on the wind and the halliards require a pull, always 
ease the sheets. 

What is meant by " wing and wing?" 

In running before the wind the main sheet should be 
eased way off, the boom going out on the side that will be 
the lee side when the boat is brought " on the wind;" the 
foresail being boomed out by a boat hook on the opposite side. 

Sailing on the wind and struck by a squall ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 1 43 

If the squall be light, ease off the fore and jib sheets, and 
luff her. If a heavy squall, let fly the head sheets, hard 
down with the helm, lower and brail up the sails. 

Sailing with the wind abeam and struck by a squall ? 

Let fly all sheets, and if necessary, brail up and lower 
the sails. 

What precautions are taken when running ? 

Running dead before the wind is dangerous ; particularly 
in a seaway; better bring the wind a little on either quarter; 
if in a heavy sea, sails or spars towed astern diminish the 
risk of being pooped. Remember before rounding to 
(bringing by or on the wind), that a boat cannot carry the 
same sail on a wind that she can before it, and reduce sail 
accordingly. 

If caught in a gale and you cannot rtin ? 

Lash the spars, oars, and other gear together ; make a 
span and secure it to the spars, bend a line to the span, 
get the spars overboard, and with as much line out as 
possible, ride to leeward of them. 

How bring a boat alongside under sail ? 

A general rule is to keep the main yard end on, but 
everything will depend on the judgment of the coxswain, 
particularly in a tide or seaway, and whether a boat is 
light or ladened. In coming alongside, see the brails, 
halliards and everything clear to douse sail before reaching 
the gangway. When way e?iough, out fenders ' brail 
up! lower away! rig in the bowsprit! bowmen and 
stroke oarsmen stand by with the boat-hooks. Take out 
the shutters; if so ordered, pass the brails, etc., around the 
sails and spars, unstep the masts together, make the sails 
up neatly, and put on the covers. If the boat is to be 
hoisted, get everything ready. 



144 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

Should a vessel be "hove to," do not approach her if she 
has sternboard ; wait until she gathers headway, douse sail 
and unstep the masts before going alongside, so as to be 
in no danger from her boats and guns. 

Which is safer to enter broken water, under oars or sail? 

Under oars, then the boat can be turned in any direc- 
tion. Sails would be liable to get aback or becalmed. 

REMARKS ON BOATS UNDER SAIL. 

If sailing a boat, have the sails properly set ; otherwise, 
she will be both unsightly and unmanageable. 

Remember that the rigging helps the masts to support the 
sails, not vice versa, therefore, never set up the lee rigging 
too taut, or the mast head will be wrung off when you go 
about. 

As a general rule, reef the moment a boat begins to take 
in water. 

Get the wind out of a sail if you want to manage it. 

Never sit nor lounge on the gunwale, stand on the 
thwarts, nor have arms nor hands hanging over the side, 
nor belay the sheets, nor let go the helm. 

Keep the men out of the bows, and make them sit low 
down. 

Keep all gear clear for running, ready to shorten sail at 
a moment's notice. This caution applies not only to boats 
on the wind, but to boats before the wind, for if running 
before a fresh breeze and "brought by the lee" you are 
almost certain to capsize if the sheets and halliards are not 
well in hand. 

Remember there is always an eddy wind under the stern 
of vessels lying head to wind; frequently boats passing 
under the stern of large vessels are suddenly taken aback; 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 45 

in such cases be careful to have all hands amidships, par- 
ticulary if in a fresh breeze, and the crew have been up to 
windward. 

Never climb the mast of a boat ; if anything is to be done 
aloft, unstep the mast. Many boats have been upset from 
neglect of this rule. 

In tacking, do not put the helm down suddenly, but ease 
it down. Putting the rudder right across the stern deadens 
a boat's headway ; about three-quarters, either way, will an- 
swer every purpose. 

Keep the boat bows on to a heavy sea. 

If in charge of a boat, under sail, and the wind fails, 
douse sail at once, and get out oars; do not drift around 
waiting for a breeze. 

If a boat is swamped, all the crew should remain by 
her, as the boat will assist those who cannot swim. 

If on a wind, and there is any doubt about weathering 
a ship or any danger, "go about." Never luff and shake 
the sails, as the boat losing all way through the water, will 
become unmanageable, and drift on to the danger you wish 
to avoid. 

If out of water, twice a day dip your clothes overboard 
and put them on wet. 

HAULING BOATS UP ON A BEACH. 

A small boat can be hauled on the beach by placing 
stretchers under the keel.* Man both sides of the boat, 
and run her up. For a heavy boat, use tackles. 
To haul tip a cutter or launch. 

Bury your anchor in the sand, keeping a man on it to 
hold it down; hook one block of a tackle to the anchor, the 

7 * Rollers are better. 



140 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANTS 



■»'* 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 1 47 

other block hook to a line passed around the boat close to 
the keel, hanging the line to prevent its getting under the 
keel. The tackle is hooked to the forward bight of the 
line 



CHAPTER VII. 



BLOCKS, BLOCK STRAPS, TACKLES, ROPE OR CORDAGE. 

What is a block ? 

A fiat, oval piece of wood, containing one or more 
sheaves. 

What are blocks usually made of? 
Ash, elm, iron and composition. 
How many parts to a block? 

Four. The shell, or outside ; the sheave or wheel over 
which the rope passes, the pin or 
axle on which the sheave turns, 
and the strap -which encloses the 
whole, resting in the scores. 
How many kinds of blocks ? 
Two. The made block, and 
the morticed black. These in ' 
turn are divided into common and patent blocks. 
What is the made block ? 

One in which the shell consists of two or more pieces 
pinned together, to make up the block. 
WJiat is a morticed block ? 

The shell is composed of but one piece of 
wood, morticed (or hollowed) out to receive the 
sheave. 

What is a common block ? 

One in which the hole in the sheave is lined 
morticed (or bouched) with a composition of copper. 
WJiat is a patent block ? 
(148) 





BLOCK. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 149 

The hole in the sheave is bouched, and the bouching 
contains friction rollers. Used only when blocks are not 
subject to a great strain. 

What is boicching ? 

A metal lining, to protect any part from chafe and wear. 

What are the cheeks of a block ? 

The sides of the shell. 

WJiat is the swallow ? 

The hole through which the rope reeves. 

What are the " scores ? ' ' 

The notches cut on the sides and one end of a block, 
to allow^ the strap to fit in. There are single and double 
scores. 

What are straps made of ? 

Rope and iron. 

What is attached to the strap ? 

The thimble and hook. 

What is the breech (or bottom) of a block ? 

The end farthest from the hook. 

How do you tell the top from the bottom or breech ? 

The top is the end which has no score on top, and where 
the greatest space is between the sheave and the shell ; the 
bottom is the other end. 

What is the " becket ?" 

The small grommet spliced in the strap of a block, to 
which the standing part of the fall is sometimes made fast ; 
it fits in the score, in the bottom, of the block. 

How are blocks classed ? 

According to the number of sheaves ; for example; sin- 
gle, double, treble (or three-fold), and four-fold blocks. 

How are blocks measured ? 

By the length of the shell. 



l$D YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

How do the sizes vary ? 

From about 4 to 24 inches. 

What is included under the general term of blocks ? 

Hearts, dead eyes — bull's eyes, wooden thimbles, fairlead- 
ers, euphroes (for awnings), rollers, chocks, etc. , etc. These, 
however, are measured by their diameter. 

How are blocks named ? 

They take their names from the purposes for which they 
are used, from their form, or from the position they occupy. 

What are bee blocks, or bees ? 

Thick pieces of oak, bolted to the sides of the bowsprit, 
having heavy metal sheaves ; the fore-topmast stays reeve 
through them. 

WJiat is a cat block ? 

A heavy, three-fold, iron strapped block, a large hook 
being fitted to the strap by a link. Used in catting the 
anchor. 

What is a cheek block ? 

A block having but one cheek. It is bolted to a mast or 
gaff, and they form the other cheek. Used on gaffs for 
brails, etc., etc. 

What is a clump block ? 

A short, thick, single block, sometimes with a metal 
sheave ; for example, the fore and main tack and sheet blocks. 

WJiat is a clew garnet block ? 

A large, single, iron strapped block under the slings of 
the lower yards ; it acts as a leader for the clew garnet. 
This name is also given to the block at the clews of the sails, 
through which the clew garnet reeves. 

What is a clewline block ? 

The block at the clews of the topsail through which the 
clewline reeves. 




YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 151 

What is a dasher block ? 

A small block at the end of the spanker gaff, for the en- 
sign halliards to reeve through. 

What is a euphroe ? 

A long piece of wood, with a number of holes in it, 
through which the crow-foot (for the awning) is rove. 

What is a fiddle block? 

A block having two sheaves, one above the 
other, the lower sheave being the smaller; 
used for burtons, yard tackles, etc., etc. 

WJiat is a fly block ? 

A double block, used as the upper block 
of topsail halliards. It hooks into the thim- 
ble of the topsail tye. 

What is a gin block ? fiddle block. 

A metal block with composition sheaves, used at the top- 
mast head for the topsail tyes to reeve through. The small 
metal blocks used aloft for the top gallant and royal braces, 
buntlines, etc., etc., are also called gin blocks. 

What is a girtline block ? 

A single block, through which girtlines and single whips 
reeve. 

What are hanging blocks ? 

Blocks hanging at the mast heads for the halliards of jibs 
and staysails to reeve through; they are single, iron bound, 
and fitted with friction rollers. 

What are jack blocks ? 

Blocks under the eyes of the topgallant and royal rig- 
ging, to reeve the topgallant and royal yard ropes through. 
They are convenient in sending up and down light masts, 
as it does away with the necessity of unreeving the yard 
ropes. 



152 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

What is a jeer block ? 

A large treble or four-fold block through which the " jeer 
falls" are rove* in sending up and down lower yards. 

What is a jewel block ? 

A single block at the ends of the topsail and topgallant 
yards, through which the topmast and topgallant studding 
sail halliards reeve. 

What are quarter blocks ? 

Strong, iron strapped blocks under the quarters of the 
yards. On the topsail and topgallant yards they are double, 
to give lead to the sheet of the sail above and the clew- 
line of the sail below the yards — on the lower yards they 
are single for the topsail sheet ; on the royal yards they are 
single for the royal clewline ; on the light yards they are 
fitted with "sister hooks" so as to be easily detached. 
They are sometimes treble under topsail^ yards for the reef 
tackle to reeve through. 

What is a shoe block ? 
A single piece of wood with 
the sheaves placed at right angles 
to each other. They are used 
shoe block. f or b un tline blocks and harbor 

clothes-lines. 

What is a sister block ? 

A double block with one sheave above the 
other. The shell is in one piece, thick and 
heavy; between the sheaves is a score for a mid- 
dle seizing, and on the sides a score for the top- 
mast shrouds. The block is seized between the 
two forward shrouds of the topmast rigging; the 
topsail lift and sometimes the reef tackle reeve 
through it. It is made of lignum vitas, and 
has metal sheaves. 




YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



*~53 




What is a secret block ? 

A block open only at two holes, which are just large 

enough to allow the 
rope, which is in- 
tended to reeve, to 
pass through. It is 
so constructed to 
prevent small gear 
from getting into the 
swallow. It is used 

SECRET BLOCK. r 1 v 1 

for clew-lines, clew- 
jiggers, reef tackles, etc., etc. The shell is made of lignum 
vitae. 

IVhat is a snatch block ? 

A single block, iron strapped, swivel hooks. The shell 
has an opening at the breech that will admit the bight of a 
rope, doing away with the necessity of first reeving the 
end through. This opening can be closed by an iron 
clasp or clamp — much time being gained in leading such 
ropes as yard ropes, mast ropes, boat falls, etc., etc. 
What is a telegraph block ? 

A pyramid of blocks, with small brass 
sheaves ; used for making telegraphic signals, 
there being a sheave for the halliards bent to 
each separate flag used. 
What is a top block ? 

A heavy, single, iron strapped block, 
hooked to the lower cap, through which the 
top pendant reeves in sending up or down 
topmasts. 

What is a nib block ? 

A metal block having a rigid hook which 
causes the block to stand square. 
7* 




J 54 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



What are span blocks ? 

Blocks seized into each bight of a strap that leads across 
a cap or mast-head, so as to hang down on either side. 

What is a tye block ? 

A large, single, iron-bound block on the slings of a top- 
sail yard, for topsail tyes to reeve through. With wire tyes 
iron gin blocks are used. 

What is a tail block ? 




Tail Block. 

A block strapped with a long rope called a tail, used as 
a leading or whip block. 

What is a viol block ? 

A large single block, with a swallow large enough to 
take a small hawser. 

Strapping Blocks. 

How is the size of a strap determined ? 

By the purpose for which the block is to be 
used. The general rule is that the circumfer- 
ence of the strap should be one-third the length 
of the block. 

Wliat should be done with the rope before mak- 
ing a strap ? 

It should be well stretched. 

What is the length of a common strap ? 

About once and a half around the block; 

Common tn * s wil1 allow end for tlie s P lice - 
Strap. How is a strap passed before splicing ? 




YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 55 

Through the eye of the hook, around the thimble, then 
fit the strap to the block, and splice the ends. 

WJiere should the seizing of the strap be put on ? 

Between the thimble and the top of the block. 

WJiere does the splice go ? 

At the breech of the block. 

How are straps preserved from chafe ? 

They are wormed, parcelled, and covered with leather 
or canvas, which is sewed on. 

How are blocks measured for straps ? 

Under 12 inches in length they should be measured with 
a piece of spun yarn taken around the block in the score. 
Above twelve inches, measure - in the same way, but use, 
instead of spun yarn, a piece of small stuff, as 6, 9, 12, 15 
thread stuff, increasing with the size of the block. 

What straps are longer than the common strap ? 

Straps of blocks intended for special uses ; for example, 
the straps of fore and main lift blocks, if fitted with rope, 
are made long enough to go once around the yard. Blocks 
used for heavy purchases are double strapped — that is, a sin- 
gle strap doubled ; and large blocks for heavy work, such 
as the " main purchase blocks" have double straps, with 
eyes for toggling. 

Wliat other straps in use ? 

The gronwiet strap, which is a strap made of a grommet, 
the end being rove through the eye in the hook before the 
grommet is made ; the single strap, with lashing eyes 
(which is used instead of the hook and thimble), the strap 
and pendant, etc., etc. 



156 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




MEASUREMENTS OF STRAPS FOR CUTTING AND FITTING. 

' ' Single block with lashing eyes. ' ' 
Twice the round of the block, and 
once the round of the rope ; this 
will give the length to cut the strap. 
Marry the rope once and a half the 
lound of the block, and once the 
lound of the rope. 

' ' Single block with hook and thim- 
ble." 

Measure twice the round of the 
block, and once the round of the 
rope, for length. Marry the strap Lashing Eyes. 

once the round of the block, the 
rope, and the thimble. 

1 ' Single- block with double 
scores. ' ' 

The length for a double strap 

passing around a yard and the 

bights, lashing on top of the 

yard. Measure twice and a 

half the round of the block, 

twice the round of the yard, 

and once and a half the roun I 

of the rope. Marry the strap 

at twice the round of the yard 

and block, and once the round 

of the rope. 

"Double block with hook and thimble " 

Take twice the round of the block for the length of strap. 

Marry it once the round of the block, once the round of 

the thimble, and two-thirds the round of the rope. 




Double Strap, with Lashing 
Eyes. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



iS7 



"Brace blocks for lower yards. ' ' 

They are fitted with a double strap. Measure twice the 
round of the block, twice the round of the thimble, and 
three times the round of the rope ; allow sufficient end to 
splice. 

What is the general size of the ropes to reeve in blocks ? 

An ordinary block : take one-third ( J^) its length for the 
size of the rope to reeve ; for example ; a nine-inch block 
will reeve a three-inch rope. 




Double strap and thimble. 





Two single straps with 
lashing eyes. 




Two single straps with thimble. Strap and pendant. 



'58 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



How measure for a clump block ? 
Take one-half (£) its length. 
For a very thin block ? 
Take \ its length. 
For a fiddle block ? 
Take \ its length. 

" TACKLES.' ' 

What is a tackle ? 

A combination of ropes and blocks, used as a power to 
move or hoist heavy weights. 

What is the simplest kind of a tackle ? 

A single whip ; it is a rope rove through 
a stationary block. 

What block of a tackle should be hooked to 
the weight to be moved ? 

If possible, the block which contains the 
greatest number of parts of the rope. 

Why ? 

Because each part of a rope that is ap- 
plied to a weight will increase the power to 
move it ; for example ; if a tackle having a 
block with two sheaves is applied, the power 
is just twice as great as if the block had 
but one sheave, etc., etc. 

WJiat is meant by the friction of a tackle ? 

The amount of power that is lost, by the resistance of the 
rope or fall in passing over the sheave of the block. 

How many principal tackles or purchases in general use ? 

Five principal ones : the runner, gun-tackle purchase, 
luff tackle, two-fold purchase, and three-fold purchase. All 
other purchases are combinations or modifications of these, 




*oe^K v*tu>* * %.4jflriAifA 



is 



uid me> nit tictt uamcs (torn t/ie porpost lui ^ftXt* if 
the places where they are used. 

WJiat is a runner ? 

A single movable block and fall ; the fall has a thimble 
spliced in the end for hooking a purchase to. 

What is a gun-tackle purchase ? 

Two single blocks, the standing part of the fall being 
made fast to the block the hauling part leads from. . 



4 



Gun- Tackle Two-Fold Runner, Luff Tackle 

Purchase. Purchase. Purchase. 

What is a luff tackle ? 

A double and single block, the standing part of the fall 
being made fast to the single block. 



l6o YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

What is a two-fold purchase ? 

Two double blocks, the standing part of the fall being 
made fast to the same block the hauling part comes from, 
but is made fast to the opposite side of the block (from the 
hauling part) to keep it from canting. 

What is a three-fold purchase ? 

Two treble blocks, the standing part of the fall being 
made fast to the same block the hauling part comes from, 
but on the opposite side of the block (from the hauling 
part.) 

What is a boom, or in-and-out jigger ? 

Usually a double and single block, used to rig studding- 
sail booms in and out. 

What is a boom tackle ? 

A double purchase used on fore-and-aft vessels, to guy 
the main boom out over the quarter. 

What is a deck tackle ? 

A heavy double purchase, used for heavy work around 
deck, such as hauling in chain, etc., etc. 

What is a fish tackle ? 

A heavy double purchase, used on the fish boom or davit 
for fishing the anchor. 

What is a fore-and-aft tackle ? 

A tackle used in stretching the back bone of an awning. 
Any tackle is a fore-and-aft tackle, if used in a direction 
with the length of a vessel (or fore-and-aft). 

What is a thwart-ship tackle ? 

A tackle used across, or at right angles to the length of a 
vessel. 

What is a Griolet purchase ? 

A purchase used for dismounting guns on a covered deck. 
It is in two parts — the muzzle purchase and the breech pur- 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. l6l 

chase. The lower block of the muzzle purchase is a short, 
cylindrical block of wood, one end of which fits in the 
muzzle of the gun, while sheaves are placed in the outer 
end. The lower block of the breech purchase is fitted with 
a shackle, to shackle in the jaws of the cascable of the gun. 
The upper blocks of both purchases are three-fold iron 
blocks. 

WJiat is a hatch tackle ? 

A small purchase, used to hoist articles up, and lower 
them down, through the hatches. 

What are ' 'jeers " or ' ' jeer falls ?' ' 

A large. heavy purchase, used for sending up and down 
lower yards. They are usually composed of large treble 
blocks. 

. What is a jigger ? 

A small luff. It is very useful around decks ; 
sometimes the double block is strapped with tails, 
to clap on sheets, etc., etc. 
What is a rigging luff ? 

A tackle composed of two single blocks, used 
in setting up rigging. 
What is a stay tackle ? 

O e composed of two double blocks, used in 
setting up stays. 

What is a pendant tackle ? 

Two double blocks. It is hooked to the lower 
mast-head pendants, and is used when setting up 
rigging, steadying masts, etc., etc. 
WJiat is a reef tackle ? 

A tackle used to haul the leeches of a sail up 
to the yard arms, when reefing. 
Jigger. what are relieving tackles ? 



1 6 2 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Tackles hooked to the tiller, for the purpose of relieving 
the strain on the tiller ropes in heavy weather. In cases the 
tiller ropes carry away the relieving tackles would be used 
to steer the vessel. They have a double and single block. 

WJiat is a rudder tackle ? 

A tackle hooked to the rudder chains or pendants. To 
steer the vessel in case of accident to the rudder head or 
helm. 

What is a rolling tackle ? 

A tackle hooked to the quarter of a yard, in order to 
relieve the strain on the truss or parrel, when the ship is 
rolling heavily. 

What is a sail tackle ? 

A purchase used to hoist a topsail to the yard, when bend- 
ing. A small tail-block is bent to the lower block of the 
purchase, and it acts as a leader for the hauling part, to guy 
the sail clear of the top and yard when going aloft. Top 
burtons are generally used for sail tackles. 

WJiat is a side tackle ? 

A purchase used to run out and train a broadside gun ; 
it consists of two double composition blocks. 

What is an in-tackle ? 

A tackle hooked to the rear of a gun carriage and to an eye 
bolt amidships in the deck ; used to run the gun in, and to 
prevent its running out while being loaded. (Formerly 
called train tackle.) 

What is a stay tackle ? 

A heavy double purchase which is hooked to the "triatic- 
stay" when hoisting out boats; applied also to any tackle 
hung from a stay when hoisting anything through the 
hatches. 

What is a yard tackle ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. ^6$ 

A heavy tackle hooked or made fast to the lower yard 
arm, used to hoist out boats and other heavy weights. The 
upper block is usually fitted with a strap to go around the 
yard. 




Yard Tackle. Single Spanish Burton. 

WJiat is a water whip ? 

A tackle used at the yard arms to hoist in stores, etc., etc. 

Uliat is a single Spanish burton ? 



164 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



It has two single blocks ; the hauling and standing parts 
of the fall come from the lower or movable block. The 
hook (which connects the burton with the weight to be 
moved) is fastened to the bight of the fall between the two 
blocks. It is used in the merchant service when handling 
cargo, etc. 

What is a double Spanish burton ? 
It has one double and two single 
blocks. The standing part of the fall 
is made fast to one single block, then 
rove through the double block (which 
is fixed) ; the bight is then seized to the 
strap of the lower block (to which the 
weight to be lifted is hooked) ; the end 
of the fall is then rove up through the 
double block, down_ through the lower 
block, and then through the block the 
standing part is made fast to. With 
this arrangement the lifting power is five 
times greater than the power applied. 
What is a stock-and-bill tackle ? 
A heavy tackle used in handling an- 
chors at the bow. 
What is a top burton ? 

A tackle used in the top ; it is kept hooked to the top 
pendants. The fall should be long enough for the lower 
block and end of the fall to reach the water, with end 
enough to haul on. It is a luff tackle, but instead of the 
double block, a fiddle block is used, on account of the nar- 
row space between the rigging and the mast head. 
What is a top tackle ? 
A heavy double purchase used in sending topmasts up and 




Double Spanish 
Burton. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



down ; it is hooked into a thimble in the end of the top 
pendant (pendant tackles are used). 

What is a watch tackle ? 

A common luff purchase or jigger. 

WJiat a?'e tricing lines ? 

Single whips, or guntackle purchases used to trice up and 
lower down studding-sail booms and clothes-lines. 

WJiat is a winding tackle ? 

A purchase consisting of a double and single block or two 
single blocks ; it is used in hoisting heavy weights and 
hooks to the eye or thimble of the winding pendant. 

WJiat is a winding pendant ? 

A pendant, one end of which secures around the topmast 
or lower masthead, or reeves through a block there, and 
secures on deck ; the other end reeves through the eye 
of a lizard which is secured at the lower yard arm. The 
pendant is used to take the strain off the yard when hoist- 
ing heavy weights. 

WJiat is a parbuckle ? 

The simplest kind of a pur- 
chase : the bight or middle of 
a rope is made fast, and the 
two ends are taken and passed 
arou?id and underneath the ob- 
ject to be moved ; bring the 
ends back again ; then by 
hauling or slacking, the object 
can be hoisted or lowered. 

WJiat is a propeller purchase ? 

A purchase that reeves 
through the sheaves in the saddle of the propellor, used to 
hoist and lower the propeller. 




Parbuckle. 



1 66 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



WJiat is a runner and tackle ? 

Simply a purchase of a double and a single 
block, hooked or attached to a runner. 

WJiat advantage has a tackle with patent 
blocks ? 

The friction rollers, in the blocks, overcome 
a great amount of the friction. They cannot 
be used, however, with a great strain, fop fear 
of crushing the rollers. 

Which is the least affected by friction — Ma- 
nilla or hemp falls ? 
Manilla. 

How should the fall of a purchase lead? 
As clear or fair as possible, and the hauling 
part should be in a line, parallel to the rest of 
the purchase. 

What is " racking" a purchase ? 
Binding two parts of the fall together, with 
small stuff. 

What is a " thorough-foot" in a fall? 
When a block gets capsized, and in conse- 
quence, the parts of the fall are crossed. A 
thorough-foot must be taken out before the 
fall is used. 

What is ' ' fleeting ' ' a tackle ? 
When a tackle gets two blocks, or block-and-block, the 
fall is overhauled and one block shifted forward or aft. 
]Vhat is " swigging off?" 

Pulling at right angles on the bight of a rope, that is fast 
at both ends. 

"Rope or Cordage." 

How many varieties of rope used in the navy ? 



Runner and 

Tackle. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 67 

Four varieties, hemp, manilla, hide, and wire. Hemp 
rope, is made of the fibres of the hemp plant ; manilla rope, 
is made from the fibres of a species of wild banana, called 
manilla ; hide rope, is made of strips of green hide ; and, 
wire rope,* is made of iron and steel wire. 

Where is the rope for the navy made ? 

At the Government rope-walk, Boston Navy Yard. 

VlHiere is the best hemp raised ? 

In Russia, Italy, and America. 

Which do we use ? 

The Russian and American — the Russian being used for 
the larger ropes. 

What is the American hemp used for ? 

Marline, houseline, hambrolihe, and all cordage spun 
by hand. This fibre is stronger than the Russian. 

How is hemp rope protected ? 

By being tarred. 

Wliat is untarred hemp called ? 

White rope, or white line ; it is used for lead and log 
lines, etc. 

What is manilla rope used for ? 

Hawsers and running gear. 

What advantage has the manilla over hemp ? 

It is lighter, more pliable, and does not require tarring 
to protect it. In making it up, the fibres are sprinkled 
with whale oil. 
Is it ever tan'ed? 

Yes. In making the larger hawsers, the outside yarns 
are sometimes tarred. 

What is hide rope used for ? 

Wheel ropes — one set of wire wheel ropes being also 
supplied vessels. 



1 68 young sailor's assistant. 

How is hide rope preserved ? 

By giving it a lick of a mixture of tar and tallow (one • 
fifth tallow to four-fifths tar), every six months. The rope 
should be perfectly dry when treated. Oil must never be 
used, nor should hide rope be soaked to make it pliable. 
How is hide rope stowed below ? 

It is treated as before explained, and headed up in a beef 
barrel, to preserve it from the rats and mice. 

What is wire rope used for ? 

Almost entirely for standing rigging. Vessels of the navy 
are now being furnished with steel wire tow lines. 

What is small stuff? 

A term applied to small rope, and is specified by the num- 
ber of threads or yarns it contains, as 15, 18, and 21 thread 
ratline-stuff, and 4, 6, 9, and 12 thread seizing-stuff. 

What is spun yam ? 

It is made of " long tow" of hemp, twisted up loosely, 
well tarred and rubbed, to keep it from opening. The 
threads are twisted right handed and laid up left handed to 
form the spun yarn. 

How is it distinguished ? 

It is known as 2 and 3 yarn, spun yarn. It is very use- 
ful for rough seizings, etc., etc. 

WJiat is s eizing- stuff ? 

Hambroline, houseline, marline, also 4, 6, 9, and 12 
thread seizing-stuff. 

What is hambroline ? 

A fine description of seizing-stuff. 

What is roundline ? 

A fine right handed three-thread stuff (left handed yarns.) 

What is meant by right and left handed yarns or rope ? 

Right handed, is when the twist or lay is from the right 



VOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 69 

to the left — left handed, when the twist or lay is from the 
left to the right. 

JVJiat is house line ? 

A three-thread stuff, fine like roundline, but left handed ; 
it is used for service, seizings, etc., etc. 

What is marline ? 

Two thread stuff of finely dressed hemp : it is left handed ; 
used for service, seizings, etc., etc. 

l^Hiat is ratline stuff? 

Small stuff, larger than seizing stuff; from 1 2 to 24 thread. 

How is small stuff measured? 

All, except ratline stuff, is measured by the pound. 

How is ratline stuff, rope, etc., etc., measured? 

By the fathom. 

What are nettles ? 

They are made by laying up two or three yarns in a taut 
twist, with the thumb and forefingers, then rubbing them 
down smooth. Used for hammock clews and neat stops. 

Wliat are foxes ? 

Made by laying up two or more yarns by hand, and 
rubbing down with tarred parcelling (canvas). They are 
used for temporary seizings, making mats, sennit gaskets, 
gripes, etc., etc. 

What is a Spanish fox ? 

A single yarn, twisted up in a direction contrary to its 
natural lay. Used for small seizings ; seldom used now. 

What is junk ? 

Pieces of condemned rigging, old rope, etc., etc. 

What is oakum ? 

Junk untwisted and picked to pieces ; used for caulking 
seams, etc., etc. 

What are shakings ? 
8 



170 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




Odds and ends of yarns and small ropes ; found in the 
sweepings after work. 
WJiat is a rope yarn ? 

Fibres, of hemp or manilla, drawn out of the bundle, 
overlapped, and twisted from right to left; rope yarns are 
therefore right handed ; or it is one of the yarns forming a 
strand . 

How much strain will a rope yam bear? 
About one hundred pounds. 
What is a strand ? 

A combination of rope yarns, laid up or twisted left 

handed. 

What is a plain laid 
rope ? 

Three strands laid up or 
twisted together, forming 
a right-handed rope. 
What is a cable or hawser-laid rope ? 

Three plain laid ropes 
are taken and laid up to- 
gether, left handed, form- 
ing a left handed cable, or 
hawser of nine strands. 

What is a four stranded 
or shroud laid rope ? 

It is four strands laid up 
right handed, with a heart 
in the centre. 

What is the heart? 
A small rope made soft 
and pliable. It is about 
one-third the size of the strand. It keeps the ropes in 
proper shape. 



Plaiit Laid Rope. 





Shroud- laid 
Rope. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 171 

What is a back-handed rope ? 

The strands are laid up with the same twist as the yarns 
(right handed). Then when brought together to form the 
rope theymust be laid up left handed (or back handed). 
A back handed rope is more pliable and less liable to 
kinks, when new, than plain laid rope. 

What is a tapered rope ? 

The part that bears the strain is full sized, tapering to the 
hauling part, which is light and pliable. This rope is used, 
when great strain is to come, only, on one end. 

What is bolt rope ? 

Rope used for the roping of sails ; it is made of the best 
hemp and finest yarns, and of less twist. 

How is wire rope made up ? 

It has six strands to a rope, and eighteen wires to a strand. 
Each strand has a hemp heart, and the rope itself also has 
a hemp heart. These hearts make the rope more pliable. 
It is laid up right handed. 

What are towlines ? 

Large plain laid ropes. 

How do you measure the size of a rope ? 

By its circumference. Its length is measured by the 
fathom. 

How does the cordage of men-of-war range ? 

From 1 y 2 inch to as high as 19 inch hawsers, for very large 
vessels. The hawsers and towlines furnished a vessel vary, 
and depend upon the weight of her bower anchor. 

How are hawsers and towlines stowed? 

Upon reels, and should not be stored in the hold, if it can 
possibly be avoided. 

What is the length of a hawser or towline ? 

One hundred and twenty fathoms. 



172 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

WJtat is the length of a new coil of rope ? 

From fifty to one hundred and fifty fathoms, varying with 
the size of the rope. 

How should rope be coiled down ? 

Right handed rope, with the sun or from left to right; 
left handed rope, against the sun, except hemp hawsers ; al- 
though left handed, they are coiled in tiers with the sun. 

How would you take new rope from the coil? 

The end is passed through the coil, and coiled down 
against its lay to get the turns out. 

What is done with the running rigging on board ship {at 
anchor) during wet or very foggy weather ? 

It is slacked up. 

Why? 

The rope contracts or shrinks when wet, and the rigging 
should be slacked, in order to avoid springing a yard or 
carrying something away. 

How is standing rigging protected from the weather ? 

If of hemp, it should be covered with a coating of black- 
ing, made of tar oil and coal tar. Wire rigging is galvan- 
ized, but it is wormed, parcelled, served, and blacked from 
end to end, as a protection against wear and tear. If ever 
used when not galvanized, it is protected by a mixture of 
red lead and boiled linseed oil. 

What is done before stowing ropes or hawsers below ? 

They are all thoroughly dried, to prevent rot and mildew. 

How is one rope rove off by another ? 

Place the two extreme ends of the ropes together, and 
worm three yarns of spun yarn in the lay of the ropes for 
four or five inches on either side, called, " marrying the 
ropes together;" haul on the old rope and reeve the new 
one in its place. New braces, etc., etc., are generally rove 
off in this way. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. I 73 

What ff /V^ standing part, the hauling part, and the bight 
of a rope? 

The standing part, is the end made fast. The hauling 
part, is the end taken hold of to haul on. The bight, is 
the part between the standing and hauling part. 



CHAPTER VJII. 

THE COMPASS, HELM, LEAD, LOG, AND LOOKOUTS. 

What is a compass ? 

The instrument, by which the ship's track or the course 
upon which she is sailing, is pointed out. 
What compass is used in the navy ? 

Ritchie's liquid compass. 

What are the principal parts of a compass ? 

The card, the needle or magnet, and the bowl. 

How does the needle or magnet point ? 

Always North. 

What form is the card? 

A skeleton card, of circular form. 

Into how many points is the compass card divided ? 

Thirty-two, and each point is sub-divided into halves, 
quarters, and eighths. The card is also divided into de- 
grees. 

How many degrees in a point? 

Eleven degrees and fifteen minutes. There being 360 
degrees in every circle, and the compass circle being divided 
into thirty-two equal parts, it gives us eleven degrees and 
one quarter to each part or point. 

What are the cardinal points ? 

North, East, South, and West ; they are represented by 
the letters N. — E. — S. — W., respectively. Different com- 
binations of these letters, will represent the intermediate 
points of the compass. 

(m) 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 1 75 

How many points between each of the cardinal points ? 

Seven points. 

WJiat are the half-cardinal points ? 

N. E. — S. E.— N. W.— S. W. 3 called northeast, south- 
east, north-west, and south-west. These points are half 
way between the respective cardinal points, or four points 
from each. 

What is the " lubber s point" ? 

The black vertical line on the inside of the bowl of the 
compass. It represents the vessel's head (when steering). 

The following description of the Ritchie compass is an 
extract from a paper on the Marine Compass, by Lieut. R. 
P. Rodgers, U. S. Navy : 

THE U. S. NAVY COMPASS. 

The Navy Compass designed and constructed by E. S. 
Ritchie & Sons, of Boston, has the distinctive peculiarity 
of a buoyant card in a liquid-resisting medium, the mean 
density of the card being so adjusted to the density of the 
liquid as to produce a small downward pressure upon the 
pivot in the ordinary form of compass or a small upward 
pressure in those compasses of the class known as the cabin 
"tell-tale." 

The compass-bowl (see Figs. 13 to 19) is made of cast 
bronze ; the glass cover is closely packed with rubber, 
completely preventing the evaporation or leakage of the 
liquid, which entirely fills the bowl. Beneath the bowl is 
a metallic self-adjusting expansion-chamber of elastic 
metal, by means of which the bowl is kept constantly full 
without the show of bubbles or the development of undue 
pressure caused by the changes of volume of the liquid 
due to changes of temperature. The bowl-circle, or outer 



i 7 6 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




FiG. 13. 



a^Coxnpass lawL 
Ij-Eiia of bawl. j aer. 

C-^Pivot . e -iEspansion. chamber. 

cL-Hole connecting iowl |£-Ialse bottom of bowl 
•with. exgansiora. cTiampilhlead atliotiemto give 



stability toliowL 
g"- Glass cover. 
h.-Side fiHing Me. 

i-Iipifeedgesupporls-upoit - 
winds. Soivl Testsm gimbals. 




Fig. 14. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 
SccHcjv UirmialtXZ 



'77 




1'IG. 10. 

jBonom/uf Cqru,* 

aroiSlaccdUicmagncls. vi31a//nzte soliiere&ta ajlijidcr 

o-Biwijanlrmr/ of card, 




178 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

edge of the rim of the bowl, is made rigid and turned 
strictly to gauge, so as to admit of the interchange, from 
one bowl to another, of every azimuth-circle of its class. 
(The ship compasses now furnished to the service are of 
one size.) The lubber's line is a fine line drawn on an 
enameled plate placed on the inside of the bowl, whose 
inner surface is covered with a white paint which is insolu- 
ble in the liquid. 

(Directions for preparing the fluid and filling the bowl.') 
— The liquid used is 34 per cent, pure alcohol, and 66 per 
cent, distilled water, and remains liquid at — io° Fahr. 

In filling the bowl, place the card on its pivot and pour 
in the liquid until nearly full. Then by placing the com- 
pass under the receiver of the air-pump any air which may 
remain in the liquid is removed. This prevents the forma- 
tion of small bubbles, which without this precaution, would 
frequently appear. The glass plate is then put on, the rub- 
ber strap placed around it, and the top ring screwed down. 
(This ring, when screwed down, presses on the rubber, forc- 
ing it against the edge, but not on the faces of the glass, 
and thus prevents the breaking of the latter.) After this 
the bowl is turned on its side and more liquid is poured in 
through the side screw-hole, which should now be upper- 
most. The bowl is then shaken so that the air under the 
glass may escape. This being done, and care being taken 
that the expansion chamber is but partially full (half full, at 
a temperature of 6o°), finally, with the screw just inserted 
in its hole, with a gentle pressure upon the expansion-chamber 
force the air out and tighten the screw. 

The Navy Compass in general use has a 7.6-inch skeleton 
card, with provision for one pair of magnets symmetrically 
placed, as hereafter described. The outer inclined ring, 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. I 79 

convex on the upper and inner side, is graduated to read to 
one-eighth point, and a card-circle is adjusted to the ring, 
which is divided to half degrees, with legible figures at each 
5°, for use in reading bearings by the azimuth-circle or in 
laying the course to degrees. The ring forms the upper 
portion of an annular chamber, which, with the cylinders 
containing the magnet and central cap, are air-tight, and 
have sufficient capacity to support, by their buoyancy in the 
liquid, the entire weight of the card (including magnets) 
to within sixty grains when the liquid is at 6o° Fahr., or to 
within eighteen grains at a temperature of 13 . The middle 
point of each of the cylinders containing the magnets is 
joined by another air-tight cylinder, at the middle of which 
is found the central cap, which rests upon the pivot, and so 
supports the card. This cap may be accurately adjusted by 
small screws acting upon it. The pivot is fastened to the 
center of the bottom of the bowl by a flanged plate and 
two screws. Through this plate and the bottom of the bowl 
are two small holes, which communicate with the expansion- 
chamber, and admit of a circulation of the liquid between 
it and the bowl. The point of the pivot is of bell-metal 
and very sharp. At the center of the cap is a small ruby 
cup, which rests upon the pivot when in place. 

The weight of the card complete, in air, is 5,350 grains, 
of which 1,350 grains is in the steel of the magnets. 

The magnet system of the card consists of twi equal 
compound magnets inclosed in the parallel cylinders placed 
in the chords of the circle a little within the arc of 30 
from the parallel diameter. Until of very recent date each 
magnet was built up of six laminae, each lamina being 6^ 
inches long, T V inch wide, and about A inch thick. The 
steel of which the magnets were made, is that known as 



& 



1 80 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

/ />N V" Stubb's Sheet," which, from numerous experiments by 

f^C^ Mr. Ritchie, was found to be the best for this purpose, not 
only for its uniform excellence, but for its magnetic 
capacity in both intensity and permanence. The laminae 
having been cut to the proper size, were hardened and 

V tempered throughout their entire length, the process being 
so conducted as to secure a remarkable degree of uni- 
formity in the results. The magnetization to their utmost 

xJ capacity was effected by means of a very powerful electro- 
magnet. After this the laminae were separately tested for 
their relative magnet-power by a deflection-needle, and the 

Y>* angle of deflection marked on each. They were then laid 
aside for a little time in promiscuous contact. As required 
in the formation of card-magnets, these laminae were again 
carefully examined for magnet-power, and every piece 
which showed diminution of power was thrown out. Mag- 
nets of the latest pattern, furnished by Mr. Ritchie, are 
made of steel wire about .06 inch in diameter, formed into 
cylindrical bundles and soldered into the cylinders. They 
are magnetized between the poles of a powerful electro- 
magnet instantly and to saturation after the card is fin- 
ished. The change to wire was made because it can be 
more perfectly tempered and for the same weight gives 
greater power. 

" Box the Compass:" 

K^ North. 

North by East. 
North North-East. 
J North-East by North. 

">* VNorth-East. 

North-East by East. 

^% East North-East. 





VNo 









YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

East by North ^ rNs /\o * 

East. "\.\ \ ^ 

East by South. 

East South-East. 

South-East by East. 

South-East. 

South-East by South. 

South South-East. 

South by East. 

South. 

South by West. 

South South- West. 

South-West by South. 

South-West. ochv^ C? xxJLA^Ub c^^V* 

South-West by West. ^ \^ i 

West South-West. CkSL ^^"^ YoOlX>~> 

West by North. ft ryjJJ^jJ^ 
West North-West. oj^/y 1 ^^^^ ^^ - 

North-West by West. * \ juJ-^*<> 

North West. 

North-West by North. 

North North-West. 

North by West. f^ 

North. kjL^yJHJ^ 

Box by Half Points: 

North. 

North y^ East. 
North by East. 
North by East ^ East. 
North North-East. 






182 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT, 

North North-East ]/ 2 East. 

North-East by North. 

North-East % North. 

North-East, etc., etc. 

Box by quarter points : 

North. 

North y East. 

North y. East. 

North y East. 

North by East, etc., etc. 

Commence at North-East and box to the Southward ; at 
North North- West and box to the Westward, etc., etc. 

What is the opposite point to N. W. ? 

South-East. Bear in mind that the letter "N" "is oppo- 
site to " S " on the compass card, and the letter " W " is 
opposite to <m E ", (or North opposite Sputh and West oppo- 
site East.) By remembering this you can readily answer the 
opposite points; for example, S. S. E. is opposite N. N. W., 
and S. W. by S. is opposite N. E. by N., and E. y S. is 
opposite W. y N., etc., etc. 

If a ship heads directly North, where do the cardinal points 
mark ? 

North will mark * ' right ahead" or ' ' dead ahead. ' ' South 
will mark " right astern" East will mark " right abeam." 
(starboard side), and West will mark " right abeam " (port 
side.) 

A ship heading directly North, where do the ci half cardi- 
nal points ' ' mark ? 

N. E., the starboard bow; S. E., the starboard quarter; 
N. W., the port bow, and S. W., the port quarter. 

The7i how many points fi'om the ship 's head (or right 
ahead ) to the bow or 1 1 broad on the bow ' ' ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. I S3 

Four points. 

How many points from the shift 's head to " right abeam ' ' ? 

Eight points. 

How many points from the shift s head to the quarter (ot 
broad off the quarter) ? 

Twelve points. 

How many points from the shift s head to right astern ? 

Sixteen points, or half the points of the compass. 

What is the standard compass ? 

The compass by which all bearings, etc., are made. It 
is raised above the deck, in that part of the ship where local 
influences, (such as iron or steel) affect it least. 

WJiat is a binnacle ? 

A wooden, or composition case to hold a compass, and is 
usually mounted on a stand. It has a glass top, covered 
with movable brass plates. Lamps are attached, at the side 
of the top, to light the card at night. The steering, or bin- 
nacle compass, is placed inside the binnacle. Men-of-war 
have two binnacles, one on each side of, and forward of the 
wheel. 

Wliat is the tell-tale compass ? 

A particular form of- the Ritchie's compass, so arranged, 
as to be suspended from the deck beams above, in order that 
its card may be seen from below. It is generally placed in 
the cabin, where it can be referred to by the commanding 
officer. 

What is a boat compass ? 

A small compass fitted in a brass case (this case is painted 
black), that has a small lamp attached. They are used in 
boats, whenever needed. 

When looking at a compass on deck, and the ship's head 
changes direction, it will appear as though the compass card 



[84 young sailor's assistant. 

was revolving. This is not the case, it is the ship that re- 
volves. The magnetic needle attached to the card always 
points to the north, and therefore keeps the card pointing 
in that direction. The lubber's point represents the ship's 
head, and by careful attention it will be seen that it is the 
lubber 1 s point (or ship's head) that is moving away from a 
given point on the card, and not the point itself moving 
from the lubber's point. 

THE HELM. 

What is the helm ? 

The apparatus, by which a vessel is steered. It is com- 
posed of the rudder, tiller, tiller-ropes, (or wheel ropes) and 
wheel. 

Describe the rudder? 

It is a long, peculiar-shaped timber or piece of iron, 
which is attached to the stern-post, 0£ rudder post of a 
vessel, by means of pintles (or bolts) on the forward side 
of the rudder, which ship into gudgeons, (bolts or braces 
with an eye in them) that are secured to the after side of a 
rudder-post of a vessel. Rudders for ship's boats are of 
similar shape, and made of wood or metal. 

What is the rudder-head ? 

The top or upper part of the rudder. 

What is ajitry rudder? 

A rudder made of spare spars, planks, etc., etc., to re- 
place one that has become unserviceable. A hawser is 
sometimes used ; it is towed, with a long scope, astern, 
and has tackles made fast to it, leading to each quarter, to 
work it. 

Describe the tiller ? 

It is-an iron or wooden bar, which fits into the socket 
in the rudder head, forming the lever for moving the 




YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 185 

rudder. On screw steamers the rudder-head is generally 
shaped to receive an iron yoke or quadrant, 
which ships on the rudder-head with the 
arc aft ; the tiller ropes reeve through separ- 
ate slots in the quadrant, and shackle to the 
extreme ends of the arc. 
WJiat is the tiller -he ad ? 
That part of the tiller which is farthest 
Quadrant. { rom t he rudder, when the tiller is shipped 
in its socket. 

What are tiller or wheel ropes ? 
Ropes that connect the tiller with the wheel. 
What is a spare tiller? 

An extra tiller, provided ships, in case of accident to the 
one in use. 

Describe the wheel? 

It is a double, circular frame, shaped like a wheel, the 
two parts, one abaft the other, being connected by a barrel 
on which the wheel ropes wind ; the spokes of the wheel 
project out, in order to give handles to turn it by. The 
wheel on men-of-war, is usually placed aft, just forward of 
the mizzen mast. Vessels are now being rigged with 
steam steering apparatus, particularly vessels of great 
length. 

How are wheel ropes rove on men-of-war ? 
Through blocks, hooked or shackled to the tiller head, 
and blocks hooked to the ship's side, in the after part of 
the wardroom, then through casings under the beams to 
sheaves in the deck under the wheel, and make fast to the 
barrel of the wheel. With quadrants, the wheel ropes 
cross ; that is, the port wheel rope makes fast to the star- 
board arm of the arc (of the quadrant) the starboard, 



I $6 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

STEAM STEERING GEAR U. S. S. " LANCASTER.' 




^.—Spar-deck wheel, b. b. £.— Connect steam steerer 
with steam steering-wheel, c. c— Wheel ropes, d. d.— 
Bridge, e. c— Spar deck. / /.—Gun deck. g. g.— 
Berth deck. h. h— Orlop deck. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 87 

wheel rope to the port arm, both reeving through their 
respective slots, and crossing before reaching the barrel of 
the wheel. 

WJiat is tender stood by the u ship's course" :jhen given to 
the ma?i at the wheel ? 

It is the point of the compass the ship's head is to be kept 
at, for a certain period. 

WJiat is steering a vessel or boat ? 

Moving her head in any particular direction, or keeping 
her on any given course. This is accomplished by moving 
the tiller, and placing the broad surface of the rudder in 
such a position, that the water will act upon it, and force 
the vessel's stern one way and her head the other. 

In steering, what direction does the wheel go when compared 
to the ship ' s head? 

The same direction. 

When the order is given " Starboard ! ' ' how is the wheel 
moved ? 

To port ; for with starboard helm the ship's head moves 
to port. 

Why? 

Moving the wheel to port, will wind the starboard tiller 
rope on the barrel and move the tiller over to starboard, 
which places the rudder in such a position, in the water, 
that the vessel's head is forced to port. 

From the above it will be seen that the order starboard ! 
or port! refers to the tiller and not to the wheel; therefore, 
when the order is given to put the helm to starboard, or to 
port, remember that the tiller is to go to starboard, or port, 
as the case may be, and to accomplish this, the wheel must 
be moved over in the same direction the ship's head is to 
go. 



1 88 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



SECTION OF U. S. S. LANCASTER, SHOWING RUDDER, SCREW, 
ETC., ETC. 



! 


iO 


ri 


*J?. 


p 

a. 






-1 

P 




m 


■-1 


zn 


3 




pa 


r^ 








^N 


CL 




1 


CfQ 


s 


1 


a 


1 


n 


rr, 


Cfi 


(D 



o 3 



, o* 



w 



UJ 


c/) 






-a 

p 

►-1 


CL 




fD 


n 


CL 






P 


P" 


^ 


< 




o 










(D 




i 7 " 


H( 




'j 


*0 


r^ 


1 


1 

*-< 


i 


a 


< 

it- 


1 




ch 




f5 


Hi 


(13 


*~! 




'"1 


n 




'-*' 




*-! 




p 


o 


t3 


C 


'U 






JTotckKiss 




RcvoTvingCknwri 





YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 89 

IVJiat is meant by helm amidships ? 

Putting the tiller in line with the keel — or directly fore- 
and-aft. 

How do you know when the helm is amidships ? 

By the mid-ship spoke, which should be up, and perpen- 
dicular to the line of the keel. This spoke is larger than 
the others and is different in form, so it can be easily dis- 
tinguished at night. The turns of the wheel ropes on the 
barrel, is another method of telling the way the helm is car- 
ried. When the helm is amid-ships the same number of 
turns are on the forward and after part, of the barrel, of the 
wheel. 

WJiatpart of the barrel does the starboard wheel rope wind 
on? 

The forward part. The port one on the after part. 

How can you tell when the helm is to starboard, or to port? 

If the helm is starboard, the turns of the wheel rope will 
accumulate (or wind) on the forward part of the barrel of 
the wheel, and decrease or unwind on the after part. If the 
helm is lo port the turns on the barrel will be just the oppo- 
posite. 

WJiat is meant by " tivo turns starboard helm /" 

The tiller is well to starboard, and about two extra turns 
of the tiller rope have been wound on the forward part of 
the barrel. "Two turns to port" would be just the oppo- 
site. 

Which side of a vessel is the weather side ? The lee side ? 

The weather side, is the side towards the wind, or on 
which the wind first strikes ; the lee side, is the opposite 
side to the weather side. Sheets of fore-and-aft sails are 
hauled aft, on the lee side. 

VlHiat is meant by "the iceather wheel?" " The lee 
wheel?" 



190 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

The weather and lee side of the wheel. For example, 
" Whose weather wheel is it ? " " Whose lee wheel is it?" 
applied to the men. whose turn it is, to take the weather or 
lee wheel. 

WJiat is ' ' conning a ship ? ' ' 

The act of giving various orders, directing the helms- 
man to steer the ship on her proper course. 

What is a man 1 s time at the wheel called ? 

His " trick " at the wheel. 

What is meant by ' ' helm up, " or " helm down ? 1 ' 

The helm is up when the tiller is over to the weather 
side, or up against the wind. The helm is down when the 
tiller is over to the lee side, or down from the wind. 

WJiat is meant by hard-a-starboard, hard-aport ? 

Moving the wheel, so that the tiller will go over as far as 
possible to the starboard side ; hard-a-port, is the opposite 
to this. 

What is meant by ' ' steady ? ' ' 

The ship's head is pointing in the right direction, and 
to keep it so. 

What is steady- aport ? Steady -a- star board ' ? 

It means the ship's head is pointing about right, but to 
put her helm a little to port, to keep her head from turning 
to port. Stead y-a-starboard, is the opposite. 

What is understood by i i meet her ? ' ' 

When the ship's head moves to starboard, or port, in obe- 
dience to the helm, as she nears the proper course, the helm 
\s gradually put the opposite way to "meet her' 1 (or check 
her), so she will not pass the desired point. 

WJien is a vessel "on the wind 11 "by the wind, 11 " on a 
bowline, 11 or "close hauled? " 

When the yards are braced sharp up on either tack, tacks 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 191 

well down, sheets aft, bowlines hauled out, and the ship 
sailing as close to the wind as possible. 

IV/ien is a vessel on the starboard tack ? Port tack ? 
When the wind is blowing on her starboard side, her star- 
board tacks are aboard (starboard clews of her courses 
hauled forward,) and her port sheets aft (port clews of her 
courses hauled aft.) The port tack is the opposite. 

When are yards braced sharp up ? 

When the lee braces are hauled in, and the weather yard 
arms carried as far forward, as the rigging will permit. 

Wlien are yards braced in ? 

When the weather braces are hauled on, and the lee braces 
eased off, and the yards clear 'of the rigging. 

What is meant by " no higher?" 

The ship is too close to the wind, and the helmsman is 
to "let her go off " a little. 

What is meant by i ' let her go off? ' ' 

Put the helm up a little, to allow the ship to go off from 
the wind. 

What is meant by 4 ' nothing off? ' 

The ship is not close to the wind, and the helmsman is 
to "let her come up " a little. 

What is meant by i ' luff her ? ' ' 

The helmsman is to put the helm down, and bring the 
ship up into the wind. 

WJiat is meant by " right the helm ? " 

To put the helm amidships. 

Wliat is meant by " shift the hehn ? " 

When the tiller is well over to one side, to shift it, or bear 
it over to the same position on the other side. 

WJiat is ?nea?it by ' ' ease the helm ? ' ' 

To allow the tiller to move more amidships, and ease the 
strain on the tiller ropes and rudder. 



I92 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What is ' ' weather helm ?" "Lee helm ? ' ' 

Weather helm, is when the tiller is carried over to the 
weather side. Lee helm, when the tiller is carried over to 
the lee side. 

What is meant by " mind your weather helm ? " 

A caution given to the helmsman, to meet the ship should 
she fly into the wind. Usually given, when some head sail 
is about to be taken in. 

How can weather and lee helm be relieved ? 

Weather helm can be relieved by reducing (or taking in) 
after sail, or increasing (setting) head sail. Lee helm can 
be relieved by reducing head sail, or increasing after sail. 
Also regulated by trimming the yards. 

How should a vessel carry her helm ? 

As near amidships as possible, so the rudder will not 
drag and reduce the speed. Vessels on the wind, generally 
take a spoke or two of weather helm, to tauten the wheel 
ropes. 

When is a vessel ' 'full and by?" 

When she is close hauled, and making as much to wind- 
ward, as possible, with the sails full. 

What is a vessel steered by when ' 'full and by ?" 

In good weather, by the weather leech of the main 
royal, or any upper sail on the main. In heavy weather, 
by the weather leech of the mainsail. The weather leeches 
should be kept "touching" or quivering with the wind. 

What is 7neant by " very well thus" or very well dice ? 

The ship is sailing a good li full and by;" keep her so. 
What is bearing up ? 

Putting the helm up and running away from the wind } 
to leeward. 

How close to the wind will a good {square rigged} work- 
ing vessel lie ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. I93 

About six points, 

How close to the wind will a fore-and-aft rigged vessel lie ? 

About four points. 

WJiat are the usual methods of working a ship to wind- 
ward ? 

By tacking or wearing. 

What is tacking? 

When a ship is close hauled on one tack, by putting the 
helm down, and letting go the head sheets, she is brought 
up head to wind; then by working the yards and sails, she 
is made to fall off on the other tack. 

If a ship lies within six points of the wind, how many 
points will she tack in ? 

In twelve points. 

What is wearin g ? 

Getting a ship on the other tack, by putting the helm up, 
and running off from the wind, bringing the wind aft; and 
finally, with the helm, and by bracing the yards, the wind 
is brought on the other bow. 

How many points will a ship wear in ? 

Twenty points. 

Which is the best method of working to windward ' ? 

Tacking. 

Why ? 

Because if properly preformed, a ship will lose nothing 
to leeward ; on the contrary, she will " head reach" and 
gain, that is, run up several of her lengths to windward, 
while in stays (going about or tacking). 
What is leeway ? 

The drift a vessel makes, away from the wind, when 
close hauled. 

JVJiat is meant by " a good full for stays t " 
9 



194 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

The helmsman is to keep the sails full, and get good 
headway (or speed) on the vessel before tacking. 

How is the hehn put down whe7i tacking ? 

It should be eased down, slowly and gradually, so as not 
to deaden the ship's headway. 

When a ship fails to tack what is it called ? 

Missing stays. 

When is a ship ' ' in irons ? ' ' 

When "in tacking" she stops dead in the water, and 
will not fall off either way. 

When tacking, if headway is lost (ship stops), what is done 
with the helm ? 

It is put amidships. 

After stopping, suppose the vessel "gathers sternboard" 
{starts going astern) ? 

Shift the helm for sternboard. 

How is a helm put for sternboard ? 

The wheel is turned the opposite way the ship's head is to 
go, the tiller going the same way the ship's head is to go. 
That is, the helm is put just the opposite to the way it would 
be if the ship was moving ahead, instead of moving astern. 

What is weathering a place or point ? 

Sailing, or passing to windward of it. 

What is running to leeward of a place or point ? 

Sailing, or passing on the lee side of it. 

When is a ship sailing free ? • 

When she is sailing with the yards braced in, and the 
sheets eased off. 

LOOKOUTS. 

Where are lookouts stationed, during the day, while at sea ? 
From daylight to sunset a man called "mast-head look- 
out," is stationed on the slings of the foretopsail yard, and 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 1 95 

sometimes one, in addition, on the maintopsail yard. He is 
required to report all sails, land, or strange objects that may 
come in sight. He is not only to keep a bright lookout 
ahead, but also around the horizon, and be must be careful 
to let nothing escape his eye. 

How is a sail or land reported ? 

By singing out : Sail Ho ! ! Land Ho ! ! The answer 
from deck is Where away ? 

How are the lookouts stationed ,f or the night, at sea ? 

One at each cat-head, one in each gangway, and one on 
each quarter. Sometimes at sea, when carrying studding 
sails, quarter watches are stationed in the fore and main 
tops. The lookouts on deck are called the "deck lookouts,' 1 
and are required to keep a bright lookout, and report sails 
or lights, etc. They are to pass the hail every half hour, 
that is, sing out the name of their station or lookout, as 
' ' starboard cat-head, ' ' * 'port gangway, " " starboard quar- 
ter 1 ' etc., etc. On board some vessels, the cat-head lookouts 
are required to report the condition of the side lights, in ad- 
dition, as " starboard cat-head bright light." 

What are the lookouts in port ? 

The quartermaster and sentries. The quartermaster re- 
ports to the officer of the deck, all boats approaching the 
ship before sundown, and hails and reports, all boats ap- 
proaching the ship after sundjwn. He will also report 
anything unusual that may occur around the harbor. Sig- 
nalmen, are also kept on the lookout for signals. 

How is a boat hailed at night, and what are the answers i 

The boat is hailed by singing out: "Boat ahoy!" The 
answers are : for all enlisted men "Hullo!" for warrant 
officers "No! No!" for all commissioned officers below 
commanding officer "Aye! Aye! " for all commanding of- 



I96 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

fleers, the name of the vessel they command, as " Ports- 
mouth! " " Saratoga! " etc., etc.; for all flag officers the 
answer is ' ' Flag ! ' ' 

How can you tell when a commanding officer is tempora- 
rily out of his vessel, at night ? 

A white light is hoisted at the peak, (or end of the 
spanker gaff.) 

How can you tell when a flag officer is temporarily oin 
of the ship, at night ? 

For a commodore, two lights are hoisted at the peak; 
for an admiral, vice-admiral, or rear-admiral, three lights 
are hoisted. 

Flag- ships carry a white top-light, in the mizzen-top. 

LEADS AND LEAD LINES. 

What is a lead line ? 

A line with a leaden weight attached, used to find the 
depth of the water. 

WHiat is finding the depth of water called? 

Sounding. 

How many kinds of leads and lead lines are there, in 
general use ? 

Three, the hand-lead and line, the coasting-lead and line, 
and the deep-sea lead and line. 

When is the hand-lead zised ? 

On entering or leaving port ; or in any case when cruis- 
ing, it is expected to find less than 20 fathoms of water. 

What is a fathom ? 

Six feet. 

How much do the hand leads weigh, and what is the 
usual length of the line ? 

They weigh from seven to fourteen pounds ; the line is 
from twenty to thirty fathoms long. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 1 97 

When, is the deep-sea lead used ? 

In a greater depth of water than twenty fathoms. 

What are the weights of the deep-sea lead, a?id the length 
of the line ? 

They weigh from forty, to one hundred pounds ; the line 
is from eighty, to one hundred and fifty fathoms in length. 

When are the heaviest leads used? 

In very deep water. 

How do you know, by the hand lead, the depth of water yon 
are in ? 

The hand -line is divided into twenty equal parts, or 
fathoms, called marks and deeps, commencing at the bot- 
tom or lead end ; and, if in very shallow water, the line is 
divided into feet, marked by white or red rags. 

How many marks, an I how ??iany deeps ? 

Nine marks and eleven deeps. 

WJiat are the marks andhozv distinguished ? 

At 2 fathoms, 2 strips of leather. 

At 3 fathoms, 3 strips of leather. 

At 5 fathoms, white rag. 

At 7 fathoms, red rag. 

At 10 fathoms, a piece of leather with a hole in it. 

At 13 fathoms, three strips of leather. 

At 15 fathoms, same as 5, white rag. 

At 17 fathoms, same as 7, red rag. 

At 20 fathoms, piece of line with 2 knots. 

What are the deeps ? 

They are at 1, 4, 6, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, and 19 
fathoms. They have no marks to distinguish them, but are 
distances between the different "marks," and must be 
guessed at, calculating the deep from the mark nearest it. 

How is the deep-sea line marked ? 



I98 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

By knots at every fiye fathoms, commencing at twenty 
fathoms. 

At 20 fathoms, 2 knots. 
At 25 fathoms, 1 knot. 
At 30 fathoms, 3 knots. 
At 35 fathoms, 1 knot, etc., etc. 

There is an additional knot, for every tenth fathom aftei 
twenty. For example, thirty, 3 knots ; sixty, 6 knots. 
The midway mark of 5 fathoms between these knots is al- 
ways one knot, as 45 fathoms, 1 knot, etc., etc. 

IVJiat is there peculiar in shape about the deep- 
sea lead, that is differ ent froin the hand lead ? 

It is hollowed out at the base, and before taking 
a sounding, this hollow is "armed" (filled with 
tallow), so that when the lead strikes bottom, any 
small substance, as shell, sanely gravel, etc., etc., 
will stick to the tallow, and in that way, the 
nature of the bottom can be told. Should the 
lead strike rocks, the tallow would be dented or 
cut out. 

How is the line bent to the lead ? 
A long eye splice is made in the end of the 
line. Through the hole in the top of the lead a 
becket is worked, which is covered with leather. 
Pass the eye in the end of the line, through the 
becket, down over the bottom of the lead, and 
haul it taut up to the becket. (See fig.) 
Where is the hand lead hove from ? 
eep-se jr rom the main chains, or from an after boat, 
so placed, that the lead will swing clear of the 
ship, while being hove. 

IVJiat is done on going into the chains or boat to heave the 
lead? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 1 99 

See the ends of the breast band well secured to support 
the body; the apron, if any, adjusted in front, to protect 
the clothing from water. The line clear, and the inner end 
(or end from the lead) made fast. The toggle is placed at 
a convenient distance from the lead, to take hold of when 
heaving. 

How is the hand lead hove ? 

It is thrown as far forward as possible, and the soundings 
taken when the lead comes aft, opposite the leadsman, and 
the line is taut up and down. The leadsman will know 
by the "feel" of the line, whether the lead is on the bottom 
or not. 

Describe h eaving th e lead ? 

Grasp the line at the toggle, swing it backwards and 
forwards and once or twice over the head, (bending the 
arm slightly when the lead is over the head, and straighten- 
ing it when the lead is near the water). When the lead is 
swinging with sufficient force, let go the toggle with a jerk, 
at the last of the swing, or just as the lead comes forward 
of the feet of the leadsman, befo7'e it rises. Try and heave 
it so that the lead, as it shoots forward, will not rise above 
the centre of the leadsman's body. An apprentice can 
become an expert leadsman only by constant practice, not 
only in heaving, but in measuring with the eye the differ- 
ent deeps, etc., on the line. 

If a dark night \ how would you tell the soundings ? 

Take the distance, with the line, from the breast band to 
the water's edge, and at each cast, deduct this distance from 
the amount of line out. 

Having learned the marks and deeps, how would you cah 
the soundings ? 

The "marks" are called "by the mark,' 1 the "deeps," 



200 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

" by the deep " For example: " by the mark" " f," "by 
the deep" " 8" Each sounding should be sung out sharp 
and distinct, not drawled out. 

How are the ^ fathoms, ]/ 2 fathoms, and ^ fathoms 
distinguished and called? 

They are measured with the eye (guessed at) from the 
nearest mark or deep. The ^ fathoms are called " and a 
quarter, ' ' the ]/ 2 fathoms ' ' and a half, ' ' the fy fathoms 
' i and a quarter less. ' ' For example : 6^ fathoms ' { and a 
quarter six" 6^2 fathoms " and a half six ,"* '6fy fathoms 
" and a quarter less seven," etc., etc. 

How are the soundings taken with the deep-sea lead? 

Sufficient men are ranged outside on the weather side, and 
the end of the deep-sea line (which is kept on a reel aft) 
is passed from well aft on the weather quarter, as far forward 
as is necessary, being careful to keeplhe line clear of every- 
thing. (The quantity of line to be taken off the reel and 
passed forward will depend upon the supposed depth of the 
water.) The deep-sea lead having been well " armed" and 
sent forward, is bent on there to the end of the line. The 
line, aft and inboard, is kept clear for running, the reel be- 
ing held by two of the afterguards. Should the line accu- 
mulate outside, each man, commencing at the forward one, 
is to gather a small coil in his hand, being careful, however, 
to let it go in time, and not check it.as it passes him, unless 
the lead has reached the bottom. When "all ready for- 
ward ! " is reported, the ship is "hove to n or thrown into 
the wind and her headway deadened . At the order ' i heave ! ' ' 
the lead is hove overboard from the cat-head, fore chains, 
or wherever it may be, by the person holding it (generally 
the captain of the forecastle), who sings out "watch! ho 
wvtch ! " and as the line runs out each man throws his coil 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 201 

clear and sings out " watch ! ho watch! " (remembering 
the caution to let it go in time.) The sounding is taken by 
the "quartermaster" aft. The line is then snatched to a 
small block secured to the mizzen rigging, weather vang, or 
some convenient place. And at the order the men lay aft 
and run the line in, walking in carefully as the lead ap- 
proaches the ship, when the lead is detached, the line is 
reeled up. The lead is examined to see what bottom, if 
any, is brought up by the " arming*" 

With a ship " lying to " in a gale, how is the deep-sea line 
fassedfor sounding ? 

The end is passed from to windward, around the stern, 
forward on the lee side, where the lead is hove from. 

What is a "coasting lead 7 " 

The name given to a lead used in running along a coast, 
when you have more than 20 fathoms, and less than 75 
or 80 fathoms of water. 

JVhat other methods are there for finding the depth of the 
water ? 

Several patent sounding apparatus, the most successful of 
which is Sir William Thomson's. 

What is a drift lead? 

k. lead used when lying at anchor, blowing fresh, or in 
foggy weather. The lead rests on the bottom and the line 
is made fast on deck, with a man stationed there to tend it, 
who must look out for the change of tide, etc., etc. Should 
the vessel drag or part her cable, the drift lead, if on the 
bottom, and properly " tended," will give instant notice ot 
it, for the line will immediately slant forward as the ship 
goes astern. 




202 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

"THE LOG." 

WJiat is the log? 

The apparatus, used for obtaining the velocity, or speed 
of a vessel through the water. 

What does the log consist of? 

The log line and reel, log chip, the long-time glass of 
28 seconds, and the short-time glass of 14 seconds. 
What is the log chip ? 
A flat piece of thin board, in tha 
form or shape of the quarter of a circle, 
loaded on the circular edge with suf- 
ficient lead, to make it float vertically 
(or up and down) in the water. At the three corners small 
holes are bored. Through two of the holes (those near the 
leaded edge) the ends of a piece of small line (about 4 feet 
long) are rove. A knot is then put in these ends to prevent 
their pulling out. A wooden plug is fastened to the middle 
part of this line. The third hole is for the log line. 

What is the log line ? 

Small " white line" about 150 fathoms long, divided into 
distances called knots, which are sub-divided into tenths of 
knots. The outer end of the log line is rove through a hole 
in the upper corner of the "log chip," and a knot made 
in the end to prevent it coming out. A small wooden 
Socket for the plug to fit in, is made fast to the log line, at 
a distance from the "chip," to correspond with the distance 
of the plug from the " chip." 

What is the plug and socket for ? 

Before heaving the log, the plug is fitted close in the 
socket, and then the chip is hanging by a three legged 
span (see fig.) Now when the log line is straightened out 
and trailing in the water astern of a vessel, the broad sur- 
face of the chip will be perpendicular to the line. 




YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 203 

WHiat is the log-reel ? 

A wooden frame, about two feet long, revolving on an 

iron spindle, having 
wooden handles at 
each end. The in- 
Log Reel. ner end of the log 

line is made fast to this frame, and the line then reeled up. 

WJiat is the length of a knot in feet ? 

About 47.3 feet, or 47 feet and 4 inches. It is the same 
part of a sea mile that 28 seconds (the long glass) is of an 
hour. 

WJiat is the length of a sea mile ? 

It is 6086.4 feet. 

A quick way to roughly calculate the length of a knot, 
is to add a cipher to the number of seconds in the given 
glass, and divide by six — the result will be the length in 
feet nearly : for example, with the 28-second glass we have 
with a cipher added 280, which divided by 6 will give 47 
feet nearly. 

How is a log line marked ? 

Soak a line in water, a few days, to get the kinks out, 
and at about 15 or 20 fathoms from the chip, mark the 
stray line. This is marked by a piece of red bunting, 
about six inches long. From the stray line measure 47 feet 
4 inches for the first knot, which is marked by a piece of 
fish line with one knot in it. The remaining knots at in- 
tervals of 47 feet 4 inches, are marked by fish line with 
two, three, and four knots, etc., etc., according to its 
number from the "stray-line" mark. Each space between 
the marks is to be sub-divided into five equal parts, and 
the five parts are each marked by a piece of white bunting, 
about two inches long. This white bunting will, therefore, 
mark everv two -tenths of a knot. 




204 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

WJiat is the ( ' stray line ? ' ' 

The allowance made, to permit the chip to float well 
clear of the eddies, etc., astern of the vessel, before mark- 
ing the knots. 

WJiat are the time glasses ? 

The 28 second or long glass; the 14 second or short 
glass. They consist of two glass chambers called bulbs, 
joined by a small neck (hour glass shape). 
One of the bulbs, in each glass, has an open- 
ing, through which is poured a quantity of 
clean, dry sand. The quantity of sand 
placed in each glass, should be such that it 
will take exactly 28 seconds of time for the 
larger, and 14 seconds of time for the 
smaller, to have the sand pass from the upper 
Time Glass, b^]^ through the neck, into the lower bulb, 
when the glass is held in a vertical position. 
How do you heave the log? 

Two of the afterguards hold the reel, one holds the time 
glass. The quartermaster (or the officer whose duty it is) 
takes the plug and fits it securely in the socket, then gather- 
ing a small coil of line in his hand sings out " clear glass ! " 
if all clear (that is the sand all in one bulb) the answer from 
the glass holder is " all clear !" The quartermaster sings 
out " stand by ! " and throws the chip (and coil in his hand) 
over the lee quarter, clear of everything. The "chip" 
takes the line, and when the red rag passes the rail he sings 
out " turn ! " which the glass holder is to repeat, and at the 
same time turns the glass so that the bulb, with the sand in, 
is on top. The instant the sand is out of the upper bulb the 
glass holder must sing out "up! " (sometimes giving a cau- 
tion "stand by. ") At the word " up ! " the line is stopped, 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



and the quartermaster notes the mark nearest the taffrail. 
If the 2 8 -second glass was used, and the mark at the rail is 
5 knots, then the ship is going 5 knots; but if the 14-sec- 
ond glass was used, this must be doubled, and the ship is 
going 10 knots. After the mark has been noted, the quar- 
termaster 'gives the line a quick jerk to pull out the plug. 
The chip falls flat on the water, and the line is then hauled 
in and reeled up. 

WJwn is the long, and when is the short glass used? 
The 28-second or long glass is generally used up to a 
speed of 5 knots. When the ship is going 5 knots or faster 
the 14-second or short glass is used. The short glass is used, 
simply to avoid running out a* quantity of line, when the 
ship is going fast. Always double the mark when the 14- 
second glass has been used. 

If, with the 28-second glass the mark at the rail is 4 knots 
and 2 pieces of white rag out, how fast is she going? 
Four knots and four-tenths. 

If with the 14-second glass the mark at the rail is 5 knots 
and j white rags out* how fast is 
she going? 

Ten knots and six-tenths. 
WJiat other logs are used for 
determining the speed of a vessel? 
Several patent logs, the most 
convenient of which is the 
"American Taffrail log." The 
dial of this log is connected by 
a small line with the Taffrail, and 
can be readily inspected at all 
times \ particularly when chang- 
Ci Taffrail Log " ing the course of the vessel, the 
necessity of hauling in is avoided. 




206 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

What is a current log t ' ' 

The ordinary log, when used to determine the direction 
and velocity of currents. It is hove from the ship (or a 
boat), when at anchor, in the same manner as if under way. 
The mark on the line, at the rail, will give the rate of the 
current per hour. The bearing of the chip, (when out) by 
compass, will give the direction of the current. 

What is a ground log ? 

When cruising in shoal water, and the actual speed of the 
ship over the ground is desired, a lead or small grapnel is 
made fast to the chip end of the log line, and dropped 
overboard (in this case, the stray line must be long enough 
to allow the lead to reach bottom, before the glass is turned). 
The speed is then measured as before ; the end of the log 
being on bottom, the amount of line out will give the 
actual speed over the ground. 

What is the log book ? 

A record book kept by the officer-of-the-deck. It con- 
tains an official record of all transactions on board ship, 
such as drills, courts-martial, signals, accidents, punish- 
ments, articles received on board, etc., etc. The columns 
contain a record of courses steered, distances made, and 
leeway for each hour at sea ; also the direction and force 
of the wind, state of the weather, clouds and sea, height 
of the barometer, temperature of air and water for each 
hour at sea, or in port, the latitude and longitude at noon 
of each day at sea. The log book is signed for each watch 
by the proper officer-of-the-deck. 

How is the state of the weather expressed r t 

B — Clear blue sky. 

C — Cloudy weather. 

D — Drizzling or light rain. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 207 



F— Foggy. 

G — Gloomy, or dark and stormy. 

H— Hail. 

L — Lightning. 

M — Misty. 

O— Overcast. 

P — Passing showers. 

Q — Squally. 

R — Continuous rain. 

S— Snowy. 

T — Thunder. 

U — Ugly, or threatening. 

V — Variable. 

W— Wet. 

Z — Hazy. 

How is the state of the sea recorded? 

B — Broken, or irregular sea. 

C — Chopping, or short sea. 

G — Ground swell. 

H — Heavy sea. 

L — Long, rolling sea. 

M — Moderate. 

R — Rough sea. 

S — Smooth sea. 

T — Tide rips. 





Wind Scale. 






Force of wind. 
Nautical scale. 

O .... , 


Nautical 
designation. 

. . . Calm 


Velocity 
miles 


of wind in 
per hour. 
O 


1 . . . . 

2 . . . . 

3 . . . . 


. . . Light airs . . . 
. . . Light breezes . 
. . . Gentle breezes . 




I tO 2 
4 
9 



2C>8 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

4. Moderate breezes . ... 14 

5 Stiff breezes 17 

6. . Fresh breezes 20 

7 Very fresh breezes ... 24 

8 ...... . Moderate gale 30 

9 Strong gale 40 

10 Very strong gale .... 67 , 

11 Violent gale 80 

{Hurricane .... 1 
Typhoon .... I I0 ° a " d 
^ , upwards. 

Cyclone 

How are the clouds recorded ? 

"Cir" for "cirrus" are light, feathery clouds, in clear 
weather. 

" Cir-cum" for " cirro-cumulus "~~ small, round, white 
clouds. 

" Cir-str" for "cirro-stratus " consist of feathery clouds, 
in layers of considerable extent. 

"Cum" for "Cumulus" large wnite clouds, look like 
huge heaps of snow. 

" Cum-str" for "cumulus-stratus" clouds giving the 
horizon a bluish-black color. Seen in dry, windy weather, 
towards night. 

" Nimb" for "nimbus " heavy rain clouds. 

" Str" for "stratus" an extended, horizontal layer of 
clouds, increasing from below. 

The scale for denoting the amount of cloud is from o to 
10; o is a clear sky; 5 a half covered sky, and 10 a sky 
wholly covered. 

IVliat is a log slate ? 

A slate, sometimes used to keep a temporary record of the 
log, which record is copied daily into the log-book. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 200 

What is the rough or deck log? 

The log-book for daily use. It is carried on deck when 
needed. 

WJiat is the smooth log? 

The smooth copy of the rough log. It is signed in full 
by the proper officers, and every six months, one must be 
sent^to the Navy Department. 

SEAMEN'S PROVERBS. 

"A red sky in the morning, 
Sailors take warning ; 
A red sky at night 
Is a sailor's delight." 
"The evening red and morning gray 
Are sure signs of a fine day; 
But the evening gray and morning red 
Make the sailor shake his head." 
"With the rain before the wind, 
Your topsail halliards you must mind; 
But when the wind's before the rain, 
You may hoist your topsails up again." 
"Long foretold, long last, 
Short notice, soon past." 
"Rainbow in the morning, 
Sailors take warning ; 
Rainbow at night 
Is a sailor's delight." 
"Mackerel skies and mare's tails, 
Make lofty ships carry low sails." 
" If Bermuda lets you pass, 
Then look out for Hatteras." 
"A dead calm often precedes a violent gale." 
"Porpoises swim towards the coming breeze." 



2IO YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

"When the wind veers against the sun, 
Trust it not, for back it will come.*' 
"When the sun sets in a clear 
An easterly wind you need not fear." 
Lightning in south'ard and westward, in, or off, the La Plata 
river, is one of the common signs of a "Pampero." 

Lightning from N. N. E. to N. N. W., in the Gulf of Mex- 
ico, during hurricane months, is a common sign of a " Norther." 
Lightning in the S. W. during the winter months, in the 
Gulf of Mexico, is a sure sign of a "Norther." 

Barometer. 

First rise after very low 
Indicates a stronger blow. 

Relating to the Hurricane Months in the West Indies, 
June, too soon ; 
July, stand by ; 
August, look out you must; 
September, remember; 
October, all over. 



CHAPTER IX. 

THE GENERAL FITTINGS AND LEAD OF THE STANDING 
RIGGING. 

The following methods of rigging the masts, yards, and 
booms, are those now in use in the navy. 

It is not proposed, at this stage, to instruct the apprentice 
in " cutting and fitting riggi7tg" but simply to give him a 
practical idea of how masts, yards, and booms are rigged, 
in the vessels of the present day. 

Hemp rope was formerly used for standing rigging, but 
now galvanized wire rope is used entirely.* 

All standing rigging to be 4-stranded, shroud-laid, gal- 
vanized wire rope; to be wormed, parcelled, and served 
from end to end, as a protection against wear and tear, ex- 
cept stays on which sail is carried. 

Upper dead-eyes for lower and topmast rigging are to be 
strapped with iron, and to have a stout galvanized-iron- 
scored heart (Walton's) at the upper part of the strap to 
receive the rigging, the end of which, being passed up, is 
to be secured by five seizings, the two lower ones passed 
with racking under-turns; the lower dead-eyes to be con- 
nected with the chain-plates by bolts, so that they may be 
readily unshipped. Lower stays are to pass over an iron- 
scored heart, the ends to be secured like the ends of lower 
and topmast rigging, with at least five seizings, the two lower 
ones passed with racking-turns. 

All standing rigging to be set up by laniards. 

* Steel wire, for standing rigging, has lately been introduced in the 
navy. 

(211) 



212 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

BOWSPRIT. 

What are the principal supports of the bowsprit? 

The bobstays; there are three of them, inner, middle, 
and cap or outer bobstay. 

How are they made, and where set up ? 

Formerly made of chain, but are now made of wire rope. 
They are shackled to plates and bolts, at the cut-water, and 
set up with laniards and four-scored hearts, shackled to iron 
bands on the bowsprit. 

How do the bowsprit shrouds lead ? 

They are of wire rope, shackled to eye-bolts on each bow, 
and set up with laniards and hearts, that are shackled to an 
iron band just outside of the bobstays, near the head of the 
bowsprit. To give the proper support, bowsprit shrouds 
must be in line with the heel of the bowsprit. 

How is the jib-boom fitted for rigging ? ~" 

It has an iron band or wythe, which fits over at the hounds. 
This band has three eyes or bolts in it, one on each side 
and one underneath. 

How do the jib -guys lead? 

They shackle to the eyes, on each side of the band or 
wythe on jib-boom, lead to, and fit over, the end of each 
whisker boom with a horse-shoe cringle. They set up with 
laniards and hearts, well aft on the bows, or to the cat-heads. 

How does the jib -martingale lead? 

It shackles to the under-eye of the wythe on jib-boom, 
and shackles to the band on the end of the dolphin striker. 

How is the flying-jib-boom fitted for rigging ? 

The same as the jib-boom, with an iron wythe having three 
eyes. 

How do the flying-jib guys lead? 

They shackle to the side eyes on the wythe, reeve through 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 2 I 3 

thimbles or bull's eyes on the end of the whisker-booms, 
and set up (well aft) to the bows or cat-heads, with laniards 
and hearts. 

How does the flying-jib -martingale lead? 

It shackles to the under-eye on the flying-jib wythe, and 
reeves through a sheave in the end of the dolphin striker, 
and sets up with laniards and dead-eyes in the "head" 

How are the foot-ropes for the jib and flying-jib-boom 
secured? 

The forward ends are seized to the shackle of the jib and 
-flying-jib guys. The after ends of the foot-ropes,on the jib- 
boom, are seized to the bowsprit cap, and those for the fly- 
ing-jib-boom, to the wythe or band on the end of the jib- 
boom. 

How do the whisker jumpers lead ? 

They fit over the ends of the whisker-booms with an 
eye splice, and set up to their own parts through bull's eyes 
or thimbles secured by bolts to the sides of the cutwater. 
In straight stemmed vessels they lead to the "dolphin 
striker." 

What are the back ropes ? How do they lead? 

Back ropes are of hemp, hooked, or shackled to a band 
on the end of the dolphin-striker, and set up at the " bluff 
of the bows" with laniards and hearts. 

LOWER RIGGING. 

The rigging over the heads of the lower masts is the 
same for fore, main, and mizzen, except that the mizzen is 
only fitted with a single stay, while the fore and main stays 
are double. The oak bolsters are now sometimes done 
away with, and the trestle trees rounded and covered with 
composition, as a substitute. 



214 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What is the first rigging over the lower mast head ? 

The mast head pendants ; they go over as a pair, con- 
nected on each side of the mast head, by cross lashings or 
seizings of wire. They are fitted with a link in each end. 
Both legs are the same length. 
What follows the lower pendants ? 

The lower shrouds. These go over in pairs, No. i pair 
on the starboard side ; No. 2 pair on the port ; No. 3 pair 
on the starboard, etc., etc. — the odd-numbered pairs 
being on the starboard side, the even-numbered on the 
port. The eye that fits over the mast head, is made by 
seizing the two parts ; of each pair, with an eye seizing. The 
lower ends of the shrouds, set up with laniards and dead 
eyes in the chains. 

In case there is an odd shroud, where does it go ? 

It should be the forward shroud, and fitted with a single 
eye for strength and neatness. 

How is the number of shrouds determined ? 

By the "scale draft" or construction drawing of the 
ship. 

What goes over the lower mast head, next after the shrouds ? 

The lower stays ; there are two of them on the fore and 
main, and but one on the mizzen; each stay is fitted singly 
with split collars and lashing eyes, the fore and main seized 
together at the collars, the starboard stay on top, the port stay 
coming next to the shrouds, when on the mast head. The 
lashings, securing the collars of the stays to the mast head, 
are passed through the eyes and abaft the mast head. The 
fore stays, set up with laniards and hearts, to large iron bolts 
on the bees of the bowsprit. The main stays set up with 
laniards and hearts to heavy iron bolts, called main stay 
bolts, on each side of the fore mast. The mizzen stay is 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 215 

single, and sets up with laniards and hearts at the main 
mast. In vessels fitted with trysail masts, frequently the 
foot of the mizzen stay is split, and two legs or parts 
formed, having thimbles turned in each. These legs set 
up by laniards, to bolts on each side of the main mast. 

TOPMAST RIGGING. 

Topmast rigging goes over the mast-head in the same 
order, and is fitted in the same manner, for the fore, main, 
and mizzen topmasts, with the exception that the fore has, 
in addition, a jib-stay, which fits over last. The mizzen 
topmast stays and backstays are single, while the fore and 
main are double. 

A cast composition funnel, j^-inch thick, is now fitted to 
go over topmast heads ; the topmast rigging is fitted over 
this funnel. 

Bolsters are of oak, bolted to the trestle trees, and are 
covered with a rounded piece of composition, which is a 
part of the f wine L 

What rigging is first over the topmast head ? 

The burton pendants; they are fitted the same as the 
lower pendants. Frequently burton pendants are fitted of 
chain or wire of proper length, and hook to eye -bolts in 
the under side of the topmast trestle trees. They have a 
large link in the lower end, for burtons to hook to. This 
method of fitting weakens the trestle trees, and is gradually 
being done away with. 

What follows the burton pendants ? 

The topmast shrouds. They are fitted in the manner 
known as "straight," with one eye, formed out of two pairs 
of shrouds. This method, gives two lifts or thicknesses on 
the mast-head, with four shrouds on each side, making a 



2l6 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

neat, snug mast-head. The topmast shrouds, set up with 
laniards and dead-eyes on the top rim. 

What follows the topmast shrouds ? 

The topmast backstays; fitted double or in pairs, for the 
fore and main, with an eye seizing the same as the lower 
shrouds. The starboard backstays go on first, followed by 
the port ones. The mizzen topmast backstays are single, 
one backstay on each side going over the mast-head with 
single eyes. Topmast backstays set up with laniards and 
dead-eyes, in the chains, abaft the shrouds. 

What follows the topmast backstays ? 

The topmast stays. They are fitted separately with split 
collars and lashing eyes, and then seized together at the 
collars, the same as the lower stays ; the starboard stay on 
top, the port one being next to the backstays, when on the 
mast-head. The fore-topmast stays leacf through the bees 
on the bowsprit, and set up with laniards and hearts on each 
side of the ' ' blur! of the bows. ' ' Vessels fitted for ramming, 
the fore-topmast stays reeve through chocks at the bees, foi 
convenience in rigging in the bowsprit. The fore-topmast 
staysail, sets on the lower or port fore-topmast stay, which is 
sometimes known as the ' ( spring stay. ' ' The main-topmast 
stays lead through composition rollers in the after part 01 
the fore trestle trees, and set up with hearts and laniards to 
heavy bolts in the spar deck, abaft the foremast. The 
mizzen topmast stay leads down and sets up, with hearts 
and laniards, in the main-top. 

On the fore topmast head, what follows the fore topmast 
stays ? 

The "jib stay; " it is fitted with split collar and lashing 
eyes, and is seized on top and to the collar of the topmast 
stay to prevent chafe from the foot of the topgallant sail. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 21 7 

The jib stay leads through the end of the jib boom, down 
through a clamp, called a duck-bill, on the dolphin-striker, 
and sets up with hearts and laniards in the " head." 

TOPGALLANT RIGGING. 

A composition funnel, with arms called a "jack," goes 
over the topgallant mast heads, for the rigging to fit on. 
All topgallant masts are fitted the same, except that the 
flying jib stay goes over the fore, after the topgallant stay. 

What is the first rigging ov 67' the topgallant mast head? 

The topgallant stay, which fits over the funnel, with an 
eye-splice. The fore, reeves through the sheave in jib boom, 
down through a clamp on the dolphin-striker, and sets up 
with dead eyes and laniards in the "head." The main 
topgallant stay, leads through a sheave in the after chock of 
the fore topmast trestle-trees, and sets up, in the fore top, 
with laniards and dead eyes. They sometimes lead directly 
to a hole in the fore cap, and then to the top. The mizzen 
topgallant stay leads to a hole in the main cap, and sets up 
in the main top with laniards and dead eyes. 

What follows the fore topgallant stay ? 

The flying jib stay ; it goes over with an eye-splice, and 
leads down through the hole or sheave in the flying-jib 
boom end, and through the clamp on the dolphin-striker to 
the "head" where it sets up with laniards and dead eyes. 

WJiat follows the fore-and-aft stays on the main and miz- 
zen, and the flying jib stay on the fore? 

The shrouds. They are fitted in pairs with an "eye 
seizing," like the lower rigging. There are two (2) pairs, 
the starboard going over first, then the port pair, both fit- 
ting snugly down on the funnel. The forward and after 
leg of each pair of shrouds, lead through the horns, or 
outer ends, of the topmast cross-trees, down between thu 



2l8 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

topmast shrouds (just below the eyes of the rigging) and 
over the futtock staff; they set up with laniards and dead 
eyes in the tops. Topgallant shrouds are sometimes fitted 
to reeve through an eye bolt and thimble, of a band, on 
the lower part of the topgallant funnel, a pair on each 
side; the two legs of each pair are seized together the 
same as the lower shrouds, with an eye seizing ; this method 
gives a good support and a much neater mast head. 

What follow the topgallant shrouds ? 

The topgallant back stays. There are two of them, one 
on each side, fitted singly with eye splices. The starboard 
backstay goes over first, followed by the port one; they 
lead down, and set up with laniards and dead eyes in the 
chains, abaft the topmast backstays. 

Why should a topgallant stay go on the funnel first ? 

In order that it may be placed as low down as possible, 
to prevent chafing the foot of the royal. 

ROYAL RIGGING. 

How is royal rigging fitted ? 

If fitted to go over the mast head, it goes in the same 
order as the topgallant rigging. But vessels of the navy 
are fitted with an iron wythe, band, or telescopic funnel, 
(which telescopes, or fits in, the topgallant funnel, when 
the masts are down) which goes over the hounds of the 
royal mast ; this band or funnel has three eye bolts, one 
forward, and one on the starboard and port sides. The 
shrouds and backstays are in one piece (on each side), and 
reeve through the side eye bolts, being seized around a 
thimble there. Sometimes they shackle to the eye bolts. 
The royal shrouds reeve through the ends of the jack, and 
set up with dead eyes and laniards in the top. The back- 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



219 



stays lead down abaft, and set up, with dead eyes and 

laniards, abaft everything, in the chains. 

The royal stays, are spliced or shackled, to the eye bolt, 

in the forward side of the band or funnel. The fore, leads 
through the end of the flying jib boom, 
through a clamp on the dolphin-striker, 
and sets up with dead eyes and laniards in 
the "head" The main, leads through a 
chock in the after part of the fore topmast 
trestle-trees, and sets up with dead eyes 
and laniards in the fore top. The mizzen, 
leads through a chock in the after part 
of the main 'topmast trestle-trees, and 
sets up with dead eyes and laniards in the 
main top. 

The shrouds and back- 
stays of the U. S. S. 
" Chicago," and the 
other new vessels that are 
now being built for the 
navy, are to be set up, 
with dead eyes and lan- 

Upper dead eye. ; ardSj tnst ^ e t h e bulwarks Lower dead eye. 

of the vessels, in order to have everything clear for the 
fire of the heavy guns. 

The old method of "turning i?i dead eyes" is to be done 
away with, and " Healey' f s Patent Metallic Splice" will be 
substituted. 

UPPER AND LOWER DEAD EYE. 

These cuts represent an upper and lower dead eye 
f Healey' s). Being hollow, they are lighter than those 
made of lignum vitae with the rope or iron strap passing 





220 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



around them. The process of detaching the upper dead 
eye for the purpose of shortening the shroud is simple and 
expeditious. 

Extract of a report made by the equipment officer of the 

Boston Navy Yard, (Com- 
mander A. O. Batcheller, U.S. 
N.)' 

" The results of the tests may 
be briefly summarized as fol- 
lows:"— 

"1st. Strength. The patent 
splice is stronger than the com- 
mon splice, and stronger than 
the rope itself. 

" 2d. Durability. The patent 
splice is more durable than the 
common splice, affording, as it 
does, a perfect protection to the 
The above cut shows a rope, while in the common 
lower dead-eye with a portion s P lice the ro P e is much opened 

of the exterior shell removed, and ]iable t0 admit water ' even 

7 .7... ,7 » •, ■ •, when carefully served. 

exhibiting the interior cavity. J TTT . , 

" 3d. Economy. Without going 

into the relative cost of making the patent and the common 

splice, for which I have no positive data, there is an economy 

in using the former, as there is no waste of rope. I am of the 

opinion, however, that unless the charge for royalty is too 

high, the great economy will be in the cheapness with which 

the patent splice can be made. 

"4th. Neatness. The patent splice can be made neater than 
the common splice." 

This method of "metallic splicing" can also be used for 
splicing wire rigging when shot or carried away. The whole 
splice can be completed in the space of a few moments, after 




YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



221 



melting the metal filling. It can also be used in fitting 
"foot ropes," "stirrups," "back-ropes/' etc., etc., fitting 
sister-hooks, and an almost endless variety of rigging. 

ROUND EYE SOCKET. 




The above cut shows a longitudinal section of a round eye 
socket, showing the arrangement of the inside notches into 
which the filling metal sets, securing it so firmly that no 
force can draw it. Sockets without these notches have been 
tested, and the fact established that they are sufficiently 
strong without them ; but these are added so that nothing, 
which might contribute to the strength and safety of the 
splice, may be omitted. 

ROUND EYE SOCKET. 




The above cut represents a round eye socket. These are 
applicable to every use of a wire rope when it is desired to 
make a simple connection with it. 

There have been made more than a hundred tests of this 
method of fastening wire ropes at the United States Ar- 
senal, Watertown, Mass., South Boston Iron Works, Esta- 
brook's Chain Works, South Boston, Fearing' s Chain 
Works, East Boston, and at other places, from which the 
fact has been demonstrated that the metallic splice is not 



222 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 




only the strongest made, but stronger than the rope itself, 
which is by no means the case with the old 
style tucked splice or the other methods in 
use. 

This cut shows the metallic socket in cross 
section. It illustrates most clearly the solid- 
ity of the metallic combination. No inter- 
stices anywhere, but the union of socket and 
wire rope is complete. 

DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE PATENT SPLICE. 

First y measure the depth of socket, and cut 
the same length from the hemp heart of the 
rope. 

Second, have a sufficient quantity of filling 
metal being melted. 

Third , insert the end of rope into the 
socket, and hold it in a horizontal position 
over a strong heat until a piece of the filling 
metal will melt when held on the upper side 
of socket, and until the rope becomes too hot 
for the hand at three inches distance from the 
socket. Have the filling metal hot enough 
to ignite a shaving or piece of paper when 
brought in contact with it. 

Fourth, place the splice with the rope in- 
serted in an upright position and pour the 
Metallic socket socket full, and let it remain in position until 
%Z°" sec ~ cool, when it is ready for use. 

THE KIND OF FILLING METAL TO USE. 

Pure tin, or a compound of half lead and half tin, or 
the latter compound with two percent, of antimony added, 








YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 2 2j 

Either of these three may be used with the utmost safety, 
and is obtainable in any part of the world. 

Any apparatus for melting the metal and heating the 
parts may be used. 

THE RIGGING OF YARDS. 

Yards are now rigged with iron bands having ears or ob- 
long eyes, to which the lift, brace, tye and other blocks 
hook, with heavy iron sister-hooks or shackle. 

WJiat are sister-hooks ? 

A pair of hooks working on the same ring, which, when 
closed, form an eye or ring in themselves. 

How are lower and topsail yards fitted ? 

Strong iron bands encircle the yards. These bands have 
heavy ears, eyes, bars, etc., to which the different blocks 
hook and shackle. 

Wliat are the principal bands on the fore and main yards, 
commencing at the slings ? 

One sling band for the slings ; two truss bands, one on 
each side, for the truss; two quarter bands, one on each 
side, for quarter blocks ; two bands, one on each side, for 
the burtons; two lift and brace bands, one on each yard 
arm, for the lift and brace blocks. 

How is the lift and brace band rigged? 

It fits "over at the shoulders, and has two heavy ears or 
eyes, and a peculiar shackle ; one ear on top and the other 
ear and shackle abaft. The lift block hooks to the top ear. 
The brace block hooks to the after ear. The shackle is for 
the foot rope. (See fig. of lower yards.) 
\fyliere do the quarter blocks hook ? 

Underneath the yard, on each side of the slings. 

How do the brace bands on the mizzen topsail and cross-jack 
yards differ from other yards ? 



224 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

The ears or eyes for the brace blocks, are on the fore- 
ward side of the yards. 

What bands are fitted for topsail yards ? 

Two bands for tyes ; two bands, one on each side, for 
quarter blocks ; two bands, one on each side, for burtons ; 
two lift and brace bands, one on each yard arm. 

How are top-gallant and royal yards fitted ? 

With bands at the slings for the yard ropes, and bands 
for the quarter blocks. The lifts and braces, fit over the 
yard arms with eyes formed in each, and marled together; 
or an iron ring or spectacle fits over, the lift and brace be- 
ing seized to it. 



CHAPTER X. 



RIGGING SHIP. 

The following methods of rigging ship are those usually 
employed by navy-yard riggers. The ship is supposed to 
be lying at the navy yard, starboard side to the dock. 

Before turning a ship over to 
the riggers, the construction 
department is required to step 
the lower masts, with trestle- 
trees and tops in place. And 
also to step the bowsprit with 
the cap in place, and set up 
the gammoning. 

The ship is hauled under the 
sheers. The bowsprit and 
lower masts, are hung slightly 
heel-heavy with a garland and 
lashing. And they are stepped 
in their proper places, using 
the heavy sheers purchase, as- 
sisted by shore and other guys. 
It is not recommended to white 
lead the mortice and tenon, 
but simply to use tallow. 

In rigging, we will suppose 
the bowsprit, with cap, is in 
place, gammoning set up, the lower mast stepped with 




" Garland and Lashing. 11 



10* 



(225) 



2 26 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

lower trestle-trees on. Not unfrequently riggers are obliged 
to send up tops, therefore, that will be explained. 

After the rigging is put over the mast-head it is set up ai 
( ice) but to avoid confusion, the fact of its being set up is 
simply stated in this chapter, and a detailed description Gf 
the methods of setting up rigging will be given later on. 

The manner of rigging the foremast only, is explained, 
The main and mizzen masts, are rigged in precisely the same 
way. 

The first thing to be done, is to rig and secure the bow- 
sprit. The bobstays and bowsprit shrouds are fitted and set 
up. 

Almost invariably, as soon as the bowsprit is secure, the 

topmasts are pointed, and used as derricks for shipping the 

tops, caps, getting over lower rigging, etc., etc. This is an 

excellent plan, particularly if short-handed, or if rigging 

large vessels ; but on board the training-ships or 

smaller vessels the following methods would 

answer every purpose. 



\ 




TO GET OVER THE FORE TOP. 

Lash single blocks, for girtlines, to the tenon 
of the lower mast-head, one on each side. Place 
the top on end abaft the mast, the round ox for- 
ward side uppermost, upper part of the top aft. 
Reeve the girtlines through the mast-head blocks, 
€i Sending an( j k enc i them to the under side of the top with 
up a whole rounc [ turns and hitches on each side of, and 
to P- ^ near the centre of the lubber's hole; or in such 
a position, that after the top leaves the deck, it will nearly 
balance up and down; to prevent the turns and hitches 
from slipping, seize them to the holes in the futtock plate. 
* The dotted lines represent ropes on the under side of top. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 227 

To a strap placed, well forward, around the tenon of the 
mast, hook the upper block of a tackle, the lower block of 
which is taken forward of (or underneath) the top, and 
hooked to a strap passed around the centre of the after (or 
lower) rim of the top. This tackle is to assist in canting 
the- top into a horizontal position over the mast-head. Now 
reeve a small after guy through a block secured to the main 
mast-head, and make fast the forward end of this guy to the 
forward (or upper) part of the top rim. This guy will keep 
the top clear of the lower trestle-trees in going aloft. 

When all ready, man the girtlines ! sway aloft ! take 
in the slack of the canting tackle, or put a strain on it 
if necessary \ guy the top clear of the lower trestle-trees 
with the after guy. When the top is high enough to cant 
over the mast-head, high enough ! take a turn with the 
girtlines. 

Man the canting tackle and pull up handsomely \ tend, and 
slack the girtlines and after guy at the same time. As soon 
as the top is canted square and fair, lower awAy to- 
gether ! place the top and bolt it to the trestle-trees. 

By this arrangement there is no necessity to have a man 
aloft, until after the top is lowered over the mast-head. 

It is sometimes found useful to have a forward guy, lead- 
ing from the forward (or upper) top rim to the bowsprit end. 
It will aid in canting and setting the top in its position. 

There are several methods of sending up tops; the above, 
however, is in every way suited for the training-ships. 
Tops are sometimes shipped by " half-tops," particularly 
when rigging large vessels; each half-top being sent aloft 
on its own side of the mast, by bending a girtline around 
the centre of the top, at the lubber's hole. 




2 28 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

TO GET OVER LOWER RIGGING. 

As soon as the top is over and bolted down, the bolsters 
being in place, or the trestle-trees rounded off and covered 
with composition ; the lower rigging is sent up 
by means of the mast-head girtlines (those used 
for the top), which are taken down, through the 
lubber's hole, on each side of the mast. Other 
girtlines, rove through tail blocks secured around 
the lower trestle-trees, on each side, will assist 
very materially in the work. 

The rigging goes over the lower mast head, 
in the following order : Lower pendants, shrouds, 
and fore-and-aft stays last, or on top of all. 
Sending «/ The i ower pendants are first sent up, using the* 
J P * girtlines to place them over the mast head, bear 
them well down on the trestle trees -and bolsters, and fit 
them snugly into their place. 

All rigging should fit, so that it will not be necessary to 
beat it into place ; however, should that become necessary, 
use a commander (a heavy wooden maul) always holding a 
piece of leather, over the rigging, to strike on and prevent 
bruising. 

Now, bend the starboard girtline to the first pair of 
shrouds (No. i starboard) five or six feet below the eye 
seizing, on top of the shrouds, and seize the girtline to the 
top or centre of the eye, bend the eye down in the proper 
direction, so that it will go over the mast head readily. 
If the shrouds are heavy, the girtline at the starboard 
trestle-trees should be bent on about half way down the 
shrouds, to assist in hoisting. 

Now man the girtlines and sway aloft ! when high 
enough, the man at the mast head signifies it, cuts the stop 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 229 

at the top of the eye, places the eye over the mast head, 
and as the girtlines are lowered, he follows it down, plac- 
ing it fair and neatly in its place. Now send up the next 
pair of shrouds (No. 2 port) in the same manner. Then 
send up No. 3 starboard, and so on, until all the shrouds 
are in place. The main and mizzen shrouds are sent aloft 
in the same way. 

Now proceed to send up 

THE LOWER STAYS. 

The lower stays have been seized together (at the collar) 
in the rigging loft, the port stay underneath. 

After the shrouds are all over and down in place, the 
ends of each mast head girtline, being down through the 
lubber's hole; send a heavy girtline down, forward of the 
top; the light ones are bent on each side of the stays, two 
or three feet below the crotch of the collar, and stopped 
with spun yarn stops, at intervals of about three feet, 
along each leg (or side) of the collar. Bend on the heavy 
girtline, below the collar of the stays. Clap good stops on 
the lashing eyes. When all ready, sway aloft ! when high 
enough, the men in the top cut the stops and bear down 
the lashing eyes in their proper position, then pass the 
lashing (the stays in the meantime being held up by the 
heavy girtline). 

The main and mizzen stays, are sent up in the same 
manner. 

Now set up the lower stays, then set up the lower rig- 
ging and " rattle down." 

The tops are now over, lower rigging, and stays set up, 
proceed to 



230 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

SEND UP THE FORE-TOPMAST. 

The topmasts are supposed to be on the wharf, with the 
head forward, and after sides uppermost. 

Lash a top block at the lower mast-head, and reeve the 
end of a small hawser, fr&m aft forward, through this 
block, outside and forward of the top, through the closed 
sheave, near the heel of the topmast, up, and secure the 
end with a clove-hitch, around the head of the topmast. 
Now bring the bight, or hauling part of the hawser, into 
the topmast, rack it to the standing part, and secure it 
near the clove hitch, with a stoitf lashing. Have a good 
shore guy bent on to the mast, and also a fore-and-aft guy. 
When all ready, Man the hawser ! Hoist away ! and 
walk the mast up, and inboard, tending the shore, and 
fore-and-aft guys ; point the head of the mast through the 
lower trestle-trees, resting the heel on -deck. It frequently 
happens, however, that there is not room enough to do 
this, in which case, the mast must be swayed high 
enough, outside the top rim, to point the heel down 
through a scuttle in the deck, just forward of the lower 
mast ; and the mast then lowered sufficiently, to point the 
head through the hole in the trestle-trees; after which, 
rest the heel on deck. 

Now pass a stout strap through the fid hole, near the 
heel of the topmast, and "hang the mast," by hooking the 
pendant tackles to this strap, on each side of the topmast, 
and setting both well taut. 

Unlash the top block from the mast-head, and unreeve 
the hawser. 

The topmast is now "pointed, 7 '' and hanging by the pend- 
ant tackles, proceed to 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 23 1 

SEND UP THE LOWER CAP. 

Overhaul the girtlines, down forward of the top, and 
secure them to the forward side of the cap, dolts up, (so 
they will not come in contact with the top rim in the cap's 
passage aloft), and stop the girtlines to the square or after 
hole of the cap ; bend a small line on. leading forward, 
with which guy the cap clear of the forward rim of the 
top. When ready, Man the girtlines ! Sway aloft ! 
and when high enough, Lower away ! and place the 
round hole of the cap, (through which the topmast passes), 
over the square hole of the trestle-trees, bolts of the cap 
down; remove the mast-head girtlines. 

Now man the pendant tackles, Sway up ! handsomely, 
and lash the cap securely to the topmast -head, bolts down. 
Sway higher the topmast ! when the cap reaches just above 
the tenon of the lower mast-head, slue the topmast (with a 
heaver placed in the fid hole, or a capstan bar at the heel), 
sufficiently to bring the square hole of the cap directly 
over the tenon of the mast, fair for shipping ; tallow the 
tenon and mortise, place the capshore forward of the lower 
mast, fair for shipping, and when all ready, slack hand- 
somely the pendant tackles, lower the topmast, placing the 
cap properly, and beating it well down. Tack a piece of 
sheet-lead over the top of the cap as a protection from the 
weather. Hook the top blocks in their places, to the bolts 
in the under side of the cap, one on each side, and reeve 
the top pendants as follows : 

One end of the top pendant is pointed, the other has a 
thimble in it. There are two pendants for the fore and 
main, and one for the mizzen topmast. 

Reeve the pointed end of the port pendant, through its 
top block, under the lower cap, from aft forward, down 



232 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

through the trestle-trees, and through the upper sheave in 
the topmast ; back through the opposite side of the trestle- 
trees, and secure the end over the lower cap, not to the bolts y 
having the cap well parcelled, or better still, have a mat 
placed there to prevent chafing the pendant ; reeve the 
starboard pendant in the same manner, through the lower 
sheave of the topmast. (For the main topmast, the star- 
board pendant is rove through the upper sheave, while the 
mizzen top pendant reeves on the port side.) Hook heavy 
tackles (usually pendant tackles), for top tackles, to the 
thimble ends of the pendants and set them well taut, taking 
the weight of the topmast. Slack up the lower pendant 
tackles, and remove the fid strap. Now proceed to 

SEND UP 'THE TOPMAST CROSS TREES. 

Cast off the lashings of the lower cap (from the topmast 
head), man the top tackles, and sway the topmast a few 
feet above the lower cap. 

Lash two girtline blocks to the tenon of the topmast, 
(having the falls rove off.) Place the cross-trees on deck, 
well abaft the mast; overhaul the girtlines down abaft, 
and make fast the ends to each after horn, close to the 
trestle-trees, stopping the bights to the forward horns ; have 
an after guy leading to the mainmast head, or well aft on 
deck, to keep them clear of the after top rim, in the pas- 
sage aloft. Man the girtlines ! sway aloft ! using the 
guy to keep the cross-trees clear of the mast and top. Land 
the cross-trees on the lower cap, the forward part inclining 
upward, and resting against the topmast ; in this position, 
lash the after horns to the lower mast head to keep them 
steady. Cast off the girtlines, and remove the girtline 
blocks from the topmast head ; tallow the cross trees, and 
the topmast at the hounds, in the wake of the cross trees. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 233 

Now lower hands 07?ie ly ; (hands being stationed at the 
lower cap), the topmast is slacked down, until the cross 
trees are eased fair over the mast-head, the after horns 
being still secured to the lower cap. Now cut this lashing, 
sway up on the topmast, and lodge the cross-trees on the 
hounds of the topmast, bearing them well down in their 
places. Proceed to 

RIG THE TOPMAST. 

The rigging goes over the topmast head as follows : 
First, burton pendants, shrouds, then backstays, and last 
the fore-and-aft stays. 

Lash girtline blocks, with falls rove off, to the tenon of 
the topmast head. The gin-bar being securely in its place, 
shackle the topsail tye blocks. 

Now, sway up, and heave the hounds of the topmast 
clear of the lower mast, and, with the girtlines, send up 
the topmast funnel and place it. Then send up the burton 
pendants (if fitted to go over) shrouds, backstays, and 
fore-and-aft stays, in the same manner precisely as the 
lower rigging is sent up, except that the topmast rigging 
is sent up abaft and outside the top \ after which, shift the 
girtlines to the after horns of the topmast cross trees. 

As before explained, the topmast and jib-stays are seized 
together at the collar, in the rigging loft, the jib-stay on 
top \ they consequently are sent aloft together. 

Soft wood bolsters are no longer used. Oak bolsters 
are bolted to the trestle-tree, and are covered by the lower 
part of the topmast funnel, which is rounded off to fit over 
them. 

The burton pendants were fitted to hook or shackle to 
e) T e-bolts in the under side of the topmast trestle-trees, but 
they are now being fitted the same as the lower pendants 



234 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve the topmast stays through the bees in the bowsprit, 
and seize in the hearts. With bowsprits fitted for ramming 
they are placed in chocks 2X the bees, so as to be hove out 
quickly when rigging in the bowsprit. 

SHIP THE TOPMAST CAP. 

A convenient way to ship the topmast cap is to lash girt- 
line blocks, with falls rove off, at the topmast-head {well aft). 
Overhaul the girtlines down before all and make fast the 
ends to the forward bolts in the cap {bolts down) stopping 
the bight to the after bolts. Man the girtlines. Sway 
aloft ! When high enough the men at the mast-head cut 
the stops to the after bolts, tallow the mortice and tenon, 
Sway higher ! and the cap is easily placed over the the mast- 
head. The girtline blocks are then removed and made fast 
to the bolts under the cap. 

A topmast cap may be shipped when the topgallant-mast 
is sent aloft, in the same manner the lower cap was shipped, 
by slueing the mast, etc., etc. The other method, however, 
is much more convenient. Topgallant-masts are sometimes 
used in the same manner as topmasts, when rigging ship, 
particularly in large vessels. 

After shipping the topmast cap, man the top tackles, 
Sway up and fid ! set up the rigging. 

The methods above described, of rigging a topmast before 
fidding will answer very well for the training-ships — and 
small vessels generally — but in large vessels it is safer and 
better to rig the topmast " on the fid" (after being fidded). 

The main and mizzen topmasts are sent aloft and rigged 
in precisely the same manner. 

RIG OUT THE JIB-BOOM. 

The jib-boom is on the dock, heel aft, topside up. Hang 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 235 

the boom a little heel heavy by means of a stout strap or 
lashing, which is taken around the boom near its centre \ 
reeve a backer through the sheave in the boom to keep the 
strap from slipping. To the strap, hook the lower block of 
the pendant tackle; have a shore and fore-and-aft guy made 
fast to the boom. Man the pendant tackle, tend the guys, 
and sway the boom on board, pointing the head between 
the stays, through, and about two feet beyond, the bowsprit 
cap. 

Reeve the jib-stay, on which the hanks have been strung, 
through the sheave hole near the end of the jib-boom, and 
proceed to reeve the heel- rope, first unhooking the pendant 
tackle, and casting off the lashing and guys. 

Take the end of the heel-rope from out in through a 
strong single block, which is hooked on the port side of the 
bowsprit cap, then through the sheave hole in the heel of 
the jib-boom from port to starboard, and clinch the end to 
a bolt on the starboard side of the bowsprit cap. 

The whisker-booms should now be placed, and triced up 
by jiggers hooked to the fore topmast stays ; the dolphin- 
striker hooked (with martingale stay and back ropes attached 
to the band). Now place the iron band over the hounds of 
the jib-boom. The jib-guys and martingale stays have 
already been shackled to this band. Seize the outer ends 
of the foot-ropes to the eyes for the jib-guys, the inboard 
ends being secured to the bowsprit cap; place the wythe for 
the flying-jib-boom. Man the heel-rope, and rig out! a 
whip from the topmast-head will assist in getting the heel in 
place, or sometimes a Spanish windlass rigged across the 
topmast stays is used. As soon as the heel is well down in 
its mortice, clamp and secure it. 

Now place the rigging over the whisker-booms as follows : 



236 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

whisker-jumpers, jib-guys, and the strapped bull's eyes of 
the flying-jib-guys; then set up the rigging, first the back- 
ropes, then the whisker-jumpers (temporarily), and the jib- 
guys last. Regulate the droop of the whisker by the jumper, 
slacking the tackles. 

The topmasts are now up, jib-boom rigged out, and all 
rigging set up. We are now ready to cross topsail yards. 

Sometimes topgallant masts are sent up and fidded before 
the topsail and lower yards are across. But the general cus- 
tom is to cross topsail yards, send up lower yards, and after- 
wards to send up topgallant-masts and cross topgallant and 
royal yards. 

TO CROSS TOPSAIL YARDS. 

The topsail yards having been fitted at the loft with foot- 
ropes, stirrups, parrels, flemish-horses, and all iron work, 
including the gin-blocks on top for the tyes and quarter 
blocks under the yard, are brought to the wharf or dock, 
and are placed abreast their respective masts, the port yard- 
arms outboard or towards the ship, jaws aft. 

Hook the topsail lifts to the lift's bolts on the yard, and 
stop them down with rope yarns to the jackstay on top of 
the yard. Pass a strong lashing around the topmast-head 
below the collar of the stay, to this lashing hook the upper 
block of a strong double tackle, (sufficiently heavy to handle 
the lower yard also) the lower block of which, is hooked 
to a stout strap, which has been passed around the centre 
of the yard and well lashed down to the port quarter. 
Overhaul down the top burtons, and hook them to their 
respective quarter straps on the yards. 

Take the hauling part of the double tackle or topmast- 
head tackle, to a leader near the topsail sheet-bitts, and 
station hands to take in the slack of the top burtons as the 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 237 

yard goes aloft. Make rast a strong shore-guy to the yard, 
set it taut, and take a turn for easing away as the yard 
leaves the dock, also make fast a fore-and-aft-guy, to keep 
the yard clear of the top. Reeving lines for the lifts are 
rove through sister blocks in the topmast rigging, and led 
down into the tops. When all ready, man the top-mast- 
head TACKLE AND TOP BURTONS ! SWAY ALOFT ! easing 

the shore-guy and tending the fore-and-aft guy. When 
the centre or slings of the yard is clear of the lower cap, 
avast hoisting ! come up the quarter lashing, bend the 
reeving lines to the pointed end of the lifts, cut the stops, 
and reeve the lifts through the sister blocks in the topmast 
rigging, get the port or upper lift down to about the square 
mark, hook the upper or port brace block (with brace rove 
off), and mouse it, sway higher, until able to hook the lower 
or starboard brace block (with brace rove off), mouse it, 
and at the same time get the starboard or lower lift down 
to the square mark. Now lower away together, tending 
the burtons, easing down the port burton and hauling on 
the starboard one ; bring to and jaw the yard ; unhook the 
topmast-head tackle from the yard, and overhaul it down 
for the lower yard ; reeve off the tyes, pass the parrel, pass 
the foot-ropes abaft the mast and seize off; square the yard. 

The main and mizzen topsail yards are crossed in precisely 
the same manner. 

send up lower yards. 

The foot-ropes, stirrups, flemish-horses, reefing jackstays, 
and the necessary bands and bolts, are fitted to the yards 
before leaving the loft. The yards are placed, like the top- 
sail yards, abreast their respective masts, with the port yard- 
arms towards the ship, trusses aft. 

Lash the lower block of the topmast head tackle firmly 



238 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

to the slings of the yard, keeping the sling bolt clear. 
Unhook the top burtons from the topsail yard, and hook 
them to their respective straps, on each side of the lower 
yard ; if a heavy yard, hook the lower pendant tackles 
(which are hooked to the forward legs of the pendants) to 
strong straps, which are passed around each quarter of the 
yard. Have a strong shore guy on the dock, and for a for- 
ward guy, have a good tackle, one block of which is 
hooked to the centre of the yard, the other being hooked 
to a strap at the bowsprit cap. 

Single and overhaul the lower lifts, and hook them to 
the lift bolts on the yard arms. Now man the mast-head 
tackle, top burtons, pendant tackles, and have hands to 
take in the slack of the lifts. Have the shore and forward 
guys set taut and well tended. 

Walk away ! and sway the yard up and inboard, resting 
it across the rail upon skids or chocks (that have been 
placed there to receive it). Hook the brace blocks with 
braces rove off. (If the braces are hooked on the dock 
there is no necessity to land the yard on the rail.) Man 
all the gear, tend well the forward guy, keeping a strain on 
it to guy the truss clear of the mast. 

Sway aloft ! being careful to keep an even strain on all 
the gear as the yard goes up. When high enough, hook 
or shackle the slings, place the navel bolt, slacking the for- 
ward guy to assist in bolting the truss, double the "lifts, 
come up all the gear and square the yard. 

The main and cross-jack yards are sent up in the same 
manner ; it is seldom necessary to use the pendant tackles 
for the cross-jack yards, and with cross-jack braces rove 
off they will take the place of a fore-and-aft tackle. 

Lower yards are usually sent aloft by jeer falls, rove 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 239 

through large treble blocks called jeers, the upper blocks 
being secured to the mast-head by lashings or a shackle, 
the lower block being lashed to the slings of the yard. 
In some modern ships the jeers are of iron, and are perma- 
nently placed to form a part of the slings of the lower yard, 
the blocks taking the place of a few links of the chain. 

For expedition, however, in getting on board and send- 
ing up topsail and lower yards, spare boats or any heavy 
weights, that it may be necessary to handle with a long 
, purchase; the top?nast head tackle is preferred by riggers. 
The longer the purchase the greater the drift either forward, 
aft, outboard or inboard, and consequently the easier to 
handle, and the quicker the work is accomplished. The 
ship can be rigged and dismantled with this purchase. 

TO SEND UP "TOPGALLANT-MASTS. 

The Fore. 
Whip or pass the topgallant masts on board, place them 
abreast of their respective masts, heel aft, after side up, 
the fore and mizzen topgallant-masts on the starboard side, 
the main on the port side of the lower masts ; hook the 
topgallant top blocks, aloft, to the eye -bolt under the top- 
mast cap, (the fore and mizzen on the port side of the cap, 
the main on the starboard side) ; reeve the mast rope- 
through the top-gallant top block, from aft forward, down 
through the hole in the cross-trees and through a lizard, 
which is to be made fast at the royalmast-head, then through 
the sheave near the heel of the topgallant- mast from port 
to starboard, back aloft, through the square hole in the 
cross-trees, and clinch it to the eye-bolt in the under side 
of the cap, opposite to the topgallant top block; stop the 
hauling part of the mast-rope to the hounds of the royal- 



240 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

mast until the mast is swayed up and down; send the 
hauling part down abaft everything. When all ready, man 
the mast rope, sway up and down ! (man on lower yard 
cut the stop at the hounds of the royal-mast). Sway aloft ! 
and point the mast through the hole in the cross-trees, cast 
off the lizard, and clamp the forward side of the trestle- 
trees as soon as the heel of the mast is clear of the topsail 
yard; proceed to 

SEND UP THE TOPGALLANT RIGGING. 

It goes over the funnel as follows: First, the foretopgal- 
lant and flying-jib stay; second, the shrouds; third and 
last, the back-stays. The rigging is all fitted in the loft, 
placed upon the topgallant-funnel in regular order and seized 
there. 

Overhaul both girtlines down abaft (the blocks of which 
are hooked to the after eye-bolts of the topmast cap.) Bend 
one girtline around all parts of the rigging, about four feet 
below the funnel, and stop it to the funnel with a good stop; 
bend the other girtline around all parts of the rigging, about 
one-fourth of the distance between the funnel and the ends 
of the shrouds; this is to assist in "lighting up" the rig- 
ging as it goes aloft. When ready, sway aloft ! and when 
high enough, the man at the mast-head cuts the funnel stop 
and places the funnel on the topmast cap, fair over the round 
hole of the cap, ready for the topgallant-mast ; if necessary 
lash it there ; cast off the girtlines, take the backstays into 
the chains and reeve the laniards; reeve the topgallant-stay, 
and send the flying-jib-stay forward, ready for reeving ; 
reeve the topgallant shrouds through the horns of the 
cross-trees, between the topmast shrouds, over the futtock 
staffs down into the top. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 2 J.J 

Overhaul the girtlines down abaft again. The royal rigging 
has been hooked or seized to the band that goes over the 
hounds of the royal-mast, before it leaves the rigging loft ; 
bend on the girtlines abaft in the same manner as described 
for the topgallant rigging, sway aloft ! and place the band 
fair over the funnel ready for the royal-mast; above all, 
place the truck with signal halliards rove off, spindle and 
lightning conductor attached. Take the royal-shrouds 
through the holes in the arms of the jack, to the top; the 
back-stays to the chains, and the royal-stay forward ready 
for reeving. 

Now man the topgallant-mast rope (cast off the funnel 
lashing, if lashed) sway up ! and fid. The truck goes on 
the head of the mast, the band takes at the hounds of the 
royal-mast, and the funnel takes at the hounds of the top- 
gallant-mast; spread the rigging as the mast goes aloft and 
see the band and funnel fair and square on the mast. 

The main and mizzen topgallant-masts are sent aloft in 
the same manner. 

RIG OUT THE FLYING-JIB-BOOM. 

Whip or pass the flying-jib-boom on board, point it out- 
side of the stays and on the starboard side of the jib-boom, 
passing it through the bight of a rope which is taken around 
the jib-boom and topmast-stays ; lash a block to the shackle 
on the starboard side, of the end, of the jib-boom, reeve the 
heel-rope through this block, then through the sheave in the 
heel of the boom, from starboard to port and hitch the 
standing part, to the shackle, on the opposite side of the 
jib-boom; man the heel rope! haul out! point the end 
through the flying-jib-wythe, and a few feet beyond, place 
the iron band for the guys and martingales, passing the 
ii 



242 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

bull's eye straps (that the guys reeve through) over the 
whisker-boom ends; (if not already done); bear the boom 
in its place and clamp it; set up the martingale guys and 
stays, then topgallant and royal -rigging. All stays reeving 
through bees or sheaves have their hearts or dead-eyes 
turned, in after being rove. 

CROSS TOPGALLANT YARDS. 

The topgallant yards are whipped or passed on board, 
having been rigged in the loft ; and are placed in the lower 
rigging, the fore and mizzen on the port side, the main on 
the starboard side. 

The light yards are secured forward of the forward swifter 
of the lower rigging, the lower yard-arms resting in a hang- 
ing eye, called a stirrup, made fast outside in the chains; 
the upper yard-arms being secured with a good lashing 
around the yard-arm and swifter. 

The topgallant-yard-rope with sister-hooks in the end, 
and lizard attached, is rove through a good-sized grommet, 
then from forward aft through the sheave in the topgallant- 
mast (or the jack-block) down abaft all on deck. The 
sister-hooks are hooked to the slings of the yard, and the 
lizard is rove through the eye or thimble of the quarter- 
strap on the upper yard-arm, and made fast with a slippery 
hitch to the quarter-strap on the opposite side ; the grommet 
is slipped over the upper yard-arm, and the tripping line 
stopped to the slings. When all ready, man the topgallant- 
yard-rope; Sway out of the chains! The lashing which 
secures the yard in the rigging is eased off, and the yard is 
swayed up and down the lower mast, the upper yard-arm 
clear of the lower yard. In the mean time, the lifts and 
braces have been let go and well overhauled, then taken 
into the topmast cross-trees ready for the yards. When all 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 243 

ready, Sway aloft ! When high enough (the upper yard- 
arm at the cross-trees,) slip off the grommet and put on the 
ttppcr lift and brace over the snorter, keeping the lift in line 
with the iron jack-stay, and the brace leading fair aft. 

Now sway higher ! high enough when the slings of the 
yard -are well above the topmast cap, and the thimble of 
lizard near the topgallant sheave hole; put on the lower 
lift and brace over the snorter, and take down the slack 
of the lower lift in the top. See the lizard all clear for 
slipping, the parrel ready for passing. Keep the yard up 
and down the mast,by hauling in on the lower foot rope. 
When all ready, tend the lifts and braces ! sway across ! 
Cast off the lizard, slack down the yard rope until the yard 
is well down on the cap, pass the parrel lashing, and square 
the yard. 

The main and mizzen are sent aloft in the same manner. 

CROSS ROYAL YARDS. 

The yards are whipped on board, and placed in the 
lower rigging; the fore and mizzen in the starboard, and 
the main in the port rigging. 

The foot ropes, iron bands, slings, quarter blocks, etc., 
etc., are fitted at the loft. 

Send up and cross royal yards in the same manner pre- 
cisely, as the topgallant yards were crossed, except that the 
lifts and braces are taken in to the "jack" before placing 
them over the yard arms. 



CHAPTER XL 

STAYING OF MASTS, AND SETTING UP RIGGING. 

What is the general custom of staying masts ? 

The foremast is stayed plumb, or straight up and down; 
the mainmast with a slight rake aft; and the mizzen mast 
a little more raking aft than the main. 

STAYING A MAST BY THE USE OF BATTENS. 

Conjointly with marks on the deck and masts, battens 
are used in setting up rigging, to show whether the mast 
requires going to starboard or to port, forward or aft. To 
cut them, in the first instance, draw a line from the centre 
of the mast-hole across the deck, measure off two equal 
distances on each side of the mast, and mark the extrem- 
ities. Take two long battens of equal length, place one 
end of each on the marks on each side of the deck, and 
rest the other ends against the mast. Pull the rigging 
up on either side, till the two ends come abreast of each 
other, and the mast must necessarily be upright. Drive a 
nail on each side of the mast and deck for permanent 
marks ; but one batten only need now be retained. 

The rake being determined, say half an inch to a foot, 
a plumb-line is dropped from the centre of the mast, from 
any distance up, and the mast raked till a corresponding 
distance is plumbed. If, for instance, the plumb-line is 
dropped from the trestle-trees at sixty feet, the line must 
plumb at thirty inches abaft the mast. 

The rake of the masts has reference to the keel; but, as 
the deck and the keel are not parallel, the angle between 
(244) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



2 45 



their planes must be considered, when determining the 
angle the batten should have to the deck in order that it 
may have the assigned angle to the keel. 

Draw a fore-and-aft line from the centre of the mast, 
place the end of the batten on it, either before or abaft the 
mast as most convenient ; mark where the ends take the 
mast and deck, with a couple of nails, which, with the 
side marks and this batten, are for future guidance, it 
being needed merely to place the batten afterwards against 
the mast, to show how the latter requires to be moved. 

STAYING LOWER MASTS. 




Staying "Lower mast." 
The bowsprit having been secured, the shrouds and bob- 
stays set up, the gammoning set up with nut and screw, 
the foremast is then stayed. It is first got into position 
by hooking two pendant tackles to the forward legs of the 
mast-head pendants, leading them aft, setting taut and be- 
laying; this is called i: backing the lower pendants;" then 



246 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



a runner and tackle is made fast below the mast-head, led 
forward to the bowsprit, and set taut until the mast stands 
according to the draft. 




"Strap aitd toggle, for laniards." 

How do you set up fore- stays ? 

Let the collars of the stays down snugly over the eyes 
of the lower rigging. At the distance of eight or ten feet 
up the stays, from the upper heart, place canvas to protect 
them from chafe, and hook the upper^block of a stay-luff 
to a strap over this canvas. Take a round turn in the end 
of the laniards of the stays, and through this turn, place a 
toggle, and clap a strap around both parts of the laniard 
(place canvas to protect the laniard) below the toggle. To 
this strap hook the lower block of the luff-tackles, and take 
the end of the hauling part of these tackles, with a blackwall 
hitch, to the lower block of the mast-head pendant-tackles 
(which are hooked to straps around the lower mast-head, to 
be in line with the stays). Set up both stays together, and 
then bind the parts of the laniards, temporarily, by clapping 
on a stout racking seizing to keep them from slipping. 

How are the ends of laniards {for hearts) finally secured? 

When all ready, fill up the swallow of the heart by ex- 
pending the laniard — the ends being taken and tucked 
down, along and between the other parts of the laniards, 
and well secured with neat marline seizings. By this method, 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



247 




' * Setting 
lower rigging 



the laniards look uniform or alike, and pre- 
sent a neat, snug appearance. 

The main and mizzen stays are set up in a 
similar manner. 

How do you set up lozucr rigging? 

Place canvas on the shrouds about half- 
way up, to avoid chafe, and tail the blocks 
tdj\ of the luffs over it. Take a round turn in 
fA the bight of the laniards, and to straps around 
a toggle thrust through (place canvas to pro- 
tect laniards) hook the other blocks, and 
lead the falls up to the pendant-tackles as in 
Fig. Set up all. the shrouds in this manner, 
a pair on each side at a time. Commence 
with the forward shrouds to set up. After 
setting up, temporarily, get a pull, together, 
of the forward and after shroud, on each 
side, and secure them ; then take in the slack 
of all the other shrouds and set up for a full 
due. 

How are the ends of the laniards secured? 

As fast as each pair of shrouds is set up, 
secure the laniards, temporarily, by clapping 
on a stout racking seizing, binding the parts 
of the laniards. To secure for a ' 'full due, ' ' 
take a neat hitch, called a "laniard hitch" 
above the upper dead-eye, and secure the 
ends of laniards in exactly the same manner 
as the laniards of the lower stays were se- 
cured . 

What is done after the shrouds are set up, 
ting up an j fr e f ore t ] ie l an i ar ds are secured or hitched 

"7 rr 1 ? 11 rr ' 

for "full due?" 



248 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



The sheer-poles are seized on with a cross-seizing, to keep 
the dead-eyes in line, a piece of leather or parcelling being 
placed underneath the sheer-pole, at each shroud, to pre- 
vent chafe; preparations are then made to rattle down. 
Wlien are the masts wedged and the mast- coats put on ? 
As soon as the masts are properly stayed. Mast-coats are 
made of No. i and No. 2 canvas. 

Never wedge a mast for full due, until the rigging is well 
set up, and the mast properly stayed. 
What is capping the rigging? 

Covering the ends of the standing rigging with tarred 
canvas, to protect them from the weather. 

What preparations are necessary for rattling down ? 
The rigging is swiftered in and sparred down. The tar 
and tallow (slush) is put in small pots, convenient for work, 
the marline-spikes at hand, the ratline stuff well stretched, 
the turns all taken out, and the stuff brought up in coils 
and placed under the rigging that is to be rattled down. 
WJtat is ' ' swiftering in ? ' ' 

Passing small-sized rope around the shrouds, at intervals, 
in order that they may not get 
out of line when the ratlines are 
hove taut. 

What is " sparring down ? ' ' 
Lashing small spars or oars in 
the rigging, four or five feet 
apart, for men to stand on when 
rattling down; it will prevent 
the spread of the rigging. The 
forward ends of the oars or 
spars must be even or square. 
? 




' c J?allines. 



What is " rattling down' 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 249 

Hitching and seizing the ratlines in their proper places 
(parallel to the sheer-pole) on the shrouds. 

Wliere do you commence seizing when rattling down the 
starboard rigging ? 

The first two or three ratlines above the sheer-pole are 
made of rod iron, and are parallel to the sheer-pole ; they 
should be served over like the sheer-pole, to prevent rust 
and to appear like the rest of the ratlines. These will not 
get out of shape, when the rigging is manned, before laying 
aloft. Commence seizing, next above the iron ratlines on 
the forward shroud, (for starboard rigging) in order that the 
ratlines may be square with the sheer-pole, and to save waste 
of material. 

Describe rattling down the starboard rigging ? 

Commence at the after shroud with a small coil of ratline 
stuff, in the right hand, about the length you will require for 
hitches, and form slack clove-hitches on each shroud until 
you reach the forward shroud; then splice an eye in the end 
of the ratline stuff, and seize this eye to the forward shroud, 
fourteen inches above the upper iron ratline. This eye seiz- 
ing must be passed, so the eye will lie flat (in a horizontal 
plane) showing only one part of the rope. Now commence 
and work aft, heaving well taut each clove-hitch, in succes- 
sion, from forward aft, and keeping them square with the 
forward eye; tarring the shrouds under the hitches, and 
knocking the parts of the hitches together, so as to make a 
neat job. Never knock the hitch up y but always knock 
down; in that way you tauten the rattline. When you come 
to the after shroud cut the stuff, leaving sufficient end, and 
splice an eye; seize this eye to the after shroud, in the same 
manner as the forward eye is seized. In this way you have 
been able to cut without waste of material; and you are 



250 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

now ready with the end for the next ratline. If on the 
port side, work in the opposite way, that is, commence 
hitching from forward, and make the first eye-seizing on the 
after shroud. Two men, one in the starboard and orie in 
the port rigging, can work from the same coil, each taking 
an end. 

How do you tell the distance between the ratlines ? 

A measuring rod is used, which is of the proper length, 
fourteen inches. 

How are the fore topmast-stays set up ? 

The top burtons are overhauled down, each burton being 
hooked into its own pendant, and then hooked into a strap 
on the bowsprit, in a line with the stays. Set taut on both 
burtons until the mast is far enough forward. About ten 
feet up, have canvas on the stay to protect it from chafe ; 
then set up both stays at once, with luff-tackles clapped on 
the stays, and to ends of the laniards. Secure the laniards 
the same way as described for the lower stays. 

The maintopmast-stay is set up in the same manner, ex- 
cept that the maintop-burtons are brought to the foot ot 
the foremast and set taut, and the luff-tackles are, up and 
down, on the main topmast-stays abaft the foremast. The 
laniards are secured as before. 

The mizzen topmast-stay can be set up with the luffs on 
the stay, and without the aid of top-burtons, the mast be- 
ing lighter and the stay single. 

How do you set up topmast rigging? 

The runner (which has a thimble in one end) being rove 
through a single block, hooked, to a cat's paw, on the lan- 
iard, is tailed on to the shroud-leg about six or eight feet 
above, and the lower block of the top-burton then hooked 
to the thimble. Before hitching the laniard, seize on the 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



25 1 






Setting tip top- 



sheer-poles and futtock-staffs — the latter 
inside of the topmast-shrouds — under the 
eyes of the rigging, and swifter in. Seize 
the forward cat-harpen legs (on each side) 
to the forward shrouds, and the after 
ones (around the mast) to the after 
shrouds, then spar and rattle down. 

How is topgallant rigging set up ? 

By using lift -jiggers or the topgallant 
purchase in the tops. The royal rigging 
is set up in the same manner. 

How are topmast-backstays set up ? 

In the same manner as the lower rig- 
ging, the backstays on each side being set 
up at the same time. 

How are topgallant and 
royal-backstays set up ? 

In the same manner as top- 
mast-backstays, setting up both 
sides together, care being taken 
not to get the masts out of 
line. 

What is snaking down ? 

Passing a small rope (with 
turns) in a zigzag direction 
between two larger ropes. 

Rigging should never be set 
up unless the boatswain, or one 
of his mates, is looking out 
to keep the masts in line ; par- 
ticularly when the backstays 
and fore-and-aft stays are be- 
ing set up. 



n 



' 'Snaking 
down. ' 



CHAPTER XII. 

RUNNING RIGGING. 

An apprentice, in learning the running rigging Oi a ves- 
sel, should inform himself regarding the following points: 
First, what is the object of the rope ? Second, where does it 
belay ? And third, to reeve it. So that, if an order should be 
given to " Man the royal clewlines / " he will understand at 
once that the royals are to come in (for the clewlines haul 
the clews of the sail up to the quarters of the yard). And 
he should be so well acquainted with the lead, and belaying, 
of the gear, that he will be able to jump and man, not only 
the royal-clewlines, but any rope, without a moment's hesi- 
tation, day or night. Therefore, learn- at once the use of a 
rope, then where it belays, and afterwards to reeve it. 

The following methods of reeving running rigging are 
those in general use in the navy. There are, of course, dif- 
ferent ways of reeving g^ar, but in describing the following, 
the object has been to observe the common usage, — and to 
lead the gear fair, without chafe, and to get a good purchase. 

Only general ideas can be gained from a description. "The 
better way is to go on deck and follow each piece of gear 
(with the eye), from one end to the other. In that way it 
will become impressed upon the mind, and not easily for- 
gotten. 

THE USES OF THE DIFFERENT ROPES. 

What are halliards used for ? 

To hoist a sail on the mast or stay. 

What are sheets used for ? 

( 252) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 253 

To spread the foot of a sail. 

What are tacks used for ? 

To haul forward the clew of a course, and haul out the 
outer clew of topgallant and topmast studding sails. 
Courses have a tack and sheet shackled to each clew; the 
tack is always used on the weather side, the sheet on the 
lee side. 

Whvt are braces used for ? 

To swing the yards around, horizontally, into such a posi- 
tion that the wind will strike the sails properly. Braces are 
led (if possible) from the yard-arms aft and downward, be- 
cause, the square sails being secured at the two bottom cor- 
ners to the yard immediately below them, the wind blow- 
ing on the sails will bring a strain on the yard-arms, blow- 
ing them forward and upward. 

What are lifts used for ? 

To support the yard-arms and keep them from drooping. 

JVhat are clew-lines used for? 

To haul the clews of a topsail, topgallant-sail, or royal, 
up to the quarters of their respective yards. They are abaft 
the sail. 

What are clew-jiggers used for ? 

To haul the clews of a topsail or course, forward of, and 
above, the yards. They are forward of the sail, and only 
used for convenience in furling. 

What are clew-garnets icsedfor? 

When taking in a course, to haul each clew up to the 
quarter of its respective yard. Used only on courses. 

What are bunt-lines used for ? 

When taking in square sails (except royals and studding 
sails) they are used to haul the foot of the sail up to, or a 
little above the yards. Buntlines are forward of a sail. 



254 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What are leech-lines used for ? 

When taking in a course, leech-lines are used to haul the 
leeches of the sail up to the yard, on the forward side. 

What are bunt-jiggers or bunt-whips used for? 

To haul up the bunt of a sail when furling. 

What are reef tackles used for? 

To haul the leeches of a sail chock up to the yard-arms, 
to assist the men in reefing. Reef-tackles are also used to 
stretch the head of a sail taut along the yard, when bending. 

What are bowlines used for ? 

After a sail is hoisted, and the yards braced up, the bow- 
lines are used to haul and steady a weather-leech further 
forward, to make it catch the wind better. 

What are brails used for ? 

When taking in a trysail or spanker. They lead from the 
after leech of a sail, up to the gaff and" mast on both sides. 

What are vangs used for ? 

For steadying the gaff, when the sail is brailed up. 

What are downhauls used for ? 

For hauling down the heads of fore-and-aft sails. 

What are outhauls used for ? 

To haul a spanker out to the end of its boom, and a try- 
sail and spanker out to the ends of their gaffs, or a lower 
studding sail out to its boom. 

REEVING THE GEAR. 

Rwining rigging on the bowsprit. 

In reeving the running rigging, it is rove as it would be 
starting with the end of a rope, from the coil. 

WJiere do the foretopmast stay-sail halliards belay? 

At the after part of the fore-pin rail, port side. They 
lead aft. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 255 

Reeve them ? 

They consist of a whip and runner. A block is spliced 
in one end of the runner, the other end of which is rove 
through a hanging block on the after end of the port fore- 
topmast trestle-trees, then to another hanging block on the 
forward end of the port foretopmast trestle-trees, down the 
port fore topmast stay, and is hooked to the foretopmast 
stay-sail with sister-hooks. The whip is rove up through 
the single block which is spliced to the runner, and the 
standing part is secured at the port fore '-pin rail. 

Where does the foretopmast stay -sail downhaul belay ? 

At the forecastle or head-pin rail, on the port side. It 
leads aft. 

Reeve it? 

It is rove through a leadex at the forecastle pm rail, then 
up through a block made fast near the tack of the staysail 
(at the foot of the stay) and is clinched to the head of the 
sail. 

Where do the foretopmast stay-sail sheets belay ? 

There are two sheets, and they belay, one on each side of 
the forecastle, near the bulwarks, and forward of the fore- 
rigging. 

Reeve them ? 

They consist of whips and pendants. Each pendant is 
made fast to the clew of the sail, and has a block turned in 
the other end, which forms the outer block of the whip; 
the inner block of the whip hooks to an eye-bolt on the 
forecastle, the standing part of the whip is made fast to the 
outer block. 

Describe the centipede on the jib-boom ? 

A strong piece of rope, one end of which is secured at 
the head of the jib-boom, and the other at the bowsprit cap. 



256 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Through the strands,at intervals of four feet, small pieces of 
rope are placed; these small ropes are called centipede 
legs, and are used to bind the sail down to the jib-boom 
and make a neat stow of it. 

Where do the jib halliards belay? 

At the after part of the fore-pin rail, starboard side. 
They lead aft. 
Reeve them t 

They reeve up through a hanging gin-block on the after 
part of the starboard foretopmast trestle-trees, then through 
a hanging gin-block on the forward part of the starboard 
fortopmast trestle-trees, down through a block at the head 
of the sail, back up the stay, and the standing part is 
hitched and seized to the collar of the jib and foretopmast 
stays. 

Where does the jib-downhaul belay ? 

On the starboard side of the forecastle pin-rail. It leads 
aft. 

Reeve it? 

It is rove through a leader on the starboard side of the 
forecastle pin -rail, to a block secured near the foot of the 
stay, and the standing part is rove through a few hanks and 
clinched to the head of the sail. 
Where ao the jib-sheets belay? 

At the forward end of the fore pin-rail, (both sides.)* 
Reeve them ? 

They are double, fitted with whips and pendants, in the 
same manner as the foretopmast-staysail. The whip reeves 
the same, and the standing part of the whip makes fast in 
the same way to the outer block, at the end of the pendant. 
Describe the centipede on the flying-jib-boom ? 
It is for the same purpose, and fitted in the same manner 
as the jib centipede. 

* In heavy weather they belay to the cleats on the deck or water- 
ways, just forward of the fore rigging. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 257 

WJiere do the flying-jib halliards belay? 

At the after part of the fore pin -rail, p07't side. They 
lead aft. 

Reeve them ? 

They are single. Reeve up through a gin-block secured on 
the port side of the jack, down the flying-jib stay, and the 
standing part hooks to the head of the sail with sister- 
hooks. 

Where does the flying- jib downhaul belay ? 

At the forecastle pin-rail — port side. 

Reeve it? 

It reeves through a leader in the forecastle pin-rail, out 
through a block at the foot of the stay (or at the end of 
the flying-jib-boom) and the standing part is clinched to 
the head of the sail. 

Where do the flying-jib sheets belay ? 

At the cavil in the forward part of the fore pin-rail, both 
sides. 4 

Reeve them ? 

They are double, but have single whips; the standing 
part is hooked to a bolt on the side of the forecastle, and 
reeves through a block in the end of the pendant. 

Jib and flying-jib sheets are generally led, through lead- 
ers, on the forecastle. 

RUNNING RIGGING ON FOREMAST AND YARDS. 

Where do the fore braces belay? 

At the main fife rail. They lead forward in each gang- 
way : (sometimes they lead aft.) 

Reeve them ? 

They lead through the sheaves in the main fife-rail 
(from forward aft) up to blocks on main bibbs, forward 



258 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

to the brace blocks on the yard-arms (from down up), back, 
and the standing parts are hooked to bolts on the side of 
the main bibbs. 

Where do the fore tacks belay ? 

On each side of the forecastle, to cavils or cleats on the 
spirketting near the bulwarks, just forward of the fore pin- 
rail ; in heavy weather they belay to the bitts. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through chocks in the bulwarks out to large 
single blocks, on the fore bumpkins, up through tack-blocks 
shackled to the spectacles of the sail, back, and the stand- 
ing parts are hooked, to the ends of the fore bumpkins; both 
fore and main tacks are wormed and served two or three 
fathoms from the end, as a protection from wet, chafe, etc. 

The hooks for tacks, sheets, halliards and all running 
gear having hooks, etc. spliced to the standing part, are 
spliced on after the rope is rove off. 

Where do the fore sheets belay? 

To cleats just abaft the fore pin-rails, both sides. They 
lead forward. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through the bulwarks sheaves, thence through 
sheet-blocks shackled to the clews of the sails, back to the 
bulwarks, and the standing parts are hooked with sister- 
hooks to eye-bolts, that are just abaft and below the bul- 
wark sheaves for the hauling parts. 

Where do the fore and main clew-garnets belay ? 

To their respective fife-rails, both sides. They lead aft. 

Reeve the fore? 

They are rove through the leaders at the fore fife-rail, up 
through the quarter blocks on the fore yard, then down 
through blocks at the clews of the sail, back to the quarters 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 259 

of the yard, where the standing part is taken around the 
yard, outside the quarter block, and secured to its own part. 
The main are rove in the same manner. Substitute main 
for fore. 

WJiere does the fore bowli?ie belay ? 

To the forecastle pin -rail. It leads aft. 

Reeve it? 

It reeves through a block on the fore stay; then, through 
the bull's eyes on the bowline bridle, forward again, and the 
standing part is seized to a' bridle on the fore stay. 

Where do the fore and main reef tackles belay ? 

They are belayed to their respective pin-rails, both sides, 
(fore and main clew-jiggers are used for whips.) 

Reeve the fore ? 

They are fitted as pendants. A thimble is turned in one 
end, the other ends are rove down through blocks on the 
fore yard-arms, and hook to the reef-tackle cringle in the 
leeches of the sail. The fore clew-jiggers are used for the 
whips, the lower block of which hooks to the thimbles in 
the upper ends of the reef-pendants. The main are rove 
the same. Substitute main for fore. 

Where do the fore buntline s belay ? 

Usually at the forecastle pin-rail (on both sides.) They 
lead aft. 

Reeve them ? 

The upper and outer legs toggle to the outer buntline tog- 
gles on the foot of the sail, then up to the blocks under the 
forward part of the fore top, down through the upper sheaves 
of the fiddle-blocks, back to the blocks under the top, and 
down to the inner buntline toggle on the sail. The lower 
legs reeve through the leaders in the forecastle pin-rail, to 
blocks on the bowsprit, up to the lower sheaves of the fiddle- 



260 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

blocks, and the standing part is seized to the fore stay. In 
steamers they are up and down the mast, which is neater 
and better. 

Where do the fore and mam leech-lines belay ? 

At the forward part of their respective pin-rails, both 
sides. 

Reeve the fore ? 

There are two of them, the inner and outer leech-line; 
they reeve up through fairleaders on the lower rigging and 
double blocks under the top, to single blocks seized to the 
jackstay on the quarters of the yard, down, and are clinched 
to the leeches of the sail. The main are rove the same. 
Substitute main for fore. 

Where do the fore and main clew-jiggers belay ? 

At their respective pin-rails, both sides. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They lead up through fairleaders in the fore rigging, to 
blocks hooked under the top, then down to blocks in the 
clews of the sail, back again, and The standing part is 
made fast to the upper block. The main are rove the same. 
Substitute main for fore (generally unhooked at sea.) 

Where do the fore and main bunt whips belay ? 

At the starboard forward side of their respective fife- 
rails. 

Reeve the fore ? 

It leads through a block seized to the upper part of the 
lower slings, down forward of the sail, and hooks to the 
upper glut abaft the sail, (it is usually unhooked at sea.) 
The main reeves the same. Substitute main for fore. 

Where do the foretop-7nast studding-sail-boom tricing lines 
belay ? 

At the fore pin-rail, each side. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 261 

Reeve them ? 

They lead up through a fair-leader on the fore shrouds 
through a single block ' hooked under the forward part of 
the top, then to a single block hooked to the becket on 
the heel of the boom, the standing part being made fast to 
a becket in the bottom of the upper block. 

WJiere do the fore and main topsail halliards belay ? 

At the after part of their respective pin-rails, both sides. 

Reeve the topsail tyes ? 

They are of wire rope, the lower end, of each, has a 
thimble turned in for the fly-block to hook to, the other 
end of the tyes passes up through gin-blocks under the top- 
mast trestle-trees, down through tye-blocks on the slings 01 
the yard, then up through the topmast trestle-trees, and the 
standing parts are clinched around the topmast-heads. The 
heel of the topgallant-mast is scored out on purpose to ad- 
mit the tye. The tyes of fore and main topsail-yards are 
double. In small vessels the topsail-tyes reeve through a 
sheave in the topmast-head, in which case they are, of 
course, single. 

Reeve the fore topsail halliards ? 

There are two double blocks. The blocks which are 
hooked into the thimble in the ends of the topsail tyes, are 
the fly-blocks. The falls are rove up through the fly-blocks, 
down and through a block in the after part of the fore 
chains (both sides), up again to the fly-block, down to the 
chains, the standing part being finally made fast to the fly- 
block. The main are rove the same. Substitute main for 
fare. 

Fly-blocks travel up and down on a jackstay or traveller. 

li Beir s purchase" is now being used in small vesseis. 



262 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Explain Bell' } s Purchase. 

This purchase consists of four single blocks, one of which, 
the tye-block, is shackled to the tye at the mast-head, and 
two blocks, one on each side, are hooked to bolts in each of 
the chains; another, Xkvz fly or whip-block, hangs just below 
the tye-block, and the standing part of the purchase being 
hooked to this fly or whip- block, the bight is seized at a 
proper distance to the tye-block, from thence reeve down 
through the block in starboard chains, up through the tye- 
block down through block in port chains, up through fly or 
whip-block, and thence to deck. The topsail tye reeves 
through a sheave in the head of the topmast, and secures to 
the yard. 

Where do the fore tops ail braces belay ? 

At the main fife-rail, both sides. They lead aft on the 
quarter deck. Sometimes they lead forward in the gang- 
way. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through the sheaves in the main fife-rail from 
aft forward up to blocks on the main bibbs out to clump- 
blocks seized to the collar of the main stay (to prevent chafe 
from the foot of the main topsail), then forward to the brace 
blocks at the foretopsail yard-arms from down up, then aft, 
and the standing parts are hitched or seized together above 
the eyes of the main topmast rigging and are then stopped 
down the collar of the stays on each side as far as the crotch 
(so as to avoid chafe from the foot of the topgallant sail.) 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topsail sheets belay ? 

At the topsail sheet bitts, forward of, and on each side of 
their respective masts. 

Be eve the fore ? 

They are rove through the sheaves in the foretopsail sheet 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 263 

bitts, up through the quarter blocks under the fore yard, 
along the yard and through the sheave in the yard-arm from 
down up, then through the blocks which are hooked or 
shackled to the clews of the topsail, back to the yard-arms, 
where the standing parts are secured around the yard-arms 
with an inside clinch. The main or mizzen topsail sheets 
are rove the same, only substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

Where are the rolling tackles belayed ? 

To the fore and main fife-rails on both sides. 

Reeve them for the lower yards ? 

With patent trusses rolling tackles are not used except in 
heavy weather; the pendant tackles or stay luffs are gener- 
ally used, and the upper block is hooked well out on the 
quarter of the yard, the lower block being hooked to a 
heavy strap around the mast, as- near as possible in a line 
with the yard, then a leader for the fall is used, and the whole 
belayed at the fife-rail. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topsail clewlines belay ? 

At their respective fife-rails, both sides, the mizzen at the 
mizzen mast. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They consist of whips and runners. The runners have a 
single block in one end, the other ends are rove through 
the forward sheaves of the quarter blocks down and hook 
to the clews of the sail. The whips are rove up through 
the lubber's hole and through the blocks in the end of the 
runner, then down again, and the standing part is made 
fast to a bolt under the fore fife-rail. The main and mizzen 
are rove the same. Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

Where do the foretop-bowlines belay ? 

At the forecastle pin-rail, both sides. 

Reeve them ? 



264 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

They reeve through leaders in the forecastle pin-rail, then 
to blocks hooked to the bees of the bowsprit, then up and 
are toggled to the bowline bridles on the leeches of the fore- 
topsail. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topsail buntlines belay ? 

At their respective pin-rails, both sides. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They reeve through fair-leaders on the fore rigging, up 
through the lubber's hole to gin-blocks that are hooked 
under the foretopmast trestle-trees, then down and are tog- 
gled to the proper toggles on the foot of the foretopsail. 
The main and mizzen are rove the same. Substitute main 
and mizzen for fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topsail reef tackles 
belay ? 

The fore at the fore fife-rail, both sides; the main at the 
main fife-rail, both sides; the mizzen at the mizzen pin-rail, 
both sides. 

Reeve the fore? 

They are sometimes rove through the lubber's hole to a 
sheave in the sister-blocks (that are seized to the topmast 
rigging) ; but a better way is to reeve them to blocks hooked 
to the topmast cap plate, and thus have no strain on top- 
mast rigging ; they then reeve down through the outer 
sheaves in the topsail yard-arms, through single secret blocks 
at the reef tackle cringles, and the standing parts are clinched 
over the pacific-irons at the yard-arms. In reefing the top- 
sails, when topsail reef tackles are rove in this way, if the 
halliards are let go and the reef tackles fast, the leeches of 
the sail will come right out to the yard-arms. The main 
and mizzen are rove the same. Substitute main and mizzen 
for fore. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 265 

Where do the fore, main, and mizzen topsail clew-jiggers 
belay ? 

At their respective pin-rails, both sides. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They are rove up through fair-leaders and the lubber's hole 
to blocks (fitted with short pendants), hooked under the 
fore topmast trestle-trees, then down forward of the sail to 
blocks (also fitted with short pendants), that are hooked to 
the clews of the fore topsail, back again, and the standing 
parts are made fast to the blocks at the trestle-trees. The 
main and mizzen are rov^e the same. Substitute main and 
mizzen for fore, (generally unhooked at sea.) 

Wliere do the fore, main, and mizzen topsail bunt-whips 
belay ? 

The fore at the fore pin -rail, port side; the main at the 
main pin-rail, starboard side; the mizzen at the mizzen pin- 
rail, port side. 

Reeve the fore ? 

Through a fair-leader on the port fore rigging, up 
through the lubber's hole, to a gin block hooked under the 
forward part of the fore topmast trestle-trees, then down 
forward of the sail (under the foot) up abaft the sail, and 
the standing part hooks into the upper glut. Bunt-whips 
are kept hooked in port only. The main and mizzen are 
rove the same. Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

IVJiere do the fore topgallant studding-sail-boo??i-t?'icing 
lines belay ? 

In the foretop, to cleats on the fore topmast shrouds. 

Reeve them ? 

They are single and reeve through a single block seized 
to the forward shroud of the fore topmast rigging (well up), 
thence to a becket in the heel of the boom. 



266 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Where do the fore topgallant braces belay ? 

At the main fife-rail (both sides). They lead forward. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They are single, and reeve through fair-leaders in the 
main fife-rail, up through the lubber's hole to blocks 
seized on the forward shroud (close under the eyes) of the 
topmast rigging ; then through check blocks seized to the 
collar of the main topmast stay, forward, and the standing 
parts go over the fore topgallant yard arms with an eye, 
which is marled to the lift. In large vessels, whips are 
attached to the ends of the braces just under the maintop. 
Sometimes iron spectacles are fitted to go over the yard 
arms, and the lift and brace are seized or spliced to the eye ; 
this is neat and secure. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant yard ropes 
belay ? 

The fore at the after part of the port fore pin-rail; the 
main at the after part of the starboard jnain pin-rail ; the 
mizzen at the port mizzen pin-rail. At sea topgallant yard 
ropes are kept neatly coiled in the tops. Frequently short 
yard ropes are used at sea, being rove in place of the long 
ones. Short yard ropes have thimbles in the ends, for the 
halliards to hook to, and are called top gallant tyes. 

Reeve the fore ? 

It is taken up abaft everything, through the sheave in 
the fore topgallant mast (just under the eyes of the rig- 
ging), down forward of the mast, and the standing part 
hooks with sister hooks to the fore topgallant yard. The 
main and mizzen are rove in the same way. Substitute 
main and mizzen for fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant halliards 
belay? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 267 

The fore at the port side of the fore fife-rail, they lead aft ; 
the main at the starboard side of the main fife -rail, also lead 
aft; the mizzen at the port side, after part, of port pin-rail. 
Reeve the Fore? 

The upper blocks of the fore topgallant halliards are 
tailed or hooked to the topgallant yard rope, just below the 
eyes of the topmast rigging ; the lower block is hooked to 
an eye bolt in the upper part of the port lower trestle-trees. 
The fall is taken up through the port side of the lubber's 
hole, through the block tailed or hooked on to the yard 
rope, down to the block in the trestle-trees, up to the block 
on the yard rope, and so on ; the standing part made 
fast to the block at the trestle-tree. The main and miz- 
zen reeve the same. Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant sheets 
belay ? 

The fore at the fore fife-rail, they lead aft ; the main at 
the main fife-rail, they lead aft ; the mizzen belay at the 
mizzen mast, both sides. 

Reeve the fore ? 

► They are single and reeve through the leaders in the 
fore fife-rail, up through the lubber's hole to the after 
sheaves of the quarter blocks under the topsail yard, along 
the yard and up through the inner sheaves in the topsail 
yard arms, the standing parts hook, with sister hooks, to the 
clew iron in the clews of the topgallant sail. The main 
and mizzen are rove the same. Substitute main and mizzen 
for fore. 

Wliere do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant clewlines 
belay ? 

At the pin-rails on both sides of the fore, main and iniz- 

_ 



26S YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They lead up through fair-leaders on the fore rigging, 
through the lubber's hole to the forward sheave of the 
quarter blocks under the topgallant yard, and hook to the 
clew irons of the topgallant sails with sister hooks. In the 
larger vessels they are fitted double, with sail blocks at the 
clews, the standing part being secured to the quarter blocks 
on the yard. The main and mizzen are rove the same. 
Substitute main and mizzen fox fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant buntlines 
belay ? 

At their respective pin-rails, (both sides). 

Reeve the fore ? 

They reeve through fair-leaders on fore rigging, up 
through the lubber's hole to gin blocks hooked to the 
inner arms of the jack; the standing parts make fast to 
the toggles in the sail, with two legs on each buntline, one 
leg toggled to the leech, the other to the foot of the sail. 
The main and mizzen are rove the same. Substitute main 
and mizzen for fore. 

In small vessels the mizzen is sometimes single. 

WJiere do the fore, main and mizzen topgallant bunt- 
whips belay ? 

To the starboard fore, port main and starboard mizzen 
pin-rails, respectively. 

Reeve the fore ? 

It reeves through fair-leaders on the starboard fore rig- 
ging, through the lubber's hole to a gin block hooked 
under the jack, thence down forward, and up abaft, to the 
glut on the after part of the sail. The main and mizzen 
are rove the same. Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

IVJiere do the fore royal braces belay ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 269 

At the main fife-rail, (both sides) they lead forward. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through leaders in the main fife-rail, through 
the lubber's hole, to gin blocks hooked to the funnel, or 
seized to the topgallant rigging (under the eyes), and some- 
times through blocks seized to the collar of the main top- 
gallant stay, the standing parts go over the fore royal yard 
arms, with an eye (which is marled to the eye of the lift). 

IVJiere do the fore, main and ?nizzen royal yard roftes 
belay ? 

The fore at the starboard fore pin-rail; the main at the 
port main pin-rail; and the mizzen at the starboard mizzen 
pin-rail. 

Reeve the fore ? 

It is taken up abaft and rov.e through the sheave in the 
royal mast from aft forward, the standing part hooks, with 
sister hooks, to the slings of the fore royal yard. The 
main and mizzen are rove the same. Substitute main and 
mizzen for fore. 

Reeve the fore royal halliards ? 

They reeve exactly as the fore topgallant halliards, ex- 
cept they are on the starboard side of the top, the upper 
block is tailed or hooked to the yard rope (under the eyes 
of the top mast rigging), the lower block is hooked to the 
upper part of the lower trestle-trees, on the starboard side, 
the fall leading down through the lubber's hole to the star- 
board fore pin-rail ; frequently royal yard ropes are used 
as halliards, with a block in the bight. The main and 
mizzen reeve the same, except the main is on the port side. 
Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen royal sheets belay ? 

At their respective pin-rails, (sometimes they belay in 
the tops). 



270 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve the fore ? 

They are single. They reeve through leaders in the fore 
rigging, through the lubber's hole to the after sheaves in 
the quarter blocks under the topgallant yard, then along 
the yard up through sheaves in the topgallant yard arms ; 
the standing parts toggle to the clews of the royal. The 
main and mizzen reeve the same. Substitute main and 
mizzen for fore. 

Where do the fore, main and mizzen royal clewlines belay ? 

To their respective pin-rails, (both sides). 

Reeve the fore ? 

They reeve through fair-leaders on the fore rigging, 
through the lubber's hole to the quarter blocks under the 
royal yards, the standing parts hook, with sister hooks, to 
the clews of the royal. The main and mizzen reeve the 
same. Substitute main and mizzen for fore. 

RUNNING RIGGING ON THE MAIN AND. MIZZEN MASTS AND 
YARDS. 

Where do the main braces belay ? 

On cavils, in the after part of the mizzen pin-rail (both 
sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through the bulwark sheaves, on the quarter, 
to blocks on the main brace bumpkins, forward to the brace 
blocks at the main yard-arms, from down up, then aft, and 
the standing parts are hooked or clinched to the bottom of 
blocks on the bumpkins. On board of large ships it is some- 
times found convenient to fit the standing part with a jig- 
ger (which is fitted aft at the bumpkin). 

VlHiere do the main tacks belay ? 

To the iron bits in each gangway. 

Reeve them ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 27 I 

They are rove through large blocks, hooked in the deck, 
up to large blocks shackled to the spectacle -irons, and the 
standing parts are hooked to bolts in the deck (in each 
gangway). 

WJiere do the main sheets belay ? 

To the iron sheet bitts on each side of the quarter deck, 
sometimes in light weather to the cleats, on the inside of 
the bulwarks. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve exactly as the fore sheets reeve, simply sub- 
stitute main for fore. 

Vi^ere dees the main bowline belay ? 

Forward, at the main stay or fore fife-rail. 

Reeve it? 

The main bowline consists of a whip and runner; the 
runner has a single block in one end, the other end is rove 
through the thimbles in the bowline bridle, and the stand- 
ing part is made fast to the fore fife -rail or main stay. The 
whip is rove through the block in the end of the runner, 
and the standing part secured to a bridle on the main stay. 
In tacking ship, the standing part of the runner is let go, 
and the bowline shifted over. Another simpler way is to 
reeve a line through the bull's eye on the bowline bridle 
and secure the standing part to the main stay. 

WJiere do the main buntlines belay ? 

Forward on the main stays (both sides.) 

Reeve them ? 

The upper legs are rove the same way as the fore, and the 
lower standing parts are crossed (to keep the turns out) and 
seized to the main stay, the hauling parts reeving through 
blocks seized there for that purpose. On steamers, main 
buntlines are rove up and down the main mast, on account 



272 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

of the heat from the smoke-stack. This is a neater and 
better lead. 

WJiere do the main topsail braces belay ? 

At the mizzen topsail sheet bitts (both sides) ; they lead 
forward on the quarter deck. 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove through the outer sheave in the mizzen top- 
sail sheet bitts from forward aft, up to hanging blocks on 
the mizzen mast (about half way between the deck and the 
top), then forward to the brace blocks on the main topsail 
yard-arms, from down up, aft again, and the standing part 
is secured to a band which travels up and down the mizzen 
topmast, with the parrel; in order to shift the strain lower 
down, as it becomes greater, and sail is reduced. 

Where do the main top bowlines belay ? 

At the fore pin-rail, both sides. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through single blocks, under the after rim of 
the fore top, then aft, and the standing parts are toggled to 
the bowline bridles on the main topsail. 

Where do the main topgallant-studding-sail-boom-tricing- 
lines belay ? 

In the main top, at the forward shrouds of the main top- 
mast rigging. 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove through blocks seized well up on the for- 
ward shroud of the main topmast rigging, and to a becket 
on the heel of the studding sail boom. 

Where do the 7nain topmast staysail halliards belay ? 

At the port main pin-rail. 

Reeve them ? 

From aft, up through a block at under part of the topmast 






YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 273 

trestle-trees, down through a block in head of the sail, and 
the standing part is secured to the collar of the topmast stay. 

Where does the main top?nast staysail downhaul belay ? 

At the port fore fife-rail. 

Reeve it? 

It reeves through a block secured near the lower part of 
the stay, and the end is taken up and clinched to the head 
of the sail. 

Where do the main topmast staysail sheets belay ? 

To cleats, on the deck, near the forward part of the main 
pin-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They are composed of two single blocks, and a fall rove 
as a gun tackle purchase, the upper block being hooked to 
the clew of the sail, and the lower one to a bolt in the water 
way, near the gangway. They are sometimes fitted as a 
whip and pendant. 

Where do the main topgallant braces belay ? 

At the composition pin-rail, on the lower part of the miz- 
zen mast (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove the same as the fore topgallant braces. 
Substitute main for fore. 

Where do the main royal braces belay ? 

At the composition pin-rail, on the lower part of the miz- 
zen mast (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve the same as the fore royal braces. Substitute 
main for fore. 

Where do the cross-jack braces belay ? 

At the after part of the main pin-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them i 



274 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

They are rove through the leaders at the main pin-rail, up 
to a double block, which is hooked to an eye-bolt on each 
side of the main mast, in a line with the yard; then to the 
brace block on the cross-jack yard, forward again, and the 
standing part is secured to the double block at the main 
mast. 

Reeve the mizzen topsail tye ? 

It is single; a thimble is turned in one end, the other end 
is rove up through a sheave in the topmast, down through 
the tye-block on the yard, up through the trestle-trees, and 
is clinched around the topmast-head. The Bell's purchase 
is frequently used on the mizzen. 

Where do the mizzen topsail halliards belay ? 

At the after part of the port mizzen pin-rail. 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove the same as the fore topsail halliards, ex- 
cept they are single. Substitute mizzen for fore. 

Wliere do the mizzen topsail braces belay ? 

At the main pin-rail (both sides), just abaft the cross-jack 
braces. 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove through the leaders at the main pin-rails, 
up through the lubber's hole to blocks at each side of the 
main cap, aft to the brace blocks on the mizzen topsail yards, 
and the standing parts are secured to the straps of the blocks 
at the main cap. 

Where do the mizzen top, bowlines belay ? 

At the after part of the main pin-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through the leaders at the main pin-rail, up 
to the outboard sheaves of the cross-jack brace blocks (on 
the main mast) and the standing parts are toggled to the 
bowline bridles on the leech of the mizzen topsail. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 275 

WJiere do the mizzen topgallant braces belay ? 

At the main pin-rail (both sides), just abaft the mizzen 
topsail braces. 

Reeve them ? 

They reeve through leaders at the main pin-rail, up through 
the lubber's hole to the small sheaves in the main topmast 
trestle ; then aft, and the standing parts go over the top- 
gallant yard-arms, with eyes that are marled to the eyes of 
the lifts, or with spectacles, as before described. 

Where do the mizzen royal braces belay ? 

At the main fife-rail (both sides), just abaft the mizzen 
topgallant braces. 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove through leaders at the main fife-rail, up 
through the lubber's hole, through sheaves in the after chock 
of the main topmast trestle-trees; then aft, and the standing 
part goes over the mizzen royal yard-arm with an eye that 
is marled to the eye of the lift, or with spectacles, as before 
described. 

GEAR ON SPANKER AND TRYSAIL. 

WJiere does the spanker boom topping lift belay ? 

To a cleat under the spanker boom. 

Reeve it? 

The standing part is hooked to a bolt near the end of the 
boom, then rove up through a gin-block at the hounds of 
the spanker gaff, then down through a sheave in the boom; 
a thimble is turned into the end, to which a small tackle is 
hooked, called a topping lift fall 

Where do the spa?iker sheets belay ? 

On each side of the stern bulwarks. 

Reeve them ? 

The spanker sheets are composed of two double blocks, 



276 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

the fall being rove first through the block hooked on the 
iron band of the boom, then through the block at the side, 
and so on, the end being secured to the block of the boom. 

IVJiere does the spanker foot- outhaul belay ? 

On the inner end of the spanker boom, starboard side. 

Reeve it? 

It is rove through the sheave on the end of the spanker 
boom, up through a block hooked to the clew of the spanker, 
and the standing part is hooked or clinched to the end of 
the spanker boom. 

Where do the spanker and trysail head or peak outhauls 
belay * 

The spanker, to the band at the mizzen mast. The try- 
sails, to the fore and main fife-rails respectively. 

Reeve the spanker-head outhaul ? 

The end is clinched to the head of the sail, and passes 
out through a sheave at the end of the gaff, thence through 
a block under the after part of the mizzen top. To the 
end, a single block is secured, and through it, a whip is 
rove. The trysail peak outhaul is rove the same. 

Where do the spanker, fore and main trysail vangs belay ? 

The spanker vangs on each side of the bulwarks, at the 
stern of the vessel. The main trysail vangs, at the after part 
of the main pin-rails (both sides). The fore trysail, at the 
after part of the fore pin- rail (both sides). 

Reeve the spanker vangs ? 

They are composed of two single blocks, one of which 
is hooked to the gaff, and has a short pendant attached, 
the other is hooked to the water ways on each side near the 
stern. The falls are rove up through the upper block, then 
through the lower, and the end secured to the upper block. 
The vangs for the trysails are rove the same. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 277 

WJiere do the peak or head downhauls for spanker, fore 
and main trysail belay ? 

For the spanker, at the band on mizzen mast, starboard 
side. The fore and the main trysails, at their respective 
fife-rails; the fore on starboard side, the main on port side. 

Reeve the spanker head downhaul? 

It reeves up through a block secured to the jaws of the 
gaff on the starboard side, and clinches to the head of the 
sail. In large vessels a whip and runner is used. Those 
for the fore and main trysails are rove the same. 

Where do the clew ropes belay for the spanker, fore a?id 
main trysails? 

At their respective bands or fife-rails. 

Reeve the clew rope for spankers ? 

It reeves up through the inner sheave of the block on 
the starboard jaw of the gaff, and is clinched to the clew 
of the spanker. Those for the trysails are rove the same. 

Where do the brails belay for the spanker, fore and main 
trysails ? 

The spanker brails at the mizzen mast ; the main trysail 
brails at the main fife-rail ; and the fore trysail brails at the 
fore fife -rail. 

Reeve the upper, middle and lower brails of spanker ? 

The brail blocks through which the brails lead, are 
seized on both sides of the luff of the sail at proper dis- 
tances, each brail is then rove through its own blocks, the 
bight of each being seized to the after leech of the sail. 
1 nose for the trysails are rove the same. 

Where do the halliards of the fore, main and mizzen 
storm staysails belay ? 

Fore and main at their respective fife-rails, and the miz- 
zen at the band on the mizzen mast. 



2 78 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve the fore storm staysail halliards ? 

From the deck on the starboard side, up through a block 
on the slings of fore yard, then down through a block on 
the head of the sail, and the end taken up and secured to 
the collar of the fore stay. 

FOOT ROPES AND STIRRUPS, ETC. 

How are the foot ropes for the lower yards fitted ? 

They hook to a shackle, which is over the ear or eye on 
the after part of the brace band, at the hounds of the yard, 
then go into the slings and are seized to the opposite side 
of the iron truss (forward of the mast), being seized again 
to the truss arm on their own sides of the yard. 

How are the foot ropes for topsail yards fitted ? 

They are fitted the same as the lower yards, except at 
the slings they go abaft the topmast and are seized to the 
opposite quarter of the yard, being leathered in the wake 
of the mast to prevent chafe. 

How are the foot ropes for the topgallant and royal yards 
fitted? 

The topgallant go over the yard arms with an eye (in- 
side of the lift and brace), and are hooked to the opposite 
quarter of the yard, abaft the mast, when at sea. The 
royal go forward of the mast. 

How are stirrups fitted ? 

They are seized to the iron jack-stays, and the lower ends 
are spliced around the foot ropes on their respective yards 

How are the flemish horses fitted 07t the lower and topsail 
yards ? 

They go over the pacific irons, with an iron thimble and 
eye. and are seized or hooked to the outer quarters of the 
yards. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 279 

LIFTS. 

Where do the lower lift jiggers belay ? 

The fore to cleats on each side of the fore mast ; the 
main to cleats on each side of the main mast; the cross- 
jack to cleats on the mizzen mast. 

Reeve the fore lift ? 

The standing part of the lift is hooked to the bottom of 
a large iron-bound block hooked to the lower cap, then 
through block at the yard arm back through forward sheave 
of block at cap, down through lubber's hole; a thimble is 
turned into the lower end to which a double purchase is 
hooked, called a lift jigger. 

The main lift is rove in the same manner. The cross- 
jack lift is single, and has a single fall. 

Reeve the fore topsail lift? 

These shackle to bands at the yard arm, and reeve up 
through the lower sheave of sister block in topmast rigging, 
thence down through lignum-vitse bull's-eyes, secured to 
the collar of the fore stay at the eyes of the rigging ; the 
ends are taken up and secured to their own parts, by means 
of selvage straps and toggle. 

The main and mizzen reeve in the same manner. 

Reeve the fore topgallant and royal lifts ? 

They go over the yard arms with eyes, or splice to spec- 
tacles, and reeve through sister blocks, or bull's-eyes, in 
their respective rigging, setting up the same as topsail lifts. 
The main and mizzen are rove the same way. 

STUDDING SAIL (PRONOUNCED STUN* SAIL) GEAR. 

Where do the lower boom topping lifts belay ? 
At the fore fife-rail (both sides). 
Reeve them ? 



280 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

They are taken up and reeve through the after sheave of 
the block at the lower mast-head, out and down, through a 
gin block at the fore yard arm, and thence to the lower 
boom. When not used on the boom, they are kept triced 
up under the fore yard. 

Where do the forward guys belay ? 

At the forecastle pin-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

They are rove through the fair-leader in forecastle pin- 
rail, then through a block on the bowsprit, thence aft and 
through the forward block on the lower boom and taken to 
a bolt near the end of the bowsprit, where they are hooked. 

Where do the after guys belay ? 

At the after part of the fore pin-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

The end is rove through the sheave hole in the bulwarks, 
and then through the after block on the lower boom, aft 
again, and the standing part hooked to a bolt in the side of 
the ship. 

Where do the lower studding sail halliards belay ? Outer 
and inner ? 

To the fore fife-rail (both sides). 

Reeve them ? 

The end is taken up through the lubber's hole, and rove 
through span blocks, which are at the topmast head, then 
down and through a block or sheave at the ends of the 
topmast studding sail booms, and thence to the deck 
(kept triced up when not in use). For the inner halliards 
use the fore clew jiggers. 

Where do the lower studding clewlines belay ? 

At the fore fife-rail (both sides), 

Reeve them ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 28 1 

They are rove through a block secured to the fore yard 
truss, then through a block at the inner part of the lower 
studding sail yard, and thence to the outer clew or corner 
of the lower studding sail (the clewline is always kept in 
the sail). Sometimes they reeve through a glut in the 
centre of the sail. 

Wliere do the lower studding sail sheets belay ? 

To a cleat on the forecastle, or to the forward pin in the 
fore pin -rail. 

Reeve them ? 

The sheets being made fast to the sail, are taken through 
a block at the heel of the boom (sometimes a bull's-eye 
is used), and through the bulwarks, in on deck. 

Where does the lower studding sail out-haul belay ? 

To a cleat near the after part' of the fore pin-rail. 

Reeve it ? 

It is rove through a sheave in the bulwarks, near the 
gangway, then through a block hooked to the top of the 
outer end of the boom, and then hooked to the outer clew 
of the studding sail. 

Wliere do the topmast studding sail halliards belay ? 

At the fore pin -rail (both sides). 

Reeve theni ? 

They are taken up abaft all, and in a line with the top- 
mast backstays, and rove, from aft forward, through a block 
at the topmast head, then forward through a block hooked 
to the pacific iron on the topsail yard, (called a jewel 
block), and from there to the deck, abaft the sail. They 
are made fast to the clews of the topsails when not in use. 
Where do the fore topmast studding sail sheets belay ? 

There are two, a long and a short sheet; the long sheet 
goes to the deck ; the short sheet belays in the fore top. 



282 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve them ? 

The long sheet is made fast to the sail, at the inner clew, 
and the end belayed to a cleat on the forecastle. The 
short one reeves through a bull's eye on the fore yard and 
belays in the fore top. 

Where do the fore topmast studding sail tacks belay ? 

At the forward pin, main pin-rail. 

Reeve them ? 

The end is rove through a block secured to the main 
swifter, then through a block at the end of the topmast 
studding sail boom, from aft forward, and thence to the 
outer clew of the topmast studding sail. 

Where do the fore topmast studding sail boom braces be- 
lay ? 

At the forward end of the main pin-rail. 

Reeve them ? 

Through the block at the main ^swifter, and the end 
secured to the topmast studding sail boom. 

Where do the fore and main topgallant shedding sail 
halliards belay ? 

The fore at the fore pin-rail, the main at the main pin- 
rail. 

Reeve the fore i 

They are taken up abaft all, and in line with the topgal- 
lant backstays, then through a span block at the topgallant 
mast-head, and thence forward through a jewel block at 
the end of the topgallant yard, and to the sail, which is 
kept in the top. 

Where do the fore and main topgallant studding sail sheets 
belay ? 

The fore at the fore fife-rail, (both sides) ; the main at 
the main fife-rail, (both sides). 






YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT, 283 

Reeve the fore ? 

One end is secured to the sail, and the other is taken 
down abaft, through the lubber's hole, and belayed to the 
fife-rail. 

Where do the fore and ?nain topgallant studding sail tacks 
belay ? 

The fore at the fore pin-rail, (both sides) \ the main at 
the main pin-rail, (both sides). 

Reeve the fore ? 

They are rove through tail blocks at the foretop rim 
(each side), out through the blocks at the ends of the top- 
gallant studding sail booms, and the standing parts are 
clinched to the outer clew of the topgallant studding sail. 
The main is rove the same. Substitute main for fore. 
They are sometimes belayed in the tops, to cleats. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

What ai'e heel ropes ? Their use ? 

They are lines made fast to the heels of topgallant masts, 
jib and flying jib-booms. On the topgallant mast they 
assist in sending down the mast. They are attached to the 
jib and flying jib-booms to rig them out. 

WJiat are gear tricing lines ? Their use ? 

Small ropes, to one end, of which, is attached a peculiar 
shaped hook ; they are rove through a block well up on 
the forward shroud of the fore rigging. They are used 
for tricing up the topmast and lower studding sail gear 
when not in use. 

WJiat is a squilgee strap ? 

A three-legged strap or bridle secured to the studding 
sail yards, and taken around the sail, the ends (in which 
eyes are worked) being secured together by a greased 
toggle, which is hauled out, when ready, letting the sail free. 



2b4 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What is a snorter ? Its use / 

Small ropes, the outer end of which is spliced in the 
iron eye, at the yard arm, of the light yards ; the inner end 
is stopped into the slings of the yard. The eye of the lift 
and brace fit, on the yard arm, over the snorter. It is used 
when sending down light yards, to pull off the lower lift 
and brace. The yard arm end of the snorter is unlaid 
and made up again in flat sennit, about a fathom in length. 

What is a tripping line ? 

A small line, long enough to reach the deck when bent 
to the inner end of the snorter on the light yards, when 
aloft. It is used to trip the yards, and by pulling on the 
snorter, haul off the lower lift and brace, and afterwards to 
guide the yard to the deck. 

What is a timenoguy ? 

Any piece of rope placed to prevent rigging from chafing 
or fouling, such as that between the main rigging and the 
sheet anchor stock, to keep the main tack and sheet clear of 
the hammocks in working ship. 

What are preventer braces? 

Braces used to assist the permanent braces in supporting 
the yards, during heavy weather; they are set taut on the 
weather side, the blocks at the yard-arms being fitted with 
long pendants that go around the yard. The standing parts 
and hauling parts lead to some convenient place aft, that 
will give the brace a good, fair lead. 

What are clothes lines ? 

Parallel lines on which wash clothes are stopped to dry. 
The habor lines extend from the bowsprit to the spanker 
boom, and are triced well up to the lower yards. The sea 
lines extend from the main to the mizzen rigging. 

W^hat are Irish pennants ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 2 85 

Rope yarns or loose ends hanging about the rigging. 

QUESTIONS ON PURCHASES. 

What purchase is used for the flying-jib halliards? 
A single whip. 

What is used for jib halliards ? 
A gun tackle purchase, or a whip and runner. 
M^at is used for the fore topmast staysail halliards ? 
A whip and runner. 

What purchases are used for head downhauls? 
Single whips. 

What are used for jib and staysail sheets ? 
Gun tackle purchases. 
What are used for flying-jib sheets ? 
Single whips. 

What purchases are used for lower and topsail braces ? 
Gun tackle purchases. 

TFhat are used for the topgallant and royal braces ? 
Single whips. 

Wliat purchase is used for hoisting the fore and main top- 
sail? 

A tackle and double ru7iner. 

WJmt are used for hoisting topgallant a7id royal yards ? 
A tackle and single runner. 
WJiat purchase is used for topsail clewlines ? 
Whip and runner. 

What for topgalla7it and-royal clewlines ? 
Single whips. Large vessels, double whips. 
What purchases are all buntlines ? 
Single whips. 

What purchase is the cat fall? 
Treble purchase, or six sheaves. 



z86 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

What purchases are boat falls ? 

Double purchase, or two double blocks. 

Wliat are the spanker sheets ? 

Double purchase. 

What purchase have the lower reef pendants? 

Double whip and runner. 

What purchase has the spanker head outhaul? 

Single whip and runner. 

What purchase is used for yard and triatic stay tackles f 

The double purchase, or four sheaves. 

What are jeer falls ? 

The treble purchase, or six sheaves. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

BENDING, LOOSING, FURLING, MENDING SAIL, REEFING SAIL, 
SQUARING YARDS. 

Printed station billets are served out on board vessels in 
the navy, stating clearly each person's station for the dif- 
ferent evolutions and exercises. These billets must be care- 
fully studied and thoroughly understood, so that the proper 
station can be taken, at an exercise or evolution, without a 
moment's delay. 

How are all square sails secured to the yards ? 

With head earings and robands. As a square sail is roped 
on the after side, always bend with the roping between the 
sail and the yard, otherwise the stitches would be chafed. 
The head earings are secured at each yard-arm, and the ro- 
bands are made fast to the jackstay on the yard, with the 
necessary turns and a square knot. 

Are the topgallafit sails and royals bent to the yards aloft, 
or while they are on deck ? 

While they are on deck. 

In bending and unbending a topsail, what ropes are bent 
and unbent ? 

Sheets, clewlines, reef tackles, bowlines, buntlines, and 
bunt whips (if bent). 

What is used for sending a topsail aloft? 

A sail tackle (top burtons being used for that purpose) 
the upper block of which is hooked to a strap secured to 
the collar of the topmast stay. 

In unbending, what ropes are used to lower a topsail on 
deck? 

(287) 



288 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

The buntlines; they are hitched around the bunt of the 
sail. The yard-arms of the sail are securely stopped with 
rope yarn stops. . If at sea, blowing hard, use a sail bur- 
ton. 

In bending and unbending a course, what gear is bent and 
unbent? 

Tacks, sheets, clewgarnets, reef pendants, buntlines, and 
leechlines. 

How many methods of making up square sails for bending? 

Two general methods. Sails made up "as square, 11 and 
sails made up " as furled. 11 When stowed in the sail room, 
sails are generally made up as square, for convenience in 
stowing. 

How pass a rob and in the head-holes of the sails ? 

Double the roband, and pass the bight through the head- 
hole, take one end, pass it over the sail and through the 
bight, then haul taut both ends. 

Make up a course {square) for bending? 

Stretch the head of the sail well taut along the deck, 
having the roping on the under side, bring up to the head 
the belly band, then the foot, leaving the clews out at each 
end, also the bowline bridles and buntline toggles, roll up 
taut; pass the head earing around the sail close inside the 
leech rope, and put a good stop to every seam. The reef 
earings are made up in the sail. By making the sail up in 
this manner the head and foot are both left out for bending 
the gear. 

TO BEND A COURSE. 

Toggle the buntlines to the foot, at each side of the mid- 
ship seam, and clinch the leechlines to their cringles, stop- 
ping both to the head of the sail, the former to the eyelet 






YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 289 

of the middle roband, and the latter in the wake of then 
leading blocks. Hook yard-arm jiggers (usually the clew- 
jiggers) from straps around the pacific-iron to the first reef 
cringles, hitch the head earings to the neck of the blocks, 
or stop them along the head of the sail. Shackle on the 
clewgarnet blocks (with the falls rove) to the after part, 
passing them under the sail. Shackle the tacks and sheets, 
station hands to light them up, as the sail goes aloft. 

Hands are sent on the lower yard, trice up the booms, 
man the gear, and sway aloft ! merely gathering up the 
slack of the clew-garnets. When high enough ! (when the 
centre of the sail reaches the centre of the yard), cut the 
buntline and leechline stops (cutting from the sail), after 
making fast the midship roband, together with three or 
four others at each side of it. by passing the short ends 
tinder the jackstay from forward aft. and the . long ones, 
over and under, from aft forward, back through the eyelets, 
and square knot them on top. "Bring to!" haul the sail 
out until the head-rope is taut along the yard, and pass 
the earings for a full due. Now make fast the remaining 
robands in the same manner as the midship ones, and hook 
the reef pendants; haul up the clewgarnets snugly. Now 
slack down and overhaul the gear. Set the sail, and if all 
is rove right, clew up and furl. As a general thing in 
bending a course in this manner, the tacks, sheets and all 
gear, are bent on deck. The yard-arm jiggers are shifted 
to their proper places as clew jiggers. If the tacks and 
sneets are not bent on deck they are triced up by the clew 
jiggers. 

How do you pass a head-earing ? 

Pass the end of the earing through the bolt on the yard, 
then through the head-earing cringle, hauling out the head 
n 



290 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



of the sail taut along the yard. Now pass five or six turns 
of the earing through the backer (a piece of flat sennit, 
nailed on top, fore-and-aft the yard, a thimble end hang- 



JBctcKer 




HEAD-EARING PASSED. 

ing forward), through the cringle from aft forward, and back 
again, hauling the turns well taut, and securing the end of 
the earing neatly to its own part. 

Make up a topsail {square) for bending ? 

Stretch the head of the sail taut along the deck, the rop- 
ing or after s'-fc down. Bring the second reef band up to 
the head, ai>c lay all the points and earings snugly along, 
bring up the belly-band, and then the foot. The clews, 
bowline-bridles, reel tackle, cringles, and buntline toggles, 
should be left out, so that, when the sail is sent aloft for 
bending, the sheets, reef tackles, bowlines and buntlines, 
can be bent without loosing the sail; which will be found 
of great advantage when blowing fresh. Roll well up, put 
good stops at each seam, and expend the head-earings round 
the ends of the sail. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 29] 

To Bend a Topsail. 

Hook the top burton (for a sail tackle) to the strap at the 
collar of the topmast stay, and also to one bight of a sail 
strap, which has been passed around the centre of the sail ; 
seize the other bight of the sail strap to the back of the hook, 
or to the strap itself, around its own part, this will form a 
running eye. 

Overhaul the sheets and reef tackles, bringing them into 
the top ready for bending; have the bowlines, buntlines, 
and clewlines ready for toggling and bending to the sail. 
(Bowlines are not toggled at once, unless shifting topsails on 
a wind.) Hands are sent aloft on the yard, the tackle 
manned, trice up the booms, and "sway aloft!" When 
the sail rises above the top, cut the stops {cut from the sail 
so as not to injure it). 

Shackle the sheets, hook the reef tackles into their own 
cringles, stopping the head-earing cringles to them, shackle 
the clewlines to the clews, and toggle the buntlines and bow- 
lines to the foot, and to the bridles respectively. Now haul 
out on the reef-tackles and lower the sail (with sail tackle), 
until the head is stretched along the yard, and the centre 
comes flush with the centre of the yard ; pass the midship 
roba?id, rouse out the head-earings, cutting the seizing of 
the strap around the sail; at the same time take in the slack 
of the buntlines and clewlines, pass the earings and the re- 
maining robands. Now unhook the sail tackle from the 
stay, overhaul the gear, down booms ! man the sheets ! 
sheet home! and hoist the sail to a taut leech. After 
which, settle away the halliards, clew up and furl. 

Sometimes reef tackles are hooked to the second reef 
cringle before hauling out, and are shifted to their own 
cringles after the sail is bent ; but the head-earing can be 



292 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

hauled out, and the head hauled taut along, when the reef 
tackle is hooked to its own cringle; and there is then no 
shifting of reef tackles after the sail is bent. 

How is a square sail furled? 

The leeches are hauled in along the yard. The ends of 
the reef points, gear, and all slack sail is passed in towards 
the bunts, to give the sail a gradual increase in that direc- 
tion. When the sail is nearly rolled up, hook the bunt-whip, 
and bouse the sail well up, lower the buntlines and clew- 
jiggers (if hooked), and shove the sail well into the skin; 
roll the sail up snug, keeping the bunt square and the skin 
smooth, pass the gaskets square, (the bunt gaskets cross) lay 
in off the yard, lower and square the booms, stop up the 
gear. 

When a sail is neatly furled it appears neither above nor 
below the yard; the earings are well slewed up, the sail 
smooth under the gaskets, the bunt square, and a taut smooth 
skin, no rope's ends hanging down, and the gaskets per- 
fectly square. Too much sail should not be left abaft the 
yard to be stowed in the back cloths, as when these latter 
are hauled over, it will give a bunchy, slouchy look, about 
the bunt, as seen from abaft. 

How are jibs and staysails secured to their stays? 

Galvanized iron hanks travel on the stays. These hanks 
are secured to the eyelet's holes in the head (or luff) of the 
sails, with robands of spun yarn. 

In bending, which side is a jib sent out on? 

On the port side, (the opposite side from its downhaul) 
so that in going out, it will not ride on the downhaul. If 
at sea, send it out on the weather side. 

In bending, which side is a jlying-jib sent out on ? 

On the starboard side, (the opposite side from the down- 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 293 

haul) and also, the wythe inclining to the starboard side will 
bring the flying-jib-boom over. 

In making up a jib for bending, how determine the head 
from the tack ? 

By the roping being on the port side of the sail, and also 
by the cloths, the short cloths being at the tack, and the long 
cloths at the head. 

Make up and send out a jib for bending? 

Commencing at the tack (or lower outer corner) of the 
jib, make it up by bighting it along the head, until the head 
cringle (or upper corner) is reached, to which, hook and 
mouse the halliards ; pass a strap or small lashing around all 
the bighted parts of the sail, and to this make fast the down- 
haul, also stop the halliards to it. To the clew (or lower 
after corner), bend a rope called a clewrope. Now man the 
halliards and hoist the sail well clear of the forecastle; man 
the downhaul and rouse the sail out to the boom ; slacking 
the halliards and clewrope as the sail goes out; shift the 
downhaul to the head -cringle and bend it there, remove the 
strap or lashing, make fast the robands to their proper hanks, 
unbend the clewrope, and shackle the sheets. 

Furl a jib ? 

Haul it close down, gather the slack sail from the foot 
and let it hang down between the furler and the boom, 
gather the rest of the sail, in neat folds, along the top of the 
boom, and when all is snugly in place, pull up this spare 
s-ail and cover the rest of the sail with it; pass the gaskets. 
This makes a neat furl, especially if the covers are not to be 
used. If in port, the cover is placed over and the stops 
tied. If at sea, pass the sea-gasket around the boom and 
sail. 

In port, before the covers are put on jibs and staysails 



294 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

the halliards should be stopped to the foot of the stays, so 
that, when the halliards are hauled taut, the heads of the sails 
will not pull out of the cover. Before stopping the hal- 
liards, a hand should ride the hanks down, then set taut the 
down-haul and belay. 

Hoiu are topgallant sails and royals bent? 

They are bent while the yards are on deck. The robands 
are passed like those of the courses and topsails; the head- 
earings are passed as follows. The sail is hauled taut along 
the yard and the earing passed through a staple or thimble 
on the yard-arm, then passed through the head -cringle from 
down up and taken aft around the yard, then again around 
the .yard without passing through the head-cringle; this is 
called a riding turn, and is for the purpose of keeping the 
sail well up on top of the yard. The remaining turns of the 
earing are passed around the yard and through the cringle, 
the end being either square knotted, or passed with frapping 
turns around the parts going to the staple or thimble. The 
buntlines, clewlines and sheets are bent after the yards are 
crossed. 

In furling a topgallant sail or royal, for going aloft or 
coming on deck, it should be rolled up with a long low bunt, 
and the clews tucked in, to avoid tearing the sail in its up- 
ward or downward passage. If furling aloft, be careful to 
get a smooth skin and a long, low, tapering bunt. 

Be careful in furling light sails, especially royals, not to 
get "clew bound." that is, leave plenty of sail at the clews, 
so that, when stowed, the clews will not depress the bunt. 

How is a spanker or trysail bent ? 

The downhaul and clew rope are overhauled and made 
fast around the sail near the head, they are then manned 
and the sail hoisted to the gaff. Shackle the luff or nock 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 295 

of the sail to the gaff, hook the head outhaul and pass the 
robands to the gaff and mast ; reeve the brails, hook the foot 
outhaul, and clinch the clewrope. When the robands are 
passed, lash the tack to the neck of the boom, or to an eye- 
bolt in the after part of the mast. 

In bending trysails or spanker with hoops running on the 
gaff, it is better to lower the gaff to the deck, bend the head, 
and then hoist the gaff, bending the luff as it goes up. 

How furl a spanker or trysail ? 

The clewrope is hauled up, the sail brailed close up and 
the furling line passed. If in port, the cover is tied or 
stopped around the sail, commencing aloft and working to 
the deck. 

How are topsails made up (as furled} and bent? 

With this method the gaskets should be sewed to the 
heads of the sails at equal distances. Make the laniards a 
fathom long. 

In making the sail up, the main point to aim at, is keep- 
ing the yard-arms as light as possible, so that the sail may 
haul out taut, all along, more easily. 

Seize the sail straps to the heads of the sails at the middle 
eyelet holes, and when using them, after the sail is rolled up, 
carry the foremost leg around the after leg, and seize its 
bight to its own part. In case this seizing is cut too soon, 
by having the strap fast to the head of the sail, the mistake 
may be partly remedied by a pull on the sail tackle, which 
is always hooked to the after leg. 

To Makt up the Topsails. 

Haul the head of the topsail along the deck, after side 
down, gather all the slack canvas back from the head, and 
haul the head taut, fore-and-aft, by the earings. Bring in 



296 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

the leeches, as far as the reef tackle cringles, along the head, 
keeping these cringles out, knot the fourth reef earing into 
the third reef cringle, and the third into the second ; carry 
the clews into the quarters about six feet over the head; 
bring the buntline toggles about a foot over the head be- 
tween the clews; coil all the remainder of the roping so as 
not to ride, leaving the bowline cringles out; face the foot 
and gather ip, then face the head and roll tip, pass the gas- 
kets taut; stop the clews up with heavy quarter stops abaft 
the head, after having passed them over the fore part of the 
bunt ; seize the sail strap ; hook the sail tackle ; knot the 
second reef earing into the first reef cringle, the first into 
the head, and stop the head earings along the top of the 
sail, on each side; lead the fall of the sail tackle through a 
block tailed to the sail strap, and take it well forward — this 
will guy the sail clear of the top, and stays, or a guy can be 
bent on from forward ; overhaul the sheets, clewlines and 
reef tackles into. the top. 

To Bend. 

Man the burtons ! The fall is manned, one hand to 
tend the stopper and one to belay. A few hands to take in 
the slack of the buntlines and belay. Sway aloft! and 
High enough ! when the clews of the sail have been swayed 
above the top rim, and the turns slewed out. 

Take a turn with the sail tackle fall, bend the reef tackles 
to their own cringles, and hook the bunt whip. 

Keep a good strain on the bunt whip as the sail tackle is 
lowered on, hauling the reef tackles out. If the quarters 
of the sail are allowed to get below the yard they are not 
easily raised. 

The men are sent aloft, and at the order : Lay out and 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 297 

bring to ! carry the head earings out to the yard-arms, haul 
the head of the sail taut along the yard, pass the robands — 
the midship roband first — hook the clewlines, toggle the 
buntlines and bowlines, cut the seizings of the sail strap, 
furl the sail, or set it to ascertain if the gear is properly 
bent. 

If the reef tackles will not answer, yard-arm jiggers must 
be put on for the express purpose of hauling out the head 
of the sail. 

How is a course made up (as furled) and bent? 

Haul the head of the course taut along, roping down 
(after side on deck) on top of the sail strap, make the reef 
earings fast to the cringles as before explained. Gather 
the slack sail .back from the head, and lay the second reef 
band on the head, hauling the earings taut out, bring the 
leeches, in taut, as far as the inner leech line cringle and lay 
them on the head, lay the clews over the head about six feet 
on each side of the middle of the sail, and lay the buntline 
toggles about a foot over the head, between the clews. Now 
gather up as in furling (facing the foot) throw the skin over; 
face the head and roll up snugly, pass the gaskets ; stretch 
the sail across the deck, forward of its mast and under its 
own yard; overhaul down the yard-arm jiggers and proceed 
to bend the gear ; pass the forward leg of the sail strap over 
the bunt of the sail, round the after leg of the strap and 
seize its bight to its own part; pass heavy quarter stops 
around the clews. Make the stay whip fast well up on the 
slings of the yard, and hook on to the after leg of the sail 
strap, sway the sail up and down; and when well clear of 
turns, bend the reef pendants, hook the yard-arm jiggers to 
the second reef cringles over the tacks and sheets, bend the 
buntlines, leechlines, tacks, sheets and clew garnets. 



2Q8 young sailor's assistant. 

Overhaul the clew garnets, tacks and sheets, Sway aloft ! 
Lay aloft ! Trice up ! Lay out ! and Bring to ! 

Round up the clew garnets ; bring to the head of the sail ; 
cut the seizings of the strap; pass the laniards of the gaskets 
through the staples on the yard, or through the reefing jack- 
stay. 

STUDDING SAILS. 

How are they bent? 

The outer earings which are spliced into the cringles, with 
a short eye, are passed, through holes bored in the extremi- 
ties of the yard, from the after side, then back through the 
cringle and around the yard inside the hole, until three or 
four turns are taken, when the end is hitched through the 
cringle and around the single part. The sail is then brought 
taut along the yard, the inner earings being passed in the 
same manner, and the head rope secured by a neat lacing 
of roundline rove around the yard and through the eyelets, 
with a marline hitch, on top, at each of the latter, or they 
are sometimes bent with robands passed through the eyelets 
and around the yard. The gear (sheets and downhaul) is 
bent as described in running rigging, and the sail made up, 
on the after side, by bighting the leeches towards the head, 
and running the gear along the yard. 

Make up a topmast studding sail when not bent? 

Stretch the sail taut along and overhaul the downhaul 
through the thimble and block, and bight it along the whole 
length of the leech. Then roll up towards the inner leech, 
lay the sheets along the whole length of the sail, roll up 
over all, and stop the sail up with rope yarns. 

A topgallant studding sail is made up in the same manner. 

Make up a topmast studding sail when bent? 

Overhaul the downhaul the length of the luff or outei 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 299 

leech, then take the foot up to the yard and place the tack- 
block out; bight the downhaul along the yard, also the 
sheets, roll the sail up snugly and stop it with rope yarns, 
or better still, have a centipede on the yard. 

Lower studding sails are bent and made up in the same 
manner as topmast studding sails, with the sheet in, with 
this exception, that part of the lower studding sail that the 
yard does not spread, is laid right over the part, that the 
yard does spread, and is then rolled up. 

When ready for sea topgallant studding sails are kept up 
and down the topmast rigging. 

The other studding sails are rolled up and stowed in the 
booms. 

While at sea, and circumstances render a frequent use of 
these sails liable, topmast studding sails are sometimes triced 
up and down the fore rigging, and the lower studding sails, 
triced up and down the foremast. They are, by this means, 
always at hand and ready for bending the gear. Studding 
sail covers are sometimes sewed on to the, forward side of 
the, head of the sail, and are very useful. 

LOOSE SAILS. 

To dry. 

All hands are called to " loose sail;' and as soon as the 
people are up, at the order, lay aloft ready men ! The 
captains of the tops, two fore and two main yardmen, lay 
aloft. The booms are got ready for tricing up, clew jig- 
gers hooked (if ordered), gear well overhauled and covers 
taken off the fore-and-aft sails and stops on the halliards 
cut, '• ready men" laying down at the order. 

At the order Aloft sail loosers ! the men lay aloft and 
jet on the slings of the proper yards, keeping close into the 
slings. 



300 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

At the order, Man the boom tricing lines ! Trice up ! 
the booms are triced up the proper distance, to allow room 
for the men to work on the yards. 

Lay out ! Loose ! The men, ?..t this, lay out on the 
yards, casting off the gaskets, but keeping the sail well up 
on the yard; the topsail clew jiggers (if hooked) and bunt- 
lines are manned on deck, ready for pulling up; gear well 
overhauled. When all ready, Let fall ! The sails are 
pushed well clear of the yards, the gear pulled up and 
squared. 

Lay in ! Lay down from aloft ! At this, lay in off the 
yards and lay down on deck at once. The evolution is 
not completed while even one straggler is above the rail. 

The booms are left triced up, the clew jiggers and bunt- 
lines are usually left square with the yard, the jibs spread 
out, and the spanker and trysail brails slacked up. 

If the light sails are in the rigging, they are loosed and 
let fall with the rest. 

If the sails are reefed when loosing, first let fall and then 
shake out the reefs. 

Loosing, preparatory to making sail, is done in pre- 
cisely the same manner, except that the clew jiggers are 
not hooked, the gear is not manned to haul up, and the 
booms are slacked down as soon as the men are in off of 
the yards. 

LOOSE TO A BOWLINE. 

All hands are called, loose sail to a bowline. 
Heave the rigging off the pins, lead it out or coil it down 
clear for running. 

If the light yards are crossed the order is given, Aloft 

SAIL LOOSERS OF THE TOPGALLANT SAILS AND ROYALS ! 

When the royal yard men are to the topmast cross-trees. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 30 1 

and the topgallant yard men have gained the top, the 
order Aloft sail loosers ! is given. 

When the men are all aloft, the order is given Toggle 
the bowlines ! and the men aloft toggle the top bowlines 
to the buntline toggles in the foot of the sail. The head 
halliards are then snatched and led along, the downhauls 
coiled clear for running, hands by the clew garnets ready 
to ease away, fore and main buntlines and leechlines well 
overhauled, clew ropes are bent to the spanker, and trysails 
ready to haul out. Man the head halliards, top bowlines, 
and clew ropes. At the order Let fall ! the men run 
away with the bowlines and head halliards. The courses 
are let fall, and the gear overhauled so as to hang square 
from the yard. The top bowlines are out square, the head 
sails are hoisted taut up, the spanker and trysails hauled 
out, and the topgallant sails and royals, if aloft, have their 
buntlines (if any) and clewlines well overhauled. 

To shorten sail when loosed to a bowline ? 

This is done if a breeze springs up and the ship becomes 
uneasy under so much canvas. 

The light yard men are sometimes sent aloft and the 
light saiis furled. 

The downhauls, clew jiggers (or clewlines), buntlines, 
and brails are manned, the halliards, top bowlines and clew 
ropes are tended. At the order Shorten sail ! the bow- 
lines and halliards are let go, the head sails are hauled 
close down, the square sails are hauled up by the clew 
jiggers (or clewlines), and buntlines. The spanker and 
trysails are brailed up; the buntlines, etc., etc., squared 
with the yard. 

FURL SAILS. 

All hands are canea "furl sails," and if the light sails are 






302 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

aloft, Aloft topgallant and royal yard men ! The 
topmen then get in the rigging. 

Aloft topmen ! the topmen lay aloft and the lower 
yard men get out on the sheer pole. 

Aloft lower yard men ! Keep well into the slings of 
the yard. Lay out ! the men lay out to their places at 
once, but do not pick up the sail, until the order Furl 
away ! then the leeches are passed in, the sail skinned up 
snugly and tightly, and the gaskets passed square. Remai?i 
out on the yard until the order Lay in ! when the yards, top 
and rigging must be cleared as soon as possible; if so 
ordered, the square yard men alone remain aloft. If in 
port, the covers are usually put on the fore-and-aft sails. 

To furl from a bowline ? 

Shorten sail the same as before, except that the bunt- 
lines are not left square with the yard, but are hauled 
chock up. The men lay aloft and the sails are furled as be- 
fore explained. 

Loosing a?idfurlmg with a watch ? 

If at sea, loosing and furling with a watch, when the 
order is given, "lay aloft and loose the royals !" or 
any sail. The men stationed there, lay aloft at $nce and 
loose the sails without further orders, reporting when ready 
to "let fall." Loose the lee yard arm first. 

If furling, they will lay aloft, furl snugly, and lay down 
without further orders. At sea, furling lines or sea gaskets 
are always passed around the yard and sail. 

In loosing cast off the yard-arm gaskets first, particularly 
if it is blowing; keep the bunt fast and up on the yard, until 
the yard-arm gaskets are cast off, not only to prevent jam- 
ming the yard-arm gaskets, but if the bunt of the sail should 
fill with wind (and the yard-arms fast) it might rise above 
and endanger the people on the yards. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 303 

Wliat is mending sail? 

If the sails have been badly stowed, or if, for any other 
reason, they require restowing, all hands are called to "mend 
sail." The men lay aloft, in obedience to the orders, as be- 
fore. The sails are not let fall, but the gaskets are cast off 
and the sails restowed, the bunt whips are slacked a foot or 
so and the bunt restowed; haul on the bunt whip, and rouse 
up the sail, then the gaskets are passed afresh — the men lay- 
ing in and down as before. 

Wliat is squaring yards ? 

Getting the yards perfectly square by the lifts and braces. 
The square yard men lay aloft at the order. The boat- 
swain, with the assistance of his mates, commences forward 
and squares the yards by the braces first. He then gets 
into a boat (which is ready for him) pulls ahead of the ship 
and squares the yards by the lifts, then pulling around the 
ship, he sees that all the gear is taut and everything in order 
outside. 

If in a steamer, at sea, or if it is not convenient to send 
the boatswain ahead in a boat, he usually squares the yards 
by the lifts, from the end of the jib-boom, and " break of 
the poop." 

REEFING. 

When it becomes necessary to reduce sail by reefing, all 
hands are called to reef topsails. 

The topsail clewlines, buntlines, and weather topsail 
braces are manned, hands are by the topsail halliards ready 
to settle them. 

When ready — and at the order Clear away the bow- 
lines ! Round in the weather braces ! Settle away the 
topsail halliards ! Clew down ! the yard is braced in so 
that the lee topmast rigging will not prevent its being clewed 



3°4 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



down to the cap, and also to shiver the weather leech ; the 
buntlines are hauled up and the clewlines hauled on as the 
yard comes down. When it is down on the cap, steady 
the yard by the lee braces, and haul taut the halliards, be- 
lay the gear, haul out the reef tackles. 

At the order, the booms are triced up, the topmen lay 
aloft and out on the yard; face to leeward, take hold of the 
slack sail and light out to windward; pass the weather earing 
forward and over the yard through the cringle, rousing the 
reef cringle well up, and expending the, reef earing in turns 
through the cringle and over the yard, except sufficient to 
secure its end; then face to windward, and haul out to lee- 
ward; hauling the reef-band well taut along the yard, and 
pass the lee earing in the same manner as the weather one; 
when both earings are secured, knot the reef points (or tog- 
gle the beckets) hauling the sail well up on top of the yard. 
A round turn taken with the reef earing through the cringle 
will keep the sail well up on the yard. 

Pass the after reef points clear of the topgallant sheets, 
that is, between them and the yard; and be particular that 
the reef points are all knotted; and that the dog's ear (the 
bight of sail at each yard-arm) is well up on top of the yard. 

Lay in, and lay down from aloft at the order; the bunt- 
lines, clewlines, and reef tackles are let go and overhauled. 
The lee braces are let go, the weather ones tended, the hal- 
liards manned and the topsails hoisted. When the sail is 
up to a taut leech, the halliards are belayed, the yards 
tiimmed, the bowlines steadied out, and pipe down. 

When the topsails are being hoisted, the men aloft must 
see the gear well overhauled. 

Royals are furled, but topgallant sails are sometimes set 
over single reefed topsails. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 305 

The second and third reefs are taken like the first, and 
the earings passed the same way. With the close reef, pass 
the earing in the opposite direction (from forward aft), etc.; 
the reef band is hauled up under the yard; the earing being 
hauled close under; the after points of the reef band being 
hauled well taut, getting the band as close under the yard 
as possible. 

Before taking a second reef in the topsails, topgallant 
sails are generally furled. 

The mizzen topsail is usually furled when the fore and 
main are close reefed. 

When taking a close reef, it is necessary to ease a little 
of the topsail sheets, in order to get the earing up snug, 
After the topsail yard is hoisted clear of the cap, the reef 
tackles are steadied taut and belayed, to relieve the strain 
on the earings. Steady taut the topsail lifts, and usually 
put on preventer braces with a close reef. 

How reef a course ? 

The reef pendants being hooked to their cringles on the 
leeches of the sail, hook the clew jiggers to the thimble in 
the upper end of the pendant. The clew garnets, bunt- 
lines and leechlines, are manned and the sail hauled up, 
(sometimes a course is only hauled half up, in reefing). 
Haul well taut both lifts. Haul out the reef-tackles, slack- 
ing the clew garnets to get them well out. Lay aloft at 
the order, trice up booms and proceed as in taking the first 
reef in a topsail, being careful to secure every reef point, 
or toggle the beckets. Lay in and down from aloft, at the 
order, let go and overhaul the reef-tackles, and set the sail. 

How shake or turn a reef out of a topsail ? 

The reef-tackles and buntlines are hauled taut. The 
topsail halliards are settled a little, to take the strain off 



306 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



the leeches of the sail and reef-earing. Lay aloft the 
quarter watch ! Cast off the reef-points from the slings 
as they lay out, and have the earings ready to ease away 
when the reef points are all clear. Ease away the earings 
together, let go and overhaul the reef tackles, buntlines, 
clewlines; tend and slack the topgallant sheets; lay in off 
the yards and down from aloft, at the order. Man the 
topsail halliards, tend the braces, hoist away the topsails, 
trim the yards, etc. 

To turn a reef out of a course ? 

Proceed the same as in a topsail ; then ease off the tack 
and sheet, to relieve the strain on the leeches of the sail, 
while hauling taut the reef tackles. When ready, ease away 
the earings, let go and overhaul the gear, haul aboard the 
tack and haul aft the sheet. 

To reef a sail fitted with beckets and bull earings ? 







SS^WNSVsN^S^ 



Bull earing. 




Toggle and becket. 
What is a bull earing ? 
An earing composed of two ropes spliced into each 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



3°7 



other and marled together forming an eye, which goes over 
the topsail yard arm. Used for first and second reefs. 

To Reef. 
As soon as the men are on the yard, the sail is picked 
up with both hands, until each man has hold of the reef 
line, then face to leeward, and light the sail out to wind- 
ward. As soon as the weather earing is passed, face to 
windward and light the sail out to leeward. As soon as 
the lee earing is passed, toggle the reef beckets and lay in. 

To Shake out the Reef. 
The reef tackles are hauled taut, and the halliards slacked 
down a little. The reef beckets are untoggled, working 
from the slings towards the yard-arms, and after they are 
all clear, the earings are eased down together. 




Bull earing passed with riding turn. 

To pass a bull earing? 

It is rove with a long running eye round the yard-arm, 
and passed, from aft forward, through the reef cringle; 
the sail is then hauled well up on top of the yard ; then take 
three turns with the earing, round the yard and up through 
the cringle, and hitch the end to the lift. 



308 young sailor's assistant. 

If the first inner turn is taken around the yard, without 
being passed through the cringle, the sail will keep up bet- 
ter, and the earing can be passed quicker. 

To pass the third reef earings ? 

A turn is taken around the yard-arm, before the lift, over 
the cleats and through the reef cringle, from aft forward; 
the sail is hauled well up on top of the yard, then three or 
four turns are passed around the yard and up through the 
cringle. The end, after taking a turn round the yard-arm, 
is hitched to the lift. If the first inner turn is passed 
around the yard-arm only, it will keep up better. The 
close reef, as before described, is hauled up under the yard, 
the earing being passed the opposite way. 

UNBENDING SAIL. 

How is a course unbent? 

It is hauled up and furled. Then cast off the robands; 
secure the buntlines around the body of the sail, at each side 
of the bunt; pass rope yarn stops around the sail at each 
seam, or pass the gaskets if they are sewed to the sail ; cast 
off the leechlines, ease away the earings, and at the same 
time lower away the buntlines and clew garnets. When on 
deck, un toggle the buntlines, unshackle the tacks and sheets, 
and cast off the gear. 

How Unbend a Topsail? 

A topsail is unbent in the same manner as a course, ex- 
cept that the sheets and clewlines are unbent aloft. It is 
sent down by the buntlines, they being hitched or passed 
around the sail, on each side of the bunt; haul the sail 
into either gangway, as it is lowered. 

At sea, the lee earing should be eased away first, to get it 
to windward of the stay, then ease away the weather earing 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 309 

and lower a way. on the buntlines. In bad weather a line is 
bent to the lee earing. 

In blowing weather, at sea, unbending sails, every man 
stationed on a yard, before going aloft, should provide him- 
self with a length of rope yarn or spun yarn, sufficient to 
go twice around the sail. After casting off the robands he 
passes this stop twice around the sail; keep the gaskets fast 
until" the sail is quite ready for easing away. In case the 
gaskets are secured to the head of the sail, they are taken 
around it, and made fast to their own part, instead of 
using stops. 



CHAPTER XIV. 

MAKING AND REDUCING SAIL, ROPES USED, ETC., ETC. 

WORKING STUDDING SAILS — MANOEUVRING, TACKING, 
WEARING, ETC., ETC. GENERAL REMARKS. 

What ropes are used in setting a course ? 

Let go and overhaul leechlines, buntlines, and bunt- 
whips, ease down clew garnets. Haul upon the weather 
tack and lee sheet, or both sheets. 

What ropes are used in setting a topsail ? 

Let go and overhaul the buntlines and bunt-whips, ease 
down the clewlines. Haul upon the sheets and halliards. 

What 7'opes are used in setting a topgallant sail ? 

Let go and overhaul the buntlines, clewlines, and bunt- 
whips. Haul upon the sheets and halliards. 

What ropes are used in setting a royal? 

Let go and overhaul the clewlines. Haul upon the 
sheets and halliards. * 

U'hat ropes are used in setting a jib or staysail? 

Let go and overhaul the downhauls. Haul upon the 
halliards and sheets. 

Wliat rop-es are used in setting a spanker or iiysail ? 

Let go and overhaul the brails, clew ropes, and head 
downhauls. Haul upon the outhauls and sheets. 

In setting a topsail or topgallant sail, what is hauled home 
first ? 

The topsail and topgallant sheets. They are hauled 
chock home, then the halliards are manned and the yards 
hoisted. If in good weather, or exercising, sheet home 
(3io) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 3 1 1 

and hoist away at the same time. The sheets should be 
marked, to show when chock home. 

Wliich halliards are manned in hoisting a topsail? 

At sea, the weather halliards are manned with a few 
hands to take down the slack of the lee halliards, (a turn 
should always be taken with the halliards not being hauled 
upon). In port, the port fore, and starboard main topsail 
halliards are the ones hauled upon. The mizzen topsail 
halliards are single, and on the port side of the ship. 

When hoisting topsails, always, if possible, pass from 
one halliards to another, for example ; if hauling on the 
starboard main topsail halliards, when forward on the fore- 
castle, let go and pass over on the run to the fore topsail 
halliards on the port side (they lead aft) ; then when abaft 
the main mast, pass over again to the main, and so on. 
By this plan no time is lost trying to get aft to man the 
same halliards, but main topmen assist the fore, and vice 
versa. 

In setting royals ', how is the gear hauled on ? 

Haul home the sheets and hoist away the halliards at 
the same time. 

In setting a jib or staysail, how man the halliards ? 

A few hands run away with the end, the rest mass and 
stand by to " tail on" (catch hold), as the sail goes up. 
By this plan the sail is hoisted steadily until chock up. 

In setting a spanker or trysail, what haul on first ? 

The head is first hauled chock out, the outhaul or sheet 
being kept slack until the head is out. 

In hoisting yards, what is done with the braces ? 

They are tended and kept slack. 

If the ship is "on a wind" hoisting yards, what is done 
with the braces ? 



312 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

The lee brace is let go, the weather brace is tended and 
a slight strain kept on it. 

In hauling out a spanker, the wind is made to help by 
easing the boom well over on the lee quarter. 

In making sail, never let go the clew garnets or topsail 
clewlines by the run (altogether), but ease them down. 

The hand tending a topsail clewline, must be careful and 
not let the clew of the topsail get below the lower yard. 
Should this happen, the sheets are much harder to haul home, 
as they will bind against the yard, or topmast studding 
sail-boom. 

In hauling home a weather sheet, wait for the weather roll, 
or spill the sail by luffing a little. 

At sea, owing to the topgallant yards turning part way 
over, as the sails fill with wind, the royals are apt to sheet 
home quite hard ; therefore, in setting the royals, hoist about 
two-thirds up, and then avast hoisting-until the sheets are 
well home and alike. 

When the spanker or trysail is being set, always let go the 
weather vang to take the strain off the gaff; after the sails 
fill, it can be hauled hand-taut and belayed. 

In loosing sail, people in the tops, and on lower yards, 
must look out for the fall of topsail reef tackle blocks, bridles, 
etc., etc. 

In hauling out a studding sail tack, the wind is made to 
help, by keeping the ship away (letting her go off). 

In making sail, the people aloft must always see the gear 
well overhauled. 

REDUCING SAIL. 

WJiat ropes are used in taking in a course ? 
Ease away the tack and sheet, or both sheets; haul upon 
the clew garnets, buntlines, and leechlines. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 313 

What ropes are used in taking in a topsail ? 

Ease away the sheets, settle away the halliards, haul upon 
the clewlines and buntlines. 

WJiat ropes are used in taking in a topgallant sail? 

Let go the sheets and halliards, and haul upon the clew- 
lines and buntlines. 

WJiat ropes are used in taking in a royal? 

Let go the sheets and halliards, and haul upon the clew- 
lines. 

WJiat ropes are used in taking in a jib or staysail? 

Let go the halliards and sheets, haul up the downhaul. 

What ropes are used in taking in a spanker or trysail? 

Let go the outhauls and sheets, and haul upon the brails 

In taking in a sail the object is to "spill if (get the wind 
out of it) ; the more wind it holds the more difficult it will 
be to manage. 

If blowing fresh, never let go a lee sheet, but ease it off. 

In taking in a course, blowing fresh, never let go a tack, 
but ease it off. 

In takin-g in a topgallant sail before the wind, the hal- 
liards are let go and the yard clewed down, then the sheets 
are let go. 

In taking in a topgallant sail on the wind, blowing fresh, 
the lee sheet and halliards are eased off, the clewlines and 
weather brace hauled upon. The weather sheet is kept fast 
until the sail is "spilled" and the yard down. 

In taking in royals on the wind, the weather braces are 
hauled upon just enough to " spill" the sail. 

In taking in a trysail or spanker, always haul on the lee 
brails best and spill the wind out of the sail, taking in the 
slack of the weather brails and vang. 

In taking in a jib or staysail, let go the halliards first; the 
14 



314 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

wind is spilled out of the head of the sail, and it will run 
half way down the stay of itself; then, by easing off the 
sheet, the sail is hauled down without straining the stay or 
boom. 

In taking in a course, with the wind aft, the sail is spilled 
by hauling on the buntlines and leechiines best. 

STUDDING SAILS. 

These sails are used in light or moderate weather, with 
the wind free or aft, to increase the speed of a vessel. The 
weather topmast and topgallant studding sails are not usually 
set before the wind is two or three points free, or forming 
an angle of eight or nine points with the keel. 

The lower studding sails can only be used, to advantage, 
with the wind well abaft the beam. With the wind right 
aft and yards square, studding sails are set on both sides. 

To set a topgallant studding sail? 

At sea, the sail is kept in the top, up and down the top- 
mast rigging. At the order Stand by to set the topgal- 
lant STUDDING SAILS! Or GET THE TOPGALLANT SAILS 

ready for setting! those stationed, lay aloft at once, 
get a jigger on, and haul taut the topgallant lift, haul taut 
topgallant and topsail braces on deck. One of the top 
men lay up on the topsail yard, and converts the boom tric- 
ing line into an in-and-out jigger, toggles the heel of the 
boom to a bull's eye, which travels on a jackstay, fitted for 
that purpose. 

Cast loose the sail in the top, and pass a squilgee strap 
(which is secured to the yard) around the sail and the stud- 
ding sail yard, then put the toggle in ; man the halliards on 
deck, also the tack (or man it in the top if it leads there), 
have a hand by the sheet, man the in-and-out jigger (boom 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 315 

tricing line) in the top. And at order Haul taut ! Rig 
out ! Hoist away ! the studding sail boom is rigged out 
to the mark on the heel, and a lashing passed securing the 
heel in place, keeping the boom on the right slue for the 
tack. As the sail goes up, the slack of the tack is taken in, 
the men in the top slacking off the line which is attached to 
the squilgee toggle ; when the sail is well above the topsail 
yard, and at the order Out squilgee ! the toggle is hauled 
out, the sail falls clear, the tack is hauled out, the sail hoisted 
chock up, and the sheet trimmed down. 

To take in a topgallant studding sail? 

At the order Stand by to take in the topgallant 
studding sail ! the down haul and sheet are manned, hands 
are stationed by the tack and halliards ; a hand lays up on 
the topsail yard ready to cast off the heel lashing, to rig in 
the boom. At the order Lower away ! Haul down ! Rig 
in! haul down on the sheet and downhaul, lower away the 
halliards, ease off the tack and haul the sail into the top; rig 
in the boom. If necessary, to prevent the sail flying for- 
ward of the topgallant sail, ea^e off the tack before lower- 
ing the^ halliards. Take the jiggers off the topgallant lifts; 
make up the sail. 

The fore and main topgallant studding sails, are usually 
set and taken in together. 

To set a topmast studding sail ? 

At the order " Stand by to set the topmast studding 
sail," or "Get the topmast studding ready for set- 
ting." Lay aloft, and get a burton on the topsail yard 
and haul it well taut. Get the sail out, forward of the 
fore rigging, and make it up ready for sending aloft. Over- 
haul down and bend on the halliards and tack, pass a 
squilgee strap (which is made fast to the yard), around the 






31 6 young sailor's assistant. 

sail and halliards, put in the toggle (which has a line bent 
to it). A hand on the lower yard hooks the in-and-out 
jigger, for rigging out the boom. 

Man the halliards, hands to take in the slack of the tack. 
And at the order Set taut ! Rig out ! Hoist away ! The 
boom is rigged out, by hauling on the in-and-out jigger, the 
heel being lashed, with the heel lashing, as soon as the boom 
is out In the meantime, the sail is being walked up, the 
man on the lower yard, bearing clear as the sail passes him. 
When high enough, above the yard, to clear the brace, Out 
squilgee ! The squilgee is hauled out by a hand on the 
forecastle, and the sail falls clear. Haul the tack close out, 
hoist the sail taut up, trim down the sheets. The short 
sheet, is rove through a bull's-eye on the lower yard and 
made fast in the top. The long sheet, is dipped down for- 
ward of the course to the deck, dip the downhaul down 
forward of the course, and take it through a leader on the 
forecastle. 

How is the in-and-out jigger rigged? 

A small gun tackle purchase, kept on the ya^d, is used. 
To rig out, the outer block is secured to the neck of the 
boom iron, the inner one to the heel of the studying sail 
boom, the fall is rove through a leading block, at the truss 
of fore yard, and down on deck. To rig in, secure one 
block to the slings of the yard and the other to the heel 
of the boom, the fall leading as before. 

To take in a topmast studding sail ? 

At the order, the downhaul is manned, also the long sheet 
and in-and-out jigger. Hands stationed by the halliards, 
tack, and short sheet in the top. At the order, Lower 
away ! Haul down ! Rig in ! The halliards are lowered 
and the sail hauled down to the boom by the downhaul; 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 3 1 7 

then let go the tack, haul down on the downhaul and long 
sheet together, rigging in the boom at the same time. 
Take the burto?i off the topsail yard. Make up the sail, 
round up the halliards and hitch them to the clew of the 
topsail, and stop the tack along the boom. The down- 
haul and sheets are made up in the sail. 

If there is a boom brace on the topmast studding sail 
boom, it is set taut when the boom is out, and tended when 
rigging in. 

Large vessels sometimes have, as an additional support, a 
topping lift for topmast studding sail boom. 

How rig a jumper on the topmast studding sail 000m ? 

This is done when carrying a topmast studding sail, blow- 
ing fresh. The lower studding sail halliards are used; a 
toggle is placed in the halliards above the boom, and the 
lower halliards rounded down until this toggle takes in the 
block in the outer end of the topmast studding sail boom; 
bring the halliards inboard and belay them taut, to some 
convenient place by the fore rigging. 

A jumper on lower yard is usually a water whip; hook it 
to the yard-arm and to a bolt in the gangway, then set 
taut and belay. 

To set a lower studding sail? 

At the order, break out and make up the lower studding 
sail for setting; overhaul down the outer halliards, and 
bend them to the yard; overhaul down the boom topping 
lift, and hook it to the lower boom; hook the inner halliards 
(use fore clew jigger) to the inner head earing of the sail; 
bring in and bend on the outhaul to the clew ; pass a squil- 
gee strap (which is secured to the yard) around the sail and 
secure it with a toggle, having a tripping line leading on 
deck; haul taut the fore lift and brace. At the order, man 



318 young sailor's assistant. 

the lower boom topping lift and forward guy] have a hand 
by the after guy, pull up the inner halliards, top up and rig 
out the lower boom. At the order, man the halliards and 
outhaul. At Hoist away! pull up the outer halliards, 
taking in the slack of the outhaul and inner halliards; 
when clear of the topping lift, and about half way up, 
Out squilgee ! The sail falls clear, walk away with the 
halliards and walk the sail chock up, then haul out the out- 
haul and pull up the inner halliards ; reeve the sheet through 
a thimble or block on the goose neck of the lower boom, 
and haul it well -rr it ; trim the lower boom by the fore yard, 
so that the sail i^dy be set parallel with the foresail. 

To take in a lower studding sail? 

At the order, man the clewline, sheets, and inner halliards, 
have hands by the outhaul and outer halliards. At Ease 
away the outhaul! Clew up! the clewline is hauled 
on, the outhaul cleared away, and the outer clew hauled 
up to the yard, then Lower away ! Haul in ! slack 
the outer halliards, haul on the inner halliards, clewline, 
and sheet. When the sail is well in on the forecastle, lower 
the inner halliards and make the sail up ; rig in the lower 
boom, and trice up the gear. 

In setting a topmast studding sail it is hoisted abaft the 
foresail ; but in taking it in, it is hauled down forward of 
the foresail. 

The lower studding sail is hoisted and hauled in, abaft the 
foresail. 

Lower studding sails are sometimes triangular or three- 
cornered (always so in the merchant service) ; these are con- 
venient for setting and taking in, and are especially good 
for night work, as they leave the side lights clear. If blow- 
ing fresh, and a three-cornered studding sail is set, a jumper 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 319 

should be rigged to support the topmast studding sail 
boom; there being no outer clew to the lower studding 
sail, it leaves the boom very poorly supported, especially 
if the topmast studding is pulling hard. 

What is meant by ' * passaree the foresail ' ' ? 

When the ship is before the wind and lower studding sails 
set, the clews of the foresail are hauled out by jiggers to the 
lower booms. This is to present more sail surface, for the 
wind to act on by spreading out the foot of the foresail. 

MANEUVERING, ETC., ETC. 

Whe?i is the wind abeam ? 

When it is eight points from the bow or stern, or at right 
angles to the keel. 

What is running before the wind? 

Sailing with the wind exactly aft. 

When is the wind on the quarter ? 

When twelve points from the bow, or four points from the 
stern . 

What is meant by " all in the wind 1 ' ? 

An expression used, when a ship comes so close to the 
wind as to cause her head sails to shake or be aback. 

What is meant by ' 'flat-aback ' ' ? 

When by shift of wind ahead or other cause, a ship's sails 
are thrown aback against the masts so as to force her astern. 

What is boxing off? 

Bracing the head yards around to pay a ship's head off, 
when she is in the wind or aback. 

Wliat is backing and filling? 

By working the sails and helm a ship is brought nearly 
head to the wind, gathering stern board, then causing hei 
to fall off and fill on the same tack, and gathering headway, 



320 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

the tide carrying the ship in the required direction. This 
is done in harbors and rivers. 

WJiat is "heaving to" ? 

To bring vessel's head to the wind, and brace the yards, 
so she will remain nearly stationary. 

What is "lying to" ? 

In a gale of wind a vessel is brought by the wind, and by 
a proper arrangement of sails, is allowed to come up and 
fall off two or three points, drifting to leeward. 

What is " clawiiig off" ? 

Working to windward off a lee shore. 

What is scudding ? 

When a ship runs before the wind, under very short canvas 
or bare poles. 

What is being i ' brought by the lee ' ' ? 

When a ship sailing with the wind aft or on the quarter, 
changes her course so much that she brings the wind on 
what was the lee side, taking the sails aback, she is "brought 
by the lee." 

What is i ' broaching to ' ' / 

When a ship is sailing with the wind aft or on the quarter, 
flies suddenly into the wind, throwing everything aback, and 
thus endangering spars, sails, etc., etc., she has "broached 
to." 

When is a vessel pooped? 

When she is running before a heavy sea, and the waves 
break over the taffrail. 

When is a vessel on her beam ends ? 

When she is heeled over so much that her beams are 
nearly in a vertical position. 

What is the vessel's wake ? 

The track she leaves in passing through the water. 






YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 32 1 

Wlien is a vessel able to carry the most sail ? When the 
least ? 

When sailing before the wind — she can carry the least 
when sailing on the wind. 

When the ship is going ahead \ if the helm is pit to star- 
board, how will the rudder act ? 

It will force the ship's stern to starboard, and her head to 
port. 

When the ship is going astern, if the helm is put to star- 
board, how will the rudder act ? 

It will force the ship's stern to port, and her head to star- 
board. 

With the wind abeam, and the fore topsail alone set, what 
effect will it have on the ship ? 

It will force the ship ahead, and her bow to leeward or 
away from the wind. 

With the wind abeam, and the fore topsail braced aback, 
what effect will it have on the ship ? 

It will force the ship astern, and her head to leeward or 
away from the wind. 

With the wind abeam, and the mizzen topsail alone set, 
what effect will it have on the ship ? 

It will force the ship ahead, and her stern away from the 
wind, bringing her bow to windward 

With the wind abeam, and the mizzen topsail braced 
aback, what effect will it have on the ship ? 

It will force the ship astern, and her stern away from the 
wind, bringing her bow to windward. 

With the wind abeam, and the main topsail alone set, 
what effect will it have on the ship ? 

It will force the ship ahead. 
14* 



322 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

With the wind abeam, and the fore and niizzen topsaih 
alone set, what effect will it have on the ship ? 

They will balance each other, and force the ship ahead. 

With the wiiid abeam, a7id all three topsails set, with no 
ncdder, how 7vould you trim the sails to keep the ship azvay, 
or force her bow away froi7i the wind ? 

Shiver the after sail by bracing in the yards (main and 
cross-jack) so that the wind will strike against the weather 
leeches and along the surface of the sails, without having 
any direct pressure on them, thus leaving the fore topsail 
to send her bow to leeward. 

Why brace in the yards on the main as well as those on 
the mizzen ? 

Because the sails on the main must be reckoned as acting 
abaft the centre of rotation, the body of the ship being so 
much larger forward than aft. 

With the wind on the quarter, how trim the sails, if you 
wish to bring the ship nearer the wind ? 

Brace up the after yards and set the spanker. 

In a steamer, what effect will backing the engines have 
upon the ship 's head ? 

Backing will always bring the ship's stern up to the 
vvmd, and, therefore, throw her head off the wind, or to 
leeward. 

How should sails be set ? 

As flat as possible, for the force exerted is always at right 
angles to the part struck. 

TACKING. 

Meaning of each order given in tacking a ship. 
" Ready about, stations for stays!" — Every one 
takes his station for tacking ship. 

" Ready, ready!" — Cai. on to "stand by." 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. $2^ 

"Ease down the helm!" — To the quarter-master, who 
puts the helm down gradually. 

"Haul the spanker boom amid-ships !" — The boom is 
hauled amidships, in order to force the stern to leeward 
and throw the bow into the wind. 

"Helm's a lee!" — When the helm is down this order is 
given \ then ease off the fore and head sheets, in order to 
take the wind out of the head sails as soon as possible. In 
a light breeze, or tacking against a head sea, the head sails 
are sometimes hauled down, and are hoisted again as soon 
as the wind is on the other bow. 

"Rise tacks and sheets !" — The wind being out of the 
lee clew of the main sail, the clew garnets are pulled up, high 
enough, to allow the tack and sheet blocks to swing around 
with the sail, clear of the rail. Shorten in (take in the 
slack) the lee main tack and weather sheet. The fore tack 
can be kept fast, and not hauled up until just before the head 
yards are braced. The weather clew of the foresail will 
assist in forcing the ship around. Now jump and man the 
weather main, and lee cross-jack braces; a few hands stand- 
ing by to run away with the end of the main brace, the 
others standing by to tail on. Man the lee main tack and 
weather sheet. Let go and overhaul the weather lifts. 

"Haul taut, mainsail haul!" — The lee after braces 
a* id the after bowlines are let go, the after yards braced 
around, and the mainsail set on the other tack. 

"Head braces! — Now jump and man the head braces. 
If the fore tack is down, those stationed at the weather fore 
clew garnet man it, Man the lee fore tack and weather 
fore sheet. Rise fore tack. 

"Haul well taut, let go and haul!" — The lee head 
braces and head bowlines are let go, the head yards braced 
around, and the foresail set on the other tack. 



324 young sailor s assistant. 

"Haut taut the lifts, steady out the bowlines !" 
— The weather lower lifts are hauled taut and the bowlines 
hauled forward. 

If a ship does not come up or is sluggish, check a little 
the lee head braces, bracing up again as she comes around. 

Why does the main yard fly around by itself, if hauled be- 
fore the wind is ahead? 

Because the head sails becalm the lee side of the main 
topsail, but not the weather side, which is aback ; and the 
wind acting only on the weather side will blow that side aft, 
and force the lee side forward. 

Why is a screw ship harder to tack than a sailing vessel ? 

In tacking, as long as a sailing vessel has headway, the 
water coming along the weather side of the bottom strikes 
the rudder and assists to turn the ship; but in a ship with 
a screw the water meets a constant current coming from the 
lee side, through the screw hole, caused by the lee way the 
ship is making, and the side movement of the stern, and is 
consequently carried off with it to windward, at a consider- 
able angle from the line of keel, without touching the rud- 
der at all. 

The rudder, to be of the utmost use, must receive the di- 
rect force of the water before the direction of the stream is 
altered by running through the screw hole. 

With yards braced up, which brace has the most strain on 
it, the weather or lee brace ? 

The weather brace. 

/. hy should upper yards be braced more "in" than the 
lower yards, when the ship is on the wind? 

The lower yards of a ship are braced up to an angle of 
about 20 with the fore-and-aft line, but the weather half 
of the topsail is at a much larger ansrle on account of the 






YOUNG SATLOR S ASSISTANT. 325 

curvature of the sail. Large sails have more curvature than 
small ones; a large sail must, therefore, have its yards braced 
up to a sharper angle than the yards of a small sail, for the 
plane of both sails to be at the same angle with the fore-a id- 
aft line. And the upper part of a sail, from being attached 
to the yard, has not so great a curvature as the lower half, 
therefore the upper yard of the upper sail may be braced in 
more than the lower yard of the upper sail. If upper yards 
are braced in more than the lower, and the sails are kept 
full, it insures the lower sail being well full. 

/// tacking, if a ship misses stays, what is done ? 

Either fill away on the same tack, or wear her around on 
her heel. 

Describe in general terms wearing short around after miss- 
ing stays ? 

As the ship is falling off, the head and fore sheets are 
hauled aft, the mainsail and spanker taken in. As the wind 
comes on the bow and shakes the sails, the " after yards are 
squared." As the wind draws well aft the after yards are 
braced up on the other tack, the mainsail is set, and the head 
yards squared. When the wind is on the other quarter, the 
spanker is set, shift over the head sheets. When the wind 
is abeam brace shaip up, trim aft the head sheets; be care- 
ful not to let the head sails get aback by waiting too long 
to brace up the head yards. 

IVJiat is box-hauling ? 

Putting a ship on the other tack by luffing up into the 
wind, keeping fast the head sheets, and as she loses her 
way and comes up head to wind, haul up mainsail in spa?iker, 
brace abox (aback) the head yards. Square the after yards, 
and let her head fall off from the wind, trimming the sails 
as before, until sharp up on the other tack. 

What is tacking tuith a drag? 



326 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

In a light wind near the land, this is sometimes done: A 
tow-line is rove through a block at the jib-boom end, and 
taken aft clear of everything to the weather quarter, where 
a drag is made fast to it; the line is manned inboard, let 
go the drag when the helm is put down, and haul away on 
the line at "mainsail haul." 

What is club-hauling $ 

In working or clawing off a lee shore when there is no 
room to wear, and, therefore, an absolute necessity for go- 
ing about without missing stays. The lee anchor is got 
ready for letting go, a hawser is bent to it and taken to the 
lee quarter; proceed as in tacking; if the vessel loses head- 
way and is in danger of missing stays, the lee anchor is let 
go, and the after yards braced around; haul in on the haw- 
ser, veer chain, and when the hawser takes the strain, slip 
the cable. When the after sails fill, brace around the head 
yards and cut the hawser. In club-hauling, an anchor is 
lost. 

What is clubbing? 

Drifting down a current with an anchor under foot. 

Describe wearing a ship ? 

Mainsail and spanker are taken in, main and mizzen 
staysails (if set) hauled down. Put the helm up. The 
weather main lee cross-jack braces are manned, the after 
bowlines cleared away. As the ship falls off the after braces 
are rounded in gradually, keeping the sails just lifting until 
the after yards are square. The head braces are now 
manned, also fore clew garnets, rise fore tack and sheet, 
and clear away head bowlines, square the head yards ; shift 
over the head sheets when before the wind ; as the wind 
gets on the other quarter, set mainsail and spanker, brace 
up the after yards : as she comes to, brace up the head 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 327 

yards and trim aft the head sheets. The time to right the 
helm depends upon the ship, care being taken not to let her 
come into the wind after she is on the other tack. In wear- 
ing a short ship the head yards can be swung entirely 
around, not stopping when square. 

If a ship flies into the wind, how will you get her head off '? 

First, put the helm up and flatten in the head sheets; if 
that will not do. brace abox the head yards, which will force 
her head off from the wind. 

REMARKS OX EXERCISES. ETC.. ETC. 

When all hands are called for an exercise or evolution, 
the crew repair at once to their stations, moving on the run. 

Keep perfect silence, pay strict attention to orders, and 
when given, obey them with a will. 

If stationed aloft, do not man the rigging until ordered. 

When "laying aloft" take hold of the shrouds; an im- 
perfect ratline might be met with, and if taken hold of and 
carried away, you would probably lose your hold and fall 
from aloft. 

Yard men must keep close in to the slings, and not lay out 
until ordered. 

When out on the yard do not lay in until ordered. 

At the order "lay dowx from aloft!" leave the top at 
once, unless stationed to remain aloft. This order must be 
strictly obeyed, for if not stationed aloft your services are 
needed on deck; as soon as you reach the deck jump at 
once to the proper station. 

In furling, do not commence to pick up the sail until the 
order ' ' furl away ! ' ' 

In loosing, keep the sail well up on the yard until the 
order "let fall !" 



328 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Never " sing out " from aloft. If you want a rope let go, 
shake it. 

If stationed aloft, in sending down topgallant and royal 
yards, stop in the lifts and braces securely before laying 
down (if checking lines are used, see them well taut), so that 
the lifts and braces can be hauled taut on deck. 

Remember, that an evolution is not complete until all 
hands are not only clear of the tops, but also clear of the 
rigging. 

In sending paint, tar, etc., aloft, place the pot in a deck 
bucket, bend on a line from aloft, and haul it up. 

In all exercises work lively, and with perfect silence. 

Station billets should be taken care of and carefully read, 
so as to be sure of your proper station. 






CHAPTER XV. 

EXERCISING SPARS — SHIFTING SAILS. 

To send down topgallant and royal yards ? 

Supposing the yards are across, ready for sea. Cast off or 
cut yard-arm stops, unbend the gear, single the parrel, un- 
reeve royal sheets, unhook quarter blocks, unhook the foot 
ropes of topgallant yards, and hook them to the yard for- 
ward of the mast, come up the halliards and reeve the long 
yard rope. 

The after or hauling parts of the yard ropes are kept coiled 
in the top, except when exercising ; they are then paid down 
on deck abaft, and rove through snatch blocks (abaft the 
masts), ready for use. 

The yard rope being hooked to the slings of the yard, is 
confined to, what will be, the upper quarters, by the lizard. 
The tripping line is bent to the snorter on the opposite or 
lower yard-arm, and is led down forward, clear of every- 
thing. At the order, man the yard ropes and tripping lines, 
tend the parrel, lifts, and braces. Stand by! the tripping 
line (which has been kept into the slings of the yard) is let 
go and the slack taken in on deck. At, Sway ! pull up on 
the yard ropes until the yards go clear of the cap and hang 
by the yard ropes, let go the lower lift and tend both braces, 
at the same time haul down with the tripping lines, clear- 
ing the lower yard-arms of the lifts and braces; take a turn 
with the yard ropes for lowering. At the order, lower 
away the yards, clearing the upper yard-arm of the lifts and 
braces, haul down with the tripping lines, bearing the yards 
clear as they go down, securing them in the lower rigging. 
(3 2 9) 



330 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Stop the lifts and braces in, snugly, at the mast head before 
laying down from aloft. 

At sea, the light yards are sent up and down to windward 
and abaft the lower yards. 

In exercising topgallant and royal yards, in port, check- 
ing lines for the lifts and braces may be used, by which they 
are hauled into the mast head, the moment they are clear of 
the yard-arms. 

When exercising, topgallant and royal yards are some- 
times Aung from the forward top rim or from the lower yards ; 
but the evolution is more thorough and complete if the yards 
are taken in the lower rigging, where they properly belong ; 
particularly in ships with no topgallant forecastle, like the 
"training ships." 

Tripping lines must be sufficiently wdl manned to haul 
off the lower lifts and braces, and guy the yards clear, when 
coming down. They usually reeve through a tail block, 
which is tailed to any convenient boltror cleat, and used as 
a leader. 

For exercising in port, the yard ropes are generally rove 
through jack blocks which are shackled, those for the top- 
gallant yard ropes at the forward part of the funnel, those 
for the royal yard ropes to the band for the royal rigging. 
Jack blocks are very convenient, for they do away with the 
necessity of unreeving the yard ropes when exercising top- 
gallant masts. 

What are bull ropes ? 

They are used to aid in getting the upper topgallant yard- 
arms into the rigging. The upper end has a running eye 
turned in ; the hauling part is led through a bull's eye or 
leader on the forward swifter, about where the upper yard- 
arm will come, and taken to the deck. The running eye 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. <j^j 

is taken up under and forward of the lower yard, clear of 
everything, and as the topgallant yard comes down, it is 
dropped over the upper yard-arm by a hand stationed on 
the lower yard or in the top. The bull rope is manned on 
deck, and as soon as the lower yard-arm is placed outside 
in the chain-, the upper yard-arm is hauled into the rigging 
and the lashing passed. 

Topgallant and royal yards are crossed as described in 
Rigging Ship. 

To send down topgallant masts ? 

The fore and mizzen topgallant mast ropes lead abaft the 
masts, on the port side. The main, leads in the same way 
on the starboard side. They are taken through good snatch- 
blocks, and have a cavil (cleared) near by, to take a turn 
for lowering. 

Unreeve the topgallant and royal yard ropes (if rove 
through sheaves in the mast.) Come up and overhaul 
enough of the laniards of the backstays, shrouds, and fore- 
and-aft stays, to slack the rigging, so that mast can be lifted 
and the fid taken out; bend or hook a heel rope to the heel 
of the mast and send it down on deck. At the order, man 
the mast ropes and heel ropes, sway up ! and out fid ! care- 
fully attending the fore-and-aft stays, take a good turn with 
yard ropes, lower away together, when all the fids are out, 
and all the masts ready for lowering. 

When the royal sheave hole comes below the topmast cap, 
pass the lizard. 

Lower the mast on deck, forward of the topsail yards; 
the topmen, aloft, unclamp the forward side of the trestle- 
trees, as the mast goes down, to clear the topsail yard. The 
funnel is lashed aloft, if necessary, as is also the royal rigging ; 
stop in the shrouds and backstays to the topmast rigging, and 



33-' YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

take down the slack of the fore-and-aft stays ; stop in all the 
rigging, and if at sea, lash the topgallant masts in the gang- 
way, but if for sundown or other exercise, topgallant masts 
are usually secured up and down the lower masts. 

The heel rope should have sufficient hands on to haul 
down, and guy the mast clear when coming down. 

At sea, topgallant masts are usually sent down abaft and 
to windward of the topsail yards. 

Topgallant masts are sent up as described in Rigging 
Ship. 

To rig in the flying jib-boom ? 

Reeve the heel rope, bend on a rope's end to the heel, 
and lead it to the forecastle. The flying jib must be unbent. 
Come up the rigging, set taut the heel rope, unclamp and 
rig in ; unreeve the fore royal and flying jib-stays, take off 
the guys, foot ropes, and martingales, secure the boom in 
the gangway, and stop in all rigging. If rigging in for ex- 
ercise, lash the flying jib-boom at the side of the jib-boom, 
and keep fast the rigging. 

To rig in the jib-boom ? 

Reeve the jib heel rope, set it taut, taking a turn well aft. 

Ease up the jumper, guys and back ropes. 

Hook the foretopmast staysail halliards to a strap around 
the jib-boom end, haul them taut, and keep them manned. 

Unclamp the heel. 

Ease in ! pulling up the staysail halliards as the boom 
comes in. 

Use the inner studding sail halliards (fore clew jigger), to 
steady and lift the heel of the boom over the rail. 

As the boom comes in, the funnel or band and rigging 
are stopped up on the fore part of the bowsprit cap. 

A jigger on the fore stay is used to steady and lift the 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 33$ 

head of the boom, shifting the strap out as the boom comes 
in, or, if great care is taken, the jib-halliards may be used. 

To rig out ? 

Haul away the heel rope, attend the inner halliards and 
the jigger. After the boom is pointed and rigged, hook on 
and attend the staysail halliards, easing away as the boom 
goes our. 

When far enough out, clamp the heel. 

Pull up the back ropes and jumpers, bend the jib, rig out 
trie fying jib-boom, and bend the flying jib. 

Send up the fore topgallant mast. 

To send down a topsail yard? 

Unshackle the quarter blocks, securing them to the lower 
cap. 

Unbend the sail from the yard, and haul it into the top ; 
overhaul the buntiines well, and unbend the reef tackles 
from the sail, but nothing else. 

Hang the hauling part of the reef tackles, studding sail 
halliards and topgallant sheets to the eyes of the lower rig- 
ging, to keep them from unreeving at the mast-head, and to 
have them ready when the yard comes up. 

Trice up the fly blocks, unshackle the tye blocks from the 
yard, and stop them to the cap. 

Take the tack blocks off the topgallant studding sail 
booms, hitching the tack round the strap of the block. 

Get the studding sail booms up and down the topmast 
rigging, using the boom tricing line and topgallant studding 
sail halliards or clewlines. 

Unreeve the topgallant sheets and topsail reef tackle. 

Unreeve and knot the ends of the studding sail halliards, 
and round them up to the mast-head block. 

Take the topgallant mast rope, which is rove through its 



334 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

top block, and make the end fast around the slings of the 
topsail yard, stopping the bight out to (what will be) the upper 
quarter, with a strong lashing, so that when the yard is 
swayed it will hang, up and down, by the mast rope. Hook 
the top burtons to their respective straps on the yard. 

Bend a top bowline to the slings of the yard, as a fore- 
and-aft guy to clear the jaws, first of the topmast, and after- 
wards of the top. 

Tend the topsail braces and lifts, cast off the parrel on 
one quarter of the yard ; Sway away ! pulling up on the 
burtons and mast rope, and cock-bill the yard by pulling 
on one burton and slacking the other. 

Unrig the lower yard-arm of the topsail yard on the lower 
yard, and the upper yard-arm in the topmast rigging or top. 

Steady the lower yard-arm well forward, as then the upper 
yard-arm is kept close to the top for the men working in 
the topmast rigging or top. 

When the rigging is off, keep it clear for going aloft. 

Lower the yard on deck — lower yard-arm aft, land it on 
a mat, swab, or grating, to prevent scoring or digging into 
the deck. 

When ready for sending up the same, or a new yard? 

Sway aloft by the mast rope and burtons, bent and 
hooked as before. 

When up and down, rig the yard as before. 

Use the bowline bent to the upper quarter, to keep the 
yard clear of the fore part of the top. 

Tend the lifts and braces. Sway aloft ! 

Cross the yard by slacking the mast rope, and upper bur- 
ton, and hauling on the lower burton. 

Pass the parrel lashing, reeve and secure the lifts as soon 
as possible. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 335 

Reeve the reef-tackles and top gallant sheets. 

Replace the studding sail booms, and put on the tack 
blocks. 

Shackle the quarter blocks and the tye blocks. 

As soon as the reef tackles are bent, haul out and bend 
the sail. 

In shifting a yard at sea, send it up and down, on the 
weather side. 

After crossing a yard, if the jaws have fallen to leeward, 
or the yard does not rest fairly on the cap, and conse- 
quently does not allow the parrel to be passed taut at once; 
use a rolling or other tackle, to rouse it over to windward. 

In general, exercising sending up and down a topsail 
yard, the sail would be unbent, and sent down on deck out 
of the way. 

To send down or shift a topmast, leaving the topsail yard 
aloft? 

Send the top gallant studding sails down out of the top. 
Any ropes or whips that may be wanted, must be kept 
clear of the topmast rigging, as the masts come down. 
Come up and hang all the backstays abreast the top. 

Send down the top gallant and royal yards and mast, 
getting them all on deck. 

Secure the top gallant and royal rigging and truck, on 
the topmast cap. 

Secure the top gallant studding sail booms, and the bunt 
of the topsail to the topsail yard. Bend one of the top- 
bowlines to the centre of the yard. Cast off the parrel on 
one side, attend the topsail halliards, braces and lifts, haul 
forward on the bowline. 

Let go the reef tackles, and topgallant sheets, and when 
clear of the lower cap, lower away the halliards. Slack up 



336 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

the lifts, and lower the topsail yard across the fore part of 
the top, well forward, lashing it there. Clear away the 
topmast rigging, backstays and stays. Starting all the 
laniards, except one fore-and-aft stay, and (if at sea), the 
weather backstay, these are tended as the mast is swayed. 

In the training ships, the jeers must be rove off, and the 
lower yard untrussed. A fore-and-aft tackle is then hooked 
to a strap around the yard, from well forward, and the lower 
yard hauled forward to clear the heel of the topmast. In 
more modern ships, the truss is so shaped that the topmast 
can pass down between the legs, and between the yard and 
lower mast. 

A hawser, with stout lizard (having two tails) attached, 
having been rove off through the top block, and rive sheave 
in the topmast, up through the opposite top block, and 
down on deck, belay it to the forward bits. Use a pen- 
dant tackle for a top tackle, and clap it on to the other 
end of the hawser. Man the top tackle ! light up the top- 
sail halliards, lifts and all gear that goes to the topmast head. 

Sway up ! Out fid ! and Lower away ! When the topmast 
cross-trees are about six feet above the lower cap, secure 
the hawser with a stopper, for surging the topmast t© start 
the cross-trees off the mast-head. See the cap-shore well 
secure, and all the people clear; take off the stopper, and 
surge (drop) the topmast, and if the cross-trees still hang, 
sway up the mast and surge as before. As soon as the 
masthead is clear, secure the topmast cross-trees and cap 
on top of the lower cap. 

Now pass two tails of the lizard around the topmast be- 
low the hounds, taking two round turns with each tail, and 
then knot them together; hang it with a small rope from 
the topmast head, to keep it from slipping down, or pass 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 337 

the lizard through the sheave hole. Come up the top- 
tackle. Now lower away the topmast (with the hawser) 
pointing the heel down the scuttle or hatchway, until the 
head is clear of the lower tressle-trees, bend on the end of a 
whip, from the lower yard, round the mast-head, and haul 
forward. When the head is forward the top, sway up! 
As soon as the heel of the topmast rises above the hatch or 
scuttle, hook a tackle from aft, to the heel, haul aft on the 
tackle, lower away, and land the mast on deck. 

In sending up. 

Man the hawser, and walk the topmast up with the head 
pointing before the top. Lower the heel down the scuttle 
or hatchway, slue the mast with the foreside forward, point 
it through the trestle-trees, and land the heel on deck. Light 
up all the gear, fid the mast, set up the rigging. Before 
Adding, if short-handed, belay the hawser, and clap on the 
top tackle. 

Sway up the topsail yard. Fid the topgallant mast, casting 
off the lashings as the mast goes up 

To house topmasts and send dow?i lower yards ? 

The topgallant mast having been sent down, "all hands 
house topmasts and send down lower yards. ' ' This is some- 
times done when steaming head to a strong wind, or when 
at anchor during a gale, so as to offer less resistance to the 
wind. 

The top pendants, tackles and jeers having been rove and 
sent aloft, Man the top tackles and jeers ! if the ship is 
rolling use thwartship tackles on the lower yards; hook fore- 
and-aft tackles; single the lower lifts and hook the burtons 
from the lower cap to the burton straps on the yard. 

Come up the topmast rigging and stays, but be careful in 



338 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

easing the fore-and-aft stays, not to ease more than is al> 
solutely necessary. 

The jeers may be taken to the capstan if necessary. Have 
seamen or petty officers to lower. 

Sway up! the top tackles and unfid. The topsail lifts, 
buntltnes and reef tackles must be overhauled and lighted 
up, also the laniards of the topmast rigging. Hang the 
backstays and halliards aloft from the top, as in swaying up 
much weight is saved ; steady the topsail yard. 

The flying jib and jib-booms come in when the topgallant 
masts and the topmasts come down. 

When the top tackles are swayed up, overhaul all the gea? 
leading to the topmast head. The gear of the courses must 
be attended. 

The jeers being manned (or taken to the capstan) tend 
all the gear, and Sway away ! when the trusses and slings are 
clear; the fids being out, Lower away! together. Rest the 
lower yards on casks placed in the nettings, and lash the 
heel of the topmast about half way down the lower mast. 

The topsail yards can be kept in their places or lowered 
across the top. The former is preferable, for then the lifts 
can be hauled taut and the yards braced to the wind. 

To fid the topmasts and sway up lower yards ? 

Before starting the top tackles or jeers, all rigging, such 
as backstays, halliards, etc., etc., should be well overhauled 
and hung from the top, have jiggers and luffs on the stays 
and backstays ready for setting up at once. The fore-and- 
aft stays, topsail lifts, etc., should be overhauled beyond 
the old nip, so as to leave the masts free for going aloft. 

All running gear must be well overhauled. 

Reeve off the topgallant mast ropes, and place the masts 
fair for pointing. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 33J 

When all ready, Man the top tackle falls and jeek 
falls ! Sway aloft ! fid the topmasts and set up the rigging, 
key the trusses, and hook the slings of the lower yards. 

Sway up and fid the topgallant masts. 

SHIFTING SAILS. 

Sails, when split, are taken in and repaired aloft, if pos- 
sible, if not, then shifted. The new sail is sent up to wind- 
ward, as the old one goes down to leeward. 

If the sail is split so as to be of no further use, it is un- 
bent and sent down at once ; if not, it is kept on the ship 
until the new one is ready. 

A reef tackle cringle, or any part of the leech can be re- 
paired aloft by the sailmaker in moderate weather. If car- 
rying studding sails on one side only, the others can be 
shifted over and set, if anything happens to those in use. 

If the jib splits, the fore topmast staysail is set. 

If a topsail splits across the head, or, if in turning out a 
reef, the sail is torn, and it is not convenient to shift it, take 
the reef in again. 

To shift a jib. 

Haul the sail down, gather it on the boom and put on 
good stops. 

Unhook the tack lashing or strap, cut the robands, un- 
shackle the jib pendants, and bend a clew rope to the clew 
for an inhaul. 

Overhaul the halliards, hook them, and bend the down- 
haul to a strap or lashing passed around the head of the 
sail. 

Pull up the halliards, ease away the down haul, haul in on 
the clew-rope, hauling the sail inboard. 

Shift the halliards, downhaul, and clew-rope from the old 



343 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

to the new sail, hooking the halliards as before, to a strap 
or lashing around the head of the jib. 

Pull up the halliards until the sail is well clear of the u head 
rail," haul out on the downhaul, ease away the clew-rope 
and halliards. 

Lower the jib on the boom; hook the tack lashing or 
strap; shackle the jib pendants; and make fast the robands; 
shift the halliards and downhaul to the head cringle, mous- 
ing the halliards. 

Hoist away the sail. 

To shift a topsail (by the wind) ? 

Hook the top burton (for a sail tackle) to a strap made 
fast to the collar of the topmast stay. 

The new sail is in the weather gangway ready for bend- 
ing; it is to go aloft by the sail burton. 

The old sail is to be sent down to leeward by the bunt- 
lines. 

The topgallant sail and royal are clewed up. 

The topsail is taken in, furled, and unbent. 

Unbend the topsail sheets, clewlines, bowlines, reef tackles, 
robands, and head-earings. Make fast the buntlines around 
the sail at each side of the bunt ; carry the weather head- 
earing over to leeward, and make it fast to the lee yard-arm 
of the sail, so the sail will go down clear to leeward. 

Lower the sail down the lee side (if possible), having a 
line bent on to the lee earing, if necessary, to guy the sail 
down clear. 

In case it is not convenient to send the sail down to lee- 
ward and forward of the course, send it down to windward 
abaft the new sail ; but this will seldom be necessary, and it 
is much better to send the old sail down to leeward, except 
in heavy weather. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 34 1 

As the old sail is going down, hoist away the sail burton 
and walk up the new topsail. 

High enough ! when the clews are above the top. The 
yard-arm stops are cut from the sail, as it passes the top. 

See the turns out of the sail. 

Bend the reef tackles, hitch the head-earings to them, and 
haul out. 

Bend the sheets, clewlines, bowlines and buntlines. 

Lower the bunt of the sail level with the yard. 

When the forward part of the top is clear of men, cut the 
stops in the bunt. 

Pass the midship robands first, then head-earings and ro- 
bands; reeve the first and second reef earings, if bull ear- 
ings. 

Haul home the sheets and set the sail. 

To shift a topsail in a gale ? 

The sail is furled, and before the robands are all cast off, 
several good stops are passed around it. 

The sail is sent down to windward, either by the bunt- 
lines, or the topgallant yard rope, passed around the body 
of the sail. 

Unbend the gear. Cast off the robands, and keep fast 
the head earings. 

Pass the lee head earing into the top, and rouse the lee 
side of the sail over to windward; lower the sail clear 
of the top, to windward, ease away the weather earing, 
and lower into the weather gangway. 

If necessary, a line can be bent to the sail, to guy it 
down clear. 

The new sail can be sent aloft by the topgallant yard 
rope, sail burton or buntlines. 

To shift a course (moderate weather f) 



342 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

The new sail is made up ready for bending, and is stretched 
across the deck forward of the mast. The yard-arm jig- 
gers are on the yard ready for hauling out. And the lee 
lift hauled taut. 

The course is hauled up, furled, and unbent. The 
buntlines are made fast or stopped to the body of the sail 
at each side of the bunt. Unhook the reef pendants. 
When all ready, ease away the earings, lower away the 
buntlines, and overhaul the gear as the sail comes down. 
All the gear coming down with the sail. 

Unbend the gear from the old, and bend it to the new 
sail, stopping the buntlines and leechlines to the head. Hook 
the yard-arm jiggers to the first reef cringle, and stop the 
head earing to it. 

Man the gear ! hands light up the tacks and sheets. 

Sway aloft ! Haul out and bring to ! 

The yard-arm jiggers are hauled out, leechlines hauled 
up, the sail bent and reef pendants hooked. 

Loose the sail and set it. Shift the yard-arm jiggers. 

To shift a course in a gale ? 

The sail is hauled up and furled ; cast off a few robands 
on the yard, and pass several good stops around the sail. 
Secure the buntlines around the body of the sail at each 
side of the bunt, cast off the reef points and earings (if the 
sail is reefed), leechlines and all the robands, keeping fast 
the head-earings. Sea gaskets may be used to secure the 
sail in sending down. 

The sail is to be sent down to windward. 

Pass the lee head-earing into the bunt of the sail, and 
(assisted by a line from the top if necessary) rouse the lee 
clew into the body of the sail, and secure it there; have a 
line from deck made fast to the sail to guy it clear. Ease 
away to windward, and lower away the sail. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 343 

In sending up the sail, send up as before. In addition, the 
bunt-whip may be hooked to the centre of the head of the 
sail to assist in swaying aloft. Hook the reef pendants, and 
reef the sail after bending. 



CHAPTER XVI. 



Spar ))]]][[(( deck capstan 



CAPSTAN, ANCHORS AND CHAINS. 

WJiat is a capstan ? 

A machine used on board ship for moving heavy weights, 
such as anchors, etc., etc. 

What are capstans made of? 
Wood and iron. Iron cap- 
stans are now in general use, 
and are worked by hand and 
by the use of steam. 

What are the principal parts 
of a capstan ? 

The spindle, barrel, drum- 
head, pigeon-holes, pawls and 
pawl rim. 

What is the spindle ? 
The shaft on which the cap- 
stan revolves. 

What is the barrel ? 
The round, perpendicular 
part which forms the body. 
What is the drum-head ? 
The circular part on top of 
the barrel. 
What are the pigeon holes? 

The square holes in the drum-head to receive the bars. 
What are pa7vls ? 

Short bars of iron working on stout pins of iron ; they are 
attached to the sides of the bottom of the capstan. 
(344) 




Steam Capstan. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 3 -j 5 

Wliat is a pawl rim ? 

The cast-iron rim secured to the deck around the bottom 
of the capstan, having notches, in which the lower ends of 
the pawls fall when the capstan is being hove around. By 
this arrangement they prevent a backward movement of the 
capstan. 

What are chain whelps ? 

Ridges of iron in the space at the bottom of the capstan. 
They prevent the cable from slipping when heaving in. 

What are capstan bars ? 

Large wooden bars, shaped at one end to fit the pigeon 
holes in the capstan, the other end having a slot in it for 
the rope, when the bars are swifted in. Capstan bars are 
used to revolve the capstan when it is worked by hand. 

How many capstans have vessels in the navy ? 

Large vessels have two or more; small vessels have but 
one. 

Wliat is a zuindlass ? 

A small capstan, the barrel of which is worked horizon- 
tally by levers. It is used on board small vessels, although 
large vessels (" Trenton " ) sometimes have steam windlasses. 

ANCHORS AND CHAINS. 

Parts of, etc., etc. 
What is meant by the growid tackle of a ship ? 
Anchors, chain cables and all gear used in connection 
with them. 

Wliere are the anchors and chains for the navy made ? 
At the Washington Navy Yard. 
Name some of the anchors in use ? 

There are many anchors used by sea-faring nations. The 
Martin anchor is used bv the English. 



346 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



The Willams anchor, similar to the Martin, is highly 
spoken of, and many others. In our navy, the American 
iron-stocked anchor has been found to answer every pur- 
pose. (See figs.) 




Martin (English) Anchor. 

How many kinds of anchors in use in the navy ? 
Two, the solid anchors and the portable anchors, 




Williams (American) Anchor. 
What are the solid anchors ? 

Those having the shank and arms wrought (or made) in 
one mass. 

What are the portable anchors ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



34/ 



Those that are made so that they can be taken to piec:s. 

IVJiat are the p?'incipal parts of the naval anchor? 

The shank, the ring (shackle or jewsharp), the arm, palm 
(or fluke), the bill (or point"), the blade, crown, stock and 
throat. (See fig.) 

American Naval Anchor. 




What is the shank ? 

The perpendicular or long middle piece of the anchor. 

What is the ring {shackle or jewsharp) ? 

The piece bolted to the upper end of the shank, to 
which the chain is shackled. 

Wliat are the arms ? 

The pieces extending from each side of the lower end of 
the shank; they form hooks, which bury in the ground 
(when the anchor is let go), and hold the ship stationary. 

WJiat is the palm or fluke? 



34$ YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

The broad shield-shape piece on each arm. So made 
in order to take a good hold on the ground. 

What is the blade ? 

That part of the arm at the back of the palm. 

What is the bill? 

That part of the arm beyond the palm, (the extreme 
ends of the arms.) 

Therefore each arm is composed of the palm, the blade, 
and the bill. 

What is the crown-? 

The lower or heavy end of the shank, where the arms 
are welded on. 

What is the throat ? 

The upper curved part of the arm, where it joins the 
shank. 

What is the stock ? 

The iron beam placed at right angles to the shank. It 
runs through a hole in the shank below the ring. 

How is the stock secured in its place ? 

The stock has a shoulder (or swelling) near the middle 
or half of its length. One end of the stock has a fixed iron 
ball attached ; the other end (opposite the shoulder) is 
bent, for convenience in stowing, and has a movable 
iron ball attached. The bent end (the ball having been 
taken off) is put through the hole in the shank, and the 
stock pushed through until the shoulder takes against the 
shank. A key or bolt is then put through a hole in the 
stock, which is on the opposite side of the shank from the 
shoulder. The ball is then secured to the bent end. The 
anchor is properly stocked when the bent part of the stock 
is in line with the crown, pointing down. 

How we the different anchors of a vessel named? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 349 

The bowers, sheets, stream and kedges. 

Wliat are the bowers ? 

The anchors that stow on each bow. All vessels carry 
two bowers. 

What is meant by the best bower? 

The heaviest bower anchor. It is usually stowed on the 
starboard side. 

What are the sheet afichors ? 

They formerly stowed, outboard, in the waist or gang- 
way of a vessel. In modern built vessels they stow out- 
board just forward of the fore rigging; this is more conven- 
ient. In the Navy, vessels of over 1500 tons carry two sheet 
anchors, below 1500 tons they carry but one, which is stowed 
inboard. Sheet anchors are kept in reserve, to use in case 
of an accident to the bower anchors, or to use with the 
bowers in very heavy weather. Sheet and bower anchors 
are about the same weight. 

What is a stream anchor ? 

It is an anchor about one- quarter the weight of the 
bovver, and is usually stowed below. It is used for heavy 
work, that is too heavy for a kedge, and not heavy enough 
for a bower. One stream anchor is supplied each vessel of 
coo tons and over. 

WJiat are kedges ? 

Small anchors of different sizes, used for light work, 
such as warping, kedging, etc., etc. Four kedges are pro- 
vided very large vessels, but three is the general allow- 
ance. The kedges vary in weight, from about 100 to 900 
pounds, according to the weight of the bowers. 

What is a sea anchor ? 

A contrivance of triangular form, made of spars, oars, 
canvass, etc., etc., lashed and secured together. It is used 



350 YOUNG sailor's assistant. 

by vessels and boats to prevent drifting, or to weather a 
gale. Lieutenant Danenhower of the " Jeanette," with a 
small boat and exhausted crew, successfully weathered a 
gale in the Arctic seas, by the intelligent use of a sea 
anchor. 

When a sea-anchor is put overboard, the vessel or boat 
rides to leeward of it, with a long scope of cable out. 

Construct a Sea Anchor. 

This anchor may frequently be of the greatest possible 
use, and may be made in the following manner : Take 
three spare spars (topgallant studding-sail booms will be 
sufficiently large), with these form a triangle, the size you 
think will be large enough, when under water, to hold the 
ship ; cut these spars to the required length, before or after 
cross-lashing them well at each angle ; then make fast your 
spans, one to each angle, so that they will bear an equal 
strain when in the water; but should^ your spars be weak, 
you should always increase the number of spans accord- 
ingly ; fill up the centre of the triangle with strong canvas, 
having eyelet-holes round its sides, about three inches 
apart, to which eyelet-holes attach the canvas securely to 
the spars ; at the back of the canvas pass many turns of 
inch or inch and a half rope, net fashion. A proper net 
would be preferable to rope so expended. To the base of 
the triangle attach a weight, or small anchor, supported in 
the centre of the base by a span running from each of the 
lower angles. To the first mentioned span make fast the 
stream cable. When everything is quite ready, hoist or 
put it overboard from the place vou think it will answer 
best. There is every reason to believe that with this 
anchor under the trough of the sea, and seventy or eighty 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 35 I 

fathoms of stream cable out, a ship's drift would not be 
very great. A triangular form is used in order that the 
sea may strike lightly on the part near the surface. 

What is a mushroom anchor ? 

The head is shaped like a mushroom or bowl, and it has 
no stock. Mushroom anchors are used for permanent 
moorings, and for stationary or permanent buoys, etc. 

What is an ice anchor ? 

It is formed of a bar of iron, bent with a hook in each 
end, similar to a "pot-hook." A hole is cut in the ice and 
one hook is inserted, the riding hawser is bent to the other 
hook. 

How can you tell the weight of an anchor or kedge ? 

It is marked on the anchor or kedge. The weight, 
marked, includes the bending sliackle and stock. 

CHAIN CABLES. 

What cables are used in the Navy for riding cables ? 

Chain cables. The English are now using wire cables 
in one or two vessels. 

How long are. chain cables ? 

Usually from 120 to 135 fathoms long. 

What is done with the iron before the chain is made 

The best iron is used, each bar is tested, and the links 
are carefully welded. Experiments, for steel cables, are 
now being conducted, and, if successful, will greatly re- 
duce the weight and bulk of all chain cables. 

How is a chain cable divided? 

Into lengths or sections of 15 fathoms each, for conven- 
ience in handling and in slipping. These sections are con- 
nected by shackles, which will place a shackle at every 15 
fathoms of the chain. 



352 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

In each link of a section, except the two end links, a cast 
iron stud or bar is inserted ; this strengthens them, by keep- 
ing the two sides from closing when strained, and also 
keeps the links from kinking. Each end link of a section, 
not having the strengthening studs, is made one size larger 
than the other links. 

Why is the stud omitted in the end links ? 

To leave room for the shackle. 

How much strength does a stud add? 

About one-fourth. 

Which end of the shackle is forward? 

The rounded end or crown, for if the pins and lugs, 
which are at the other end, were forward, they might 
catch or foul against the bitts or hawse pipes, and check 
or stop the cable when running out. 

What are swivels ? 

Links in the chain that are fitted to turn in a socket. 

Where are they placed \ and for what reason ? 

They are placed at 7^, 37^, 82^, and 127*^ fathoms. 
They are for the purpose of keeping a cable clear of turns 
and kinks, for example: A vessel lying at anchor, and 
swinging with the different tides. Were it not for the 
swivels turning, the cable would soon become full of kinks 
and turns, and in that way bring an unequal strain on the 
different links. 

What difference is there between the anchor shackle {the 
one that shackles to the ring), and the chain shackles? 

The bolt of the anchor shackle projects beyond the sides 
(or lugs), and is there secured by a key or pin. The chain 
shackle bolts do not project beyond the lugs, and are se- 
cured by passing a pin through holes in the lugs, to holes 
in the bolt. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 3^3 

What are shackle-pins made of? 

The pins or keys for anchor shackles are of iron. The 
pins for the chain shackles are usually of hickory or oak. 

Hoiv are swivels preserved and kept lubricated? 

By forming a mixture of white-lead and tallow in the cup. 

How are chain cables marked? 

There is a shackle at every 15 fathoms. The number 
of each shackle being plainly marked, in plain raised num- 
bers, on the pin end opposite the head, commencing at 
the shackle nearest the anchor shackle. 

Then the swivels will mark the 7^, 32^2, 82}^, and 
127^ fathoms. 

What should be done with a cable before placing it on 
board ship ? 

It should be carefully tested and proved. 

Where are chain cables stowed oji board ship, and by 
whom ? 

In the chain lockers, by men detailed, called "chain 
tierers. ' ' 

U hen bringing a cable off to a ship, in a boat, what end 
should be stowed first in the boat ? 

The end that shackles to the anchor, because it will be 
the last to come out of the boat. 

How are the chain cables named? 

The starboard and port bower chains; the starboard and 
port sheet chains ; and the stream chain. They each take 
their names from the anchors to which they are bent. 

What hawse holes do the bower chains lead through ? 

The two nearest the stem, or the inner ones on each side. 

WJiat chain cables lead through the outer hawse holes on 
both sides ? 

The sheet chains. 



354 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

How is the inboard end of a chain secured on board ship ? 

The end is taken into the chain locker and then rove 
through a heavy ring bolt, which is secured to the keelson. 
It is then taken up out of the chain locker and secured, by 
a strong lashing, to a bolt in the berth deck beams. 

Why not shackle the chain to the ring bolt in the locker? 

Because, if a ship was riding with all chain out (blow- 
ing hard), and it became necessary to slip, it would be im- 
possible to get enough slack chain to unshackle. But when 
the chain is lashed, clear of the chain locker, the end is 
easily reached, the lashing cut, and the chain is slipped at 
once. 

What is slipping a chain ? 

Unshackling or cutting it, and allowing it to run over- 
board, in order to free a vessel from her anchors. 

What is the bitter -end? 

The extreme inboard end. 

What is the tongue- end ' ? 

The end that is shackled to the anchor. 

What is the club link ? 

A peculiar-shaped link (attached to a short section of 
chain, that is made fast to the anchor) which is shackled to 
the outboard end of the chain, when the chain is bent. The 
club link is used so that the chain can be shifted, end for 
end, when necessary. 



CHAPTER XVII. 

HANDLING ANCHORS AND CHAINS MOORING STATE OF 

HAWSE, ETC., ETC. WARPING AND KEDGING 

— CARRYING OUT ANCHORS. 

Haw is a chain bent to a bower anchor ? 

A ring rope is rove through a sheave in the cat -head, 
under the head gear, and in through the hawse hole. The 
chain having been roused up out of the chain locker, the 
ring rope is bent to the fifth or sixth link of the cable with 
a rolling hitch, and is then securely stopped to the third and 
first links. The fore bowline can be bent inside to the chain, 
if necessary, to assist in rousing out. Haul out on the ring 
rope, and when enough slack chain is out and the cable 
well up to the cat-head, cut the stop on the first link, and 
the blacksmith shackles the club link to the chain. 

How bend a sheet chain, the anchors being stowed in the 
waist ? 

In modern ships the sheet chain is bent the same as the 
bower, but in the training ships it must be bent to the 
anchors in the waist. 

Rouse up from the locker enough sheet chain for bending 
purposes (about 30 fms.); and range it on the gun deck 
clear for running; bend hook ropes to the chain, at inter- 
vals, to prevent it running too rapidly. 

Hook the top burton to the main yard on the side the 
chain is to be bent; secure a block at the main mast-head, 
and one on the main yard in line with the sheet anchor 
stock. 

(355) 



356 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Reeve, for a ring rope, a small tow line through the mast- 
head block, from aft forward, through the block on the yard- 
arm, to a block secured to the stock of the anchor, then 
through the ring of the anchor, outside and clear of every- 
thing into the sheet hawse pipe, and bend it to the sheet 
chain in the same manner a bower chain is bent on. Haul 
away on the towline, rouse out the chain and haul it well 
up to the anchor, where it is shackled to the club-link; then 
take the chain, straight and taut, down to the elbow bolt, 
and pass the lashing. Clap on a deck tackle and haul in 
the chain, and as it comes out of the water, pass slip ropes , at 
intervals, around it to hang it for lashing. As it is hauled 
taut, seize it with good spun yarn stops underneath and to 
the bolts, in the ship's side, for that purpose. The chain 
should then be in a straight line from the elbow lashing to 
the hawse pipe. Black the chain. 

Another way is to reeve the towline through a viol block 
lashed to the head of the sheet anchor stock; this will do 
away with the strain on the main yard. 

What is a chain hook ? 

An iron rod with a hook at one end and an ey£ (or bar) 
for the hand at the other ; it is used to rouse chain about. 

What is a hook rope ? 

A rope with a hook spliced in one end; it is used in 
handling chain. 

What are deck stoppers used for? 

For securing a cable when the vessel is at anchor. 
What is a deck-stopper? 

It is usually made of four-stranded hemp rope or wire 
rope, about one fathom in length (when fitted). In one 
end is spliced a hook and thimble, in the other end is 
formed a man-rope knot; a long laniard, about one-third 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 357 

the size of the stopper, is attached with an eye, around the 
stopper, close to the knot. The hook, is to hook in a 
stopper ring bolt in the deck; the knotted end is placed 
with the lay of the cable ; and the laniard is passed around 
the cable and stopper with several turns, leaving about a 
fathom of the end to worm forward in the lay of the cable 
beyond the knot, the end being well secured. Deck 
stoppers are now being fitted with a large toggle, in place 
of the man-rope knot (with wire rope stoppers;, these are 
neat, convenient, and do not deteriorate. 

Wliat is a ring-stopper for the cable ? 

A piece of rope unlaid and plaited, whose bight is fas- 
tened about a ring in the deck, while the ends are dogged 
to the cable. 

What is a Mix s stopper 

Mix's stopper consists of an iron casting like a hawse 
pipe, set in a strong oak framework, on the after part of 
the manger. A thick and strong slab of iron, scored out 
on the under part to admit a vertical link of the chain, 
moves up and down in a groove, in the after part of the 
framework, by means of a screw placed vertically over it. 
This stopper is exceedingly convenient, and is much used; 
but the ship is never allowed to ride by it. 

How to bitt a chain ? 

Hook a single block (generally a snatch block) to the 
eye bolt over the bitt head ; through this block reeve (or 
snatch) a hook rope. Now, sufficient slack chain having 
been roused up, form a cockold's neck with the chain abaft 
the bitts; so the part leading aft will be on top; and hook 
the hook rope into the bight thus formed, pull up and drop 
the bight over the bitt head, so the cross will be outside; 
the after or locker part on top, the forward or riding part 



358 YOUNG sailor's assistant. 

underneath. The chain must be stoppered forward, before 
bitting. 

What is weather bitting a cable? 

Taking a double turn with it around the bitt head. 

How is a chain unbitted? 

A stopper is put on the chain forward of the bitts; the 
stoppers are taken off abaft the bitts ; slack chain is roused 
up. and the chain lifted off the bittL 

When is a chain bitted? 

As soon as the anchor is catted and rung up. It remains 
bitted when the anchor is let go, and while the vessel is at 
anchor. 
When- is a chain unbitted? 

When the chain is brought to the capstan, preparatory 
to heaving up the anchor. 

How range a chain cable ? 

Bend on a hook rope, and rouse up the quantity of chain 
(out of the locker) that may be required ; place it in par- 
allel lines called fleets fore-and-aft the deck, between the 
bitts and chain pipes. Have the running pai-t, {the part 
leading to the anchor) outboard \ outside of ah 7 the other parts, 
to avoid violent surging of the chain, which would take 
place, if the chain swept from outboard in, with a rush. 
What is a cat fall? 

The purchase by which an anchor is hoisted to the cat- 
l ead. 

jReev: it? 

Bring the cat -block on deck, and place it near the after 
part of the bill board, with the sheaves corresponding to 
the sheaves in the cat-head, the bill of the hook pointing 
inboard. 

Commence and reeve the end of the cat fall down 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 359 

through the forward sheave of the cat-head, and haul 
enough end through to reeve the rest of the fall. Then con- 
tinue and reeve the end through the forward sheave of the 
cat-block, from outboard in ; take it (next to the ship's 
side), up through, over and down through the second or 
middle sheave in the cat-head ; then through the middle 
sheave in the cat-block from out in. then up through. ove> 
and down through the last or after sheave in the cat-head; 
then through the last sheave in the cat-block, and the 
standing part is rove through an eye bolt on the after 
side of the cat-head, and is hitched to a ring bolt on 
the forecastle, or clinched to the cat-head. 

What is a cat-baek ? 

A line secured to the cheek of the cat -block, to aid in 
handling it. 

Reeve it? 

The cat-back consists of a fall and two single blocks, one 
of which is hooked to the neck or inner end of whisker 
boom, the other being hooked to a bolt in the after part of 
the stem. The lower end of the fall is fitted with sister- 
hooks, and is hooked to an eye bolt or span on the forward 
cheek of the cat- block. The hauling part of the cat-back 
leads in over the rail to the forecastle. Another one is some- 
times hooked to the back or belly part of the hook. 

Wliat is the fish-fall used f 07 ? 

For hauling the anchor up on the bill board. 

Reeve it? 

The lower fish-block is placed on deck under the fish- 
boom, the hook of the block pointing aft. The upper or 
double block is hooked to a bolt on the under side of the 
fish-boom or davit (the side of the upper block, to which a 
bull's eye is fitted, must be on the port side). Now com- 



360 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

mence at the foremast and reeve the end of the fish-fall 
through a leader hooked about half way up the foremast, 
then down through a sheave in the end of the fish-boom, 
and through the starboard sheave of the lower fish-block 
from aft fonuard ; then through the starboard sheave of the 
upper block from forward aft, then through the middle 
sheave of the lower block, to the middle sheave of the up- 
per block, and so on. The standing part passes from the 
port sheave of the lower block up through the bull's eye 
(on the port side of the upper block), and is secured by 
hitching the end around the neck of the topping lift bolt. 

What is the fish-back ? 

A small rope, with a hook at one end, which is attached 
to the back or belly of the hook of the lower fish-block. 
It is for convenience in hooking the fish-block to the fluke 
of the anchor. 

What is the ring stopper ? 

It is a small chain which passes over a roller (or shoulder) 
on the forward edge of the cat-head, xlown and through the 
ring of the anchor, from forward aft. The last or trip link 
of the chain goes over a hinged shoulder or tumbler on the 
after edge of the cat-head. This tumbler is kept in an up- 
right position by means of a trigger extending across the 
cat-head ; the trigger is secured by a small iron pin on the 
inboard side. The inboard end of the chain is taken in, 
and belays around an iron cleat, which is secured to the cat- 
tail, or inboard end of the cat-head. When letting go the 
anchor, take out the pin, the trigger is then knocked clear, 
the hinged tumbler falls, the link slips off, and permits the 
ring stopper to slip out of the ring of the anchor. 

What is a shank painter ? 

A small chain which passing around the shank of an anchor 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 36 1 

(near the arms), secures the flake up on the bill board. One 
end, is secured with a trigger and tumbler, in the same man- 
ner as the ring stopper. The inside end, belays to an iron 
cleat on the water-ways of the forecastle. 

Who work the compressors on the berth deck? 

The berth deck cooks, in charge of the master-at-arms. 

Wliat is "hauling to " the compressor ? 

Hauling on the tackle (which is attached to the com- 
pressor), and checking the chain. 

What is "heaving back the compressor?" 

Slacking the tackle, and leaving the chain free, by push- 
ing back the arm of compressor. 

How is a chain secured when a vessel is at anchor? 

The chain is bitted, and two or more (depending on the 
weather) decked stoppers clapped on the chain, abaft the 
bitts. The compressor, when the. strain is well on the stop- 
pers, is " hauled to." 

llHiat is an anchor buoy ? 

An iron buoy which is attached to, and serves to mark 
the position of an anchor when down. The top of the 
port one is sometimes painted red, and the starboard one 
green, to mark out the anchor. 

What is a buoy i'ope ? 

The rope that makes fast the buoy to an anchor. It is 
bent or hitched, securely, to the crown of the anchor. 

Wliat is streaming the buoy ? 

Letting it fall from the forecastle or chains into the water, 
just before the anchor is let go. 

\lhat is meant by a buoy not "watching?** 

When it don't float on the surface of the water; this 
sometimes happens from the buoy rope being too short, or 
from the buoy leaking. In the former case, the buoy rope 
16 



362 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

is lengthened; in the latter case " bleed the buoy" (let the 
water out). 

What is a back rope ? 

A rope led through a block on the bowsprit, and bent 
to a mooring buoy, to keep it clear of the stem. 

Where is the buoy stowed, when the anchor is catted ? 

In the forward part of the fore chains, the buoy rope 
being coiled down, neatly, near it, clear for running. 

Who " bring to ' ' the chain ? 

The port watch of fore and main topmen, and quarter 
gunners. 

What is "bringing to" the chain ? 

Taking the chain to the capstan ready for heaving in. 

How does the chain go on the capstan ? 

The bight of the chain is carried to the after part of the 
capstan ; and that part of the bight, leading to the anchor, 
is fitted into the space, under the barrel, on the whelps. 
The chain is taken half way around trie capstan, and when 
it gets to the forward and opposite side, it leads off and 
passes aft, around one or two vertical friction rollers, (that 
are placed in sockets in the deck), and thence to the chain 
pipe and locker. 

What other method of connecting a chain to a capstan? 

By using a messenger. 

Wliat is a messenger? 

It is either of hemp or of chain, being firmly united (or 
temporarily secured) to the main or anchor chain by nip- 
pers. A hemp messenger is taken around the barrel of the 
capstan, and after passing around a roller, is made fast to its 
own part at the hawse hole ; forming an endless (or con- 
tinuous) rope. A chain messenger works over studs placed 
on the capstan, and around a roller forward, forming an 
endless chain, in the same manner as the hemp messenger. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 363 

WJ10 rig the capstan ? 

The Carpenter's gang. 

How is the capstan rigged? 

The bars are shipped and "swiftered in," the chain is 
"brought to/' and everything is moved clear of the bars 
and capstan. 

What is ' ' swiftering in ' ' ? 

Steadying the bars, by connecting them with a small line 
passed through and around the slots in the end. 

W7w man the bars, etc. , for heaving in ? 

All hands, unless one watch is required on deck. When 
the starboard watch remain on deck, the port watch and 
marines man the bars. The quarter gunners are at the cap- 
stan, to keep the chain clear and pay it below; the people 
stationed at the compressors are at the tackles; the chain 
tierers are in the lockers. When "all ready," the stoppers 
are taken off, and at the order, " heave round ! " the 
anchor is hove up to the bows. 

WJiat is meant by the chain tending? 

It means in what direction, relating to the ship, does the 
chain lead from the hawse hole, as the chain " tends broad 
off the starboard bow. ' ' 

What is meant by "up and down ' ' ? 

When all the slack chain is hove in, the chain will lead 
right tip and down, from the hawse hole, to the anchor. 

What is short-stay ? 

When the chain is not quite up and down, and leads in a 
line with the fore topmast stay. 
Wlien is an anchor aweigh ? 

The moment it leaves the ground. 

When is an anchor in sight ? 

As soon as the stock can be seen. 



364 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

What is a clear anchor ? Foul anchor ? 

A cleat anchor, is when the chain leads straight, from the 
anchor shackle, to the hawse hole. A foul anchor ; is when a 
chain has one or more turns around the flukes, shank or 
stock, or when the anchor is caught in some other anchor 
chain, or a wreck. 

When is an anchor up ? 

When it is up high enough for catting; the capstan is 
then pawled, and a stopper put on the chain. 

What is done at the capstan when the order "hook the cat ' ' 
is given ? 

The bars are unshipped at once, (be sure the pawls are 
well down) and preparations made for veering chain. A stop- 
per having been put on the chain forward, the vertical rollers 
are taken out of their sockets, and, if necessary, a hook rope 
is made fast to the chain at the capstan, so that when the 
order "veer chain " is given, the chain can be cleared fiom 
the capstan and allowed to run out the hawse hole. 

How is an anchor catted? 

After an anchor is up, the cat-block (having been over- 
hauled down) is hooked into the ring of the anchor aided 
by the cat-back; the bill of the hook pointing inboard, so 
it can be unhooked after the anchor is catted. The slack of 
the cat-fall is taken in. When all ready, the cat-fall is 
manned and "walk away with the cat;" as soon as a 
good strain is on the cat fall, "veer chain ;" the stoppers are 
taken off the chain, the chain knocked or hauled clear of the 
capstan, and sufficient slack chain run out to allow the anchor 
to go to the cat -head. The anchor is hoisted to the cat-head, 
and a turn with the cat is then taken. As soon as the anchor 
is catted, the ring stopper is passed, as before described. 

How fish an anchor ? 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 365 

The fish-boom or davit having been rigged out over the 
bill-board, the lower block of the fish-fall is overhauled down, 
and (with the assistance of the fish-back) hooked to the arm 
of the anchor; the bill of the hook pointing inboard, and 
resting against the inner part of the after fluke or palm. 
When all ready, " walk away with the fish ! " the anchor 
is hoisted up on the bill-board, and the shank painter is 
passed, as before described. 

What is "ringing up the anchor" ? 

After the anchor is on the bill-board, and the shank 
painter passed, the cat-fall is unrove ; the fish-boom is then 
shifted over the cat-head, and the lower block of the fish- 
fall is hooked to the ring of the anchor. The fish-fall is 
then manned, and the anchor is hoisted close up under the 
cat-head, the slack of the ring stopper is taken in and se- 
cured. The anchor is now ready for letting go. A ring 
rope is frequently used, reeving it through the sheave of 
the cat-head, and through the ring of the anchor. This is 
done if in a. hurry to make sail. 

How is the chain prepared for letting go ? 

After ringing up the anchor, the slack chain is hauled 
inboard, bitted, and all slack chain paid below into the 
locker ; the compressor is then hove back, and everything 
placed clear of the chain.. 

How is an anchor secured for sea ? 

The inner fluke is hoisted well inboard, the slack of the 
shank painter taken in ; extra lashings are passed around 
the cat-head, and through the ring of the anchor; also 
around the shank and through a bolt on the forecastle. 
The bulwarks around the anchor are secured in their places. 

How get an anchor off the bows ? 

Take off the extra lashings, and heave the inner fluke of 



366 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

the anchor outboard ; (with the assistance of an anchor- 
bar, slacking the shank painter), so that the anchor will 
slip off the bill-board when the shank painter is let go. 

What is an anchor-bar ? 

A large, iron-shod, oak bar, used in handling anchors. 

How is an anchor let go ? 

The chain being all clear for running, one hand is stat- 
ioned with a heavy hammer at the trigger, for the ring- 
stopper, and one hand at the trigger for the shank painter, 
(generally the captains of the forecastle). At the order 
"Let go" the man at the ring-stopper sings out, o?ie, two, 
(take out preventer pins) three ; at three, both triggers are 
struck together; the ring-stopper and shank painter un- 
reeving, the anchor falls into the water. 

When is the anchor cock-billed? 

When it is not on the bill-board, but is hanging at the 
cat-head by the ring-stopper. 

When is a vessel riding to a single anchor ? 

When only one anchor is down. 

MOORING, STATE OF HAWSE, ETC., ETC. 

VffJien is a vessel moored? 

When riding to two or more anchors, or when made fast 
to a dock or wharf. 

How is a vessel moored with t7vo anchors ? 

The first anchor is let go, and twice the amount of chain 
that it is proposed to ride to is run, or veered 'out; then the 
second anchor being let go, the first chain is hove in, at 
the same time the requisite amount of chain is veered on 
the second anchor. The chains are secured when both 
anchors have the proper amount of chain out. 
IVJiat is a flying-moor ? 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



3 6 7 



Letting go both anchors, while having headway, and 
afterwards equalizing the chain on each. 
When is a vessel moored head and stern ? 
When one cable leads from the hawse-hole, and the other 
leads aft from the stern. 

WJiat is a " clear-hawse ' ' ? 

A vessel moored, and riding, with the cables clear of 
each other. 

What is an " open hawse" ? 

A vessel riding with her head in a line between the two 
anchors; the cables leading out on their respective sides 
clear of the stem. 

What is a "foul-hawse ' ' ? 
If, by swinging, the cables are brought 
to bear upon each other, so as to be 
chafed by the motion of the vessel. 
What is a cross in a hawse ? 
A vessel from a clear hawse swinging 
half around, or performing a half cir- 
cle, brings a cross in the hawse. If the 
starboard cable is on top, she must 
swing to starboard to clear hawse \ if the port cable is o i 
top, she must swing to port to clear. 
What is an elbow in the hawse ? 
Having a cross, if a vessel swings 
the wrong way (that is, the same 
way she did before), and performs 
a full circle from a clear hawse, it 
will produce an elbow. 

What is a round-turn, etc. , etc. ? 
From an elbow, if a vessel swings 
again in the wrong direction, it brings a :ound turn, 
Another swing will bring a round-turn and el'j^w, etc. 





3 63 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



How is a hawse cleared? 

Sometimes, in good weather and 
smooth water, by towing the ship 
around, or by winding her around 
with the spanker; but usually, it is 
cleared, with the clear hawse gear. 
What is clear hawse gear? 
The clear hawse pendant, clear 
hawse rope, deck tackle and devil's 
claw (or pelican hook or shackle). 
How clear hawse, using clear hawse 
gear? 

The cable with the least strain on, is the one to be 



JLRoiotid, 





Clearing hawse of an elbow. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



3 6 9 



handled. Pass the clear hawse pendant out of the sheet 
hawse pipe, at the side on which the cable is to be cleared, 
and secure it to the cable below the turns, and well down 
to the water's edge; clap on a deck tackle on the gun deck, 
and haul until the chain is well slack above where the 
clear hawse pendant is secured ; then pass the hook rope 
or clear hawse rope outboard, and around the chain, in 
the opposite way to which the turns are ; bring the end 
back through the hawse pipe, and hook it to the link of 
the chain inboard (which has already been unshackled for 
that purpose). Now man the hook rope, and reeving out 
the short end of the chain, haul the turns clear and shackle 
on again. For greater security, and in blowy weather, a 
hawser is used to assist the clear hawse pendant. 

What is a mooring swivel? 

A swivel with four shackles attached. It is shackled to 
the cables, and by revolving, prevents the cables fouling. 




MoortTig Swivel. 

How is a mooring swivel put on, the port chain being the 
slack chain ? 

When the chain cables are ready for the mooring swivel, 
the shackles are between the stem and the water. Place the 
1 6* 



370 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

mooring swivel in a boat, containing the blacksmith, with 
punches, pins, hammer, etc. Have hands on gun deck with 
hawse pendant, hawse rope, deck tackle, etc. ; pass the 
hawse pendant out from the sheet pipe, and secure it to the 
starboard chain or riding chain. Hook deck tackle and 
bouse well taut, taking off all strain above where the hawse 
pendant is hooked ; now unshackle the chain in the boat, 
and shackle the upper end to the upper leg of the mooring 
swivel, taking care to see that the upper part or cup of the 
swivel be uppermost ; then shackle the lower leg of swivel 
to the lower part of the chain. Then heave taut the 
chain with deck or other tackle, and bitt and secure. 
When secure, come up the hawse p^iiuait, and pass out 
on the port side, and proceed in same manner. If neces- 
sary, one part of the chain inboard can be sent below. 
When moored, the swivel should lie clear of the stem 
and well out of water. Place tallow in cup of swivel for 
lubricating purposes. The best time to put on a mooring 
swivel is at slack water: for at that time there is less strain 
on the cables. 

If the swivel is so small that it can pass through the hawse 
hole, stopper the riding cable inboard, unshackle, put the 
swivel on and veer it outboard. Then send a boat under 
the bows and put it on the lee cable, as before explained. 

If a cable parts, and the anchor and chain are lost, how 
are they recovered? 

By sweeping or dragging for them. Boats are used, hav- 
ing long lines with grapnels. Let the grapnels rest on the 
bottom, and drag or sweep across, or at right angles to the 
direction the anchor and chain is supposed to lie, and the 
grapnel will probably catch on the chain or anchor. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 371 

WARPING AND KEDGING. 

What is a warp ? 

A rope or hawser used to move a ship from one place to 
another, in a river or harbor. 

What is warping a ship ? 

Moving her from one point to another with warps, which 
may be attached to other ships, buoys, or fixed points on 
shore.. The ship is moved by hauling on the warps by hand, 
by applying purchases, or taking the warp to the capstan. 

How is a short warp run out quickly ? 

One boat takes the end and runs away with it, the other 
boats pull in fore-and-aft under the bights, at equal distances, 
giving away the moment they get hold. 

What is done with the end of a waip in the boat? 

Enough end is coiled away forward, to allow plenty of 
slack to make fast, the moment the boat reaches the proper 
point. 

How is a heavy warp laid out ? 

It is necessary that the bight be floated — and in case there 
is a chance of it tautening, hang it outside the boat, instead 
of laying it fore-and-aft amidships. 

What is a gicess-warp ? 

It is judging the distance, by the eye, from the ship to 
the point to make the warp fast, then coiling sufficient line 
in the boat to reach that distance. 

How are guess-warps rim ? 

If going to lay out a. warp to windward, or against the 
tide, coil the whole of the warp in the boat, pull to the 
desired point and make the end fast ; then pay out with 
judgment as the boat returns to the ship; do not pay out 
too quickly, but keep sufficient line to reach the ship. 
Another way is to coil a part of the warp only in the boat, 



372 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

which pulls for the "make fast," and commence to pay 
out from the boat, only, when sure of having sufficient line 
to reach the "make fast." 

What precaution is taken with wet warps? 

They require careful seizing to prevent them slipping. 

What is done with the end of a hawser if 7wt becketed? 

A hitch is put in it, and the end stopped down, to bend 
on the heaving line. 

WJiat is hedging? 

It is moving a vessel from one point to another, by 
means of warps, made fast to kedges. 

How is a vessel kedged? 

A warp is made fast to a kedge, which is carried out, 
and let go in the direction the ship is to be moved. The 
warp is manned and walked in ; as the kedge comes home, 
another is carried out and let go a sufficient distance ahead 
of the first, and the second is walked in ; the first is then 
weighed, sent ahead, and so on until the desired point is 
reached. The same appliances are used as for warping, 
hauling by hand tackles or taking it to the capstan. After 
warping or kedging, the lines should be triced up to dry, 
before sending them below. 

WJiat precautions are necessary in veering chain in heavy 
weather ? 

The compressors are well manned, deck stoppers tended, 
and, if necessary, a deck tackle is clapped on near the chain 
pipe, to assist in checking the chain. Only a few fathoms 
are veered out at a time, in order to prevent the chain tak- 
ing charge. 

TO CARRY OUT ANCHORS. 

There are several excellent methods of carrying out 
anchors, but as that work is usually directed by an officer. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



373 




only three methods are explained. The occasion may arise 
when the coxswain of a boat will be obliged to superintend 
the carrying out of a kedge, a stream anchor, or a bower. 

How are anchors and hedges carried out? 

Usually, by the ships' boats. 

To carry out a heavy 
kedge or a light stream ? 
Hoist the kedge or 
stream out by the yard 
and stay, and lower it 
into the water astern of 
the boat. The coxswain hangs it there by a lashing. One 
end of the lashing is made fast to the ring bolt in the stern, 
passed around the shank of the. anchor, and the end belayed 
or made fast for shipping. Bend the hawser to the anchor, 
and coil it away in the boat ; unhook the yard tackle. 
When the anchor is to be let go, heave the hawser over- 
board first, and then slip the stopper. 

A small kedge may be 
made heavier and more 
effective by lashing bal- 
last or other convenient 
weight to it. 

To carry out a large _, 
stream ? 

Prepare to receive the 
stream across the after 
part of the boat. 

Hoist it out by the 
yard and stay, hooked to 
the ring. When the crown is below the gunwale of the 
boat, hang it with a rope from the bottom bolt around the 




374 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

arms. Lower away, bearing the stock over the opposite gun- 
wale, roll the anchor aft, and bend the cable to the ring 
under the stock. In this way you can steer, and pull the 
after oars. 

If the anchor is too short for this method, place the mid- 
ship thwart across the stern, lay two capstan bars fore-and- 
aft, and land the anchor on this platform, fore-and-aft, with 
the flukes over the stern. 

Heave the cable overboard first, when letting go. If nec- 
essary, a boat can be made more buoyant by lashing casks 
under the counter. 

To carry out a bower anchor between two boats in shoal 
water? 

It is sometimes necessary to carry out a heavy anchor, in 
order to warp a sailing vessel away from a dangerous shoal, 
where a kedge or stream anchor would not be heavy enough ; 
or when a vessel is ashore, and a very heavy heave will be 
required to pull her off. The following method of canning 
out a bower has been found to answer every purpose. 

Call away and lower the two largest cutters, or a launch 
and cutter. Cut adrift two strong- backs from the davits, 
and pass them into the boats. Forecastlemen rig and top up 
the fish boom, or rig the fore yard ready for lifting the 
bower. Fore and main topmen break out, and fake, a large 
hawser on the gun deck, pointing the end either through 
the hawse-pipe, bridle port, stern warping chock, or wher- 
ever it may be wanted. Haul the two boats forward, and 
place them abreast of each other, sufficiently far apart to 
allow the bower anchor to come between them, in a 
position fair to receive it. Lash the two strongbacks across 
the gunwales of each boat, about four feet from the bow 
and stern respectively, each strongback overlapping the 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 375 

outside gunwales about a foot; two lashings must be passed 
over each strongback, and around the proper thwarts, close 
to the outer and inner gunwales of each boat. Should it 
be found difficult on account of wind, tide, or sea, to keep 
the boats steady, carry out and drop a kedge, well ahead, 
for the boats to ride by. 

Rig the fish boom (or fore yard; over the bower anchor, 
hook and mouse the lower block of the fish fall to a stout 
span, which has been taken through the ring of the anchor 
and around the arms near the palms, and lash the hook in 
such a position that the anchor will be lifted squarely. 

Now unbend the chain and pass the end of the hawser 
under the after strongback ; bring it to the anchor and 
bend it to the ring. Man the fish-fall, get a good strain on 
it, cast off the ring stopper and shank painter, pull up and 
clear the anchor of the bill board and cat-head, and lower 
it in between the tw r o spars and the boats ; lash the ring 
with a stout lashing to one spar and the crown to the other 
spar; now slack handsomely the fish-fall, and the anchor 
will slue and hang with the flues up and down, and the 
stock athwartships; pay out and coil the hawser, partly, in 
each boat clear for running. The two boats thus loaded, 
can be towed out to the proper place, for letting go, by 
other cutters, a steam launch, or steam cutter ; pay out the 
hawser first from the ship, after which "pay and go." 
When the hawser is all out, the lashings are cut together, 
and the anchor let go. 

In case there is plenty of water around the ship, a better 
way would be to cock-bill the bower, hook the lower block 
of the fish-fall to the ring, pull up, cast off the ring stop- 
per, and lower the bower between the boats and spars, and 
hang it with a lashing passed through the ring and around 



376 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

both spars. When ready to let go, cut the lashing on one 
spar. 

If blowing fresh and not able to tow the cutters out, 
send out a kedge, with a long light warp made fast, and 
warp the two boats out to the proper place for letting go. 

In case the anchor is to be run out astern (in shoal water) 
hang it between the boats with the flukes aft ; if to be run 
out ahead, hang it with the flukes forward. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 

HOISTING IN AND OUT BOATS — SECURING YARDS 
FOR HEAVY WEIGHTS. 

What is a triatic stay ? 

It consists of three parts, two pendants and a span 
The pendants have hooks in their upper ends which hook 
to bolts in the fore and main caps, or are secured around 
the mast-heads.* In the lower ends of the pendants thim- 
bles are spliced, into which the stay tackles hook. These 
pendants are spanned together by another rope, the ends 
of which span are spliced around thimbles which travel on 
the pendants. The length of the span will be the distance 
you are to have the pendants apart, viz., the length of 
the launch. If the boats stow well forward, the long pend- 
ant goes forward ; if they stow aft, it goes aft. 

Hoist in a launch or other boats ? 

In stationing a crew, certain men are detailed for the 
different stations in hoisting in boats, on the yards, in the 
tops, etc., etc. When all hands are called to hoist in or 
out boats, these men are to be ready at the ladders to go 
aloft when ordered. While a portion of the fore and main 
top men are stationed to clear away the booms for the re- 
ception of the boats, .or in clearing away the boats to be 
hoisted out, some of the boats' crews are stationed in 
the boats to pass out the oars, masts, sails, etc., to haul 
them alongside, and be in readiness to hook the purchases. 

Forecastle men take out their own whip on the fore yard; 
they look out for the fore yard tackle, and hook the burton 
on the fore yard. 

* Triatic stays are sometimes secured at the topmast head, especially 
in long steamers. 

(377) 



378 young sailor's assistant. 

Foretopmen overhaul down their burton, send the fall 
on deck, send down the whip for fore-triatic stay, and 
look out for the fore stay tackle. 

Quarter gunners look out for the main yard tackle, and 
hook the burton on main yard, etc. 

Main topmen send down whip for main-triatic, overhaul 
down the burton, and send the fall on deck and look out 
for the main stay tackle. 

The mast men see the leading blocks ready. 

At the order, Lay aloft ! the men detailed will lay aloft 
to their stations, keeping into the slings of the yards. At 
the order, Lay out ! the yard men lay out together, taking 
out the burtons and whips from the tops, securing the tail- 
blocks of the whip to the lifts, and hooking the burtons- to 
their bolts; standing by to secure the purchase when swayed 
up to them. The men in the tops send down the hauling 
and standing part of the whips and the hauling part of the 
burtons ; and from the forward part of the main top, and 
the after part of the fore top, send down whips for the tri- 
atic stay. Bend the whips to the yard-arm tackles, and the 
top whips to the pendants, hooking and mousing the stay 
tackles to the thimble ends of the pendants. At the order, 
Man the fore and main braces, yard-arm and top 
whips ! Trice up ! Brace in ! the main yard is braced up, 
the fore yard in. The braces should be marked at the proper 
place for belaying. The purchases are whipped up to the 
yards, and the ends of the triatic pendants to the tops; the 
yards are then secured and the purchases hooked and moused, 
being careful to get an equal strain on the lifts and burtons. 
In the meantime the launch has been hauled up, the masts, 
oars, thwarts, sails, etc., etc., are passed out, and the booms 
prepared to receive her. The lower blocks of the yard and 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 379 

stay tackles are hooked to the rings in her stem and stern 
post, and the hooks moused. 

The purchase falls lead as follows : The main yard through 
a snatch block hooked to an eye-bolt in the deck near the 
main fife-rail and then aft. The main stay leads aft through 
a block hooked to the deck on the opposite side from the 
main yard purchase. The fore yard tackle leads through a 
block hooked by the forecastle pin-rail and then aft. The 
fore stay leads forward through a block hooked near the for- 
ward end of boat hatch on the opposite side from the fore 
yard purchase. 

Now at the order Man the yards ! the men lay in to the 
tops, the yard purchases are manned, and hands stationed to 
take in the slack of the stays as the boat comes up. There 
should be one man in the bow and one man in the stern of 
the boat. At Walk away with the yards ! the boat is 
hoisted up. When high enough (the falls should be marked) 
a turn with the yards is taken, and the stays manned. At 
Walk away with the stays ! the yard tackles are eased off 
and the stays walked in until the boat hangs over the chocks, 
and is hanging by the stays (these falls should be marked 
also). Lower away ! and she is landed on the chocks, the 
men in the boat overhauling the purchases. 

It may be necessary to use a fore-and-aft tackle, to guy 
the boat clear of the fore rigging of a sailing vessel, or the 
smoke-stack of a steamer. 

If the boats have any water in them when a little way up, 
it is customary to avast hoisting, and let the water run out. 

After the boat is in (or out) the order is given to Lay 
out ! The men lay out on the lower yards, unhook the 
burtons, unhook and stand by to send down the yard pur- 
chases. The men in the top come up, and stand by to 



3 So YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

send down the stay pendants ; hands are stationed by the 
whips on deck; then the order is given, Stand by to 

LOWER AWAY TOGETHER ! HAUL TAUT SQUARE AWAY ! The 

purchases are lowered on deck, the yards squared, the whips 
taken off the lifts, and all gear stowed away. When ready, 
lay down from aloft, at the order. 

Hoisting out boats will be the reverse of this. 

When the yards are propeily laid, the braces are hauled 
taut. Should the weight to be lifted be a very heavy one, 
and the foreyard at all weak, a water- whip taken to the 
working yard arm, and led forward, is a good precaution, 
as it will prevent the yard from getting sprung. 

SECURING YARDS FOR HEAVY WEIGHTS. 

To secure a main ya? dfor ordinary work ? 

Hook both top burtons on the yard arm that the pur- 
chase is to be placed ; then secure the upper block of the 
purchase on the yard in between the two burtons; haul taut 
the lifts, braces and burtons, getting an equal strain on lifts 
and burtons. When ready and hooked on, lead out and 
man the purchase and hoist away. 

To secure a main yard for extra heavy weights ? 

If necessary, fish the yard with studding sail booms or 
such light spars as may be convenient; this will aid in 
strengthening the yard. 

Reeve of! the jeer-falls, un truss and lower the yard a few 
feet, and lash it with good cross lashings to the mast. 
Hook both top burtons on the yard arm that is to be used ; 
shift the pendant tackle to the lower cap ; carry the lower 
block out and hook it on the yard arm to assist the burtons ; 
top up the yard arm that is to be used. 

For a jumper, hook the upper block of a pendant tackle 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 38 1 

to a strap passed around the opposite yard arm, about half 
way out ; the lower block of which is hooked on deck, op- 
posite the mast ) set taut the tackle and belay. Hook and 
set taut the rolling tackle on the same side as the jumper. 

For a shore, place a stout spar (spare topmast, if possi- 
ble) from the waterway to the yard arm ; lash the head of 
the spar securely to the yard, and secure the heel to the 
waterway. Shore up the deck underneath the yard shore. 

Lash the thimble end of the winding pendant (allowing 
about five feet to hang below the yard), with a strong lash- 
ing, to the yard arm, between the burtons, passing the other 
end over the lower cap (have a mat there to prevent chafe) 
and make it fast on deck on the opposite side of the mast. 

Hook and mouse the purchase to the thimble end of the 
winding pendant, and lead the fall through a leader lashed 
on the yard, to a leader at the top mast head, then down on 
deck. 

See everything well taut, with an equal strain on burtons, 
lifts, pendant tackle, etc. etc. 

The above is for very heavy weights ; in hoisting lesser 
weights, if the purchase fall is led to the topmast head as 
above described, it takes a good deal of strain off the yard, 
and the shores can be done away with ; and with lesser 
weights, it may not be necessary to untruss the yard; but 
in cases of doubt, always untruss. A truss should not be 
subjected to a very heavy strain. 

In using the winding pendant, the lashing on the yard 
generally binds the pendant to such an extent, that when 
it gets the strain from the weight to be lifted, there is a 
violent surging which greatly endangers springing the yard, 
and stranding the purchase. A good precaution to, in a 
great degree, lessen the force of this surging, is 'to first 



382 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

before lifting the weight, hook the lower block of the yard 
purchase to some bolt in the- deck, and put strain enough 
on the tackle to render the pendant through the parts of 
the lashing. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

PREPARATIONS FOR SEA — LIFE BUOYS, ETC. MAN-OVER- 
BOARD RULES OF THE ROAD — BELLS TO REGULATE 

. THE MOVEMENTS OF STEAMERS. 

WJiat is preparing a vessel for sea ? 

Getting her ready, in all departments, for leaving port. 

How is a vessel prepared for sea ? 

The battery is well secured with extra lashings, mnzzle 
bags put on, and if necessary, the ports are closed. The 
sails and gear are properly bent, covers taken off fore-and- 
aft sails, stops of halliards cut, stoppers put on for sheets, 
halliards, braces, etc., etc., light yards are crossed, and 
gear bent, everything clear and ready for making and 
shortening sail, reeve off studding sail gear if ordered. 
If a steamer, start fires. Put on chafing gear, rig timeno- 
guys, etc., etc., furl awnings, and stow them below. Hoist 
all boats and secure them for sea ; unship side ladders, rig 
life boats, see life buoys ready for letting go, take in stern 
ladders, and rig grab lines from main brace bumpkins; rig in 
and secure lower booms, unhook topping lifts and stop them 
up, unhook boom ladders and pendants and stow them be- 
low. Reeve off the cat and fish fails, i; bring to " the chain 
and rig the capstan. The log line and time glasses are 
brought on deck, corrected, and stowed ready for use; the 
hand lead lines are placed in the chains or boats and the 
deep sea or the coasting lead and line are brought on deck. 
All chests and loose articles around deck are securely 
lashed, binnacle covers and hatch hoods are placed near 

; 3S3 ) 



384 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

at hand. The ship's draught forward and aft is taken, by 
the Carpenter, and reported. 

What is chafing gear, and where used ? 

Mats, leather, canvas, battens, etc., etc., put on the 
horns of the cross trees and jack, on the lower shrouds in 
wake of the yards, on davits in wake of sheets, etc., etc. 
Used to protect the sails and rigging from wear and chafe. 

What is done with the air ports on lower deck? 

They are closed by the Carpenter's gang. 

What is done about the health bill and ship's bills? 

The health bill is taken on shore, by the Surgeon, and 
there certified to by the proper authorities. The ship's 
bills are paid, by the Paymaster, before sailing. 

LIFE BUOYS, ETC., ETC. MAN-OVER-BOARD. 

What are life buoys ? 

Buoys of cork or other material, which are dropped or 
thrown into the water, to assist a person who has fallen over- 
board. 

What life buoys are used on board vessels of the navy ? 

Two copper buoys are attached to the stern of a vessel, 
one on each side. Circular buoys, made of canvas stuffed 
with cork, are sometimes distributed around the spar deck, 
and breakers slung with beckets, etc., are also used. Cork 
jackets are stowed below. On board some vessels small 
balsas or life-rafts are kept fitted, and ready for launching 
overboard. 

How are the stern buoys let go ? 

Two handles, similar to bell pulls, are let into the stern 
bulwarks (from inboard.) One of these handles marked 
"Port Fire," (usually the right hand one) when pulled, 
fires the match, and at night, must be the first pulled. The 
other handle is marked " buoy/' and when pulled, the buoy 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 385 

is detached and drops into the water. The buoy floats with 
the two copper globes up. On the bottom of the frame is a 
step for a person to stand on, when supported by the buoy. 

When using this^buoy, be careful to stand well down on 
the step, and grasp the upright bar that projects up between 
the two globes. This plan will keep the head above water ; 
but if an attempt is made to get on top of the buoy it will 
certainly capsize. 

A good time to practice using a life buoy is during the 
bathing hour. It can then be dropped and experimented 
with. 

Life buoys are sometimes fitted to fire the match and de- 
tach, with one and the same pull. 

Which are the life boats? 

Usually the two best sea boats at the davits, one on each 
side, are selected for the purpose ; they are fitted with a 
detaching apparatus, and kept ready for lowering, day and 
night ; every thing about them being so fitted, that they can 
be cast adrift without delay. 

Man-over-board. 

At the cry of "Man overboard '," every one should jump 
at once to his station, and pay careful attention to the orders 
of the officer-of-the-deck. Do not run aft and gape over 
the stern, but try and remember that the only way to sav^ 
the man's life is to obey the orders with a will, and get the 
ship into such a position that the life boat can be lowered 
quickly, and with safety. If stationed to lower the life boat, 
don't get excited, but lower carefully and steadily. If 
stationed at the buoy, don't pull at once, but look over the 
side and try and drop the buoy as close to the man as pos- 
sible ; unless it is known that the man fell from the after part 
of the vessel, when it will be necessary to drop the buoy at 



3<S6 young sailor's assistant. 

once. A little judgment in dropping a life buoy may save 
a man's life. If at night be careful to pull the port fire 
first, and the buoy pull afterwards, unless they are fitted 
for one pull. 

Persons stationed at life buoys should acquaint themselves 
at once with the proper working of the buoys, and never 
pull the "buoy" until the person overboard is astern of the 
ship and clear of the buoy; as it is a well-known fact that 
people, overboard, generally strike out toward the ship, and 
it is seldom they can be induced to turn the other way ; and 
swim toward a floating object, and away from the vessel. 

How are cork jackets used? 

They are secured around the chest and body, tender the 
arms. 

What are balsa s life rafts, etc., etc. ? 

Wooden or inflated rubber rafts, used when landing in a 
surf, abandoning ship, etc., etc. As before stated, small 
balsas are sometimes used for life buoys. 

Rules of the road at sea. 
The following comparison of the old and of the new regu- 
lations to prevent collisions at sea, are given to show the 
changes made, which it is hoped will soon be legalized by 
Congress, and adopted for general use. The attention is 
especially called to those portions of the revised regulations 
in italics, as it is in them that the changes from the old rules 
exist. 

regulations for preventing collisions at sea. 

General Order) Navy Department, 

\ Washington, D. C, 

No - 2 53- ) July 16, 1880. 

A revised code of " Regulations for Preventing Collisions 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



tfl 




STEAM WHISTLE. 



fog sig:n"^x,s. 

STEAM VESSEL. SAILING VESSEL. 

ONE ^ ONE BLAST 

Ciik Prolon g ed Blast jlJ^Z. At intervals of not 

At intervals of not ± ^^^^ ^E ^ morettan two 

more than two *^^^^>~; J minutes, 

minutes. ^^vS^" 

n , v/ , \^ Sailing- Vessel 
oteam Vessel 

fog horn. On Starboard Tack, 



team Vessel 
UNDER WAY. 




SAILING VESSEL. 

<^ TWO BLASTS 
In Succession 

^fc-^ At intervals of not 
more than two 
minutes, 

Sailing Vessel 

On Port Tack. 



FOG HORN. 




SAILING VESSEL. 

THREE BLASTS 

In Succession 

f^Z'ir At intervals of not 
-_. more than two 
^r m nutes. 

Sailing- Vessel 

^With Wind Abaft 
the Beam. 



FOG HORN. 




A BELL 

Rung- at intervals of not more than two minutes. 

Steam or Sailing Vessel 

When NOT under Way 

OPTIONAL SIG-2STALS. 



^ferj Short Blast: 




STEAM WHISTLE 









1 



STEAM WHISTLE. 



If J 



g TWO 
g; Short Blasts 

"I am di- 
recting my 
course t u 
port." 




THREE 

Short Blasts. 

"I am going full spee.i 
astern," 



STEAM WHISTLE. 



3*8 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



at Sea" having been approved by nearly all maritime na- 
tions of the world, and adopted by them, to go into effect 
on the i st of September, 1880, thus becoming an integral 
part of the law of the sea, it is hereby adopted for the naval 
service of the United States, to go into effect on the above- 
mentioned date, in so far as the navigation of naval vessels 
outside of United States territorial waters is concerned. 
Within the waters of the United States, naval vessels will 
be guided by the regulations for preventing collisions, as 
specified in Section 4233, of the United States Revised 
Statutes. 

Navy Department General Order No. 34, dated May 4, 
1864, and forming appendix No. 2 of the United States 
Naval Regulations, is hereby rescinded ; and the precepts 
of the Revised Regulations, and of the United States Sta- 
tutes hereto appended, will be strictly complied with in ac- 
cordance with the above specifications. 

A careful examination and comparison of the appended 
codes is enjoined upon all officers of the Navy, especially 
of those parts of the Revised Regulations which are printed 
in italics, as it is in them that the modifications from the 
old rules exist. 

WM. N. JEFFERS, 
Acting Secretary of the Navy. 



Section 4233, U. S. Revised Statutes. 

Rule I. Every steam-vessel which is 
under sail, and not under steam, shall be 
considered a sail-vessel ; and every steam- 
vessel which is under steam, whether 
under sail or not, shall be considered a 
steam-vessel. 

Rule II. The lights mentioned in the 
following rules, and no others, shall be 
carried in all weathers, between sunset 
and sunrise. 

Rule III. All ocean-going steamers, 
and steamers carrying sail, shall, when 
under way, carry — 



Revised International Regulations. 

Article I. In the following rules every 
steamship which is under sail and not 
under steam is to be considered a sailing- 
ship ; and every steamship which is under 
steam, whether under sail or not, is to be 
considered a ship under steam. 

Article II. The lights mentioned in 
the following articles, numbered 3, 4, 5, 6, 
7, 8, 9, 10, and 11, and no others, shall be 
carried in all weathers from sunset to 
sunrise. 

Article III. A sea-going steamship, 
when under way, shall carry — 



YOUNG SA7T.OR S ASSISTANT. 



3S9 



(A.) At the foremast-head, a bright 
white light, of such a character as to be 
visible on a dark night, with a clear at- 
mosphere, at a distance of at least five 
miles, and so constructed as to show a 
uniform and unbroken light over an arc 
of the horizon of twenty points of the 
compass, and so fixed as to throw the 
light ten points on each side of the vessel, 
namely, from right ahead to two points 
abaft the beam on either side 



(B.) On thestarboad side, a green light, 
of such a character as to be visible on a 
dark night, with a clear atmosphere, at a 
distance of at least two miles, and so con- 
structed as to show a uniform and un- 
broken light over an arc of the horizon of 
ten points of the compass, and so fixed as 
to throw the light from right ahead to two 
points abaft the beam on the starboard 
side. 

(C.) On the port side, a red light, of 
such a character as to be visible on a dark 
night, with a clear atmosphere, at a dis- 
tance of at least two miles, and so con- 
structed as to show a uniform and un- 
broken light over an arc of the horizon 
of ten points of the compass, and^o fixed 
as to throw the light from right ahead to 
two points abaft the beam on the port 
side. 

(Z?.) The green and red lights shall be 
fitted with inboard screens, projecting at 
least three feet forward from the lights, 
so as to prevent them from being seen 
across the bow. 

Rule IV. Steam-vessels, when towing 
other vessels, shall carry two bright white 
mast-head lights vertically, in addition to 
their side lights, so as to distinguish them 
from other steam- vessels. Each of these 
mast-head lights shall be of the same 
character and construction as the mast- 
head lights prescribed by Rule three. 



Rule V. All steam- vessels, other than 
ocean-going steamers and steamers carry- 
ing sail, shall, when under way, carry on 
the starboard and port sides lights of the 
same character and construction and in 
the same position as are prescribed for 
side lights by Rule three, except in the 
case provided in Rule six. 



(a.) On or in front of the foremast , at 

i a height above the hull of not less than 

\ 20 feet, and if the breadth of the ship 

J exceeds 20 feet, then at a height above 

I the hull not less than such breadth, a 

bright white light, so constructed as to 

show an uniform and unbroken light over 

I an arc of the horizon of twenty points of 

the compass, so fixed as to throw the 

; light ten points on each side of the ship, 

viz., from right ahead to two points abaft 

the beam on either side, and of such a 

character as to be visible on a dark night, 

with a clear atmosphere, at a distance of 

at least five miles. 

(b.) On thestarboard side, a green light, 
so constructed as to show an uniform and 
unbroken light over an arc of the horizon 
of ten points of the compass , so fixed as 
to throw the light from right ahead to two 
points abaft the beam on the starboard 
side ; and of such a character as to be 
visible on a dark night, with a clear at- 
mosphere, at a distance of at least two 
miles. 

{c.) On the port side, a red l : ghtso con- 
structed as to show an uniform and un- 
broken light over an arc of the horizon 
of ten points of the compass ; so fixed as 
to throw the light from right ahead to 
two points abaft the beam on the port 
side ; and of such a character as to be 
visible, on a dark night, with a clear at- 
mosphere, at a distance of at least two 
miles. 

(d.) The said green and red side lights 
shall be fitted with inboard screens pro- 
jecting at least three feet forward from 
the light, so as to prevent these lights 
from being seen across the bow. 

Article IV. A steam-ship, when tow- 
ing another ship, shall, in addition to her 
side lights, carry two bright white lights . 
in a vertical line one over the other, not 
less than three feet apart, so as to dis- 
tinguish her from other steamships. Each 
of these lights shall be of the same con- 
struction and character, and shall be car- 
ried in the same position as the white light 
which other steamships are required to 
carry. 



(Inland Water Regulation.) 



Article V. A ship, whether a steam- 
ship ur sailing-ship, when employed 



yjo 



YOUNT. SAILOR 5 ASSISTANT. 



(New Regulation.) 



Rule VI. River steamers navigating 
waters flowing into the Gulf of Mexico, 
and their tributaries, shall carry the fol- 
lowing lights, namely : One red light on 
the outboard side of the port smokepip=, 
and one green light on the outboard side 
of the starboard smokepipe. Such lights 
shall show both forward and abeam on 
their respective sides. 

Rule VII. All coasting steam-vessels, 
and steam-vessels other than ferry-boats 
and vessels otherwise expressly provided 
for, navigating the bays, Likes, rivers, or 
other inland waters of the United States, 
except those mentioned in Rule six, shall 
carry the red and green lights, as pre- 
scribed for ocean-going steamers ; and, 
in addition thereto, a central range of two 
white lights ; the after light being carried 
at an elevation of at least fifteen feet 
above the light at the head of the vessel. 
The head-light shall be so constructed as 
to show a go 3d light through twenty 
points of the compass, namely : from 
right ahead to two points abaft the beam 
on either side of the vessel ; and the after 
light so as to show all arjund the hori- 
zon. The lights for ferry-boats shall be 
regulated by such rules as the board of 
supervising inspectors of steam-vessels 
shall prescribe. 

Rule VIII. Sail- vessels, under way or 
being towed, shall carry the same lights 
as steam-vessels under way, with the ex- 
ception of the white mast-head lights, 
which they shall never carry. 



cither in laying or picking up a tele- 
graph cable, or which, from any acci- 
dent, is not under command, shall at 
night carry, in the same position as the 
white light which steamships are re- 
quired to carry, ana if a steamship in 
place of that light, three red lights in 
globular lanterns , each not less than ten 
inches in diameter, in a vertical line 
one oz>er the other, not less than three 
feet apart ; and shall by day carry in a 
vertical line one over the other, not less 
than three feet apart, in front of but not 
lower than her foremast head, three 
black balls or shapes, each two feet in 
diameter. 

These shapes and lights are to be 
taken by approaching ships as signals 
that the ship using them is not under 
command, and cannot therefore get out 
of the way. 

The abo7Je ships, when not making any 
7vay through the water, shall 7iot carry 
the side lights, but when making way 
shall carry them. 



(Inland Water Regulation not affecting 
naval vessels.) 



Article VI. A sailing ship under way, 
or being towed, shall carry the same 
lights as are provided by article 3 for a 
steamship under way, with the exception 
of the white light, which she shall never 
' carry. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



39* 



Rule IX. Whenever, as in case of 
small vesseis during bad weather, the 
green and red lights cannot be fixed, these 
lights shall be kept on deck, on their 
respective sides of the vessel, ready for 
instant exhibition, and shall, on the ap- 
proach of or to other vessels, be exhibited 
on their respective sides in sufficient time 
to prevent collision, in such manner as to 
make them most visible, and so that the 
green light shall not be seen on the port 
side, nor the red light on the starboard 
side. To make the use of these portable 
lights more certain and easy, they shall 
each be painted outside with the color of 
the light they respectively contain, and 
shall be provided with suitable screens. 



Rule X. All vessels, whether steam- 
vessels or sail-vessels, when at anchor in 
roadsteads or fair-ways, shall, between 
sunset and sunrise, exhibit where it can 
best be seen, but at a height not exceed- 
ing twenty feet above the hull, a white 
light in a globular lantern of eight inches 
in diameter, and so constructed as to show 
a clear, uniform, and unbroken light, vis- 
ible all around the horizon, and at a dis- 
tance of at least one mile. 

Rule XI. Sailing pilot-vessels shall 
net cany the lights required for other 
sailing vessels, but shall cany a white 
light at the mast-head, visible all around 
the horizon, and shali also exhibit a 
flare-up light every lifreen minutes. 



(New Regulation.] 



Rule XII. Coal boats, trading boats. 
produce boats, canal boats, oyster boats, 
fishing boats, rafts, or other water craft, 
navigating any ba}~, harbor, or river, by 
hand-power, horse-power, sail, or by the 
current of the river, or which shall be 
anchored or moored in or near the chan- 
nel or fair-way of any bay, harbor, or 
river, shall cany one or more good white 
lights, which shall be placed in such 
manner as shall be prescribed by the 
board of supervising inspectors of steam- 
vessels. 

Rx:le XIII. Open boats shall not be 
required to carry the side lights required 
for other vessels, but shall, if they do not 
carry such lights, carry a lantern having 
a green slide on one side and a red slide 
on the other side ; and, on the approach 
of or to other vessels, such lantern shall 



Article VII. Whenever, as in the 
case of small vessels during bad weather, 
the green and red side lights cannot be 
fixed, these lights shali be kept on deck, 
on their respective sides of the vessel, 
ready for use, and shall, on the approach 
of or to other vessels, be exhibited on 
their respective sides in sufficient time to 
prevent collision, in such manner as to 
make them most visible, and so that the 
green light shall not be seen on the port 
side nor the red light on the starboard 
side. 

To make the use of these portable 
lights more certain and easy, the lanterns 
containing them shall each be painted 
outside with the color of the light they 
respectively contain, and shall be pro- 
vided with proper screens. 

Article VIII. A ship, whether a 
steamship or a sailing ship, when at an- 
chor, shall carry, where it can best be 
seen, but at a height not exceeding twenty 
feet above the hull, a wh ite light in a glob- 
ular lantern of not less than eight inches 
in diameter, and so constructed as to 
show a clear, uniform, and unbroken 
light, visible all round the horizon at a 
distance of at least one mile. 

Article IX. A pilot-vessel, wht 
gaged on her station o?i pilotag 
shall not cany the lights required lor 
other vessels, but shall cany a white light 
at the mast-head, visible all round the 
horizon, and shall also exhibit a flare-up 
light, or flare -up lights, at short inter- 
vals, which shall never exceed fifteen 
minutes. 

A pilot-vessel, when not engaged on 
her station on pilotage duty .shall carry 
lights similar to those 0/ other ships. 



(Inland Water Regulation not affecting 
naval vessels.) 



Article X. (a.) Open fishing boats 
and other open boats, when under way 
shall not be obliged to carry the side 
lights required for other vessels, but every 
such boat shall, in lieu thereof, have 
ready at hand a lantern with a green glass 
on the one side and a red glass on the 



392 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



be exhibited in sufficient time to prevent 
collision, and in such a manner that the 
green light shall not be seen on the porti 
side, nor the red light on the starboard 
side. Open boats, when at anchor or 
stationary, shall exhibit a bright white 
light. They shall not, however, be pre- 
vented from using a flare-up, in addition, 
if considered expedient. 



(New Regulations.) 



Rule XIV. The exhibition of any 
light on board of a vessel of war of the 
United States may be suspended when- 
ever, in the opinion of the Secretary of 
the Navy, the commander-in-chief of a 
squadron, or the commander of a vessel 
acting singly, the special character of the 
service may require it. 

Rule XV. Whenever there is a fog, or 
thick weather, whether by day or night, 
fog-signals shall be used, as follows : 



other side, and on the approach of or ta 
other vessels such lantern shall be exhib- 
ted, insufficient time to prevent collision, 
so that the green light shall not be seen 
on the port side nor the red light on the 
starboard side. 

(b.) A fishing vessel and an open boat, 
when at anchor, shall exhibit a bright 
white light. 

(c.) A fishing vessel, when employed 
in drift-net fishing shall carry on one 
of her masts two red lights in a vertical 
line one over the othe?' } not less than 
three feet apart. 

(d.) A trawler at work shall carry on 
one of her masts two lights in a ve7'tical 
li7ie one over the other, not less than 
three feet apart, the upper light red and 
the lower green, and shall also either 
carry the side lights required for other 
vessels, or, if the side lights cannot be 
carried, have ready at hand the colored 
lights, as provided in article y, or a 
lantern with a red and a green glass, 
as described in paragraph {a) of this 
article. 

(e.) Fishing vessels and open boats 
shall not be prevented from using a 
flare-up in addition, if they desire to do 
so. 

(f.) The lights mentioned in this arti- 
cle are substituted for those mentioned 
in the 12th, 13th, and 14th articles of 
the convention between France and 
England 'scheduled to the British Sea 
Fisheries Act, 1868. 

(g.) All ligh ts required by th is a rticle , 
except side lights, shall be in globular 
lanterns so constructed as to show all 
round the horizon. 



(Rescinded.) 



Article XII. A steamship shall be 
provided with a steam-whistle or other 
efficient steam-sound signal, so placed 
that the sound may not be intercepted by 
any obstructions , and with an efficient 
fog-horn to be sounded by a bellows or 
other mechanical means, and also with 
an efficient bell. A sailing-ship shall 
be provided wilh a similar fog-horn 
and bell. 

In fog, mist, or falling snow, whether 
by day or night, the signals described in 
this article shall be used as follows, that 
is to say : 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



393 



{A.) Steam-vessels under way shall 
sound a steam-whistle placed before the 
funnel, not less than eight feet from the 
deck, at intervals of not more than one 
minute. 

(B.) Sail-vessels under way shall sound 
a fog-horn at intervals of not more than 
five minutes. 



(New Regulation.) 

(C.) Steam-vessels and sail-vessels, 
when not under way, shall sound a bell at 
intervals of not more than five minutes. 

(jD.) Coal boats, trading boats, produce 
boats, canal boats, oyster boats, fishing 
boats, rafts, or other water craft, navigat- 
ing any bay, harbor, or river, by hand- 
power, horse-power, sail, or by the cur- 
rent of the river, or anchored or moored 
in or near the channel or fair-way of any 
bay , harbor, or river, and not in any port, 
shall sound a fog-horn, or equivalent sig- 
nal, which shall make a sound equal to a 
steam-whistle, at intervals of not more 
than two minutes. 



(See Rule XXL) 



Rule XVI. If two sail-vessels are 
meeting end on, or nerrly t"d on, so as 
to involve risk of collision, .ne helms of 
both should be put to port, so that each 
may pass on the port side of the other. 

Rule XVII. When two sail-vessels are 
crossing so as to involve risk of collision, 
then, if they have the wind on different 
sides, the vessel with the wind on the port 
side shall keep out of the way of the ves- 
sel with the wind on the starboard side, 
except in the case in which the vessel 
with the wind on the port side is close- 
hauled, and the other vessel free, in 
which case the latter vessel shall keep out 
of the way. But if they have the wind 
on the same side, or if one of them has 
the wind aft, the vessel which is to wind- 
ward shall keep out of the way of the 
vessel which is to lee ward. 



Rule XVIII. If two vessels under 
steam are meeting end on, or nearlv end 
on, so as to involve risk of collisioi. ^he 



(a.) A steamship under way shall mak<- 
with her steam-whistle, or other sic*ni- 
sound signal, at intervals of not more than 
two minutes, a prolonged blast. 

(b.) A sailing ship under way shall 
make with her fog-horn, at intervals of not 
more than two minutes, when on the 
starboard tack o7ie blast, when ofi the 
Port tack two blasts in succession, and 
when with the wind abaft the beam 
three blasts in sziccession. 

(c.) A steamship and sailing ship, when 
not under way, shall, at intervals of not 
more than two minutes, ring the bell. 



(Inland Water Regulation not affecting 
naval vessels ) 



Article XIII. Every ship, whether 
sailing ship or steamship, shall, in a fog, 
mist, or falling snow, go at a moderate 
speed. 



Article XIV. When two sailing ships 
are approaching one another so as to in- 
volve risk of collision, one of them shall 
keep out of the way of the other, as fol- 
lows, viz: 

(a.) A ship which is running free shall 
keep out of the way of a ship which is 
close-hauled. 

(b.) A ship which is close-hauled on the 
port tack shall keep out of the way of a 
ship which is close-hauled on the star- 
board tack 

(c.) When both are running free with 
the wind on different sides, the ship which 
has the wind on the port side shall keep 
out of the way of the other. 

(d.) When both are running free with 
the wind on the same side, the ship which 
is to windward shall keep out of the way 
of the ship which is to leeward. 

(e.) A ship which has the wind aft shall 
keep out of the way of the other ship. 

Article XV. If two ships under steam 
are meeting end on, or nearly end on, so 
i.s to involve risk of collision, each sh«J] 



394 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



helms of both shall be put to port, so that 
each may pass on the port side of the 
other. 



(Explanatory note.) 



Rule XIX. If two vessels under steam 
are crossing so as to involve risk of collis- 
ion, the vessel which has the other on her 
own starboard side shall keep out of the 
way of the other. 

Rule XX. If two vessels, one of which 
is a sail-vessel and the other a steam-ves- 
sel, are proceeding in such directions as 
to involve risk of collision, the steam-ves- 
sel shall keep out of the way of the sail- 
vessel. 

Rule XXI. Every steam- vessel, when 
approaching another vessel, so as to in- 
volve risk of collision, shall slacken her 
speed, or, if necessary, stop and reverse; 
and every steam- vessel shall, when in a 
fog, go at a moderate speed. 

(Article XIX is an obligatory regula- 
tion in United States waters, although 
not mentioned in the Statutes.) 



alter her course to starboard, so that each 
may pass on the port side of the other. 

This article only applies to cases 
•where ships are meeting end on, or 
nearly end on, in such a manner as to 
involve risk of collision, and does not 
apply to two ships which must, if both 
keep on their respective courses, pass 
clear of each other. 

The only cases to which it does apply 
are, when each of the two ships is end 
on, or nearly end on, to the other ; in 
other words, to cases in which, by day, 
each ship sees the nzasts of the other in 
a line or nearly in a line with her own; 
and, by night, to cases in which each 
ship is in such a position as to see both 
the side lights of the other. 

It does not apply, by day, to cases in 
which a ship sees another ahead crossing 
her ozun course, or, by night, to cases 
where the red light of one ship is op- 
posed to the red light of the other, or 
where the green light of one ship is op- 
posed to the green light of the other, or 
where a red light without a green light, 
or a green light without a red light, is 
seen ahead, or where both green and red 
lights are seen anywhere but ahead. 

Article XVI. If two ships under 
steam are crossing so as to involve risk 
of collision, the ship which has the other 
on her owii starboard side shall keep out 
of the way of the other. 

Article XVII. If two ships, one of 
which is a sailing ship and the other a 
steamship, are proceeding in such direc- 
tions as to involve risk of collision, the 
steamship shall keep out of the way of the 
sailing ship. 

Article XVIII. Every steamship, 
when approaching another ship so as to 
involve risk of collision, shall slacken her 
speed or stop and reverse if necessary. 



Article XIX. In taking any course 
authorized or required by t ese regula- 
tions, a steamship under way may indi- 
cate that course to any other ship which 
she has in sight by the following signals 
on her steam- whistle, viz : 

One short blast to mean " 1 am direct- 
ing my course to starboard." Two 
short blasts to mean "I am directing 
my course to port. ' ' Three short blasts 
to mean " I am going full speed astern." 

The use of these signals is optional ; 
but if they are used the course of the 
ship must be i;i accordance with the sig- 
nal madei. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



395 



Rule XXII. Every vessel overtaking 
any other vessel shall keep out of the way 
of the last-mentioned vessel. 



(New Regulation.) 



Rule XXIII. Where, by rules seven- 
teen, nineteen, twenty, and twenty-two, 
one of two vessels shall keep out of the 
way, the other shall keep her course, sub- 
ject to the qualifications of rule twenty- 
four. 

Rule XXIV. In construing and obey- 
ing these rules, due regard must be had 
to all dangers of navigation, and to any 
special circumstances which may exist in 



Article XX. Notwithstanding any* 
thing contained in any preceding arti- 
cle, every ship, whether a sailing ship or 
a steamship, overtaking another, shall 
keep out of the way of the overtaken ship. 

Article XXI. In narrow channels 
every steamship shall, when it is safe 
and practicable, keep to that side of the 
fair- way or mid-channel which lies on 
the starboard side of such ship. 

Article XXII. "Where, by the above 
rules, one of two ships is to keep out of 
the way, the other shall keep her course. 



Article XXIII. In obeying and con- 
struing these rules, due regard shall be 
had to all dangers of navigation, and to 
any special circumstances which may ren- 



any particular case rendering a departure : der a departure from the above rules ne- 
from them necessary in order to avoid ! cessary in order to avoid immediate dan- 
immediate danger. ger. 

Section 4234. * * * and every such i Article XI. A ship which is being 
vessel (sail-vessel) shall, on the approach overtaken by another shall show from her 



of any steam-vessel during the night-time, 
show a lighted torch upon that point or 
quarter to which such steam- vessel shall 
be approaching. ******* 



(New Regulations.) 



stern to such last mentioned ship a white. 
light or a flare-up light. 



Article XXIV. Nothing in the&e 
rides shall exonerate any ship, or the 
owner, or master , or crew thereof .front 
the consequences of any neglect to carry 
lights or signals, or of any neglect to 
keep a proper lookout, or of the neglect 
of any precaution which may be re- 
quired by the ordinary practice of sea- 
men, or by the special circumstances of 
the case. 

Article XXV. Nothing in these 
rules shall interfere with the operation 
of a special rule, duly made by local 
authority, relative to the navigation of 
any harbor, river, or inland naviga- 
tion. 

Article XXVI. Nothing in these 
rules shall interfere with the operation 
of any special rules 7nade by the gov- 
ernment of any nation with respect to 
additio7ial station and signal lights for 
two or more ships of war, or for ships 
sailing under convoy. 

1 



Note.— Paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (/), and (g) of Article X are suspended until 
September 1, 1881, in order to permit a knowledge of them to be circulated among 
all vessels which they affect. 

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

In construing and obeying these rules, due regard must 
be had to all dangers of navigation, and to any special 



« 

396 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT 

circumstances which may exist in any particular case, ren- 
dering a departure from them necessary, in order to avoid 
immediate danger. 

Sailing-vessels to be furnished with signal lights and to 
show torches. 

Collectors or other chief officers of the customs shall re- 
quire all sail- vessels to be furnished with proper signal- 
lights; and every such vessel shall, on the approach of any 
steam- vessel during the night-time, show a lighted torch 
upon that point or quarter to which such steam-vessel shall 
be approaching. 

ADDITIONAL RULES, 

These additional rules (found in the proceedings of the 
Board of Supervising Inspectors of Steam-Vessels and De- 
cisions of Treasury Department) are published for the in- 
formation of all concerned : 

Lights for ferry-boats . 

All double-ended ferry-boats on lakes and seaboard shall 
carry a central range of clear, bright, white lights, showing 
all around the horizon, placed at equal altitudes forward 
and aft ; also such side-lights as specified in Section 4233 
of the Revised Statutes, Rule 3, paragraphs b and c. Local 
inspectors, in districts having ferry-boats, shall, whenever 
the safety of navigation may require, designate for each 
line of such boats a certain light, white or colored, which 
shall show all around the horizon, to designate and distin- 
guish such lines from each other, which lights shall be car- 
ried on a flag-staff amidships, fifteen feet above the white 
range-lights. * * * The signal-lights on ferry-boats, 
on waters flowing into the Gulf of Mexico and their tribu- 
taries, shall be the same as those on all other steamboats on 
the same waters, except double-ended ferry-boats, which 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 397 

shall be governed by the rule governing double-ended 
ferry-boats on lakes and seaboard. 

Lights on small craft. 

All coal-boats, trading-boats, produce-boats, canal-boats, 
oyster-boats, fishing-boats, and other water craft, navigating 
any bay, harbor, or liver, propelled by hand-power, horse- 
power, sail, or by the current of the river, or which shall 
be moored in or near the channel or fair-way of any bay, 
harbor, or river, shall carry one bright white light forward, 
not less than six feet above the rail or deck. 

Rafts of one crib, and not more than two in length, shall 
carry one bright white light, on a pole not less than six feet 
high; three or more cribs in length, shall carry one white 
light at each end of the raft at the same height. 

Rafts of more than one crib abreast shall carry one white 
light on each outside corner of the raft, making four lights 
in all. 

Row-boats shall carry one white light two feet above the 
stem . 

It is recommended by the Board of Supervising Inspectors 
of Steam Vessels that, whenever there is a fog by day or 
night, sailing-vessels and every craft propelled by sails upon 
the oceans, lakes, and rivers, when on the starboard tack, 
shall sound, with intervals of not more than two minutes, 
one blast of the fog-horn ; when on the port tack, two 
blasts; when with the wind free or running large, three 
blasts; and that, when lying to or at anchor, they shall 
sound the bell with the same intervals. 

Fog- ho 7ms. 

Any instrument or device for this purpose, which pro- 
duces a sound equivalent to that of a steam-whistle, will be 
considered sufficient for the purposes of the law. 



39<S young sailor's assistant. 

The various tows of barges passing up and down Long 
Island Sound frequently carry lights as follows : The 
steamer towing (in addition to her side lights) and all the 
barges but the last one, carry two white lights, one above 
the other, the rear barge in the tow carrying but one. 
Although there is no law authorizing this, it seems an ex- 
cellent idea *and a very necessary precaution, as the tows 
are quite long, and it will prevent them being broken in 
upon. A vessel coming suddenly upon them in thick 
weather, and seeing two lights, would naturally know there 
must be something following. 

AID TO MEMORY, IN FOUR VERSES, BY THOMAS GRA\, - 
(RULES OF THE ROAD AT SEA.) 

1. Two Steamers Meeting. 

When both side lights you see ahead, 
Port your helm, and show your red. 

2. Two Steamers Passing. _ 

Gree7i to green, or red to red, 
Perfect safety — Go ahead ! 

J. Two Steamers Crossing. 

If to your starboard red appear, 

It is your duty to keep clear, 
To act as judgment says is proper , 

To port — or starboard — back — or stop her. 

But when upon your port is seen 
A steamer starboard light of gree?i, 

There's not so much for you to do, 
Y or green to port keeps clear of you. 

4. All ships innst keep a bright lookout. Steamers must stop 
and go astern if necessary. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 399 

"Roth in safety and in doubt, 
Always keep a good lookout : 
In danger, with no room to turn, 
Ease her! — stop her! — go astern! 

CHANNEL BUOYS, ETC., FOR THE WATERS OF THE UNITED 
STATES AND CANADA. 

Buoys are placed in the harbors, and nirnVr^d with ref- 
erence to vessels leaving the harbor; thai ■ . Xo. i buoy 
nearest the head of the channel, then No. 2, etc., etc., the 
highest number nearest the mouth of the channel, with the 
red buoys and even numbers on the port hand, and the black 
buoys and odd numbers on the starboard hand, passi?ig out 
the channel to seaward. 

1. In approaching the channel, etc., from seaw T ard, red 
buoys with even numbers will be found on the starboard 
side of the channel, and must be left on the starboard hand 
when passing in. 

2. In approaching the channel, etc., from seaward, black 
buoys with odd numbers, will be found on the port side of 
the channel, and must be left on the port hand when pass- 
ing in. 

3. Buoys painted with red and black stripes will be found 
on obstructions, with channel-ways on either side of them, 
and may be left on either hand when passing in. 

4. Buoys painted with white and black perpendicular 
stripes will be found in mid-channel, and must be passed 
close to avoid danger. 

All other distinguishing marks will be in addition to the 
foregoing, and may be employed to mark particular spots. 

Perches with balls, cages, etc., w r ill, when placed, be at 
turning points, the color and number indicating on which 
side they shall be passed. 



400 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Vessels approaching and passing "light vessels" in the 
United States, will be warned of their proximity by the al- 
ternate ringing of a bell and sounding of a fog-horn on 
board the "light ship," at intervals, not exceeding five 
minutes. 

BELLS REGULATING THE MOVEMENTS OF MEN-OF-WAR 
STEAMERS. 

The bell is pulled from the bridge on deck, and strikes 
in the engine-room, as follows : 
i bell — go ahead slow. 

2 bells — stop. 

3 bells — back. 

4 bells — go ahead full speed. 

Merchant steamers have a different system of bells. On 
board merchant steamers, and in the English and other 
navies, the system of bells is being superseded by an "In- 
dicator. ' ' This consists of a dial having a pointer attached, 
and with the "go ahead slow," "back," etc., etc., printed 
on the face. It is placed on deck or on the bridge. 
There is a corresponding "Indicator" in the engine-room. 
The pilot or officer-of-the-deck, for example, moves the 
pointer of the Indicator on deck to "go ahead slow ; " this 
strikes a bell and attracts attention to the Indicator in the 
engine-room, the pointer, of which, has been moved to a 
corresponding point, at the same instant that the one on 
deck was moved. 



CHAPTER XX. 



CAUTIONARY WEATHER SIGNALS VESSELS ASHORE MANAGE* 

MENT OF OPEN BOATS IN A SURF INSTRUCTIONS FOR 

SAVING LIFE WHEN SWIMMING DIRECTIONS FOR 

RESTORING THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. 

UNITED STATES SIGNAL SERVICE STATION AT LIFE-SAVING 
STATIONS. 

The following flag, shown over any station number 
flags, will be used to designate a full signal sta- 
tion of the United States, from which any com- 
munication received will be 
transmitted by telegraph to 
destination. This flag will 
always be hoisted above the 
station number flags when the Signal Ser- 

\> station number of such full p Iff Fla ^' 

IZ ... XT Vistinc?- 

, ^^--^_ station is shown as rso. 8. 

^M^J^^^ Any message signalled by 
"" the International Code, as adopted or 

used by England, France, America, Den- 
Jvo. 6. mark, Holland, Sweden and Norway, 

Russia, Greece, Italy, Germany, Austria, Spain, Portugal 
and Brazil, received at these telegraphic Signal Stations, 
will be transmitted and delivered to the address on pay- 
ment, either at the Station or at place to which addressed 
of the telegraphic charge. All messages received from or 
addressed to the War, Navy, Treasury, State, Interior, or 
(401) 



402 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

other official department at Washington, are telegraphed 
without charge. 

Ships* official numbers, shown and recognized at sta- 
tions thus designated, are reported to Washington by tele- 
graph. 

The flag flown below the United States national colors 
indicates a full signal station connecting by telegraph, but 
not a Life- Saving Station. 

General messages to be telegraphed will be taken only at 
stations flying either three flags, as first given above, or the 
American flag with the Distinctive " Signal Service Flag," 
as above stated. 

The Distinctive Signal Service flag flown alone indicates 
a United States Signal Service station anywhere, not nec- 
essarily, however, connecting by telegraph. 

From and after January i, 1878, an additional Caution- 
ary Storm Signal will be displayed, as occasion may require, 
at all active Signal and Display stations of the Signal Ser- 
vice. The signal will be displayed at and on the regular 
place and staff, and will consist of a white flag with a square 
black centre, shown above a red flag with a square black 
centre by day, or a white light shown above a red light by 
night. This signal will be known as the "Cautionary 
Off-shore Signal/' and will indicate, when shown, that 
while the storm disturbance is considered, at the office of 
the Chief Signal Officer, as not yet passed for the port or 
place at which the signal is displayed, and the winds may 
yet be high, and there may be danger, the winds are expected 
to blow from a northern or western direction, or "off-shore," 
at or near the port or place where the signal may be. 

The display of this signal will often follow, and must be 
distinguished from the display of the usual "Cautionary 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 403 

Signal/' i. e. a square red flag with a square black centre 
by day, or a red light shown at night — which retains, when- 
ever shown alone, its usual meaning. The display of either 
signal is always cautionary. 

The "Cautionary Signal," i. e.. sl red flag with black 
square in the centre by day, or a red light by night, calls 
for caution in view of an approaching storm, and is so "cau- 
tionary" WITH REFERENCE TO WINDS BLOWING FROM ANY 
DIRECTION. 





THE CAUTIONARY SIGNAL. 

Cautionary against Approaching Storm, and against Winds 
from any direction. 

The Cautionary Off-Shore Signal, i. <?., a white flag 
with black square in the centre, shown above a red flag with 
black square in the centre, by day, or a white light shown 
above a red light by night, is "cautionary" with ref- 
erence TO WINDS EXPECTED TO BLOW FROM A NORTHERN OR 
WESTERN DIRECTION, OR OFF-SHORE, AT OR NEAR THE PLACE 
AT WHICH IT MAY BE. 



404 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 







THE CAUTIONARY OFF-SHORE SIGNAL. 

Cautionary against Rough Weather, and against Winds ex* 
pec ted to be in a Northern or Western direction or ' ' Off- 
Shore." 

The display of cautionary signals by flags by day and 
lights by night, is made on occasions of supposed especial 
danger, at the following points, ports, and harbors : 

THE ATLANTIC COAST. 

Atlantic City, N. J., Baltimore, Md., Barnegat, N. J.. 
Booth Bay, Me., Boston, Mass., Cape Hatteras, N. C, Cape 
Henry, Va., Cape Lookout, N. C, Cape May, N. J., 
Charleston, S. C, Chatham, Mass., City Island, N. Y., 
Deer Island, Me., Fort Macon, N. C, Gloucester, Mass., 
Highland Light, Mass., Hyannis, Mass., Jacksonville, Fla., 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 405 

Key West, Fla., Kittyhawk, N. C, Lewes, Del, Marble- 
head, Mass., New Bedford, Mass., Newburyport, Mass., 
New Haven, Conn., New London, Conn., Newport, R. L, 
New York City, Norfolk, Va., Portland, Me., Portsmouth, 
N. H., Rockland, Me., Sandy Hook, N. J., Savannah, 
Ga., Smithville, N. C, Stonington, Conn., Thatcher's 
Islands, Mass., Tybee Islands, Ga., Wilmington, N. C, 
Wood's Hole, Mass. 

THE GULF COAST. 

Galveston, Texas, Indianola, Texas, Mobile, Ala., New 
Orleans, La., Pensacola, Fla., Port Eads, La., St. Mark's, 
Fla. 

VESSELS ASHORE. 

In case of a vessel stranding near a life-saving station on 
our coast, keep a bright lookout for a line, which, after 
their attention has been attracted by the signals of distress, 
the life-saving crew will attempt to throw across the wreck, 
by firing a shot (with the line attached) from a mortar. 
Having secured the line, and at a signal from the shore, 
haul it on board until a tail block with a whip rove off 
is reached ; attached to this block is a metal tag with the 
necessary directions printed on it (in several languages), 
how and where to secure the block; after securing the 
block, cast off the line. A large hawser will then be 
hauled on board, by the people on shore, using this whip. 
When the hawser reaches the wreck, it must be secured on 
board well up on a mast, if possible ; the other, or shore 
end will be properly secured on shore, and communica- 
tion made by means of a "breeches-buoy" or sort of 
chair, which is attached to the hawser, and is "hauled 
out" and "ashore" by the same whip which carried out 
the hawser. 



406 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



The figures will illustrate the manner of "hauling off 
the hawser " and establishing the communication. 




JTailliTig off the fvazoser. 




Jtaisirtg the Crotch. 




JfaTcLing Oub^ 




Hauling Ashore- 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 407 

If stranded on the coasts of England or the United 
Kingdom, communication will be established in a similar 
manner ; instead of firing a shot, a rocket, with line at 
tached, will be thrown across the vessel ; to this line a tail 
block, with whip rove off, is attached, as before described. 

RULES FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF OPEN ROW- 
BOATS IN A SURF— BEACHING THEM, ETC. 

RULES OF MANAGEMENT. 

I. In rowing to Seaward. 
As a general rule, speed must be given to a boat rowing 
against a heavy surf. Indeed, under some circumstances, 
her safety will depend on the utmost possible speed being 
attained on meeting a sea. For if the sea be really heavy, 
and the wind blowing a hard, on-shore gale, it can only be 
by the utmost exertions of the crew that any headway can 
be made. The great danger then is, that an approaching 
heavy sea may carry the boat away on its front, and turn 
it broadside on, or up-end it, either effect being immedi- 
ately fatal. A boat's only chance in such a case is to ob- 
tain such way as shall enable her to pass, end on, through 
the crest of the sea, and leave it as soon as possible behind 
her. Of course, if there be a rather heavy surf, but no 
wind, or the wind off shore, and opposed to the surf, as is 
often the case, a boat might be propelled so rapidly through 
it that her bow would fall more suddenly and heavily after 
topping the sea than if her way had been checked ; and it 
may, therefore, only* be when the sea is of such magnitude, 
and the boat of such a character, that there may be chance 
of the former carrying her back before it, that full speed 
should be given to her. 



408 young sailor's assistant. 

It may also happen that, by careful management under 
such circumstances, a boat may be made to avoid the sea, 
so that each wave may break ahead of her, which may be 
the only chance of safety in a small boat ; but if the shore 
be flat, and the broken water extend to a great distance 
from it, this will often be impossible. 

The following general rules for rowing to seaward may, 
therefore, be relied on : 

i. If sufficient command can be kept over a boat by the 
skill of those on board her, avoid or " dodge" the sea, if 
possible, so as not to meet it at the moment of its breaking 
or curling over. 

2. Against a head gale and heavy surf, get all possible 
speed on a boat on the approach of every sea which cannot 
be avoided. 

3. If more speed can be given to a boat than is sufficient 
to prevent her being carried back by a surf, her way may 
be checked on its approach, which will give her an easier 
passage over it. 

II. On running before a Broken Sea, or Surf, to the Shore. 

The one great danger, when running before a broken 
sea, is that of broaching- to. To that peculiar effect of the 
sea, so frequently destructive of human life, the utmost 
attention must be directed. 

The cause of a boat's broaching-to when running before 
a broken sea or surf is, that her own motion being in the 
same direction as that of the sea, whether it be given by 
the force of oars or sails, or by the force of the sea itself, 
she opposes no resistance to it, but is carried before it. 
Thus, if a boat be running with her bow to the shore and 
her stern to the sea, the first effect of the surf or roller, on 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 409 

its overtaking her, is to throw up the stem, and as a con- 
sequence to depress the bow; if she then has sufficient 
inertia (which will be proportional to weight) to allow the 
sea to pass her, she will in succession pass through the de- 
scending, the horizontal, and the ascending positions, as 
the crest of the wave passes successively her stern, her mid- 
ships, and her bow, in the reverse order in which the same 
positions occur to a boat propelled to seaward against a 
surf. " This may be defined as the safe mode of running 
before a broken sea. 

Eut if a boat, on being overtaken by a heavy surf, has 
not sufficient inertia to allow it to pass her, the first of the 
three positions above enumerated alone occurs ; her stern 
is raised high in the air, and the wave carries the boat be- 
fore it, on its front or unsafe side, sometimes with frightful 
velocity, the bow all the time deeply immersed in the hol- 
low of the sea, where the water, stationary or compara- 
tively so, offers a resistance, whilst the crest of the sea, 
having the actual motion which causes it to break, forces 
onward the stern or rear end of the boat. A boat will, in 
this position, sometimes, aided by careful oar-steerage, run 
a considerable distance until the wave has broken and ex- 
panded itself. But it will often happen that if the bow be 
low it will be driven under water, when, the buoyancy 
being lost forward, whilst the sea presses on the stern, the 
boat will be thrown (as it is termed) end over end ; or if 
the bow be high, or it be protected, as in most life-boats, 
by a bow air-chamber, so that it does not become sub- 
merged, that the resistance forward, acting on one bow, 
will slightly turn the boat's head, and the force of the surf 
being transferred to the opposite quarter, she will in a 
moment be turned round broadside by the sea, and be 
jS 



41 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

thrown by it on her beam-ends, or altogether capsized. It 
is in this manner that most boats are upset in a surf, espe- 
cially on flat coasts, and in this way many lives are 
annually lost amongst merchant seamen, when attempting 
to land after being compelled to desert their vessels. 

Hence it follows, that the management of a boat, when 
landing through a heavy surf, must, as far as possible, be 
assimilated to that when proceeding to seaward against one, 
at least so far as to stop her progress shoreward at the mo- 
ment of being overtaken by a heavy sea, and thus enabling 
it to pass her. There are different ways of effecting this 
object : 

i. By turning a boat's head to the sea before entering the 
broken water, and then backing in stern foremost, pulling 
a few strokes ahead to meet each heavy sea, and then again 
backing astern. If a sea be really heavy and a boat small, 
this plan will be generally the safest, as a boat can be kept 
more under command when the full force of the oars can 
be used against a heavy surf than by backing them only. 

2. If rowing to shore with the stern to seaward, by back- 
ing all the oars on the approach of a heavy sea, and rowing 
ahead again as soon as it has passed to the bow of the boat, 
thus rowing in on the back of the wave ; or, as is practiced 
in some life-boats, placing the after-oarsmen with their faces 
forward, and making them row back at each sea on its ap- 
proach. 

3. If rowed in bow foremost, by towing astern a pig of 
ballast or large stone, or a large basket, or a canvas bag, 
termed a u drogue " or drag, made for the purpose, the ob- 
ject of each being to hold the boat's stern back, and pre- 
vent her being turned broadside to the sea or broaching-to. 

Drogues are in common use by the boatmen on the Nor- 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 41 1 

folk coast; they are conical-shaped bags of about the same 
form and proportionate length and breadth as a candle-ex- 
tinguisher, about two feet wide at the mouth and four and a 
half feet long. They are towed with the mouth foremost by 
a stout rope j a small line, termed a tripping-line, being fast 
to the apex or pointed end. When towed with the mouth 
foremost they fill with water and offer a considerable resis- 
tance, thereby holding back the stern ; by letting go the 
stouter rope and retaining the smaller line their position is 
reversed, when they collapse, and can be readily hauled into 
the boat. 

Drogues are chiefly used in sailing-boats, when they both 
serve to check a boat's way and to keep her end on to the 
sea. They are, however, a great source of safety in rowing- 
boats, and the rowing life-boats of the National Life Boat 
Institution are now all provided with them. 

A boat's sail bent to a yard and towed astern loosed, the 
yard being attached to a line capable of being veered, hauled, 
or let go, will act in some measure as a drogue, and will 
tend much to break the force of the sea immediately astern 
of the boat. 

Heavy weights should be kept out of the extreme ends 
of a boat ; but when rowing before a heavy sea the best 
trim is deepest by the stern, which prevents the stern being 
readily thrown on one side by the sea. 

A boat should be steered by an oar over the stern, or on 
one quarter, when running before a sea, as the rudder will 
then at times be of no use. If the rudder be shipped, it 
should be kept amidships on a sea breaking over the stern. 

The following general rules may therefore be depended 
on when running before, or attempting to land, through a 
heavv surf or broken water : 



412 YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 

i . As far as possible, avoid each sea by placing the boat 
where the sea will break ahead or astern of her. 

2. If the sea be very heavy, or if the boat be very small, 
and especially if she have a square stern, bring her bow 
round to seaward and back her in, rowing ahead against 
each heavy surf that cannot be avoided sufficiently to allow 
it to pass the boat. 

3. If it be considered safe to proceed to the shore bow 
foremost, back the oars against each sea at its approach, so 
as to stop the boat's way through the water as far as possi- 
ble ; and if there is a drogue, or any other instrument in 
the boat which may be used as one, tow it astern to aid in 
keeping the boat end on to the sea, which is the chief ob- 
ject in view. 

4. Bring the principal weights in the boat towards the end 
that is to be seaward, but not to the extreme end. 

5. If a boat, worked by both sails and oars, be running 
under sail for the land through a heavy sea, her crew should, 
under all circumstances, unless the beach be quite steep, take 
down her masts and sails before entering the broken water, 
and take her to land under oars alone, as above described. 
If she have sails only, her sails should be much reduced, a 
half-lowered foresail or other small head-sail being suffi- 
cient. 

III. Beaching or Landing through a Surf. 
The running before a surf or broken sea, and the beach- 
ing or landing of a boat, are two distinct operations; the 
management of boats as above recommended, has ex- 
clusive reference to running before a surf when the shore is 
so flat that the broken water extends to some distance from 
the beach. Thus, on a very steep beach, the first heavy 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 413 

fall of broken water will be on the beach itself, whilst on 
some very flat shores there will be broken water as far as 
the eye can reach, sometimes extending to even four or five 
miles from the land. The outermost line of broken water, 
on a flat shore, where the waves break in three and fou r 
fathoms water, is the heaviest, and therefore the most dan- 
gerous; and, when it has been passed through in safety, 
the danger lessens as the water shoals, until, on nearing 
the land, its force is spent and its power harmless. As the 
character of the sea is quite different on steep and flat 
shores, so is the customary management of boats on landing 
different in the two situations. On the flat shore, whether 
a boat be run or backed in, she is kept straight before or 
end on to the sea until she is fairly aground, when each 
surf takes her further in as it overtakes her, aided by the 
crew, who will then generally jump out to lighten her, and 
drag her in by her sides. As above stated, sail will in this 
case have been previously taken in if set, and the boat will 
have been rowed or backed in by oars alone. 

On the other hand, on the steep beach, it is the geneaal 
practice, in a boat of any size, to retain speed right on to 
the beach, and in the act of landing, whether under oars 
or sail, to turn the boat's bow half round towards the 
direction from which the surf is running, so that she may 
be thrown on her broadside up the beach, where abundance 
of help is usually at hand to haul her as quickly as possible 
out of the reach of the sea. In such situations, we believe, 
it is nowhere the practice to back a boat in stern foremost 
under oars, but to row in under full speed as above de- 
scribed 



414 young sailor's assistant. 

IV. Boarding a Wreck, or a Vessel, under Sail or at 
Anchor, in a Heavy Sea. 

The circumstances under which life -boats or other boats 
have to board vessels, whether stranded or at anchor, or 
under way, are so various that it would be impossible to 
draw up any general rule for guidance. Nearly everything 
must depend on the skill, judgment, and presence of mind 
of the coxswain or officer in charge of the boat, who will 
often have those qualities taxed to the utmost, as un- 
doubtedly the operation of boarding a vessel in a heavy sea 
or surf is frequently one of extreme danger. 

It will be scarcely necessary to state that, whenever prac- 
ticable, a vessel, whether stranded or afloat, should be 
boarded to leeward, as the principal dangers to be guarded 
against must be the violent collision of the boat against the 
vessel, or her swamping or upsetting by the rebound of the 
sea, or by its irregular direction on coming in contact with 
the vessel's side; and the greater violence of the sea on the 
windward side is much more likely to cause such accidents. 
The danger must, of course, also be still further increased 
when the vessel is aground and the sea breaking over her. 
The chief danger to be apprehended on boarding a stranded 
vessel on the lee side, if broadside to the sea, is the falling 
of the masts ; or if they have been previously carried away, 
the damage or destruction of the boat amongst the floating 
spars and gear alongside. It may therefore, under such 
circumstances, be often necessary to take a wrecked crew 
into a life-boat from the bow or stern ; otherwise a rowing- 
boat, proceeding from a lee shore to a wreck, by keeping 
under the vessel's lee, may use her as a break water, and 
thus go off in comparatively smooth water, or be at least 
shielded from the worst of the sea. This is, accordingly, 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 415 

the usual practice in the rowing life-boats around the 
United Kingdom. The larger sailing life-boats, chiefly on 
the Norfolk and Suffolk coasts, which go off to wrecks on 
outlying shoals, are, however, usually anchored to wind- 
ward of stranded vessels, and then veered down to 100 or 
150 fathoms of cable, until near enough to throw a line on 
board. The greatest care, under these circumstances, has, 
of course, to be taken to prevent actual contact between 
the boat and the ship; and the crew of the latter have 
sometimes to jump overboard and to be hauled to the boat 
by ropes. 

In every case of boarding a wreck or a vessel at sea, it is 
important that the lines by which a. boat is made fast to the 
vessel should be of sufficient length to allow of her rising 
or falling freely with the sea; and every rope should be 
kept in hand ready to cut or slip it in a moment if neces- 
sary. On wrecked persons or other passengers being 
taken . into a boat in a sea way, they should be placed on 
the thwarts in equal numbers on either side, and be made 
to sit down. All crowding or rushing headlong into the 
boat should be prevented as far as possible; and the captain 
of a ship, if a wreck, should be called on to remain on 
board to preserve order until every other person has left 
her. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAVING DROWNING PER- 
SONS BY SWIMMING TO THEIR RELIEF. 

BY JOSEPH R. HODGSON. 

i. When you approach a person drowning in the water, 
assure him, with a loud and firm voice, that he is safe. 
2. Before jumping in to save him, divest yourself as far 



4i6 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



and as quickly as possible of all clothes ; tear them off, if 
necessary ; but if there is not time, loose at all events the 
foot of your drawers, if they are tied, as, if you do not do 
so, they fill with water and drag you. 

3. On swimming to a person in the sea, if he be strug- 
gling, do not seize him then, but keep off for a few sec- 
onds till he gets quiet ; for it is sheer madness to take hold 
of a man when he is struggling in the water, and if you do 
you run a great risk. 




Method of rescuing a drowning man. 

4. Then get close to him and take fast hold of the hair 
of his head, turn him as quickly as possible on to his back, 
give him a sudden pull, and this will cause him to float ; 
then throw yourself on your back also and swim for the 
shore, both hands having hold of his hair, you on your 
back and he also on his, and of course his back to your 
stomach. In this way you will get sooner and safer ashore 
than by any other means, and you can easily thus swim 
with two or three persons ; the writer has even, as an ex- 
periment, done it with four, and gone with them forty or 
fifty yards in the sea. One great advantage of this method 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 417 

is that it enables you to keep your head up, and also to 
hold the person's head up you are trying to save. It is of 
primary importance that you take fast hold of the hair, and 
throw both the person and yourself on your backs. After 
many experiments it is usually found preferable to all other 
methods. You can in this manner float nearly as long as 
you please, or until a boat or other help can be obtained. 

5. It is believed there is no such thing as a death-grasp; 
at least it is very unusual to witness it. As soon as a 
drowning man begins to get feeble and to lose his recol- 
lection, he gradually slackens his hold until he quits it 
altogether. No apprehension need, therefore, be felt on 
that head when attempting to rescue a drowning person. 

6. After a person has sunk to the bottom, if the water 
be smooth, the exact position where the body lies may bc 
known by the air-bubbles, which will occasionally rise to 
the surface, allowance being of course made for the motion 
of the water, if in a tide-way or stream, which will have 
carried the bubbles out of a perpendicular course in rising 
to the surface. A body may be often regained from the 
bottom, before too late for recovery, by diving for it in 
the direction indicated by these bubbles. 

7. On rescuing a person by diving to the bottom, the 
hair of the head should be seized by one hand only, and 
the other used, in conjunction with the feet, in raising 
yourself and the drowning person to the surface. 

8. If in the sea, it may sometimes be a great error to try 
to get to land, If there be a strong " outsetting " tide, 
and you are swimming either by yourself, or having hold 
of a person who cannot swim, then get on your back and 
float till help comes. Many a man exhausts himself by 
stemming the billows for the shore on a back-going tide, 



41 3 young sailor's assistant. 

and sinks in the effort, when, if he had floated, a boat or 
other aid might have been obtained. 

9. These instructions apply alike to all circumstances, 
whether as regards the roughest sea or smooth water. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR "LIFE-SAVING SERVICE." 

DIRECTIONS FOR RESTORING THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. 

Rule I. Arouse the patient. — Unless in danger of freez- 
ing, do not move the patient, but instantly expose the face 
to a current of fresh air, wipe dry the mouth and nostrils, 
rip the clothing so as to expose the chest and waist, and 




Fig. I. Showing the first step taken, by which the chest is 

emptied of air, and the ejection of any fluids 

swallowed is assisted. 

give two or three quick smarting slaps on the stomach and 
chest with the open hand. If the patient does not revive, 
then proceed thus : 

Rule II. To draw off water, etc., fro7n the stomach and 
chest. — (See Fig. I ) — If the jaws are clenched, separate 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



4/9 



them, and keep the mouth open by placing between the 
teeth a cork or small bit of wood ; turn the patient on the 
face, a large bundle of tightly-rolled clothing being placed 
beneath the stomach, and press heavily over it for half a 
minute, or so long as fluids flow freely from the mouth. 

Rule III. To produce breathing. — (See Fig. II.)— Clear 
the mouth and throat of mucus, by introducing into the 
throat the corner of a handkerchief wrapped closely around 




Fig. II. Showing the position and action of the operator, in 

alternately producing artificial expiration and 

inspiration of air. 

the forefinger ; turn the patient on the back, the roll of 
clothing being so placed beneath it as to raise the. pit of 
the stomach above the level of any other part of the body. 
If there be another person present, let him, with a piece of 
dry cloth, hold the tip of the tongue out of one corner of 
the mouth, (this prevents the tongue from falling back and 
choking the entrance to the windpipe,) and with the other 
hand grasp both wrists and keep the arms forcibly stretched 
back above the head, thereby increasing the prominence 



420 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

of the ribs, which tends to enlarge the chest. The two 
last-named positions are not, however, essential to success. 
Kneel beside or astride the patient's hips, and with the 
balls of the thumbs resting on either side of the pit of the 
stomach, let the fingers fall into the grooves between the 
short ribs, so as to afford the best grasp of the waist. 
Now, using your knees as a pivot, throw all your weight 
forward on your hands, and at the same time squeeze the 
waist between them, as if you wished to force everything 
in the chest upward out of the mouth; deepen the pres- 
sure while you can count slowly one, two, three ; then 
suddenly let go with a final push, which springs you back 
to your first kneeling position. Remain erect on your 
knees while you can count one, two, three; then repeat 
the same motions as before at a rate gradually increased 
from four or five to fifteen times in a minute, and continue 
thus this bellows movement with the same regularity that 
is observable in the natural motions of breathing which 
you are imitating. If natural breathing be not restored, 
after a trial of the bellows movement for the space of three 
or four minutes, then, without interrupting the artificial 
respiration, turn the patient a second time on the stomach, 
as directed in Rule II, rolling the body in the opposite 
direction from that in which it was first turned, for the 
purpose of freeing the air-passages from any remaining 
water. Continue the artificial respiration from one to four 
hours, or until the patient breathes; and for a while, after 
the appearance of returning life-, carefully aid the first short 
gasps until deepened into full breaths. Continue the dry- 
ing and rubbing, which should have been unceasingly 
practised from the beginning, taking care not to interfere 
with the means employed to produce breathing. Thus the 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 42 1 

limbs of the patient should be rubbed, always in an upward 
direction towards the body, with firm-grasping pressure 
and energy, using the bare hands, dry flannels or handker- 
chiefs, and continuing the friction under the blankets or 
over the dry clothing. The warmth of the body can also 
be promoted by the application of hot flannels to the 
stomach and arm-pits, bottles or bladders of hot water, 
heated bricks, etc., to the limbs and soles of the feet. 

Rule IV. After Treatment. — Externally : As soon as 
breathing is established let the patient be stripped of all 
wet clothing, wrapped in blankets only, put to bed com- 
fortably warm, but with a free circulation of fresh air, and 
left to perfect rest. Internally : Give a little brandy and 
hot water, or other stimulant at hand, every ten or fifteen 
minutes for the first hour, and as often thereafter as may 
seem expedient. Later ma?iife stations : After reaction is 
fully established, there is great danger of congestion of the 
lungs; and if perfect rest is not maintained for at least 
forty-eight hours, it sometimes occurs that the patient is 
seized with great difficulty of breathing, and death is liable 
to follow unless immediate relief is afforded. In such 
cases apply a large mustard plaster over the breast. If the 
patient gasps for breath, before the mustard takes effect, 
assist the breathing by carefully repeating the artificial 
respiration. 

Note. — An eminent authority, Dr. Labordette, the Su- 
pervising Surgeon of the Hospital of Lisieux, in France, 
appears to have established that the clenching of the jaws 
and the semi-contraction of the fingers, which have hitherto 
been considered signs of death, are, in fact, evidences of 
remaining vitality. After numerous experiments with ap- 
parently drowned persons, and also with animals, he con- 



42 2 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

eludes that these are only signs accompanying the first 
stage of suffocation by drowning, the jaws and hands be- 
coming relaxed when death ensues.* This being so, the 
mere clenching of the jaws and semi-contraction of the 
hands must not be considered as reasons for the discontinu- 
ance of efforts to save life, but should serve as a stimulant 
to vigorous and prolonged efforts to quicken vitality. Per- 
sons engaged in the tasks of resuscitation are, therefore, 
earnestly desired to take hope and encouragement for the 
life of the sufferer from the signs above referred to, and 
to continue their endeavors accordingly. In a number of 
cases Dr. Labordette restored to life persons whose jaws 
were so firmly clenched that, to aid respiration, their teeth 
had to be forced apart with iron instruments. 

* The muscular rigidity of death {rigor mortis) occurs later, after 
the temporary relaxation here referred to. 



CHAPTER XXI. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Bright Work — Stowage of Holds — Scraping Spars — Ac- 
tional Holidays — Dressing Ship — Manning Yards — 
Mourning — Navy Yards — Recipes for Paints, 
Stains, Currency Tables, etc., etc. 

CLEANING BRIGHT WORK. 

WJiat is bright work ? 

The name applied to the metal objects on board ship, 
which are kept bright by polishing. The call for gun 
bright work is by the bugle or drum — for deck bright work 
by passing the word. 

IVJiat is "gun bright work ? " 

The metal objects, around the battery, that are kept 
bright. 

What is " deck bright work ? ' ' 

The metal objects, around the decks, that are kept bright. 

REMARKS. 

At the call for gun or deck bright work, proceed at once 
to the proper station for cleaning. "The gun's crews clean 
their own bright work. Afterguards and mizzen topmen 
and part of main topmen clean the deck bright work abaft 
the main mast. Forecastle men, fore and a part of main 
topmen, clean forward of the main mast. The gun deck 
bright work is cleaned by the port watch. Any extra 
bright work is cleaned by extra duty men. 

At the call, the people, stationed, break out the tarpaulin 
and spread it on deck, near the bright work to be cleaned, 
placing the brick and cleaning rags on it. The oil should 

(423) 



424 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

be in charge of the quarter-gunners or captains of the 
different parts of the ship, and should not be left on the 
tarpaulin, where it will be likely to spill and stain the deck 
When used, however, it should always be poured, having 
the tarpaulin to protect the deck. Be careful not to waste 
the brick, but scrape it off in small quantities as needed. 

A little oil mixed with brick will remove verdigris, etc. 

Keep off the tarpaulin and do not tramp brick and oil 
over the deck. 

Keep the brick and cleaning rags off the deck. 

If the bright work: is gone over, with an oiled rag, dur- 
ing rainy or bad weather, it will not turn so quickly 

STOWAGE OF A HOLD. 

What is first stowed in a hold ? 

Ballast, composed of pigs of iron. 

What is ' ' zvinging out ' ' the ballast ? 

Lengthening it out from the keel to the sides. " Wing- 
ing out " tends to make a vessel roll ;_and " building up " 
amidships, to keep her steady. 

What are stowed on top of the ballast ? 

Water-tanks ; they are of iron, made to fit the form of 
the hold, and are stowed according to their marks in their 
proper places. 

How are they slung and stowed'? 

They are slung by placing an iron toggle in the man- 
hole (hole in the top of the tank), the tackle hooking to 
an eye or ring in the toggle. When stowed, they should 
be placed compactly, and form an even surface on top. 
They are then wedged with slips of wood, and the seams 
caulked and pitched, so that no dirt may work down be- 
tween them. 

What is done with wood before stowing in the hold 2 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 425 

It is "barked," all insects, dirt, etc., knocked off. 
Wood is used to chock up casks, etc., in the hold, as well 
as for fire -wood. 

How are beef and pork barrels stowed? 

Beef on the port side, Pork on the starboard side, and 
fill in with wood between the barrels. 

Where are the wet and dry provisions usually stowed? 

The dry provisions aft, the wet provisions forward. 

What are the " wet ' ' and the ' 'dry ' ' provisions ? 

The wet provisions consist of beef, pork, vinegar, etc., 
etc. The dry consist of flour, rice, beans, etc., etc. 

What is stowed overhead in the hold? 

Oars, boat-hooks, lumber, pieces of iron, spare gun gear, 
etc., etc., etc. 

Wliat is done with lime before receiving it inboard? 

It is well slacked (mixed with water). 

Where are the sails stowed? 

In the sail-room. 

Where is the tar, pitch, etc., stowed? 

In the fore-hold. 

What is stowed in the spirit room ? 

Sugar, tea, tobacco, clothing, etc., etc. 

SCRAPING SPARS. 

The spars are scraped, and afterwards slushed (greased) 
down j this is done to brighten up aloft. A windy day, with 
wind abeam, if possible, is usually taken, in order that the 
scrapings, etc., will blow clear of the decks and boats. 

The topgallant and royal masts, topmasts, yard-arms, of 
light yards, jib and flying jib booms, spanker boom, 
gaffs and all studding sail booms are scraped ; the latter 
(studding sail booms) should not be greased unless they 
can remain triced up ; otherwise they will grease the sails. 



426 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

The davit strong-backs, if not painted, must be scraped, 
also trysail and spanker masts, rungs of Jacob's ladders, 
ends of whisker booms, etc., etc. 

NATIONAL HOLIDAYS — DRESSING SHIP — MANNING YARDS — 
MOURNING. 

WJiat are the National Holidays in the United States ? 

July 4th, the anniversary of the Declaration of Inde- 
pendence ; and Feburary 22d, the anniversary of Wash- 
ington's birthday. 

Our men-of-war are "dressed" on the National Holi- 
days, and also when assisting in the celebration of the anni- 
versaries of foreign powers. 

Dressing Ship, 

Ensign at each mast-head. 

From flying jib-boom end to foretop-gallant head. 
[Pennants and square flags alternately.] 

Thence to main top-gallant mast-head. [Same arrange- 
ment.] 

Thence to mizzen top-gallant mast-head. [Same.] 

Thence to peak, thence to boom end. [Square flags.] 

From spanker-boom end hang ship's pennants, and from 
the flying jib-boom end the number, a lead being bent on 
to each to keep them from flying away. 

Topgallant yards are not usually sent down the evening 
before dressing ship. 

The flying jib and royal halliards are used to trice up 
by, rove through blocks at the mast-heads, with down- 
hauls made fast. And the flags, in addition to being 
stopped at the head and tack, are stitched to the halliards 
amidships. Reeve them beforehand, and bend on the flags. 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 427 

Before tricing up, send people aloft to keep the flags 
clear. Trice up mast-head ensigns first. 

When dressing in honor of a foreign power, courtesy re- 
quires the colors of that power to be displayed at the main 
topgallant mast-head. 

On a shift of wind, or at the turn of the tide, if in a 
tideway, hands should be sent aloft together to clear the 
flags. 

JVhen are yards manned? 

When receiving the President of the United States, and 
the rulers of all foreign countries. 

How is a man-of-war put in mourning? 

By half-masting the colors, and in addition "minute 
guns " are sometimes fired. 

Merchant vessels, in addition to half-masting the colors, 
sometimes cock-bill the yards. 

The ensign, if at half-mast, must always be mast-headed, 
before hauling down at sunset. 

NAVY YARDS AND STATIONS IN THE UNITED STATES. 

Navy Yard at Kittery, Maine, called the " Portsmouth 
Navy Yard " (being on the opposite side of the river from 
that city). 

Navy Yard, Charlestown, Mass., near Boston, called the 
"Boston Navy Yard." 

"Torpedo Station," and the "Naval Training Station" 
at Newport, R. I. 

"Naval Station," New London, Conn. 

Navy Yard, Brooklyn, N. Y., called the "New York 
Navy Yard." 

Naval Station at League Island, Pa., near Philadelphia, 
Pa. 



428 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Navy Yard at Gosport, Va., opposite the city of Norfolk; 
Va., called "Norfolk Navy Yard." 

Navy Yard, Washington, D. C. 

Naval Academy, and Experimental Battery, Annapolis, 
Md. 

Naval Station near Port Royal, S. C. 

Naval Station at Key West, Florida. 

Navy Yard, Pensacola, Florida. 

Navy Yard at Mare Island, Cal., about thirty miles 
above San Francisco. 

"Naval Nitre Depot," at Maiden, Mass. 

PAINTS, STAINS, ETC., ETC. 

Proportions of materials for mixing paints, as ordered by 
the Bureau of Construction and Repair, Navy Department. 

Black for outside work. 
ioo pounds lampblack ground in linseed oil. 
10 gallons linseed oil raw. 
i gallon turpentine. 
3 quarts Japan drier. 
One pound will cover about five square yards of surface. 

White for outside work. 
ioo pounds of white-lead in oil. 
3^2 gallons linseed oil raw. 

2 quarts turpentine. 

3 pints Japan drier. 

One pound will cover about one and a half square yards 
of surface. 

White for inside work. 
50 pounds whitelead, in oil. 
50 pounds white zinc, in oil. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 429 

2 gallons linseed oil, raw. 
2 gallons turpentine. 
1 pint Japan drier. 
One pound will cover about three square yards of sur- 
face. 

White for inside work to be varnished. 
100 pounds white zinc, in oil. 
1 quart linseed oil, raw. 
3 gallons turpentine. 

1 pound sugar of lead drier. 

One pound will cover about three square yards of sur- 
face. 

Straw color for spars. 
100 pounds whitelead, in oil. 
2^/2 gallons linseed oil, raw. . 
10 pounds French yellow, in oil. 
iy 2 pounds Venetian red, in oil. 
y pound vermillion. 

2 quarts turpentine. 

3 pints Japan drier. 

One pound will cover about one and a half square yards 
of surface* 

PROPORTIOM OF MATERIAL FOR MIXING SHELLAC. 

Shellac varnish. 
3 pounds gum shellac. 

1 gallon alcohol. 

Shellac for decks, 

2 pounds gum shellac. 

2 pounds French yellow, dry. 
1 gallon alcohol. 



4 30 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

One gallon will cover about twenty square yards of sur- 
face. 

USEFUL RECIPES. 

Copper color paint. 
Six parts spruce ochre. 
One part Venetian red. 
One part of black. 

Bronze paint. 

2 pounds chrome green. 
i ounce ivory black. 

i ounce chrome yellow. 

i gill good Japan. 

Grind altogether, and mix with linseed oil. 

A little salt added to black paint, will prevent blistering. 

Removing old paint. 

One part of pearl-ash mixed with three parts of quick 
stone-lime, (by slacking the lime in water, and then add- 
ing pearlash) laid over paint work, and allowed to stand 
fourteen or sixteen hours, will soften it so that it can be 
easily scraped off. 

Oil polish. 

Dissolve resin in turpentine to about the consistency of 
treacle; add two pints of linseed-oil to one of resin and 
turpentine. 

STAINING. 

Ebony stain. 

3 pounds logwood. 
Yz pound copperas. 
}£ pound nut gall. 

i gallon vinegar. 

To be well boiled, and u;ed while hot. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 



431 



The wood, to be stained, must be sandpapered before and 
after the stain is put on. Apply at least four coats of stain, 
each coat to be well rubbed in. Oil well when finished. 
Black guh polish. 

4 ounces resin. 

2 ounces lampblack. 

2 ounces shellac. 

1 quart linseed oil. 

Boil fifty minutes, then add 3 ounces beeswax, half pint 
of turpentine. 

For bronzed guns omit the lampblack. 
Black polish for iron. 

1 pint coal tar. 

1 ounce lampblack. 

Yz ounce hellebore. 

1 ounce beeswax. 

The beeswax and hellebore to be dissolved in the turpen- 
tine; then add the lampblack and tar; mix, warm it well, 
and apply at once. 

CURRENCY TABLE. 

Francs Reduced into Dollars and Cents. 
I Franc — 100 Centimes. 



1 Centime 


= 0.193 Cents. 


20 Centimes 


= 3.860 Cents 


2 " 


= 0.386 « 


30 


" 


= 5.790 


t 


3 


= 0.579 " 


40 


k 


= 7.720 


t 


4 


= 0.772 " 


50 


a 


= 9.650 


' 


5 


= 0.965 " 


60 


a 


= 11.580 


4 


6 


= 1.158 « 


70 


a 


= 13.510 


1 


7 


= 1.351 " 


80 


" 


= 15.440 


' 


8 


= 1-544 " 


90 


tt 


= 17.370 


t 


9 


= 1.737 " 


100 


a 


= 19.300 " 


10 " 


= 1.930 " 











I Cent = 5.181347 Centimes. 



43 2 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



Frs. 


* c. 


Frs. 


$ 


c. 


Frs. 


£ 


c. 


Frs. 


$ c 


I 


20 


27 


5 


21 


53 


10 


23 


79 


15 25 


2 


39 


28 


5 


40 


54 


•10 


42 


80 


15 44 


3 


58 


29 


5 


60 


55 


10 


62 


81 


15 63 


4 


77 


30 


5 


79 


56 


10 


81 


82 


15 s 3 


5 


97 


31 


5 


98 


57 


11 


00 


83 


16 02 


6 


1 16 


32 


6 


18 


58 


11 


19 


84 


16 21 


7 


1 35 


33 


6 


37 


59 


11 


39 


85 


16 41 


8 


1 54 


34 


6 


56 


60 


11 


58 


86 


16 60 


9 


1 74 


35 


6 


76 


61 


11 


77 


^7 


16 79 


IO 


1 93 


36 


6 


95 


62 


11 


97 


88 


16 98 


ii 


2 12 


37 


7 


H 


63 


12 


16 


89 


17 18 


12 


2 32 


38 


7 


33 


64 


12 


35 


90 


17 37 


13 


2 51 


39 


7 


53 


65 


12 


55 


91 


17 56 


H 


2 70 


40 


7 


72 


66 


12 


74 


92 


17 76 


15 


2 90 


4i 


7 


9i 


67 


12 


93 


93 


17 95 


16 


3 °9 


42 


8 


11 


68 


13 


12 


94 


18 14 


17 


3 28 


43 


8 


30 


69 


13 


32 


95 


18 34 


18 


3 47 


44 


8 


49 


70 


13 


5i 


96 


18 53 


19 


3 67 


45 


8 


69 


7i 


13 


70 


97 


18 72 


20 


3 86 


46 


8 


88 


72 


13 


90 


98 


18 91 


21 


4 05 


47 


9 


07 


73 


H 


09 


99 


19 11 


22 


4 25 


48 


9 


26 


74 


H 


28 


100 


19 30 


23 


4 44 


49 


9 


46 


75 


14 


^48 


200 


38 60 


24 


.4 63 


50 


9 


65 


76 


H 


67 


300 


57 90 


25 


4 83 


5i 


9 


84 


77 . 


H 


86 


400 


77 20 


26 


5 ° 2 


52 


10 


04 


78 


15 


05 


500 


96 50 



DOLLARS AND CENTS REDUCED INTO FRANCS AND CENTIMES. 



M 


n 


^ O 


d 


O 


►3 O 


d 


O 


*J 


O 





o> 


3 8 


O 


<T 


S 3 





o> 


P 


s 






2 it- 






£3 r+ 










p 


en 


C" 


P 


en 


E" 


p 


en 







VI 


• 


en g 
en 


•-* 

en 




en g 
en 


en 




en 


3 

en 




I 


O 05 




8 


O 4I 




15 


O 


78 




2 


O IO 




9 


O 47 




16 


O 


83 




3 


16 




10 


O 52 




17 


O 


88 




4 


21 




11 


O 57 




18 


O 


93 




5 


O 26 




12 


O 62 




19 


O 


98 




6 


O 31 




13 


O 67 




20 


I 


04 




7 


O 36 




H 


73 




21 


I 


09 



YOUNC SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



433 



o o 


*l 


O 


O O 


3 





O 


n 


^j n 






3 


2 


p 








n> 


3 n 










2 








£3 r+ 


p" en 







jd en 







p 


en 


£• 


en 


Ui 


n> 


2 


en 




en 




en jj 






V5 

* 


' 




en 






en 


22 




14 


t>3 


3 


26 


5 


OO 


25 90 


23 




19 


64 


3 


32 


6 


OO 


31 OS 


24 




24 


65 


3 


37 


7 


OO 


36 27 


25 




3° 


66 


3 


42 


8 


OO 


4i 45 


26 




35 


67 


3 


47 


9 


OO 


46 63 


27 




40 


68 


3 


52 


10 


OO 


51 81 


28 




45 


69 


3 


57 


11 


OO 


56 99 


29 




50 


70 


3 


63 


12 


OO 


62 17 


30 




55 


7i 


3 


68 


13 


OO 


67 35 


31 




61 


72 


3 


73 


H 


OO 


72 53 


32 




66 


73 


3 


78 


i5 


00 


77 72 


33 




7i 


74 


3 


*3 


16 


00 


82 90 


34 




76 


75 


3 


88 


17 


00 


88 08 


35 




81 


76 


3 


94 


18 


00 


93 26 


36 




S7 


77 


3 


99 


19 


OO 


98 44 


37 




92 


7S 


4 


04 


20 


OO 


103 62 


38 




97 


79 


4 


09 


21 


00 


108 80 


39 


2 


02 


80 


4 


14 


22 


00 


113 98 


40 


2 


07 


81 


4 


20 


23 


00 


119 17 


4i 


2 


12 


82 


4 


25 


24 


00 


!24 35 


42 


2 


18 


^3 


4 


30 


25 


00 


!29 53 


43 


2 


23 


84 


4 


35 


26 


00 


134 7i 


44 


2 


28 


85 


4 


40 


27 


00 


139 89 


45 


2 


33 


86 


4 


45 


28 


00 


145 07 


46 


2 


3* 


87 


4 


5o 


29 


OO 


150 25 


47 


2 


44 


88 


4 


56 


3° 


OO 


155 44 


■ 48 


2 


49 


89 


4 


61 


3i 


OO 


160 6a 


49 


2 


54 


90 


4 


66 


32 


OO 


165 80 


5o 


2 


59 


9i 


4 


7i 


33 


OO 


170 98 


5i 


2 


64 


92 


4 


77 


34 


00 


176 16 


52 


2 


69 


93 


4 


82 


35 


OO 


181 34 


53 


2 


75 


94 


4 


87 


36 


00 


iM 53 


54 


2 


80 


95 


4 


92 


37 


00 


191 71 


55 


2 


85 


96 


4 


97 


38 


00 


196 89 


56 


2 


90 


97 


5 


02 


39 


00 


202 07 


57 


2 


95 


98 


5 


08 


40 


OO 


207 25 


58 


3 


01 


99 


5 


J 3 


4i 


OO 


212 43 


59 


3 


06 


1 oo 


5 


18 


42 


OO 


217 61 


60 


3 


11 


2 00 


10 


36 


43 


OO 


222 79 


61 


3 


16 


3 00 


15 


54 


44 


OO 


227 98 


62 


3 


21 


4 00 


20 


72 


45 


OO 


233 *<> 



434 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



o 9 


s 

p 





U 




O 

3 


5 

p 


3 






O 

3 


3" 

p 


9 

S3 




a 
















3 




P Cfl 







p 


W5 







p 


in 






3 . 


w 


B 


m 




m 


3 


CO 




Cfl 


B 
in 


46 00 


238 


34 


65 


OO 


336 


78 


84 


OO 


435 


23 


47 00 


243 


52 


66 


OO 


341 


97 


85 


OO 


440 


41 


48 00 


248 


70 


67 


OO 


347 


15 


86 


OO 


445 


59 


49 00 


253 


88 


68 


OO 


352 


33 


87 


OO 


450 


77 


50 00 


259 


06 


69 


OO 


357 


5i 


88 


OO 


455 


96 


51 00 


264 


25 


70 


OO 


362 


69 


89 


OO 


461 


H 


52 00 


269 


43 


7i 


OO 


367 


87 


90 


OO 


466 


32 


53 00 


274 


61 


72 


OO 


373 


05 


9i 


OO 


471 


50 


54 00 


279 


79 


73 


OO 


37* 


23 


92 


OO 


476 


68 


55 00 


284 


97 


74 


OO 


3*3 


42 


93 


OO 


481 


86 


56 00 


290 


15 


75 


OO 


388 


60 


94 


OO 


487 


04 


57 00 


295 


33 


76 


OO 


393 


78 


95 


00 


492 


23 


58 00 


300 


5i 


77 


00 


39* 


96 


96 


OO 


497 


4i 


59 00 


305 


70 


78 


OO 


404 


14 


97 


OO 


502 


59 


60 00 


310 


88 


79 


OO 


409 


32 


98 


OO 


507 


77 


61 00 


316 


06 


80 


OO 


414 


5o 


99 


OO 


512 


95 


62 00 


321 


24 


81 


00 


419 


69 


100 


OO 


5i8 


13 


63 00 


326 


42 


82 


OO 


424 


87 










64 00 


331 


60 


83 


OO 


430 


05 











STERLING MONEY REDUCED INTO DOLLARS AND CENTS. 

( The pound at $4.8665, Custom-house value, as fixed by /aw.) 

(Act of Congress approved March 3, 1873.) 



sh. 


</. c. 


1 


$ 


c. 


sh. 


d. 


r. 


£ 


$ 


c. 


1 


24 


4 


87 


11 


2 


68 


11 


S3 


53 


2 


49 


2 


9 


73 


12 


2 


92 


12 


58 


40 


3 


73 


3 


H 


60 


13 


3 


16 


13 


63 


26 


4 


97 


4 


19 


47 


14 


3 


4i 


1 I4 


68 


13 


5 


1 22 


5 


24 


33 


15 


3 


65 


15 


73 


00 


6 


1 46 


6 


29 


20 


16 


3 


89 


16 


77 


86 


7 


1 70 


7 


34 


07 


17 


4 


14 


17 


82 


73 


8 


1 95 


8 


38 


93 


18 


4 


38 


18 


87 


60 


9 


2 19 


9 


43 


80 


19 


4 


62 


19 


92 


46 


TO 


2 43 1 


10 


48 


67 


20 


4 


*7 


20 


97 


33 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



435 



Pence. 


Cents. 


Pence. 


Cents. 


Farthings. | Cents. 


I 

2 

3 
4 
5 
6 


2.027708 
4.055416 
6.083124 
8. 1 10832 
10.138540 ! 

12.166248 ! 


7 

8 

9 
10 

11 

12 


14.193956 
16.221664 
18.249372 
20.2770S0 
22.30^788 
24-332500 


1 

2 
3 
4 


.506927 
1.013854 
1. 520771 
2.027708 



DOLLARS AND CENTS REDUCED INTO STERLING MONEY. 



Cents. 



d. 



Farthings. 



1.97267 

3-94534 
1. 9 180 1 
3.89068 

1.86335 
3.83602 
1.80869 



' Cents. 


d. 


Farthings. 
! 


Cents. 


d. 


Farthings. 


8 


3 


378136 


15 


7 


1.59005 


9 


4 


175403 


16 


7 


3.56272 


10 


4 


•3.72670 


17 


8 


1-53539 


» 


5 


1.69937 


18 


8 


3.50806 


1 .12 


5 


3.67204 


19 


9 


1.48073 


13 


6 


1. 6447 1 


20 


9 


3-45340 


H 


6 


3.61738 : 









$ 


c. 


£ 


S. 


d. 




c. 


£ 


s. 


d. 


3 


c. 


£ 


s. d. 




25 




I 


1 


is 


00 


3 


1 


8 


; -> 2 


00 


6 


11 6 




50 




2 


1 


16 


00 


3 


5 


9 


33 


00 


6 


i5 7 




75 




3 


1 


17 


00 


3 


9 


11 


34 


00 


6 


19 9 


1 


00 




4 


1 


18 


00 


3 


14 


°! 


35 


00 


7 


3 10 


2 


00 




8 


3 


19 


oo . 


3 


18 


1 


36 


00 


7 


7 11 


3 


00 




12 


4 


20 


00 


4 


2 


2 


! 37 


00 


7 


12 1 


4 


00 




16 


5 


1 2I 


00 


4 


6 


4 


! 38 


00 


7 


16 2 


5 


00 


I 


c 


7 


22 


00 


4 


10 


5 


; 39 


00 


8 


3 


b 


00 


I 


4 


8 


23 


00 


4 


14 


6 


40 


00 


8 


4 5 


7 


00 


I 


8 


9 


24 


00 


4 


iS 


8 


4i 


00 


8 


8 6 


8 


00 


I 


12 


10 


1 25 


00 


5 


2 


9 


42 


00 


8 


12 7 


9 


00 


I 


17 





26 


00 


5 


6 


10 


43 


00 


8 


16 8 


10 


00 


2 


1 


1 


27 


00 


5 


[O 


11 


44 


00 


9 


10 


11 


00 


2 


5 


3 


28 


00 


5 


J 5 


1 


45 


00 


9 


4 11 


12 


00 


2 


9 


4 


29 


oo 


5 


*9 


2 


46 


00 


9 


9 


J 3 


00 


2 


13 


5 


30 


00 


6 


3 


4 


47 


00 


9 


13 2 


14 


OD 


2 


17 


7 


3 1 


00 


6 


7 


5 


48 


00 


9 


17 3 



43^ 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



$ 


c. 


\£ 


s. 


d. 


$ 


c. 


£ 


s. 


d. 


$ 


c. 


£ 


s. d. 


49 


00 


10 


I 


4 


67 


00 


13 


15 


4 


85 


00 


17 


9 3 


5o 


00 


10 


5 


6 


68 


00 


13 


19 


5 


86 


00 


17 


13 5 


51 


00 


10 


9 


7 


69 


00 


14 


3 


6 


87 


00 


17 


17 6 


52 


00 


10 


13 


9 


70 


00 


14 


7 


8 


88 


00 


18 


1 8 


53 


00 


10 


*7 


10 


7i 


00 


14 


11 


9 


89 


00 


18 


5 9 


54 


00 


11 


1 


11 


72 


00 


h 


i5 


11 


90 


00 


18 


9 10 


55 


00 


11 


6 





73 


00 


15 








9i 


00 


18 


14 


56 


00 


11 


10 


1 


74 


00 


15 


4 


1 


92 


00 


18 


18 1 


57 


00 


11 


H 


3 


75 


00 


15 


8 


3 


93 


00 


19 


2 2 


58 


00 


11 


18 


4 


76 


00 


15 


12 


4 


94 


00 


19 


6 3 


59 


00 


12 


2 


6 


77 


00 


15 


16 


5 


95 


00 


19 


10 5 


60 


00 


12 


6 


7 


78 


00 


16 





6 


96 


00 


19 


14 6 


61 


00 


12 


10 


8 


79 


00 


16 


4 


8 


97 


00 


19 


18 7 


62 


00 


12 


14 


10 


80 


00 


16 


8 


9 


98 


00 


20 


2 9 


63 


00 


12 


18 


11 


81 


00 


16 


12 


10 


99 


00 


20 


6 10 


64 


00 


13 


3 





82 


00 


16 


16 


11 


100 


00 


20 


10 11 


65 


00 


13 


7 


1 


83 


00 


17 


1 













66 


00 


13 


11 


3 


84 


00 


17 


5 


2 











CHAPTER XXII. 

CUTTING AND FITTING RIGGING. 

Cutting, etc. 

The length of shrouds, stays, backstays and all standing 
rigging is determined from an accurate " scale draft " of the 
vessel to be' rigged, which is furnished by the Construction 
Department, and is usually upon the scale of one-eighth of 
an inch to one foot, making it convenient to use a common 
two-foot rule, the inches of which are divided into eighths. 

Having an accurate draft of the hull and spars of a ship, 
the measures may be readily taken and the rigging cut and 
fitted, so that it can be sent aloft as soon as the masts are 
ready to receive it. 

In order to cut by draft, a "beam draft" is necessary, 
giving the breadth of beam and width of channels abreast 
each mast, also a "fore-and-aft" or "working draft," giv- 
ing the length and rake of each mast, the length of the 
channels, the position of the lower dead-eyes, as well as 
those of the tops. An end view of the head -booms will 
also be required. 

There are several methods of measuring for standing rig- 
ging, the most convenient, of which, is measuring with the 
dividers, on the fore-and-aft or working draft of the vessel, 
the exact length of each leg of the shrouds, stays and back- 
stays. 

The "beam scale," invented by Boatswain Bell, U. S. 
Navy, is of great assistance in measuring for shrouds and 
backstays. It is a "hollow square ' ' of composition, usually 
(437) 



43$ 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 



graduated on two opposite edges of the square ; to eights of 
an inch on one edge, and to tenths of an inch on the other; 
the graduated edges have a movable scale or vernier attached, 
which is controlled by a thumb screw. 
To measure for shrouds and backstays ? 




BEAM SCALE. 

Use the fore-and-aft or working draft, the "beam scale," 
dividers and rule. 

Having determined the "half breadth of beam" from 
the "beam draft," clamp the vernier of the "beam scale M 
at this distance. The position of each dead eye being 
located on the "working draft," proceed to measure in 
the following manner: 

Place the "beam scale" on the "working draft v ' 
opposite to, and in line with, the position of the proposed 
shroud or backstay, about to be measured for (in this case 
the forward leg of No. 1 pair of shrouds), the " beam scale " 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 439 

standing in an upright position, on one of the non-gradu- 
ated sides. 

Now measure, with the dividers, from the point on the 
•'beam scale," where the vernier is clamped (which repre- 
sent the position of the upper part or thimble of the for- 
ward dead eye), to the point at the mast-head, where the 
upper part of the eye seizing will come; transfer this to the 
rule, and note the length in feet, calculating ^i of an inch 
to 3 foot; that is, for each inch on the draft allow eight 
feet on the rule ; to this distance add six feet, for the turn 
up at the end, and one-half "the length of the eye, the re- 
sult will represent the length of the forward leg of the first, 
or No. 1 pair of shrouds. Measure for the after leg in the 
same manner. 

The succeeding pairs of shrouds are measured for in the 
same manner, and in addition, the diameter of each pair of 
shrouds must be added in working aft; for example: to the 
second pair of shrouds add its own diameter, when fitted, 
for the third pair twice its diameter when fitted, and for the 
fourth pair three times its diameter. This is to allow for 
the rise on the mast-head of each successive pair of shrouds. 

LOWER RIGGING. 

Get the rope on a stretch and measure off the extreme 
length of each pair of shrouds from the draft. The mid- 
dle of the length thus determined will be the center of the 
eye; paint, worm, parcel, paint again and serve throughout. 
Then measure off from the center of the eye on each leg 
of a pair of shrouds the required distance, or place, for the 
eye-seizing. The eye and both legs, to two feet below the 
eye-seizing, should be double-served, first parcelling with 
tarred flax, parcelling and serving with round-line. Then, 
over this double service, to a distance of one foot below the 



440 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

place marked for the eye-seizing, put on the heading, which 
consists of tarred flax canvas, marled on with spun-yarn, the 
marling hitches to be on top. In putting on this heading, 
commence on each leg below the place marked for the eye- 
seizing, and work towards the center of the eye. When 
this is done, form the eye and put on the seizing, which is 
to be covered with tarred flax canvas securely marled on. 
After the shroud is let down and the eye formed, cut it to 
the length marked, and so continue until the rigging is all 
fitted for each mast. The shroud is then ready for turning 
in. To determine the place for eye-seizings of No. i pair 
of shrouds, measure off from the center of the eye two and 
one-half squares of the mast-head on each leg, and mark it 
for the upper turn of the seizing. The place of seizing for 
No. 2 to be the same distance, plus the diameter of the 
shroud; for No. 3 the same distance, plus twice the diam- 
eter, and so on for the others. Both legs of Nos. 1 and 2 
will be leathered in the wake of the yard, to take the chafe 
of the lower yards when braced up. ~ 

When the rope is first got on a stretch and the first pair 
of shrouds is measured off, continue the fitting as far beyond 
the cut-mark (on the legs of the second pair) as the stretch 
will admit of. 

Some riggers claim that, with wire rigging, five squares of 
the mast-head (once and one-quarter the round) is too much 
to allow for the eye of shrouds, and that it will make too 
long an eye. 

A practical way of finding the length of an eye is as fol- 
lows: Find the exact square of the mast-head to be rigged; 
take the "square fid" to be found in all rigging lofts, and 
mark on it the size of the mast-head. Then pass a piece of 
hemp or manilla rope the same size as the wire rope, about 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 44 1 

to be fitted, around the fid in the form of an eve. Mark 
with a rope yarn where the upper part of the eye-seizing 
would come, and thus determine by actual measurement the 
length required for the eye about to be fitted. 

The upper turns of the eye-seizings of all shrouds should 
be in a line with the lower edge of the bolsters. As before 
mentioned, the diameter of each pair of shrouds, after No. i 
pair, must be added for the length of the eye, in order that 
the seizings may lie as nearly as possible parallel to each 
other, and on the line of the bolsters. 

When there is an odd shroud in the fore and main rig- 
ging, it should be the after shroud ; the eye spliced the same 
length the heading would be, and seized above the crotch 
of the splice, making the eye the same as if it were a pair 
of shrouds, and fitted the same as Nos. 3 and 4. If there 
is an odd shroud in the mizzen rigging it is to be fitted 
straight (one leg on the starboard and the other on the port 
side), and spanned with the pendant forming the mast-head, 
and should be put over the mast-head first, the same as the 
pendants are put over the fore or mainmast -head. 

TOPMAST RIGGING 

Is to be fitted in the manner known as "straight" with one 
eye formed out of two pairs of shrouds, which gives two 
lifts or thicknesses on the mast-head, with four shrouds on 
each side, making a snug and neat mast-head. 

It should be painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, 
and served the entire length. The shrouds will be double- 
served from center of eye to three or four feet below the 
futtock-staff. The length of heading from center of eye 
down to one foot below the eye-seizing is put on the same 
as the lower rigging. Catharpins are to be of wire rope, 
wormed, painted, and parcelled, and doable-served through- 



442 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

out; to be fitted with eyes in each end, and should go abaft 
the mast and seize together in the center. 

The topmast-head (burton) pendants will be wire rope, 
fitted with a shackle in one end and a link in the other ; 
the shackle connects it to the link under the trestle-trees. 
Each topmast has four pendants, two forward and two abaft 
the rigging. The lower ends of pendants to hang six inches 
below the catharpin legs. 

Pendants td be fitted the same as topmast rigging, with- 
out double service, except around their thimbles. 

Sword mats will be substituted for double service on the 
swifters of lower and topmast rigging. 

TOPGALLANT RIGGING 

Is to be painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, and 
served the entire length; to go over the funnel on the 
mast-head. To be fitted in pairs, with eyes formed like 
the eyes of lower rigging, and seized so as to fit snug over 
the funnel. 

The forward legs to be double served from tne center of 
eye to one foot below the futtock-staff of topmast rigging ; 
the after leg to be double served from centre of eye, three 
feet down; then from a point one foot above cross-trees to 
one foot below the futtock-staff; both legs to be leathered 
in the wake of cross trees, and to set up in the top with 
dead-eyes. 

ROYAL SHROUDS, STAYS, AND BACKSTAYS. 

Fore. — Will be painted, wormed, parcelled, painted 
again, and served the entire length; will be fitted to an 
iron wythe, with three eyes laid off at equal distances on 
the wythe. The shroud and backstay to be of one piece 
of rope rove through the eye of the wythe, and are seized 



YOUNG SAILORS ASSISTANT. 443 

around a thimble there. Double service to be one foot 
down on the shroud and backstay from center of eye; 
double service on the shroud, and leathered in the nip of 
the jack. The stay to be spliced or shackled in the 
wythe; double served leathered in the nip of the flying-jib 
boom, in the clamp on the dolphin-striker, and also where 
it reeves through the bees on the bowsprit ; to be set up 
with dead-eyes. 

Main. — Fitted and set up the same as the fore; double 
service and leathered at the nip of the chock in the fore- 
topmast trestle-trees. 

Mizzen. — Fitted and set up the same as the main; double 
service and leathered at the nip of the chock in the main- 
topmast cross-trees. 

To measure for fore-and-aft stays ? 

Measure with the dividers, on- the fore-and-aft or working 
draft, the distance from the after corner of the proper 
mast to the point where the upper hearts will be ; transfer 
this distance to the rule (allowing as before for eights), add 
seven feet for the turn up at the end. An old rule was to 
allow the " length of the mast-head" for the formation of 
the collar ; but riggers now allow seven squares of the mast- 
head for the length of the collar, an additional three feet 
being added for the splicing of the lashing-eyes. 

FORE AND MAIN STAYS 

Are to be fitted separate, with split collars and lashing-eyes, 
painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, and served the 
entire length. Double service on ends of fore-stays, com- 
mencing from lower part of the end, quarter-seizing around 
the thimble and up eight feet on the standing parts. Mai?i 
stays, double service around the thimbles, up to lower part 
of quarter-seizing, on the end and standing parts. The 



444 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

lashing-eyes to be double served before splicing, which 
does away with outside parcelling and hitching. 

Collars to be seized together in the loft, and leathered 
down to four feet below the crotch. To be set up with 
four-scored hearts. 

Chains may be substituted for wire, on the main, in the 
wake of the smoke-stack, Avhen needed. 

To form the collars of topmast and lower stays ? 

Divide or split the rope to be fitted into two parts of 
three strands each. Each part being in length seven 
squares (once and three quarters the round of the mast- 
head, for which the stay is being fitted), with three feet 
added for the lashing-eye. Then from another rope, of 
the same size, take four strands, two of which lay into each 
side or leg of the collar, tucking the ends, and making a 
neat splice at the fork of the collar ; by this means, the 
collar will have five strands in each leg. Eyes, for the 
lashing at the mast-head, (lashing-eyes) are spliced in the 
upper ends of the legs of the collar. IVhen the collar is 
wormed, parcelled, served, etc., each leg will be about the 
same size as the rest of the stay. 

MIZZEN STAYS. 

Single service throughout \ collars to be fitted the same 
as fore and main; double service around the thimble, 
which will be fitted in the lower end for the lanyard, in- 
stead of using hearts. The lower end may be split, in 
which case a thimble will be spliced in the end of each leg 
and set up by lanyards to bolts on each side of the main- 
mast. 

FORE-TOPMAST STAYS 

Are to be fitted separate; single service throughout; col- 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 445 

lars the same as fore and main; double service from ten 
feet above the bowsprit to one foot inside of the leader 
under the bees; leathered over double service from four 
feet above the bees to eight inches inside the leader, under 
the bees. To be set up with three- scored hearts. 

The service on the spring-stays will be omitted in the 
wake of the stay -sail hanks. 

JIB STAYS 

To be fitted like fore-topmast stays, with split collars, lash- 
ing-eyes, etc.; to be served from four feet above the boom 
to the end where it sets up; double service and leathered 
in the nip of the clamp on the dolphin-striker, and also 
where they go through the bees, leathered over the service 
from four feet above to eight inches below the boom; col- 
lars of jib and topmast stays seized together below the 
crotch around the stays. To be set up with three-scored 
hearts. 

MAIN-TOPMAST STAYS 

Fitted the same as fore-topmast stays; in long ships, 
with great distances between fore and main masts, they 
may be brought directly to the deck near the foremast ; but 
in short ships they w r ill pass through chocks between the 
fore trestle-trees, and set up on deck with three -scored 
hearts. Nips to be double served and leathered; collars 
seized together in the loft. 

MIZZEN-TOPMAST STAYS. 

Fitted the same as main-topmast stays, and set up in the 
main-top with three-scored hearts. 

FORE-TOPGALLANT STAYS. 

Painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, and served 



446 young sailor's assistant. 

the entire length ; to be double served on the eyes around 
the funnels, and from twelve feet above, to one foot below 
the jib-boom ; also in the wake of the nip of the clamp on 
the dolphin-striker, and where they reeve through the bees. 
All nips to be leathered. Stays to be set up with dead- 
eyes. 

MAIN-TOPGALLANT STAYS. 

To be fitted the same as the fore, and set up with dead- 
eyes in the fore-top. To be double served and leathered 
at the hole in the fore-cap through which they lead; also 
to be leathered about three feet below the crotch of the 
eye-splice. 

MIZZEN TOPGALLANT STAYS. 

Fitted, served, leathered, and led in the same manner as 
the main, and set up in the main-top. 

FLYING-JIB STAYS. 

To be fitted with eye-splices, double ^served; to be served 
and leathered three feet below the crotch of splice ; in all 
other respects to be fitted like the jib stays. To be set up 
with dead-eyes. 

BOBSTAYS 

Shall be made of chain, shackled to a plate in the cut- 
water, and set up with four-scored hearts. 

BOWSPRIT SHROUDS. 

To be fitted of wire rope, to lead well down on the bows, 
shackled to eye-bolts, and set up with three-scored hearts. 
Will be painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, and 
served the entire length. 

JIB GUYS. 

To be of wire rope, painted, wormed, parcelled, painted 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 447 

again, and served the entire length; double served and 
leathered in the wake of whiskers, over which they fit with 
horseshoe cringles; outer ends shackle to the wythe on the 
boom end; set up to the bows or cat-head with three- 
scored' hearts. 

FLYING-JIB GUYS. 

Fitted, set up to the bows or cat-head with three-scored 
hearts, and connected with the boom, same as jib guys; 
reeve through thimbles in a strap out on the whisker yard- 
arms. Double served and leathered in the nip of the thim- 
bles. To be of wire rope. 

WHISKER-JUMPERS . 

To be of wire rope ; painted, wormed, parcelled, painted 
again, and served throughout ; to be fitted with an eye-splice, 
double served and leathered, to 'fit over the whisker-boom 
end ; the inner end to be leathered in the nip, and to set 
up on its own part through a bull's eye connected to a bolt 
on the cut-water. 

BACK ROPES 

Should be of hemp, served throughout, hooked or shackled 
to the dolphin -striker, and set up at the bows with three- 
. scored hearts. 

STANDING MARTINGALE STAYS 

To be of ware rope, wormed, parcelled, and served the same 
as the guys. Fitted with shackles and thimbles in each end, 
with double service around the thimbles 

FLYING-JIB MARTINGALE STAYS. 

Fitted the same as the standing martingales of wire; 
double served around the thimbles in the outer end, in the 
nip of the dolphin -striker, and where they reeve through the 



448 young sailor's assistant. 

bees. To be rove through the sheave in the dolphin-striker, 
and set up with dead-eyes. 

FORE AND MAIN TOPMAST BACKSTAYS. 

Fitted and measured off the same as the after-shrouds of 
the fore and main rigging. 

MIZZEN TOPMAST BACKSTAYS 

Are fitted with horseshoe eyes. 

FORE, MAINLAND MIZZEN TOPGALLANT BACKSTAYS. 

To be painted, wormed, parcelled, painted again, and 
served throughout. Fitted with spliced eyes, which are 
double served, without outside parcelling. 

BOAT-DAVIT TOPPING LIFTS, SPANS, AND GUYS. 

To be of wire rope, and served throughout. Spans to 
which topping lift pendants are attached to be leathered in 
the middle. 

Wire rope for stays, shrouding, and all standing rigging 
is placed upon reels, in a rigging loft, for convenience in 
getting it on a stretch. 

In cutting standing rigging, which is to be fitted with the 
" Healy patent dead-eyes, etc.," the six feet allowance for 
the " turn up " of shrouds, and the seven feet " turn up " 
of stays, will not be necessary ; but simply allow the depth 
of the socket, which is to be added to the distance measured 
from upper dead-eye or heart, to the proper place on the 
mast-head. 

STANDING AND RUNNING RIGGING. 

Length of rigging of all kinds is to be determined by an 
accurate draft of the vessel to be rigged. 

All standing rigging to be 4-stranded, shroud-laid, gal- 
vanized wire rope; to be wormed, parcelled, and served 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 449 

from end to end, as a protection against wear and tear, ex- 
cept stays on which sail is carried. 

Upper dead-eyes for lower and topmast rigging are to be 
strapped with iron, and to have a stout galvanized iron- 
scored heart (Walton's) at the upper part of the strap to re- 
ceive the rigging, the end of which, being passed up, is to 
be secured by five seizings, the two lower ones passed with 
racking under-turns; the lower dead-eyes to be connected 
with the chain-plates by bolts, so that they may be readily 
unshipped. Lower stays are to pass over an iron-scored 
heart, the ends to be secured like the ends of lower and top- 
mast rigging, with at least five seizings, the two lower ones 
passed with racking-turns.* 

All standing rigging to be set up by laniards, except the 
topmast rigging of fore-and-aft rigged vessels, which may 
be set up on end. Futtock shrouds to be made of iron rods 
set up with turnbuckles, to the top rims, and not to connect 
with the dead-eyes of the topmast rigging. 

Hide rope, if ever used, after being fitted, will be given 
a lick of a mixture consisting of tallow and tar in the pro- 
portions of i tallow to I tar. This should be repeated at 
the end of every six months. The rope should be perfectly 
dry when thus treated. Oil must never be used, nor the 
rope soaked to make it pliable, but it must be fitted in a dry 
state. 

Avoid serving the splices of hide rope. Avoid covering 
hemp rope with leather, and more especially with green 
hide, unless there be a good and well-tarred parcelling in- 
terposed. 

*With the Healy dead-eye, this of course will not be necessary, the 
lower end of rigging fitting in the socket of upper dead-eye. 



CHAPTER XXIII. 

DEFINITIONS OF SEA TERMS, EXPRESSIONS, ETC. 

Aback. — A sail is aback when the wind acts on its forward 
surface. 

Abaft — Behind — in rear of, on the after side. 

Abaft the beam. — Astern of a line forming a right angle 
with the keel. 

Abeam. — Opposite the center of the ship's side, or bear- 
ing eight points from the bow and stern. 

Aboard, — On the ship. 

About. — To go about, to change the ship's course by 
tacking. 

A-lee. — The helm is a-lee when the tiller is put to the lee 
side. 

All hands. — Assembling the ship's company. 

Aloft. — Overhead . 

Alongside. — Close to the ship's side. 

Anchor — To let go the anchor to hold the ship. 

Aitchorage. — Ground fit to anchor on, A berth. 

Ashore. — On land, applied to a vessel when aground. 

Astern. — Behind the ship. 

Avast. — To stop, to cease hauling. 

Bare poles. — Having no sail set. 

Battens. — Strips of wood, such as those nailed over the 
tarpaulins of a hatch to batten down in bad weather, Chaf- 
ing battens, etc. 

Bearing. — The point of the compass on which any object 
appears. The direction an object lies. 

(45o) 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. . 45 1 

Beating to windward. — Working a vessel as nearly as pos- 
sible in the direction from which the wind blows, by tack- 
ing. 

Becalm d. — Having no wind to fill the sails. 

Bear a hand. — To hurry up. 

Belay. — To make fast. 

Berth. — An anchorage. A station, A sleeping place. 

Brig. — Where prisoners are confined on board men-of- 
war. 

Boarding. — The act of going on board a vessel. 

Bouse. — To haul on. 

Bulkheads. — Partitions in a ship. 

Betwixt wind and water. — That portion of a vessel about 
the water line, which, by the. motion of the vessel in the 
water, caused by the heave of the sea, is alternately above 
and below the surface. 

By the board. — Over the side. A mast is said to "go by 
the board " when it is carried away. 

Block and block. — When the two blocks of a tackle are 
together and there is no more fall to haul on — also "two 
blocks. ' ' 

Boat cloak. — A mantle or cloth for the use of officers in 
a boat. 

Break bulk. — To begin to unload. 

By the head. — Applied to a vessel or boat when it is 
deeper in the water forward than aft. 

By the stern. — The reverse of " by the head." 

Call. — A pipe or whistle used by the boatswain and his 
mates, in calling all hands for any purpose, hauling on ropes, 
belaying, etc., etc. To rouse up. 

Canted. — Turned from its square state. 

Cast. — To pay a vessel's head off, and bring the wind on 



452 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

the desired side; to take a sounding, as " get a cast of the 
lead." 

Catch a crab. — Jamming an oar in the row-lock, by 
catching it in the water while rowing. 

Cat's paw. — A light air on the water. 

Chock a block. — Full, filled to the extreme limit. 

Coaster. — A vessel engaged in running up and down the 
coast. 

Cockbill. — A yard is cockbilled when, by accident or 
design, one yard-arm is cocked up above the other. An 
anchor is cockbilled when hanging by the ring stopper only. 

Checking lines. — Lines used to haul the light lifts and 
braces close in to the masts when the yards are sent down ; 
they lead on deck or in the tops. 

Check. — To ease off. 

Clap on. — To take hold of. 

Clap on sail. — To make sail. 

Clamp. — To dry down the deck withsquilgees. To fasten 
with a clamp. 

Call the watch. — To call the watch on deck by the pipe, 
and passing the word. 

Chafe. — To rub and wear. 

Clear for running. — A rope so arranged that it can run 
freely. 

Dog-vane. — A small wind vane or pennant placed at the 
truck, or at some convenient place above the weather rail. 

Derrick. — Spar supported by guys. A purchase, for 
hoisting heavy weights, is made fast to it. 

Dismantle. — To unrig a vessel, and discharge all her 
stores, guns, etc., etc. 

Dismasted.— -A ship deprived of her masts by accident 
or design. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 453 

Douse. — To let fly, to lower away quickly. 

End for end. — To shift one end of a rope to the position 
occupied by the other end. 

Flatten-in-forward. — To haul the head sheets well aft, 
and amidships. 

Flag-ship. — The name applied to the vessel carrying the 
senior officer's flag. 

Forging ahead. — Forced ahead, going ahead slowly. 

Fend off. — To bear off, or keep clear of. 

Fish a mast or spar. — To secure it with pieces of iron or 
wood, called fishes. 

Full due. — To secure permanently. 

Field day. — Day for general cleaning up. 

Freshen the nip. — To set up again. 

Garland. — A heavy strap, formed by a rope coiled up 
and marled together ; lashed to -heavy weights when hand- 
ling them. 

Granny' s knot. — A reef or square knot, with the upper 
turns crossed the wrong way. 

Haul. — To pull on; also applied to the wind when 
working ahead. "The wind hauls ahead." 

Holy stone. — A sand stone used in scrubbing decks. 

Hand. — To pick up, " to hand a sail." 

Holystoning. — Cleaning a deck with holy stone. 

Heaver. — A steel spike with a wooden handle, used by 
sailmakers, to heave in the strands in heavy splicing. A 
short wooden bar used as a lever. 

Heaving down. — Heaving a vessel, over on one side, for 
the purpose of caulking, or repairing her. 

Heave to. — To deaden a vessel's headway, by bracing 
some of the sails aback. 

Labor. — To roll and pitch heavily. 



454 YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 

Looming. — The appearance of a distant object, " the 
loom of the land." 

Lend a hand. — To assist, to aid. 

Let go by the run. — To let go a rope at once, throwing it 
clear of the pin or cleat. 

Moor a boat. — To anchor her with anchors ahead, or 
ahead and astern. To secure her to fixed moorings. 

Monk bag. — A small purse worn by sailors around the 
neck. 

Nearing tne land. — To approach the land. 

Off and on. — Coming near the land on one tack, leaving 
it on the other. 

Offing. — Out at sea from the land; well clear of the 
land. 

Overboard. — Outside of the ship. 

Overhaul. — To examine, to overtake. 

Paddle. — The float of the paddle, or side wheel of a 
steamer. A short oar. 

Pipe down. — A boatswain's call that denotes the end of 
an evolution, and that people can go below. To stop. 

Painter. — A rope in the bows of a boat, by which she is 
made fast. 

Pass. — To hand anything from one to the other. 

Passing the word. — Repeating an order or call, so that it 
may be heard throughout the ship. 

Palm and needle. — Sewing utensils used in stitching can- 
vas. 

Pricker. — A small steel spike used by sailmakers for mak- 
ing eyelet holes. 

Rake. — The fore-and-aft incline of a mast. 

Relieving tackles. — Tackles used to assist or take the place 
of the wheel ropes. 



YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 455 

Right. — To rise to an upright position. 

Ride. — To be held by the cable. 

Round in. — To haul in. "round in the main brace. " 

Rouse in. — To haul in the slack part of a cable. 

Round to. — To come up into the wind when about to 
anchor — to haul up on either tack. 

Roping pahn. — A shield for the hand, used when sewing 
the roping of a sail. 

Roping needles. — Used for roping sails, and are from four 
to twelve thread. 

Run down. — One vessel sinking another by running into 
her. 

Rubber. — A flat piece of steel about two inches long, 
having a wooden handle, used by sailmakers for smoothing 
seams after sewing. 

Screw. — The propeller. A mechanical power for squeez- 
ing. 

Scotchman. — A piece of iron, with ring attached, seized 
to the shrouds. 

Sheer off. — To shove off, to separate. 

Sheers. — Two or more spars, raised at an angle, lashed, 
and supported by guys, having purchases attached for rais- 
ing masts and lifting heavy weights. 

Span. — A piece of rope or chain made fast at each end, 
so a purchase may be hooked in the bight. 

Squilgees. — Wooden clamps holding a piece of rubber, 
used for drying down decks. 

Strike a mast. — To lower it. 

Swab. — A mop made of rope or canvas, used for drying 
down decks, cleaning paint-work, etc., etc. 

Swamp. — To sink by filling with water. 

Sail hook. — A hook attached to a sailmaker's bench to 
hold the sail or canvas when sewing. 



456 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

Seaming palm. — The shield for the hand when seaming a 
sail. 

Seaming needles. — Used when sewing the seams of sails, 
etc. ; they are from 14 to 17 thread. 

Splicing fid. — A hickory marline-spike used by sailmakers. 

Stitch mallet. — An eight-square steel instrument, pointed 
and countersunk in the end, having a wooden handle ; used 
by sailmakers for heaving in stitching over heavy splices 
and roping. 

Scuttle. — To make holes in a ship's bottom to sink her. 

Ship. — To take on board. To enlist to serve on board 
ship. 

Shiver. — To shake the sails. 

Slew. — To turn about. 

Stand by. — To be ready. 

Swing. — A ship turns or swings at her anchor with the 
tide or wind. 

Swing ship. — To get the ship's head on the different 
points of the compass to determine the"~deviation. 

Slack of a rope. — The part that hangs loose. 

Taut. — A corruption of tight. 

Tarpaulins. — Painted canvas covers. 

Tool bag. — A bag about eight inches in diameter and 
fourteen inches long, to hold a sailmaker's tools. 

Trim. — To arrange a vessel, or yard in the desired 
positions — as "trim the boat," etc. 

Turn the hands to. — To call "all hands," and set them 
at work. 

Turnbuckle. — A link, with an adjustable screw, for con- 
necting two parts of a bar or rod together ; used on Jacob's 
ladders, ridge ropes, etc., etc. 

Unship. — To take anything from the place to which it is 
fixed. 



YOUNG SAILOR S ASSISTANT. 45 n 

Unclamp a boom. — To raise the clamp that holds it down 
on the yard. 

Veer. — To pay out, also applied to the wind, as; "the 
wind veers aft." 

Veer and haul. — To slack one rope, and haul on another 
that leads to the same spar, but to another part of it. 

Water-logged. — When a vessel is so full of water as to be 
heavy and unmanageable. 

Weather-beaten. — Worn out by exposure to the weather. 

Weather gauge. — To windward of; if one ship is to 
windward of another, she has the weather gauge of her. To 
get the better of. 

Weigh. — To heave an anchor out of the ground. 

Wind a boat. — To turn her end for end. 

Wind-bound. — Detained by contrary winds. 

Wind-fall. — A rush of wind from a high land. A stroke 
of good luck. 

Wind-rode. — When a ship is riding to the wind alone, 
astern of her anchors. 

Wind 1 s eye. — The point from which the wind blows in a 
direct line. 

Water-tanks. — Tanks stowed in the hold, for holding 
fresh water. 

Yaw. — To deviate from a course. 

Yellow Jack. — Yellow fever. 

DEFINITION OF TIDES. 

A windward tide. — When the wind or tide are contrary 
or opposite. 

A leeward tide. — When the wind and tide are together. 

A windward ebb. — When the tide is setting out and the 
wind blowing in. 



458 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

A windward flood. — When the tide is setting in and the 
wind blowing out. 

A leeward ebb. — When the tide and wind are both set- 
ting out. 

A leeward flood. — When the wind and tide are both set- 
ing in. 

A spring tide is the highest tide, and occurs just subse- 
quent to the full and change of the moon. 

A neap tide is the lowest tide, occurring when the moon 
is near the first and third quarters. 




(Form No. 26.) 



WATCH No. 



STATION BILLET. 



Name, ; Rate, — 

Division, ; Gun, ; Company, - 

Mess ; Armed boat, 

Running boat, ; Fire quarters, 



EVOLUTION. 



Loosing sail 

Furling sail - - - - - - - 

Bending sail -._---. 

Uft and dow7i toft-gallant and royal yards - 

Uft and down toft-gallant masts 

House and fid toftmasts - 

Shifting toft sail yards - 

Uft and down lower yards - 

Out and in boats - 

Mooring and unmooring - 

Making sail and getting underiuay - 

Bracing uft and setting courses - 

Tacking and wearing - 

Reefing toft sails ---... 

Shortening s-ail and coming to anchor 

Clear shift for action - 



STATIONS AND DUTIES. 



You are required to know your stations as shown by this billet, and 
may be questioned at any time about them. You must keep the billet, 
but, should you lose it, you must report the fact to the Executive 
Officer. 

(459) 



460 YOUNG SAILOR'S ASSISTANT. 

U. S. NAVY REGULATIONS. 

Commanding Officers, upon returning from a cruise, when directed 
to discharge the whole or any part of the crew, will forward, immedi- 
ately on their arrival, to the Secretary of the Navy a list of such of the 
crew enlisted for three years as, in their opinion, are entitled to honor- 
able discharge, and they are not to be paid off until the discharges and 
continuous-service certificates have been received from the Bureau and 
distributed. 

When any person, having received an honorable discharge, shall 
within three months from the date thereof present it at any naval ren- 
dezvous, or account for its loss in a satisfactory manner, shall answer to 
the description it contains, and be found physically fit for the service, 
he may be re-enlisted for three years; and upon his transfer to a re- 
ceiving-vessel he will be entitled to three months' gratuitous pay, equal 
in amount to what he would have been entitled to if he had remained 
employed in actual service for three months in the rate specified on 
the face of the honorable discharge. 

No person discharged at his own request, or for his own conveni- 
ence, before the expiration of his term of enlistment, shall be given an 
honorable discharge. 

All men who enlist for three years, except officers' cooks, stewards, 
and servants, will receive, upon the expiration of their enlistments, if 
they shall so elect, continuous-service certificates in lieu of the ordinary 
or honorable discharge ; provided they are recommended by their com- 
manding officers as desirable men to be retained in the service. 

All persons holding continuous-service certificates will be entitled to 
receive, for each continuous re-enlistment for three years within three 
months from the date of their discharge, one dollar per month in addi- 
tion to the pay prescribed for their several ratings ; but a person failing 
to re-enlist within three months from the date of his discharge will cease 
to derive any advantage from his previous continuous enlistments. 

The continuous-service certificate will embrace all the advantages of 
an honorable discharge in cases where persons are recommended for 
the same, and must always show, in the column for the purpose, 
whether or not the person is entitled to an honorable discharge. 

Any enlisted man holding a continuous-service certificate who is dis- 
tinguished for obedience and sobriety, and is proficient in the line of his 
duty, shall receive, upon the expiration of his enlistment, a good-con- 
duct badge ; after he has received three such badges, under three con- 
secutive re-enlistments within three months from the dates of his dis- 
charge, he shall, if qualified, be enlisted as a petty officer, and hold a 
petty officer's rating during subsequent continuous re-enlistments; and 
shall not be reduced to a lower rating, except by sentence of a court- 
martial. 



H 131 83 













A*?* 










*°"*v 



*^ *^! 




r • • • a- 







o- 








V .-L^L'< 











